National Park Service

U.S. Department of the Interior

Natural Resource Stewardship and Science

Northeast Temperate Network Lakes, Ponds, and 

Streams Monitoring Protocol

2015 Revision

Natural Resource Report NPS/NETN/NRR—2016/1225
ON THE COVER

Clockwise from top left: Lake monitoring (Photograph by B. Arsenault, 2008), Saugus Iron Works NHS (NETN photo, 2009), 

stream monitoring (Photograph by E.Davis, 2009), measuring volumetric discharge (Photograph by B. Arsenault, 2008).
Northeast Temperate Network Lakes, Ponds, and 

Streams Monitoring Protocol

2015 Revision

Natural Resource Report NPS/NETN/NRR—2016/1225

William G. Gawley1, Brian R. Mitchell2, Elizabeth A. Arsenault1

1National Park Service

Acadia National Park

PO Box 177

20 McFarland Hill Drive

Bar Harbor, ME 04609

2National Park Service

Northeast Temperate Network

54 Elm Street

Woodstock, VT 05091

June 2016

U.S. Department of the Interior

National Park Service

Natural Resource Stewardship and Science 

Fort Collins, Colorado
ii

The National Park Service, Natural Resource Stewardship and Science office in Fort Collins, 

Colorado, publishes a range of reports that address natural resource topics. These reports are of 

interest and applicability to a broad audience in the National Park Service and others in natural 

resource management, including scientists, conservation and environmental constituencies, and the 

public.

The Natural Resource Report Series is used to disseminate comprehensive information and analysis 

about natural resources and related topics concerning lands managed by the National Park Service. 

The series supports the advancement of science, informed decision-making, and the achievement of 

the National Park Service mission. The series also provides a forum for presenting more lengthy 

results that may not be accepted by publications with page limitations. 

All manuscripts in the series receive the appropriate level of peer review to ensure that the 

information is scientifically credible, technically accurate, appropriately written for the intended 

audience, and designed and published in a professional manner. 

This report received informal peer review by subject-matter experts who were not directly involved 

in the collection, analysis, or reporting of the data

Views, statements, findings, conclusions, recommendations, and data in this report do not necessarily 

reflect views and policies of the National Park Service, U.S. Department of the Interior. Mention of 

trade names or commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use by 

the U.S. Government.

This report is available in digital format from the Northeast Temperate Network,

(http://science.nature.nps.gov/im/units/netn/index.cfm), and the Natural Resource Publications 

Management website (http://www.nature.nps.gov/publications/nrpm/). To receive this report in a 

format optimized for screen readers, please email irma@nps.gov.

Please cite this publication as:

Gawley, W. G., B. R. Mitchell, and E. A. Arsenault. 2016. Northeast Temperate Network lakes, 

ponds, and streams monitoring protocol: 2015 revision. Natural Resource Report 

NPS/NETN/NRR—2016/1225. National Park Service, Fort Collins, Colorado.

NPS 962/132820, June 2016 
iii

Revision History

Version numbers are incremented by a whole number (e.g., Version 1.30 to 2.00) when a change is 

made that significantly affects requirements or procedures. Version numbers are incremented by 

decimals (e.g., Version 1.06 to Version 1.07) when there are minor modifications that do not affect 

requirements or procedures included in the protocol. Add rows as needed for each change or set of 

changes tied to an updated version number.

Revision History Log

Version 

Number Version Date Revised by

Changes from previous 

version Justification

1.00 12/15/06 NA NA Original protocol

2.00 3/23/07 Brian Mitchell, Bill 

Gawley, Emily 

Seger, and Joe 

Bartlett

See Appendix B, Revision 

Details

Protocol update

2.01 3/31/07 Brian Mitchell In section 1.1.7.7, Added 

mg/L to ueq/L conversion 

factor.

Correction

2.02 04/15/09 Brian Mitchell See Appendix B, Revision 

Details

Protocol update

3.00 6/30/13 Brian Mitchell, Bill 

Gawley, Beth 

Arsenault, Eric 

Davis

See Appendix B, Revision 

Details

Complete 

reorganization of 

protocol to match 

Northeast Temperate 

Network (NETN)

standard, as well as 

updated methods, 

sites, and procedures.

3.01 12/16/2013 Brian Mitchell Minor clarifications and 

edits to address peer 

review comments

See Appendix B, Revision 

Details, for other changes

NPS review prior to 

publishing revised 

protocol.

3.02 2/12/2015 Brian Mitchell;

Adam Kozlowski

WQ standards for color 

and turbidity removed for 

New York (Table 3).

Leveling will be biannual 

(April/May and October).

Data collected digitally 

whenever possible, and 

added IRMA reference for 

FileMaker Apps.

Standards were for 

groundwater, not 

surface water.

Need to know if 

changes occur during 

field season or over 

winter

Reduce data entry 

errors, and use IRMA 

to increase 

discoverability of 

mobile apps.

v

Contents 

Page

Revision History ...................................................................................................................................iii

Tables....................................................................................................................................................ix

Appendices............................................................................................................................................xi

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)................................................................................................xi

Acknowledgments................................................................................................................................xii

List of Acronyms ................................................................................................................................xiii

Conversion Factors ..............................................................................................................................xv

Background and Introduction.................................................................................................................1

Justification.....................................................................................................................................3

Goals and Objectives......................................................................................................................4

State and Regional Water Quality Standards .................................................................................7

Connecticut................................................................................................................................7

Maine.......................................................................................................................................10

Massachusetts..........................................................................................................................11

New Hampshire .......................................................................................................................12

New Jersey...............................................................................................................................12

New York ................................................................................................................................13

Vermont...................................................................................................................................13

Ecoregional Nutrient Standards....................................................................................................14

Clean Water Act Section 303d Impairment..................................................................................16

Water Quality Parameters.............................................................................................................17

Water Clarity ...........................................................................................................................17

Temperature.............................................................................................................................17

pH ............................................................................................................................................17

Dissolved Oxygen ...................................................................................................................17

Specific Conductance ..............................................................................................................18

Acid Neutralizing Capacity (ANC).........................................................................................18

Apparent Color........................................................................................................................18
vi

Contents (continued)

Page

Dissolved Organic Carbon (DOC) ..........................................................................................19

Total Phosphorus (TP).............................................................................................................19

Nitrogen (N) ............................................................................................................................19

Chloride (Cl)............................................................................................................................20

Sulfate (SO4)............................................................................................................................20

Algal Biomass (Chlorophyll a)................................................................................................20

Non-native Invasive Plants......................................................................................................20

Sampling Design..................................................................................................................................21

General Sampling Design in Lakes and Ponds.............................................................................21

General Sampling Design in Streams...........................................................................................22

Individual Park Sampling Designs...............................................................................................24

Acadia National Park, Maine (ACAD) ...................................................................................24

Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historical Park (MABI), Vermont...............................29

Minute Man National Historical Park (MIMA), Massachusetts .............................................29

Morristown National Historical Park (MORR), New Jersey ..................................................30

Roosevelt-Vanderbilt National Historic Sites (ROVA), New York........................................31

Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site (SAGA), New Hampshire ...........................................33

Saugus Iron Works National Historic Site (SAIR), Massachusetts.........................................33

Saratoga National Historical Park (SARA), New York ..........................................................34

Weir Farm National Historic Site (WEFA), Connecticut........................................................35

Detectable Level of Change .........................................................................................................36

Field and Laboratory Methods.............................................................................................................37

Field Methods...............................................................................................................................37

Laboratory Methods.....................................................................................................................39

Quality Assurance and Quality Control (QA/QC)...............................................................................41

Quality Assurance ........................................................................................................................41

Quality Control.............................................................................................................................42

Data Management ................................................................................................................................43
vii

Contents (continued)

Page

Analysis and Reporting........................................................................................................................45

Personnel and Operational Requirements............................................................................................47

Field Crew ....................................................................................................................................47

Field Crew Training .....................................................................................................................48

Health and Safety Training......................................................................................................48

Field Methods Training ...........................................................................................................49

Inventory and Purchase of Supplies and Equipment....................................................................50

Calibration of Equipment .............................................................................................................50

Sampling Schedule .......................................................................................................................51

Facility and Equipment Needs......................................................................................................52

Startup Costs and Budget Considerations ....................................................................................52

Version Control Procedures.................................................................................................................53

Literature Cited ....................................................................................................................................55

ix

Tables

Page

Table 1.Monitoring questions for NETN streams.................................................................................5

Table 2. Monitoring questions for NETN lakes and ponds...................................................................6

Table 3. Summary of stream water quality standards for states in NETN containing 

stream monitoring sites. .........................................................................................................................8

Table 4. Summary of lake and pond water quality standards for states in NETN 

containing pond or lake monitoring sites...............................................................................................9

Table 5. Maine State lake trophic parameters and guidelines.............................................................11

Table 6. USEPA Ecoregional nutrient criteria that apply to NETN streams. .....................................15

Table 7. USEPA Ecoregional nutrient criteria that apply to NETN lakes and ponds.........................15

Table 8. USEPA 303d impairments in freshwater resources in NETN parks.....................................16

Table 9. Number of sampling sites at each park in NETN..................................................................23

Table 10. Lake and pond water quality monitoring sites at Acadia NP..............................................26

Table 11. Stream-water quality monitoring sites at Acadia NP. Sites at ACAD are 

predominately cold water fisheries. .....................................................................................................28

Table 12. Water quality monitoring sites at Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP ..................................29

Table 13. Water quality monitoring sites at Minute Man NHP, Massachusetts .................................30

Table 14. Water quality monitoring sites at Morristown NHP ...........................................................31

Table 15. Water quality monitoring sites at Roosevelt-Vanderbilt NHS............................................32

Table 16. Water quality monitoring sites at Saint-Gaudens NHS.......................................................33

Table 17. Water quality monitoring sites at Saugus Iron Works NHS ...............................................34

Table 18. Water quality monitoring sites at Saratoga NHP ................................................................35

Table 19. Water quality monitoring sites at Weir Farm NHS, Connecticut........................................36

Table 20. Monitoring parameters, methods, and frequency in lakes and ponds. ................................38

Table 21. Monitoring parameters, methods, and frequency in streams...............................................38

Table 22. Stabilization criteria for recording field measurements. .....................................................50

Table 23. Version Tracking Table (Sample).......................................................................................53

xi

Appendices

Page

Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast Temperate Network Parks.................63

Appendix B. Revision Log ..................................................................................................................73

Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs)

Page

SOP 1 – Safety.....................................................................................................................................79

SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites .........................................139

SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List ..........................................................................................149

SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams.............................................................................................................159

SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds...............................................................................................175

SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde....................................187

SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples.....................................................................213

SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration................................................227

SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data................................................................................239

SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures........................................................................263

SOP 11 – Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment .............................................................................281

SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses..........................................................................................................293

SOP 13 – Data Management..............................................................................................................307

SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams ...........................................323

SOP 15 – Post-Season Activities.......................................................................................................335

SOP 16 – Annual Timeline of Activities...........................................................................................337

SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures ...............................................................................345

SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes...............................................353

SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites ......................................................................................365

SOP 20 – Calculating Cumulative Watersheds for Water Monitoring Sites.....................................381
xii

Acknowledgments 

This version of the Northeast Temperate Network Lakes, Ponds, and Streams Monitoring Protocol is 

based on the original protocol by Lombard et al. (2006), with the addition of subsequent 

modifications necessitated by changes in field procedures. The efforts of Pam Lombard and Jim 

Caldwell on the original protocol are still clearly reflected herein. Indeed, much of the text was 

written by the original authors, and their contribution cannot be understated.

Thanks also to Joe Bartlett, Eric Davis, Alan Ellsworth, Meghan Goff, Adam Kozlowski, Aaron 

Rinehart, Hali Roy, Brian Schuetz, Ed Sharron, and Emily Seger for their tireless efforts in the field, 

technical assistance and contributions to revisions of various protocol sections.
xiii

List of Acronyms

ACAD Acadia National Park

ANC Acid Neutralizing Capacity

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

BOHA Boston Harbor Islands National Recreation Area

Chl a Chlorophyll a

DI Deionized water

DO Dissolved Oxygen

DOC Dissolved Organic Carbon

ELRO Eleanor Roosevelt National Historic Site

GIS Geographic Information System

GPS Global Positioning System

HDPE High Density Polyethylene

HOFR Home of Franklin D. Roosevelt National Historic Site

IRMA Integrated Resource Management Applications

LNETN Lower Northeast Temperate Network (NETN without ACAD)

MABI Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historical Park

MCIAP Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants

MDEP Maine Department of Environmental Protection

MDI Mount Desert Island

MQO Measurement Quality Objective

MIMA Minute Man National Historical Park

MORR Morristown National Historical Park

MDS Multiparameter Display System

NAWQA National Water Quality Assessment Program

NHP National Historical Park

NHS National Historic Site

NP National Park

NPS National Park Service

NRA National Recreation Area

NETN Northeast Temperate Network

NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration

NWIS National Water Information System
xiv

List of Acronyms (continued)

NWQL National Water Quality Lab

ONRW Outstanding National Resource Waters

ORW Outstanding Resource Waters

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PAR Photosynthetically Active Radiation

PCU Platinum Cobalt Units

PFD Personal Flotation Device

PLB Personal Locator Beacon

PPFD Photosynthetic Photon Flux Density

PRIMENet Park Research and Intensive Monitoring of Ecosystems Network

QA/QC Quality Assurance/Quality Control

RSD Relative Standard Deviation

ROVA Roosevelt-Vanderbilt National Historic Site

SAGA Saint-Gaudens National Historical Site

SAIR Saugus Iron Works National Historic Site

SARA Saratoga National Historical Park

SD Secchi Disk Depth

SECRL Sawyer Environmental Chemistry Research Laboratory

SOP(s) Standard Operating Procedure(s)

SPU Standard Platinum Units

STORET U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s storage and retrieval database

TMDL Total Maximum Daily Load

TSI Trophic State Index

USCG U.S. Coast Guard

USDOI U.S. Department of the Interior

USFWS U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service

USEPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

USGS U.S. Geological Survey

VAMA Vanderbilt Mansion National Historic Site

VLMP Volunteer Lake Monitoring Program

WEFA Weir Farm National Historic Site

YSI Yellow Springs Instrumentation
xv

Conversion Factors

Parameter Unit

Conversion 

Factor To Obtain (Result)

Length inch (in.) 2.54 centimeter (cm)

foot (ft) 0.3048 meter (m)

mile (mi) 1.609 kilometer (km)

Area square foot (ft2) 0.0929 square meter (m2)

square mile (mi2) 2.59 square kilometer (km2)

acre 4,047 square meter (m2)

acre 0.4047 hectare (ha)

Volume ounce, fluid (fl. oz) 0.02957 liter (L)

Flow Rate cubic foot per second (ft3/s) 0.02832 cubic meter per second (m3/s)

 Temperature in degrees Celsius (°C) may be converted to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) as follows:

°F = (1.8 × °C) + 32

 Temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) can be converted to degrees Celsius (°C) as follows:

°C = (°F - 32) / 1.8

 Specific conductance is given in microsiemens per centimeter at 25 degrees Celsius (μS/cm at 

25 °C)

 Concentrations of chemical constituents in water are given either in milligrams per liter (mg/L),

micrograms per liter (μg/L), or micro-equivalents per liter (μeq/L)

 Vertical coordinate information is referenced to the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 

(NAVD 88)

 Horizontal coordinate information is referenced to the North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83)

 Altitude, as used in this report, refers to distance above the vertical datum

1

Background and Introduction

The Northeast Temperate Network (NETN) is made up of the following 13 National Park (NP) units, 

including four National Historical Parks (NHP), one National Recreation Area (NRA), six National 

Historic Sites (NHS), and one National Park and National Scenic Trail (NST):

 Acadia NP, Maine (ACAD)

 Appalachian NST, Maine to Georgia (APPA)

 Boston Harbor Islands NRA, Massachusetts (BOHA)

 Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP, Vermont (MABI)

 Minute Man NHP, Massachusetts (MIMA)

 Morristown NHP, New Jersey (MORR)

 Roosevelt-Vanderbilt NHS, New York (ROVA); includes Eleanor Roosevelt NHS (ELRO), 

Home of Franklin D. Roosevelt NHS (HOFR), and Vanderbilt Mansion NHS (VAMA)

 Saint-Gaudens NHS, New Hampshire (SAGA)

 Saugus Iron Works NHS, Massachusetts (SAIR)

 Saratoga NHP, New York (SARA)

 Weir Farm NHS, Connecticut (WEFA)

The Appalachian NST is too large to be cost-effectively monitored by the methods in this protocol, 

and will not be considered further in this document. Boston Harbor Islands NRA is also not included 

in this monitoring protocol, because it lacks streams and its single freshwater pond is not accessible. 

Freshwater resources in the NETN parks are subjected to natural and anthropogenic impacts and 

alterations, which have imposed stress on these resources for many years. Current and historic threats 

to aquatic ecosystems in National Park Service (NPS) units throughout the northeastern U.S. have led 

to specific physical, biological, or chemical stresses to the freshwater ecosystems. The 

documentation of baseline water quality and water-quantity conditions is essential to the long-term 

maintenance of freshwater resources. Documenting the changes in baseline conditions will assist 

natural resource managers to identify and manage stressors in park freshwater ecosystems. 

NETN conducted a three-phase project to design a freshwater-resources monitoring plan, and now

monitors indicators (vital signs) that represent the overall health or condition of park resources and 

tracks the effects of stressors. The U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) worked in cooperation with 

NETN on each phase of the project to develop this lakes, ponds, and streams monitoring protocol.

The phases can be described as follows:

PHASE I: Development of a scoping report for long-term monitoring in NETN parks. This report 

(Lombard 2004) included an inventory of freshwater resources in the parks, a description of 

monitoring programs in each park, descriptions of current and emerging threats to NETN 

ecosystems, and a list of stressors and candidate monitoring indicators (vital signs) that could be used 

to assess the status of park ecosystems over the long term.
2

PHASE II: Design of prototype guidance for monitoring freshwater resources in NETN parks and 

development of a list of priority monitoring variables (vital signs) that will be measured in NETN 

parks.

PHASE III: Development of a monitoring protocol for selected high-priority vital signs in NETN 

lakes, ponds and streams. Conduct feasibility (pilot) testing of recommended freshwater 

quality/aquatic-resource vital signs at select NETN parks to finalize the freshwater resource 

monitoring design for NETN.

Phase I showed that although baseline freshwater quality data were collected in some NETN parks, 

NETN as a whole did not have a comprehensive freshwater long-term (greater than 10 years) datacollection program that included systematic quality control and data management. Environmental 

threats common to all NETN parks include climate change, atmospheric deposition, visitor overuse 

and invasive species (Shriver et al. 2004). Phase I was initiated in 2003 and the report was completed 

in 2004 (Lombard 2004). The Phase II report included a summary of a workshop at ACAD in May 

2004 in which freshwater quality professionals discussed the potential list of vital signs and made 

recommendations as to their ecological relevance, management significance and utility, feasibility, 

and response variability. The potential vital signs developed in Phase I were reviewed and ranked, 

and specific measures for high-priority vital signs were proposed. The Phase II report also included a 

comparison of the recommended list of high-priority vital signs with the water quality monitoring 

that was currently (2004) taking place in each park. Phase II was initiated in 2004 and the report was 

completed in that same year (Lombard and Goldstein 2004).

This protocol is a revision of the Phase III document (Lombard et al. 2006), the results of the study to 

design a water quality monitoring protocol for lakes, ponds, and streams. The revisions consist of a 

reorganization of the protocol to match the NETN reporting standard, as well as updated methods, 

changes to monitoring sites, and revised procedures resulting from 5 years of field work and annual 

protocol review meetings.

Procedures for NETN monitoring adapt existing procedures that meet the objectives and standards of 

this vital signs program to maintain consistency of data wherever possible. Measures of lake water 

chemistry, nutrient enrichment in lakes, and lake water levels have been monitored in ACAD since 

1997 (Breen et al. 2002) and ACAD has developed procedures for these measures (Gawley 1996).

Methods are consistent with those described in the Maine Department of Environmental Protection 

(MDEP) Lake Assessment Program Standard Operating Procedures (Maine Department of 

Environmental Protection 2004) and with Maine Volunteer Lake Monitoring Program protocols 

(VLMP) (Williams 2004). Survey methods for the detection of non-native invasive species are 

adapted from VLMP protocols and SOPs downloaded on March 23, 2012, from 

http://www.mainevlmp.org/wp/?page_id=33.

Procedures for measuring water quality vital signs in streams are based on USGS National Water 

quality Assessment Program (NAWQA) protocols (USGS variously dated). Techniques for 

collecting stream discharge data are also based on USGS methods (Rantz et al. 1982).
3

Periodic review of future versions of NAWQA, MDEP and VLMP protocols by NPS Inventory and 

Monitoring staff will ensure that NETN protocols remain current.

Justification

The vital signs for freshwater bodies included in the Phase III protocol are water quantity, water 

chemistry, nutrient enrichment, and the early detection of non-native plant species. These measures 

directly address the NPS Inventory and Monitoring Program’s objective to detect change in the status 

of physical, chemical, or biological attributes of park ecosystems. Measures of water chemistry 

including specific conductance, pH, water temperature, and dissolved oxygen (DO) are fundamental 

to any long-term water quality monitoring program, are critical for interpreting the biotic condition 

and ecological processes of freshwater bodies, and are mandatory as directed by the Inventory and 

Monitoring Program at the national level (National Park Service 2002). Measures of water quantity 

are necessary for monitoring the physical status of the freshwater ecosystems, and are fundamental to 

the interpretation of water-chemistry measures. Although only a qualitative estimate of water 

quantity is mandatory as a part of the Inventory and Monitoring Program, hydrologists at the 

workshop in Phase II identified quantitative measurements of water quantity, such as discharge and 

lake levels, as a top priority.

In addition to the fundamental water chemistry metrics listed above, acid-neutralizing capacity 

(ANC), and apparent color are measured at all NETN parks. A long-term record of these basic water 

chemistry parameters in the lakes, ponds and streams of NETN parks enables resource managers to 

detect trends that could be related to global and regional climate change, acid deposition, and sitespecific anthropogenic change. Moreover, a long-term data set of the selected parameters is essential 

to interpreting any trends noted from long-term biological and process-oriented data sets.

Nutrient enrichment metrics for all freshwater bodies in NETN parks include total phosphorus, 

multiple forms of nitrogen, chloride, sulfate, and dissolved organic carbon (DOC). At lakes and 

ponds, algal biomass (chlorophyll a) is also measured, along with water clarity (Secchi disk depth or 

a light penetration profile). Turbidity is measured for NETN streams. These metrics give managers 

guidance regarding the trophic status and productivity of freshwater bodies in parks. Nutrient 

enrichment and the acceleration of eutrophication have been identified in most NETN parks as 

stressors of great concern (Lombard and Goldstein 2004).

Non-native invasive species (often shortened to just “invasive species” in this protocol) are the 

stressor of greatest concern across all systems in NETN parks, including freshwater aquatic, 

wetlands, marine, and terrestrial systems (Shriver et al. 2004). Procedures for the early detection of 

invasive plant species in lakes and ponds are included in this protocol. The detection of invasive 

animal species was identified as high priority, but the development of a protocol for detection 

depends on future funding and (or) collaboration with other agencies. 

Other vital signs identified as high priority for protocol development include macroinvertebrates in 

streams, zooplankton community composition in lakes, and fish community composition in lakes and 

streams. Because of funding constraints, however, protocol development for these vital signs is on 

hold indefinitely, and would depend on collaboration with other agencies. Currently, ACAD staff 
4

implement benthic macroinvertebrate monitoring at five stream sites in collaboration with the Maine 

Department of Environmental Protection (MDEP), but NETN has not established specific objectives 

or monitoring questions related to this monitoring. 

The NETN protocol for freshwater wetlands at Acadia NP (Miller and Mitchell 2013) is 

implemented separately. The water quality of ground water, springs, and seeps were considered 

during the vital sign prioritization process, but were determined to be beyond the scope of the vital

signs program. NETN would, however, benefit greatly from information regarding groundwater 

resources, especially in parks such as MORR where many of the streams are groundwater fed. 

Groundwater data and data on springs and seeps can be integrated into a vital signs program in the 

future. Fecal bacteria in water were also considered in the prioritization process because this 

parameter is included in state water quality standards. Fecal bacteria are a human health issue for 

specific designated uses (generally consumptive or recreational uses involving direct contact). 

Although it is necessary in most states to meet standards for bacteria, fecal bacteria were not 

necessarily considered to be an indicator of overall freshwater ecosystem health, and thus they are 

not included in the protocol.

For additional justification and prioritization of vital signs and measures, see the Phase II water 

quality report (Lombard and Goldstein 2004).

Goals and Objectives

Our overall goal is to monitor the status and trends of NETN lakes, ponds, and streams in order to 

assess changes in ecological integrity and the impacts of key stressors, and to guide management 

decisions affecting these resources. The two specific objectives of this program and the questions that 

frame these general monitoring objectives are:

Objective 1: Detect changes over time in the status of physical (e.g., stream flow and stage), 

chemical (e.g., pH and DO), and nutrient status (e.g., nitrogen or chlorophyll a) of the lakes, ponds, 

and streams in NETN parks.

 Question 1: What is the natural range of temporal variability of the selected metrics of the 

vital signs for NETN lakes, ponds, and streams?

 Question 2: Are the selected metrics of the vital signs outside the range of natural variability? 

 Question 3: Are the selected metrics of the vital signs exceeding thresholds set by states as a 

part of their legal mandate under the Clean Water Act?

Objective 2: Ensure the early detection of aquatic invasive plants in the lakes, ponds and streams of 

NETN parks and alert park and state environmental managers of any new incidences of aquatic 

invasive species to facilitate a rapid response.

 Question 1: What non-native invasive aquatic plant species currently exist in the lakes, ponds 

and streams of NETN parks? 

 Question 2: Are there any new incidences of non-native invasive aquatic plant species in the 

lakes, ponds and streams of NETN parks?
5

The metrics associated with each vital sign and the specific questions to be addressed by collecting 

these water quality data are outlined in Tables 1 and 2 for streams and lakes, respectively.

Table 1. Monitoring questions for NETN streams. Questions in italics require additional data that are not 

collected through this protocol. In addition to the metrics below, rapid hydro-geomorphic assessments are 

made annually to provide qualitative supporting data, and ACAD monitors benthic macroinvertebrates in 

collaboration with MDEP. 

Vital Sign Metrics Monitoring Questions

Water quantity Stream discharge

(partial record 

stream flow

gaging stations 

and continuous

record stream flow 

gaging stations), 

stream stage

 What is the relation between the stage and the discharge (the rating) at 

each partial record and at each continuous record stream flow gaging 

station?

 What are the long-term (>10 year) stream flow statistics such as seasonal 

means and medians at each stream flow gaging station? 

 How do variations in stream flow explain deviations or trends in chemical or 

biological data observed in these same streams or in the park?

 Are there long-term (>10 year) trends in any of the annual or monthly stream

flow statistics at the index station(s)?

Water chemistry Specific 

conductance, pH, 

water 

temperature, DO, 

ANC, apparent 

color

 What is the natural range in variability in water chemistry parameters for 

streams in each NETN park based on streams in the park that are relatively 

unaffected? 

 Are water chemistry metrics exceeding thresholds indicating that they are 

outside the range of natural variability? What is the spatial and temporal 

extent of these deviations?

 Are freshwater bodies in NETN parks in compliance with the applicable 

federal and state water quality standard for the highest use classifications in 

each state for water chemistry?

 Are water chemistry parameters showing long-term (> 10 year) spring, 

summer or fall seasonal trends after accounting for flow? 

 Can water chemistry data be used to explain deviations in biological data at 

collocated sites?

 Can changes in water chemistry be linked to trends in human activity in the 

park such as increased roads or erosion?

Nutrient 

enrichment

Total phosphorus,

total nitrogen, 

nitrite, nitrate, 

ammonia, 

chloride, sulfate, 

DOC, clarity 

(turbidity)

 What is the natural range in variability in nutrients for streams in each NETN 

park based on streams in the park that are relatively unaffected?

 Are freshwater bodies in NETN parks in compliance with the applicable 

federal and state water quality standard for the highest use classifications in 

each state for nutrients, especially total phosphorus and stream nitrates?

 Are nutrient loads to freshwater aquatic resources in NETN parks 

increasing? What is the spatial and temporal extent of these increases?

 Are freshwater aquatic resources changing in response to increased loads? 

Is eutrophication approaching or exceeding levels that could cause shifts in 

ecosystem structure and function?

 Are nutrients showing spring, summer or fall seasonal trends after 

accounting for flow? Can trends in nutrient enrichment be used to explain 

deviations in biological data at collocated sites?

 Can changes in nutrient enrichment be linked to trends in human activity in 

the park such as increased roads, erosion, and fertilizers?

Non-native 

invasive plants -

early detection

Presence/absence  What non-native invasive plants are established in park streams?

 What non-native invasive plants are a threat to park streams on the basis of 

state lists of non-native invasive plants found in the region? 

 Are there any substantiated new occurrences of non-native invasive plants 

in any park stream based on an annual survey and reports from park staff, 

volunteers, or visitors to the park? 
6

Table 2. Monitoring questions for NETN lakes and ponds. Questions in italics require additional data that 

are not collected through this protocol.

Vital Sign Metrics Monitoring Questions

Water quantity Lake and pond stage  What are the long-term trends in lake and pond levels and how are 

they related to climatic records?

 Can variations in lake and pond levels explain deviations or trends 

in chemical or biological data observed in these same lakes and 

ponds?

Water chemistry Specific 

conductance, pH, 

water temperature,

DO, ANC, apparent 

color

 What is the natural range in variability in water chemistry

parameters for lakes and ponds in each NETN park based on lakes 

and ponds in the park (or the region) that are relatively unaffected?

 Are water chemistry metrics exceeding thresholds indicating that 

they are outside the range of natural variability? What is the spatial 

and temporal extent of these deviations?

 Are freshwater bodies in NETN parks in compliance with the 

applicable federal and state water quality standard for the highest 

use classifications in each state for water chemistry?

 Are water chemistry parameters showing long-term (>10 year) 

spring, summer or fall seasonal trends?

 Can water chemistry data be used to explain deviations in biological 

data at collocated sites?

 Can changes in water chemistry be linked to trends in human 

activity in the park such as increased roads or erosion?

Nutrient 

enrichment

Total phosphorus,

total nitrogen, nitrite, 

nitrate, ammonia, 

chloride, sulfate, 

DOC, algal biomass

(chlorophyll a), and

clarity (Secchi disk 

depth or light 

penetration profile)

 What is the natural range in variability in nutrients for lakes and 

ponds in each NETN park based on lakes and ponds in the park (or 

the region) that are relatively unaffected?

 What is the trophic status of each lake and pond based on the 

natural range of variability of chlorophyll a, phosphorus content and 

Secchi disk depth? Is cultural eutrophication accelerating natural 

eutrophication processes? Does the lake experience algal blooms?

 Are lakes and ponds in NETN parks in compliance with federal and 

state water quality standard for the highest use classifications in 

each state for nutrients, especially total phosphorus?

 Are freshwater resources changing in response to increased

nutrient loads? Is eutrophication approaching or exceeding levels 

that could cause shifts in ecosystem structure and function?

 Are nutrients showing spring, summer, or fall seasonal trends? Can 

trends in nutrient enrichment be used to explain deviations in 

biological data at collocated sites?

 Can changes in nutrient enrichment be linked to trends in human 

activity in the park such as increased roads, erosion, and fertilizers?

Non-native 

invasive plants -

early detection

Presence/ absence  What non-native invasive plants are established in park lakes and 

ponds?

 What non-native invasive plants are a threat to park lakes and 

ponds on the basis of state lists of non-native invasive plants found 

in the region?

 Are there any substantiated new occurrences of non-native invasive 

plants in any park pond or lake based on an annual survey and 

reports from park staff, volunteers, or visitors to the park? 
7

State and Regional Water Quality Standards

NETN (excluding APPA) includes parks in seven states in the Northeast (Maine, New Hampshire, 

Vermont, Massachusetts, Connecticut, New York, and New Jersey). Water quality standards have 

been established by each state for all freshwater bodies according to the Clean Water Act, section 

305b. The goal of the Clean Water Act is to restore and maintain the chemical, physical, and 

biological integrity of the Nation’s waters. Water quality standards, established by states, districts, 

territories and tribes consist of the following four basic components: designated uses, water quality

criteria, antidegradation requirements, and general policies as outlined on the U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency (USEPA) web site, http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/standards/about/.

A state’s designated use includes existing and desired uses of water that require good to excellent 

water quality. Water quality criteria, which have been developed to protect each designated use, can 

be numeric or narrative descriptions of the chemical, physical, and biological conditions necessary to 

support each of the designated uses, and can be site-specific. The antidegradation policy for each 

state must ensure that no activity is allowed that 1) compromises existing uses, 2) lowers water 

quality that currently meets or is better than the standard, or 3) degrades Outstanding National 

Resource Waters (ONRWs) – waters of exceptional ecological or recreational significance. 40 CFR 

131.12 indicates that ONRWs include waters of national and state parks. Although individual 

freshwater bodies are not all classified by states, park streams, lakes, and ponds are held to the 

highest classification standards designated by each state.

NETN adheres to state water quality standards that can and do vary across the network; 

consequently, this means that individual parks within NETN will not be adhering to the same 

standards. Descriptions of each state’s water quality standards are included in the following sections 

and in Tables 3 and 4 that summarize state standards for streams and for lakes and ponds, 

respectively.

Connecticut

Connecticut water quality standards define ranges of total phosphorus, total nitrogen, chlorophyll a, 

and Secchi disk transparency which are assessed collectively to determine the trophic state of a lake 

or pond. For the purpose of determining consistency with the water quality standard, the natural 

trophic state of a lake or pond is compared with the current trophic state to determine if it has been 

altered due to excessive anthropogenic inputs. Lakes and ponds in advanced trophic states which 

exceed their natural trophic state due to anthropogenic sources are considered to be inconsistent with 

water quality standards. Connecticut does not have parallel standards for streams, but does have 

standards for temperature, DO, pH, and nutrients (State of Connecticut Department of Energy and 

Environmental Protection 2013).
8

Table 3. Summary of stream water quality standards for states in NETN containing stream monitoring sites.

State: Water 

quality 

classification 

code

Maximum 

Temperature 

(°F)

Minimum 

Dissolved 

Oxygen

(mg/L)

pH Range 

(standard 

units)

Maximum Total 

Nitrogen (μg/L)

Maximum 

Total 

Phosphorus 

(μg/L)

Color

(color units, 

platinum-cobalt 

method)

Turbidity 

(NTU) Sulfate (mg/L)

Maine: AA As naturally 

occurs

7.0 (or 75% 

saturation)1

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

-- -- --

Massachusetts: A 68 (cold2)

83 (warm3)

6.0 (cold2)

5.0 (warm3)

6.5-8.3 As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

Not objectionable 

and does not 

impair use

Not 

objectionable 

and does not 

impair use

--

New Hampshire:

A 

As naturally 

occurs

6.0 (or 75% 

saturation4)

6.5-8.01 As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

--

New Jersey: FW2 72 (66 for 7 day 

average max 

temp)

7.0 6.5-8.5 As naturally 

occurs

100 -- 50 (15 for 30-

day average)

250

New York: AA -- 7.0 (cold2)

4.0 (warm3)

6.5-8.5 No algae 

growth5

No algae 

growth5

-- -- --

Vermont: A(1) -- 6.0-7.0 (or 

70-75% 

saturation; 

cold2)

1

5.0 ( or 60% 

saturation; 

warm3)

1

6.5-8.5 2,000 As naturally 

occurs

None that would 

prevent full 

support of uses

106

1 Criteria is “as naturally occurring.” Numerical standards are based on next most restrictive class

2 Cold refers to cold water fisheries

3 Warm refers to warm water fisheries

4

In cold water, fish spawning areas from October 1 - May 14, the instantaneous minimum DO concentration shall be at least 8 mg/L

5 There shall be no phosphorus or nitrogen that will result in growths of algae or impair the waters for their best usages

6

Annual average under dry weather base flow conditions
9

Table 4. Summary of lake and pond water quality standards for states in NETN containing pond or lake monitoring sites.

State: Water 

quality 

classification 

code

Maximum 

Temperature 

(°F)

Minimum 

Dissolved 

Oxygen 

(mg/L)

pH Range 

(standard 

units)

Maximum Total 

Nitrogen (μg/L)

Maximum Total 

Phosphorus 

(μg/L) Color

Maximum 

Chlorophyll a 

(μg/L)

Minimum 

Secchi Disk 

Depth (m)

Connecticut: 

Mesotrophic 

Eutrophic

85, or maximum 

of 4° increase 

from natural 

conditions

5.0 6.5-8.01200-600

600-1,000

10-30

30-50

None other than 

of natural origin

2-15

15-30

2-6

1-2

Maine: GPA As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

-- As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

New Hampshire: 

Ponds

As naturally 

occurs

5.0 (or 75% 

saturation)

6.5-8.01As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

As naturally 

occurs

-- --

Vermont: Ponds -- 5.0 (or 60% 

saturation)

1

6.5-8.5 5,000 As naturally 

occurs

None that would 

prevent full 

support of uses

-- --

1 Criteria is “as naturally occurring.” Numerical standards are based on next most restrictive class
10

Maine

Maine Statutes, Title 38, Sections 464, 465, and 465-A define the classification program and water 

quality standards for Maine waters (Maine State Government 2011, 2007a, 2007b). Existing instream water uses and the level of water quality necessary to protect those existing uses must be 

maintained and protected. All waters in national parks are considered outstanding national resource 

waters (ONRW) in Maine. The water quality of ONRW must be maintained and protected. Class AA 

is the highest classification and its standards shall be applied to waters that are outstanding natural 

resources.

“Class AA waters must be of such quality that they are suitable for the designated uses of drinking 

water after disinfection, fishing, agriculture, recreation in and on the water, navigation, and as habitat 

for fish and other aquatic life. The habitat must be characterized as free-flowing and natural. The 

aquatic life, DO, and bacteria content of Class AA waters shall be as naturally occur” (Maine State 

Government 2007a). No quantitative criteria are given for AA waters, but the DO content of Class A 

waters (the next lowest classification) “shall be not less than 7 parts per million [7 mg/L] or 75 

percent of saturation, whichever is higher”.

Great ponds and natural ponds and lakes less than 10 acres in size are all classified as Class GPA 

waters. “Class GPA waters must be of such quality that they are suitable for the designated uses of 

drinking water after disinfection, recreation in and on the water, fishing, agriculture, industrial 

process and cooling water supply, hydroelectric power generation, navigation, and as habitat for fish 

and other aquatic life. The habitat must be characterized as natural” (Maine State Government 

2007b).

“Class GPA waters shall be described by their trophic state based on measures of the chlorophyll a

content, Secchi Disk Depth (SD), total phosphorus content, and other appropriate criteria.” Water 

quality standards for Maine indicate that class GPA waters “shall have a stable or decreasing trophic 

state, subject only to natural fluctuations, and shall be free of culturally induced algal blooms”

(Maine State Government 2007b). Bloom conditions are defined as SD measurements of less than 2 

meters in lakes having color less than 30 standard platinum units (SPU). Lakes that chronically (more 

than 5 of the past 10 years) show algal blooms are not in attainment of state water quality standards.

Trophic status break points are based on over 20 years of SD measurements in Maine lakes 

(Williams 2004). 

Carlson’s trophic state index (TSI) (Carlson 1977) was modified for Maine and can be calculated 

using the following equations:

TSI (SD) = 70 log [(105/SD2) + 0.7]

TSI (Chl) = 70 log (chl + 0.71)

TSI (TP) = 70 log (0.33TP + 0.7)

(L. Bacon, Maine Department of Environmental Protection [MDEP], written communication 2005); 

where TSI is the Trophic State Index; SD is Secchi disk depth in meters; Chl is Chlorophyll a in ppb, 

TP is total phosphorus in ppb. General numerical guidelines of trophic status for Maine based on 
11

these formulas are shown in Table 5. Guidance from the MDEP indicates that the parameters used in 

the equations shall be calculated as the mean of the monthly means for each water sample. A 

minimum of one reading per month from May through November is used with no 2 consecutive 

months of missing data. Samples are to be taken from open water, SD must be less than total depth, 

and depth-integrated samples taken to a depth equal to that of the late summer epilimnion or to a 

concentration of 2.0 mg/L DO, (whichever is less) are used for chlorophyll a and total phosphorus 

samples (L. Bacon, MDEP, written communication 2005). In adherence to this guidance, only TSI 

(SD) can be calculated from NETN monitoring data.

Table 5. Numerical guidelines for evaluation of trophic status in Maine.* SDT = Secchi disk depth; chl a =

chlorophyll a; TSI = Trophic State Index; ppb = parts per billion. From: Maine Department of 

Environmental Protection (2004). (Note: Dystrophy is not often evaluated as a trophic category separately 

from categories below)

Parameter1

Trophic Status

Oligotrophic Mesotrophic2Eutrophic

SDT3> 8 meters 4 – 8 meters < 4 meters

CHL a < 1.5 ppb 1.5 – 7 ppb > 7 ppb

Total Phosphorus3< 4.5 ppb 4.5 – 20 ppb > 20 ppb

TSI3,4 0 – 25 25 – 60 > 60 and/or repeated algal blooms

1

SDT, CHL a, and Total Phosphorus based on long-term means.

2 No repeated nuisance algal blooms.

3

If color is > 30 Standard Platinum Units (SPU) or not known, chlorophyll a concentration (CHL a), dissolved 

oxygen and best professional judgment used to assign trophic category.

4

TSI = Trophic State Indices are calculated when adequate data exists and color is at or below 30 SPU.

* This table is a duplicate of Table 4–5 in the Assessment Methodology Section of this report (appears twice for 

the reader’s convenience).

Massachusetts

Massachusetts surface water quality standards designate Class A waters as “excellent habitat for fish, 

other aquatic life and wildlife, and suitable for primary and secondary contact recreation”

(Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection 2013). ORW is used to denote those waters, 

other than Public Water Supplies, designated for protection as outstanding resources. The DO 

concentrations of Class A waters “shall not be less than 6.0 mg/l in cold water fisheries and not less 

than 5.0 mg/l in warm water fisheries. Where natural background conditions are lower, DO shall not 

be less than natural background conditions.” Temperature “Shall not exceed 68° F (20° C) based on 

the mean of the daily maximum temperature over a seven day period in cold water fisheries, unless 

naturally occurring... Temperature shall not exceed 83°F (28.3°C) in warm water fisheries... pH 

shall be in the range of 6.5 through 8.3 standard units but not more than 0.5 units outside of the 

natural background range... These waters shall be free from color and turbidity in concentrations or 

combinations that are aesthetically objectionable or would impair any use assigned to this class.”

(Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection 2013).
12

New Hampshire

Surface waters of National Forests and surface waters designated as natural are considered

outstanding resource waters (ORW) in New Hampshire. “Water quality shall be maintained and 

protected in surface waters that constitute ORW” (New Hampshire Department of Environmental 

Services 2008). Class A is the most protective surface water classification in New Hampshire’s 

Surface Water Quality Regulations (New Hampshire Department of Environmental Services 2008). 

According to the standards, “Class A waters shall have a dissolved oxygen content of at least 75% 

saturation, based on a daily average, and an instantaneous minimum of at least 6 mg/l at any place or 

time except as naturally occurs... For the period from October 1st to May 14th, in areas identified by 

the fish and game department as cold water fish spawning areas of species whose early life stages are 

not directly exposed to the water, the 7 day mean dissolved oxygen concentration shall be at least 9.5 

mg/l and the instantaneous minimum dissolved oxygen concentration shall be at least 8 mg/l... 

surface waters within the top 25 percent of depth of thermally unstratified lakes, ponds, 

impoundments and reservoirs or within the epilimnion shall contain a dissolved oxygen content of at 

least 75 percent saturation, based on a daily average and an instantaneous minimum dissolved 

oxygen content of at least 5 mg/l.”

The standards state that Class A waters shall contain no color, turbidity, phosphorus, or nitrogen 

“unless naturally occurring.” Additionally, “there shall be no change in temperature in class A 

waters, unless naturally occurring... The pH of Class A waters shall be as naturally occurs. The pH 

of Class B waters shall be 6.5 to 8.0, unless due to natural causes” (New Hampshire Department of 

Environmental Services 2008). The standards also provide criteria for ammonia that vary by pH, 

temperature and the animal species of concern for toxicity (general, salmonids, or fish; New 

Hampshire Department of Environmental Services 2008).

New Jersey

New Jersey water quality standards (State of New Jersey Administrative Code 2011) designate the 

general surface water classification applied to freshwater bodies as FW. FW1 means those freshwater

bodies that are to be maintained in their natural state of quality and not subjected to any man-made 

wastewater discharges or increases in runoff from anthropogenic activities. These waters are set aside 

for posterity because of their clarity, color, scenic setting, or other characteristic of aesthetic value, 

unique ecological significance, exceptional recreational significance, exceptional water supply 

significance, or exceptional fisheries resource(s).

“Surface water quality criteria for FW1 waters shall be maintained as to quality in their natural state” 

(State of New Jersey Administrative Code 2011). The tributaries in the Passaic River Watershed in 

MORR are all listed as FW2 waters. Surface-water quality criteria for FW2 waters state that DO 

concentrations shall be “not less than 7.0 mg/L at any time” and that “temperatures shall not exceed a 

daily maximum of 22 degrees Celsius or rolling seven-day average of the daily maximum of 19 

degrees Celsius, unless due to natural conditions” (specifically for FW2-TP waters; TP refers to 

waters supporting trout production; State of New Jersey Administrative Code 2011). For all FW2 

waters, total phosphorus cannot exceed 0.1 mg/L, pH must remain between 6.5 and 8.5, sulfate must 

be below 250 mg/L, and for turbidity a “maximum 30-day average of 15 NTU, a maximum of 50 
13

NTU at any time” (State of New Jersey Administrative Code 2011). For all waters, “except as due to 

natural conditions, nutrients shall not be allowed in concentrations that render the waters unsuitable 

for the existing or designated uses” (State of New Jersey Administrative Code 2011).

New York

New York’s Surface Water Quality Standards (New York State Department of Environmental 

Conservation 2008) designates Class AA as the most restrictive stream classification for water 

quality. The standard for color states there will be none that will “impair the waters for their best 

usages”. For phosphorus and nitrogen, there will be “none in amounts that will result in growths of 

algae, weeds and slimes that will impair the waters for their best usages.” pH “shall not be less than 

6.5 nor more than 8.5,” color “shall not exceed 15 color units (platinum-cobalt method),” and 

turbidity “shall not exceed 5 nephelometric units” (New York State Department of Environmental 

Conservation 2008). 

“For trout spawning waters (TS), the DO concentration shall not be less than 7.0 mg/L from other 

than natural conditions. For trout waters (T), the minimum daily average shall not be less than 6.0 

mg/L, and at no time shall the concentration be less than 5.0 mg/L. For nontrout waters, the 

minimum daily average shall not be less than 5.0 mg/L, and at no time shall the DO concentration be 

less than 4.0 mg/L” (New York State Department of Environmental Conservation 2008).

Vermont

Certain waters are designated as ORW according to Vermont Water Quality Standards (State of 

Vermont Natural Resources Board 2011), “where the existing quality shall, at a minimum, be 

protected and maintained. Class A(1) Ecological Waters are managed to achieve and maintain 

streams in a natural condition”.

In all waters in Vermont, “the change or rate of change in temperature, either upward or downward, 

shall be controlled to ensure full support of aquatic biota, wildlife, and aquatic habitat uses... [For 

cold water fish habitat,] the total increase from the ambient temperature resulting from all activities 

shall not exceed 1 oF” (State of Vermont Natural Resources Board 2011). In lakes, ponds, and 

reservoirs the total increase from ambient temperature shall not exceed 1

o

F if the ambient 

temperature is above 60 oF; 2 oF if the ambient temperature is between 50 and 60 oF; and 3 oF if the 

ambient temperature is below 50 oF. In all other waters, the total increase from ambient temperature 

shall not exceed 1

o

F if the ambient temperature is above 66 oF; 2 oF if the ambient temperature is 

between 63 and 66 oF; 3 oF if the ambient temperature is between 59 and 62 oF; 4 oF if the ambient 

temperature is between 55 and 58 oF; and 5 oF if the ambient temperature is below 55 oF (State of 

Vermont Natural Resources Board 2011).

All total phosphorus and nitrate concentrations “shall be limited so that they will not contribute to the 

acceleration of eutrophication or the stimulation of the growth of aquatic biota in a manner that 

prevents the full support of uses” (State of Vermont Natural Resources Board 2011). In lakes, ponds, 

and reservoirs, nitrate concentrations are “not to exceed 5.0 mg/L as NO3-N regardless of 

classification” (State of Vermont Natural Resources Board 2011). In class A(1) waters, nitrates are 
14

“not to exceed 2.0 mg/L as NO3-N at flows exceeding low median monthly flows” (State of Vermont

Natural Resources Board 2011).

There should be no color “that would prevent the full support of uses,” and pH “shall be maintained 

with the range of 6.5 and 8.5” (State of Vermont Natural Resources Board 2011). Turbidity will not 

be present “in such amounts or concentrations that would prevent the full support of uses, and not to 

exceed 10 NTU... as an annual average under dry weather base-flow conditions” (State of Vermont 

Natural Resources Board 2011).

DO concentrations are as naturally occurs in all Class A(1) ecological waters. DO concentrations in 

cold water fish habitat is “not less than 7 mg/L and 75 percent saturation at all times, nor less than 95

percent saturation during late egg maturation and larval development of salmonids in areas that the 

Secretary determines are salmonid spawning or nursery areas important to the establishment or 

maintenance of the fishery resource. Not less than 6 mg/L and 70 percent saturation at all times in all 

other waters designated as a cold water fish habitat.” In warm water fish habitat DO concentrations 

are “not less than 5 mg/L and 60 percent saturation at all times” (State of Vermont Natural Resources 

Board 2011).

Ecoregional Nutrient Standards

Although individual states do not often give numerical values for nutrient standards, the USEPA has 

established ecoregional nutrient criteria. EPA water quality criteria for nutrients help translate 

narrative criteria within State or Tribal water quality standards by establishing values for causal 

variables (e.g., total nitrogen and total phosphorus) and response variables (e.g., turbidity and 

chlorophyll a). Causal variables are necessary to provide sufficient protection of designated uses 

before impairment occurs and to maintain downstream uses. Early response variables are necessary 

to provide warning signs of possible impairment and to integrate the effects of variable and 

potentially unmeasured nutrient loads (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 2002). 

These criteria were developed specifically for each ecoregion and are designed to represent 

conditions of surface waters that are minimally impacted by human activities and thus protect against 

the adverse effects of nutrient over-enrichment from cultural eutrophication. The values are EPA’s 

scientific recommendations regarding ambient concentrations of nutrients that protect aquatic 

resource quality (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 2002; Table 6). They do not have any 

regulatory impact or meaning.

For lakes (waterbodies greater than 10 acres and with mean water residence time of 14 or more days; 

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 2000a), the criteria were established based on the lower 25th 

percentile of lakes that EPA found data for (Table 7). This percentile of all lakes is expected to 

approximately correspond to the 75th percentile of reference (undisturbed) lakes. In other words, 75% 

of lakes in the ecoregion do not meet the criteria, nor do roughly 25% of reference lakes. For streams 

and rivers, a parallel approach was used to establish the nutrient criteria (U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency 2000b).
15

Table 6. USEPA Ecoregional nutrient criteria that apply to NETN streams.1

Nutrient criteria

Ecoregion 7

(ROVA, SARA)

Ecoregion 8

(ACAD, MABI, SAGA)

Ecoregion 9

(MORR)

Ecoregion 14

(MIMA, SAIR, WEFA, BOHA)

Total Phosphorus-μg/L 33.00 10.00 36.56 31.25

Total Nitrogen-mg/L 0.54 0.38 0.69 0.71

Chlorophyll a- μg/L 1.5

(fluorometric)

0.63

(fluorometric)

0.93

(spectrophotometric)

3.75

(spectrophotometric)

1

Accessed at http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/nutrient/ecoregions/rivers/index.html on June 23, 2005. These numbers represent the 25th percentiles 

of all values compiled for the region for all seasons

Table 7. USEPA Ecoregional nutrient criteria that apply to NETN lakes and ponds.

1

Nutrient criteria

Ecoregion 7

(ROVA, SARA)

Ecoregion 8

(ACAD, MABI, SAGA)

Ecoregion 9

(MORR)

Ecoregion 14

(MIMA, SAIR, WEFA, BOHA)

Total Phosphorus-μg/L 14.75 8.00 20.00 8.00

Total Nitrogen-mg/L 0.66 0.24 0.36 0.32

Chlorophyll a -μg/L -fluorometric 2.63 2.43 4.93 2.90

Secchi disk depth (m) 3.33 4.93 1.53 4.50

1

Accessed at http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/nutrient/ecoregions/rivers/index.html on June 23, 2005. These numbers represent the 25th percentiles 

of all values compiled for the region for all seasons
16

Clean Water Act Section 303d Impairment

Impaired and threatened waters that do not meet state water quality standards are placed on the state 

303(d) list, named for the section of the USEPA Clean Water Act where the list is described. This list 

is reviewed and updated every 2 years. If a waterbody is placed on the 303(d) list, it is placed in line 

for a Total Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) plan to identify the cause(s) of the impairment and outline 

how to clean up and restore the waterbody.

Freshwater bodies in NETN parks that have been included on the USEPA Clean Water Act 303(d) 

impairments list are listed in Table 8. It is important to note that these lists are continually changing 

and need to be updated over time. The waterbodies listed on 303(d) lists are mostly large rivers, since 

states often do not have data from smaller streams. The Hudson River forms the outside boundary of 

two parks (SARA and ROVA), and really only affects the parks during times of major backwater.

The Connecticut River is adjacent to SAGA and has the potential to affect the park during times of 

flooding. The Concord River and the Saugus River flow through MIMA and SAIR respectively, but

in all cases the part of the river in, or affected by, NETN parks is small relative to the size of the 

watershed. Conducting a TMDL and performing long-term water quality monitoring on these large 

rivers outside of NETN parks is a state responsibility, and is beyond the scope of the NPS Inventory 

and Monitoring program for the affected parks.

Table 8. USEPA 303d impairments in freshwater resources in NETN parks.

1

Waterbody Waterbody ID (WBID) Park Impairment(s)

Blow-Me-Down 

Brook

NHRIV801060303-11_2010 SAGA Aluminum, Mercury

Concord River MA82A-07_2010 MIMA Non-Native Aquatic Plants (Myriophyllum

spicatum), Fecal Coliform, Mercury in Fish 

Tissue, Phosphorus (Total)

Hudson River NY-1301-0003-2010 ROVA Cadmium, PCBs

Hudson River NY-1101-0002-2010 SARA PCBs

Saugus River MA93-35_2010 SAIR Alteration in stream-side or littoral vegetative 

covers, Low flow alterations, Fecal Coliform

Saugus River MA93-43_2010 SAIR Flow regime alterations, Oil and Grease, Water 

Temperature, Fecal Coliform

1

From USEPA 2010 cycle of listings for New Hampshire, New York and Massachusetts

The parks can avoid adding to the impairments in these rivers by monitoring the streams that flow 

into these large rivers. TMDLs and long-term monitoring of the Saugus, Concord, and Hudson 

Rivers is outside the scope of this protocol. Data from the nearest up-river monitoring stations on 

these rivers and water quality monitoring on adjacent freshwater bodies is included in the USEPA 

STORET database, and is available for use in reports.
17

Water Quality Parameters

This section includes basic descriptions of the water quality parameters that are used for long-term 

data collection and analysis in NETN parks. Typical values are included in some cases to give a 

general range that can be expected from waterbodies in the northeast.

Water Clarity

Secchi disk depth (SD) is used to measure water clarity (transparency) in NETN lakes and ponds, and 

values can range from 1 to 20 meters (Breen et al. 2002, Farris and Chapman 2000). Generally SDs

of greater than 8 meters indicate an oligotrophic lake, between 4 and 8 meters indicate a mesotrophic 

lake and less than 4 meters indicate a eutrophic lake (Maine Department of Environmental Protection 

2004).

Ponds outside of Acadia are too shallow for use of a Secchi disk, and a transparency tube was used to 

measure water clarity at these sites from 2006 to 2011 (see Appendix S8.A). This method was 

selected because there is a loose relationship between SD and transparency tube values, plus 

transparency tubes can be used in streams as well as ponds (Dahlgren et al 2004). However, the water 

at most NETN pond (and stream) sites was too clear for effective use of the transparency tube.

Beginning in 2012, a Li-Cor LI-1400 light meter is used to document trends in water clarity in these 

ponds instead. NETN utilizes a light meter to obtain light penetration profiles at shallow lakes in 

Acadia (i.e., lakes where the Secchi disk regularly hits bottom), and the use of this procedure has 

been expanded to the rest of the network parks following the purchase of a second set of equipment.

Stream turbidity is measured monthly using a LaMotte 2020e turbidity meter (beginning in 2012).

Temperature

Temperature standards for New England, New York, and New Jersey vary substantially. Within 

states, there may be separate standards for warm water and cold water fisheries. Changes in 

temperature regimes over time can affect the community of species that can survive in the stream, 

pond, or lake, primarily because warmer water does not hold as much oxygen. This protocol includes 

procedures for sampling monthly pH in situ with a multiparameter sonde.

pH

Most New England states indicate that a pH between 6.5 and 8.5 meets state water quality standards 

(Tables 3 and 4). The documented distribution of pH in Maine lakes by the VLMP and the MDEP 

(Williams 2004) indicates that the pH of most Maine lakes ranged from 6.0 to 7.0. This protocol 

includes procedures for sampling monthly pH in situ with a multiparameter sonde. Historical pH 

measurements were often made on a discrete sample in the laboratory. Differing types of pH 

measurements are not expected to be equivalent. Both types of measurements can be taken for a 

season to determine the effect of changing methods.

Dissolved Oxygen

Dissolved oxygen is a critical indicator of water quality because aquatic life generally needs DO 

concentrations at or above 5 mg/L to thrive. Individual readings are made in situ with a DO meter or 

with a DO probe on a multiparameter sonde. Mesotrophic lakes can drop below 5 mg/L or became 
18

anoxic from July through September. The combination of thermal stratification and increased 

biological activity in lakes during the summer can result in DO concentration depletion or anoxia in 

lake hypolimnions. Oligotrophic lakes occasionally drop below 1 mg/L, but only at the bottom of the 

water column (Seger et al. 2005).

Specific Conductance

Specific conductance is an indicator of pollutants in the water, and is directly related to the level of 

dissolved ions in the water. Specific conductance values can range from less than 20 to more than 

1,000 microsiemens per centimeter (μS/cm), but is most often less than 100 μS/cm in Maine lakes 

(Williams 2004). For sites in the lower NETN parks (LNETN), typical values range from 200 to 400 

μS/cm. Specific conductance was historically measured in the laboratory using grab samples and 

depth-integrated epilimnetic samples taken from NETN ponds and lakes. The SOPs included in this 

protocol call for specific conductance readings to be taken in situ with a multiparameter sonde.

Differing types of specific conductance measurements are not necessarily equivalent. Both types of 

measurements can be taken for a season to determine the effect of changing methods.

Acid Neutralizing Capacity (ANC)

Acid Neutralizing Capacity (ANC) is the capacity of solutes plus particulates in an aqueous system to 

neutralize acid and is thus determined on an unfiltered sample. Water’s ability to neutralize acid (i.e. 

buffering capacity) is largely a function of the bicarbonate and carbonate ions derived from 

dissolution of calcium carbonate in the drainage basin. When there is little input of calcium carbonate 

to a surface waterbody, the dissociation of dissolved carbon dioxide is the reaction that predominates. 

This results in slightly acidic waters with little buffering capacity.

Most states do not have numerical criteria for ANC in their water quality standards. ANC values 

greater than 100 μeq/L are considered well-buffered, while values less than zero typify acidic waters 

(Stoddard et al. 2003). The NWQL reports ANC as mg/L of CaCO3; at 1 mg/L = 20 μeq/L, values 

greater than 5 mg/L are considered well-buffered.

Apparent Color

Color in lake and stream water is caused by natural metallic ions, humus and peat materials, 

plankton, weeds, and industrial wastes. Color isreported in Platinum-Cobalt (Pt-Co) units (PCU). 

True color (not measured by NETN) is the color of water from which turbidity has been removed.

Apparent color (measured by NETN) is determined on original samples without filtration. Apparent 

color can be a rough indicator for organic acidity, which can result in low pH. Sampling apparent 

color will allow parks to determine whether a low pH is of concern or whether it is because of natural 

organic acidity, for example, derived from wetlands.

Lakes and ponds with apparent color values of greater than 25 PCU are considered to be highly 

colored and in these lakes transparency is often depressed and phosphorus concentrations are often 

high. Values of color are usually not included in water quality standards, except to note that they be 

as naturally occurs and that in highly colored lakes, it is best to use chlorophyll a as opposed to total 

phosphorus or SD as an indicator of trophic status. The color of Maine lakes varies from 2 to 194 

SPU, with most lakes between 10 and 20 PCU (Williams 2004).
19

Dissolved Organic Carbon (DOC)

Carbon is a nutrient required for biological processes. Sources of organic carbon in water include 

humic substances from plant and soil organic matter, wetland peat deposits, and atmospheric 

deposition. Certain forms of DOC can contribute to “tea” color in water, which can affect light 

attenuation. DOC is also an important part of the energy balance and acid-base chemistry in many 

freshwater systems. It also affects the transport (solubility and bioavailability) of metals, including 

mercury, in aquatic systems. Measurement of dissolved organic carbon began in 2012, and baseline 

values are not known.

Total Phosphorus (TP)

The total phosphorus occurring in water includes orthophosphate, condensed phosphates and 

organically bound phosphates. Phosphates are in solution, in particles, or in aquatic organisms.

Phosphorus originates from water treatment, laundry detergents, or agricultural or residential 

fertilizers and often indicates agricultural pollution. It is essential to the growth of aquatic organisms 

and is thus frequently a limiting nutrient in aquatic systems.

Although several forms of phosphorus (total P, total dissolved P, and soluble reactive P or 

“orthophosphate”) were tested individually in the 2006 through 2011 monitoring seasons, beginning 

in 2012 NETN only measures total phosphorus. Total phosphorus is the common water quality 

standard or criteria metric, and more specific analyses can be conducted as necessary to better 

understand the sources and sinks of elevated phosphorus concentrations should they occur.

The addition of phosphates to a waterbody usually results in the growth of aquatic microorganisms in 

nuisance quantities (American Public Health Association 1998) and it is an indicator of trophic status 

or the productivity of a waterbody. Typically, lakes have total phosphorus concentrations of between 

10 and 50 μg/L, but can range in lakes from less than 1 μg/L to 200 μg/L (Wetzel 1983). Data from 

the MDEP and the VLMP indicate that most lakes in Maine have total phosphorus concentrations of 

between 5 and 10 ppb (roughly equivalent to 5-10 μg/L) in integrated water samples taken from the 

epilimnion (Williams 2004). USEPA ecoregion criteria range from 8 μg/L to 20 μg/L (Table 7).

Similar data is not typically available for streams, but USEPA total phosphorus criteria for streams 

are higher than for lakes, ranging from 10 μg/L to 37 μg/L (Table 6).

Nitrogen (N)

Nitrogen is found in freshwater bodies in the following forms: nitrate (NO3), nitrite (NO2), ammonia 

(NH3), and organic nitrogen. Nitrate is an essential nutrient for many photosynthetic autotrophs and 

is thus a major limiting nutrient in most aquatic systems. Nitrite is rare in unpolluted waters. Under 

high pH conditions, nitrogen in the form of un-ionized ammonia (NH3) may be present and can be 

toxic to aquatic life in high concentrations. The organic form of nitrogen is typically un-ionized 

ammonia (NH3) that primarily results from the bacterial decay of humic matter or urea from animal 

or human waste.

An increase in nitrogen usually results in accelerated eutrophication. Nitrogen is indicative of 

agricultural pollution or acid rain. The drinking water standard for nitrate, the most highly oxidized 
20

state of nitrogen, is 10 mg/L (American Public Health Association 1998), but nitrate can be found in 

concentrations up to 30 mg/L in wastewater effluent.

NETN analyzes lake, pond and stream water samples to total nitrogen (TN), nitrate, nitrite, and 

ammonia. Total dissolved nitrogen (TDN) analysis was discontinued after 2011. There are no state or 

EPA criteria for nitrogen analytes other than TN.

Chloride (Cl)

Chloride is one of the major negatively-charged ions in freshwater systems. The chloride content of 

natural surface waters will depend to a great extent on the geology of the area. Concentrations are 

generally greater in lakes that are in proximity to marine regions. Another source of chloride is road 

run-off from de-icing materials. Chloride is important in terms of metabolic processes, as it 

influences osmotic salinity balance and ion exchange. Chloride analysis began in 2012 and baseline 

values are not known.

Sulfate (SO4)

Sulfate is found in most natural waters, originating from watershed geology, soils, and precipitation.

Sulfate can play a major role in acidification of lakes and streams. Sulfate analysis began in 2012 and 

baseline values are not known.

Algal Biomass (Chlorophyll a)

The amount of chlorophyll a in a water sample is a measure of the concentration of suspended 

phytoplankton and can be used as an indicator of algal biomass and thus of water quality. 

Chlorophyll a is responsible for photosynthesis and is found in various forms within the living cells 

of algae, phytoplankton, and other plant matter of water environments. Like other biological response 

variables, chlorophyll a tends to integrate the stresses of various parameters over time, and thus is 

often an important nutrient-stress parameter to measure. USEPA criteria for chlorophyll a range from 

2.4 μg/L to 4.9 μg/L, and values at ACAD are generally below 7 μg/L.

Non-native Invasive Plants

Non-native invasive plants have the potential to dramatically alter stream, pond, and lake ecology. 

Because of this potential, opportunistic surveys are conducted at stream sites, and more formal boatbased surveys are conducted at ponds and lakes.
21

Sampling Design

Sampling designs outlined in this section for each NETN park allow for the detection of changes in 

the status of physical, chemical, and biological attributes of freshwater resources over time. Water 

quality sampling at additional sites – especially the continuation of historic sites or the sampling of 

sites in cooperation with other agencies – is encouraged. Consistency of sampling procedures across 

all sites in the park is critical in the analyses and interpretation of water quality data in NETN parks.

Although attempts were made within this protocol to continue the use of historic sites and existing 

methods, adjustments were made to historical methods and sites so that there would be consistency 

across NETN or as the result of improvements in methods. Adjustments can compromise the ability 

to compare new data with historical data in some cases. 

General Sampling Design in Lakes and Ponds

The target population is the lakes and ponds with surface area greater than 1 acre (0.4 ha) in NETN 

parks. As all lakes and ponds greater than 1 acre (0.4 ha) will be sampled over time (except the four

ponds discussed below), this design is a census and thus there is no concern about the 

representativeness of the sampled population. Measurements are taken from a boat at the deepest 

point in the pond. A mid-lake sample at the area of maximum depth is the conventional sampling 

strategy used in lake chemistry monitoring programs, and lakes in ACAD have been sampled at the 

deepest point since 1970. Mid-lake samples at the deepest point have been shown to be 

representative of surface-water chemistry in lakes of up to 1,650 acres (668 ha) in Sweden 

(Goransson et al. 2004). Reports will clearly indicate that only the deepest point was sampled and 

thus conclusions will only be drawn for these sites. A lake water quality study showing how well the 

deepest point represents water quality at other sites in the lakes at ACAD and the other parks is 

recommended, although it is beyond the scope of this protocol.

There are a total of 27 ponds and lakes larger than 1 acre (0.4 ha) in or partially in NETN park

boundaries. The 13 lakes that have a surface area greater than 15 acres (6 ha) are all in ACAD. Four

of these lakes are partially outside the park boundary. There are 14 ponds between 1 acre and 15 

acres. Seven of these are in ACAD, two in ROVA, and one each in MABI, WEFA, SAGA, BOHA 

and MORR.

Because limited funding resources prevent all ACAD lakes and ponds from being sampled every 

year, a subset of the lakes are visited annually while three sets of lakes and ponds are revisited every 

3

rd year (an augmented serially alternating design) (Larsen et al. 1995, Urquhart et al. 1998). The 

augmented serially alternating design gives more power to detect trends over the long term than does 

an annual revisit design in which a fraction of the lakes and ponds are visited every year. The greatest 

increase in the power to detect trend in all cases comes from increasing the interval over which the 

trend is to be detected (Larsen et al. 1995, Urquhart et al. 1998).

For the other NETN parks, all ponds are sampled each year (Table 9). All accessible lakes and ponds 

greater than 1 acre are sampled monthly from May through October with the following exceptions. 

Nine lakes and ponds in ACAD are monitored as a part of the serially alternating design where they 

are sampled every 3

rd year (three lakes and ponds per year in addition to the eight lakes sampled 
22

every year). Two ponds in ACAD are not accessible by vehicle and are not sampled as part of this 

protocol. One pond in ACAD is less than 1 m in depth and it is recommended that this pond be 

sampled as a wetland. The pond in MORR and the two impoundments in ROVA were considered 

low priority for monitoring relative to the stream resources in the parks, and thus are not monitored. 

The ROVA impoundments are also very shallow, with detectable flow, and are generally functioning 

as wetlands. The one pond greater than 1 acre in BOHA will not be sampled because of the logistical 

challenges of sampling in Boston Harbor. The option of partnering with other agencies already 

working on the islands can be pursued to track water quality in this pond.

Sonde water quality measurements can be taken in the flowing water exiting each pond if a boat is 

not available for sampling. This location is less desirable than the deepest point because a Secchi 

transparency measurement cannot be taken. Water quality samples can be collected with the use of a 

throw bottle towards the center of the pond.

In addition, permanent shore sites were established for each lake and pond from which to monitor the 

water levels. These sites were selected on the basis of access, the presence of a stable benchmark, 

and the ease of getting an accurate water level measurement.

General Sampling Design in Streams

The challenge in creating a stream sampling design for NETN parks was to balance the importance 

of using a random probabilistic design so that results could be extrapolated to all locations in each 

park with the sometimes conflicting priorities of selecting targeted sites based on accessibility, the 

ability to get an accurate discharge measurement, and the existence of historical data. A targeted 

design was chosen to obtain the best sites to measure discharge and water quality. The targeted 

design favors downstream integrator sites that are optimum for determining nutrient loads in park 

streams. As the majority of watersheds in NETN parks will be monitored over time, there is less of a 

concern about representativeness, and results pertain only to the sites sampled. For nutrients in 

streams, the downstream sites help us to determine if the total nutrient loads draining a watershed are 

exceeding standards or changing over time. In cases where sampling does indicate that standards are 

exceeded or approached or that nutrients are increasing in a watershed, additional upstream samples 

can be taken to identify the cause(s) of the change.

NETN’s targeted design is not ideal for monitoring the status and trends of acid deposition. High 

elevation sites unimpacted by humans would be more appropriate for monitoring changes in acidity. 

It is recommended that the ACAD acidification study (Nelson 2002) be continued to better 

understand acidity in the park. The two long-term sites in this study record data year round and will 

more quickly be able to show changes in sampled watersheds.

There are about 50 miles of perennial rivers and streams flowing through, or adjacent to, nine NETN 

parks (Table 9). Thirty-five miles of stream are in ACAD, 8 miles in SARA, and less than 2.5 miles 

in each remaining park. In all parks except ACAD, every perennial stream with reasonable access to 

a site where stream flow can be accurately measured is monitored monthly from May through 

October for freshwater quality vital signs. In ACAD, every watershed (see section on individual park

sampling design for Acadia National Park, Maine) that allows reasonable access to a site where 
23

stream flow can be accurately measured is monitored monthly from May through October as a partial 

record site under an augmented serially alternating design (three sites sampled annually and 16 sites 

sampled every other year; Urquhart et al. 1998). In addition, a continuous-record stream flow gage at 

ACAD tracks water quantity at one site in the park to quantify and interpret water quality data such 

as the estimation of nutrient loads. 

Although May through October is the minimum period during which stream flow measurements can 

be taken, annual high flow spring runoff measurements would have considerable value. The timing 

of this type of high flow measurement would differ among parks from north to south in NETN and 

from year to year, but generally will occur in March or April in most parks. High flow measurements 

have not been included in this protocol because this type of measurement is harder to schedule in 

advance than other measurements; requires an earlier start time for seasonal staff; requires additional 

equipment, safety gear, and expertise; and requires access to seasonally closed roads.

Table 9. Number of sampling sites at each park in NETN.

Park

Size

(acres)

Perennial 

river miles

No. Stream 

Sampling Sites

No. Lake

Sampling Sites

No. Pond

Sampling Sites Total Sites

ACAD 47,498 35.00 17 (10-11/yr) 13 (9-10/yr) 4 (1-2/yr) 34 (21-22/yr)

MABI 643 0.47 1 0 1 2

MIMA 967 1.54 3 0 0 3

MORR 1,707 2.19 3 0 0 3

SAGA 150 0.62 2 0 1 3

SAIR 9 0.12 2 0 0 2

SARA 3,392 8.11 3 0 0 3

ROVA 401 1.57 5 0 0 5

WEFA 74 0.17 0 0 1 1

TOTAL 54,841 50.00 36 (29-30/yr) 13 (9-10/yr) 7 (1-2/yr) 56 (43-44/yr)

Initially, sample sites were selected randomly by use of GIS coverages of linear stream features. 

Streams were arranged end to end, the total length of streams was divided by the number of stations

that the network felt was feasible to sample, and a site was selected every Xth number of miles. GISselected sites were often inaccessible, or were on reaches of stream that were inappropriate for 

obtaining a discharge measurement because of the presence of braided channels, steep slopes, or 

reaches that would likely have zero flow during a typical August (despite being labeled as perennial 

on USGS 1:24,000 topographic maps). This sampling design was abandoned in favor of a targeted 

sampling design.

The targeted sampling design avoided the above listed complications. The best sampling site with 

reasonable access was selected for each stream or watershed on the basis of the ability to get a 
24

discharge measurement and water quality sample. If multiple sites were possible, the most 

downstream site was selected. If a historical site on the stream met the objectives of the vital-signs 

program, that site was selected for the stream. Targeted sites (see maps in Appendix A) were chosen 

according to the following criteria:

1. All permanent sites and access to these sites are within park boundaries and accessible from 

public roads and have a hike less than 30 minutes

2. Each site is at the downstream end of the section it represents

3. Sites are on perennial sections of the stream, have drainage areas greater than 0.3 mi2and 

have measurable flow during an average August 

4. Sites allow for an accurate measure of discharge and the potential to define a stage/discharge 

rating. Sites do not have steep gradients/waterfalls, braided channels, excessive beaver 

presence or the inability to identify a single channel because of swamps and wetlands 

5. Each site has a pool with a single control at its outflow in which a stable marker can be 

established and used to measure stage, accessible during a range of flow conditions 

6. Ideally there would be a location to get a high-flow discharge measurement if wading is not 

possible (such as a bridge)

If there was no site within the watershed that satisfied these criteria, that watershed was eliminated 

from the design.

Once a sampling site was selected for sampling on a stream, all additional sites on that stream were 

eliminated except in the following parks. ROVA (Appendix A, Figure A6) only has one stream per 

park unit (except HOFR, where a 2007 land acquisition added an additional stream). In the interest of 

sampling more than one site in each park unit, a second station was chosen on each stream (although 

only one site in ELRO and VAMA are currently sampled). MORR (Appendix A, Figure A5) and 

SARA (Appendix A, Figure A9) have watersheds that involve multiple perennial tributaries that are 

entirely contained within park boundaries. Additional sites were originally selected to characterize 

the entire watershed, and then the additional sites were removed from regular monitoring once a 

baseline data set was collected (after the 2013 field season).

ACAD (Appendix A, Figure A2) has significantly more streams than any of the other parks, and the 

specifics of its stream sampling design are discussed in the Acadia National Park, Maine (ACAD)

section of Individual Park Sampling Designs.

Individual Park Sampling Designs

Sampling design for lakes, ponds and streams in each of the NETN parks is discussed in this section.

Acadia National Park, Maine (ACAD)

Lakes

Vital-signs monitoring of freshwater resources at ACAD is limited to Mount Desert Island for 

logistical reasons. This is where most of the freshwater resources are found. 
25

A maximum of 11 out of the 17 lakes selected for sampling can be sampled monthly from May to 

October each year. This was determined after assessing the staff available at ACAD who would be 

able to collaborate with NETN staff, the logistics of lake sampling (including boat access), weather 

and the desire to limit the sampling window to a 2 week period each month. Although a more 

ambitious sampling design might identify existing trends more quickly, the lake water quality data 

from the historical monitoring program at ACAD showed data gaps where samples were lost or not 

obtained because of weather conditions, equipment problems, or scheduling factors (Breen et al.

2002). The goal of the current design is to utilize the optimal sampling frequency and number of 

lakes that is consistent with staff availability and funding resources.

Given the maximum of 11 lakes sampled monthly, a balance was obtained between permanent sites 

and rotating sites (shown in Table 10 and Appendix A, Figure A1). Annual sampling of lakes where 

there was a long-term historical database was preferred, but this schedule needed to be balanced with 

the goal of cycling through the remaining sites within 2 to 4 years. The eight lakes that had 

historically been sampled annually as a part of the park’s eutrophication regime (including three 

lakes with long-term data since 1980: Bubble Pond, Eagle Lake, and Long Pond) were selected as 

permanent sites to be monitored each year.

The serially alternating design for ACAD allows the remainder of the lakes and ponds that are easily 

accessible and greater than 1 acre (0.4 ha) to be sampled every 3rd year. Three of the nine remaining 

lakes and ponds are each assigned to year 1, 2, or 3 to balance sampling sites according to size, 

location, and accessibility.

All lakes are sampled at the location of maximum depth, which was determined through bathymetric 

surveys and the use of an electronic depth finder and a Global Positioning System (GPS) unit. 

Coordinates for these sampling sites are listed in Table 10 and in the NETN_H2O database. 

Historically there were two stations monitored on Eagle Lake and four stations monitored on Long 

Pond. Monitoring a single deepest point (station 1) in Eagle Lake was deemed sufficient as historical 

stations 1 and 2 are in the same basin, and the historical data (Bill Gawley, unpublished data) indicate 

that they are equally representative of the overall lake. Although it was recommended that annual 

monitoring continue at all four stations on Long Pond, only one site per lake is possible with this 

protocol. More sites at Long Pond would have required a large boat or trips from several separate 

launch sites because of the size of the lake. Station 1 (112 ft deep, at the lake’s deep hole) has the 

longest data record and was selected as the monitoring site. 

In addition to procedures in this protocol, ten lakes are sampled by ACAD staff in April and in 

October for indicators of acidification. Although most of the acidification analytes are not measured 

as a part of the NETN monitoring program for all lakes and ponds, it is within the goals and 

objectives of the vital signs program to include this long-term data set at ACAD in the lake, pond, 

and stream monitoring database. Therefore, the autumn acidification samples are collected from eight 

of the 10 lakes and ponds during the October NETN monitoring visits. The remaining two ponds 

(Sargent Mountain Pond and The Bowl) are not included in the regular monthly NETN sampling 

schedule because the hike to each site is longer than 30 minutes. These two ponds are sampled from 
26

shore with the water quality sonde and with a throw bottle to obtain grab samples in April and 

October.

Table 10. Lake and pond water quality monitoring sites at Acadia NP

Sampling 

Frequency

Years 

Sampled Waterbody NETN Site Code Latitude Longitude

Annual Sites All Eagle Lake ACEAGL 44.36351 -68.25042

All Bubble Pond ACBUBL 44.34506 -68.23886

All Witch Hole Pond ACWHOL 44.40001 -68.24295

All Jordan Pond ACJORD 44.33111 -68.25526

All Upper Hadlock Pond ACUHAD 44.32136 -68.28744

All Long Pond ACLONG 44.32752 -68.36333

All Seal Cove Pond ACSEAL 44.30147 -68.39719

All Echo Lake ACECHO 44.32702 -68.33771

Rotating Sites Year 1

1

Aunt Betty's Pond ACANTB 44.37038 -68.27467

Year 11Lower Breakneck4ACLBRK 44.39076 -68.25786

Year 11Bear Brook Pond4ACBRBK 44.36114 -68.19526

Year 22Lower Hadlock Pond ACLHAD 44.31140 -68.2893

Year 22 Hodgdon Pond ACHODG 44.32222 -68.39780

Year 22Seawall Pond4ACSEAW 44.24265 -68.30074

Year 33 Round Pond ACROUN 44.35279 -68.37770

Year 33Lake Wood ACWOOD 44.40778 -68.26844

Year 33 Upper Breakneck4ACUBRK 44.38655 -68.25545

1 Sampled 2006, 2009, 2012, etc.

2 Sampled 2007, 2010, 2013, etc.

3 Sampled 2008, 2011, 2014, etc.

4

Between 1 and 15 acres, so “ponds” according to this protocol. All other sites are greater than 15 acres and 

considered “lakes,” even if the name includes the word “pond.”

Streams

Streams are monitored at ACAD through the use of partial-record stream flow gaging stations in 

which both stage and discharge are measured by the field crew during monthly monitoring visits, and 

continuous-record stream flow gages in which stage data are electronically collected and stored every 

5 minutes and discharge is calculated using a rating. Continuous-record stream flow gages are the 

best way to track water quantity and to interpret water quality data. Continuous stream flow data can 

be used to calculate total amounts of analytes (primarily nutrients) over time (loads) as compared to 

only the instantaneous concentrations of analytes.
27

Stream monitoring locations were selected by clipping a GIS layer of watersheds delineated by 

Perrin (1996) to the park boundary. Sampling sites were chosen from every watershed in ACAD that 

allows reasonable access to a site where stream flow and water quality can be accurately measured. 

Occasionally, results consisted of portions of watersheds that had only intermittent streams or very 

small stream segments or drainage areas; these watersheds were excluded. Watersheds were also 

eliminated from the list if sampling sites could not be found that fit with the criteria listed in the 

section of this protocol entitled General Sampling Design in Streams.

If a historical site in the watershed met the objectives of the vital signs program, that site was 

selected. If multiple sites met the criteria, the most downstream site was chosen. Initially, 20 sites 

including three continuous-record sites were selected. One site, Man of War Brook, was discontinued 

in 2011. Two additional sites, Bubble Pond Outlet and Jordan Pond Outlet, were discontinued after 

2013 (Table 11; Appendix A, Figure A2). There are currently three continuous-record sites and one 

partial-record site sampled annually. The remaining 13 partial-record sites are sampled on a rotating 

basis, with six or seven sites sampled every other year.

One continuous-record stream flow gage was installed by USGS in 2006 and is maintained as an 

index of stream flow at ACAD because of the extent of the stream resources in ACAD. This gage

provides detailed stream flow information about one stream in the park, allowing for estimates of 

loads of constituents at this site, and also provides data to make estimates of stream flow at 

hydrologically similar ungaged sites or partial-record sites. The selection of the stream flow gage site 

to serve as an index station was chosen according to the following criteria: (1) The station must allow 

for accurate discharge measurements at a range of flows, (2) be near a location such as a bridge for 

measuring high flows, and (3) have similar watershed characteristics to other streams in the park for 

which stream flow will be estimated based on the index site. Six candidate sites for the index gage 

were evaluated according to historic measurements. These sites were measured concurrently up to 12 

times from 1999 to 2000. Correlations of stream flow between each pair of partial record stations 

were compared to determine which gage site correlated with the greatest number of other stations. 

Otter Creek near Bar Harbor, ME (USGS station 01022840) was selected as the index gage because 

it had instantaneous flows that correlated well with other measured sites, had good access at low, 

medium, and high flows, and had a suitable site for a gaging house. Breakneck Brook (USGS station 

01022825) was also considered, correlated well with other stations, and had good access, but had a 

large beaver dam upstream that made it unsuitable as the permanent continuous record site. 

Prior to the Otter Creek gage installation, two continuous-record stream flow gages were maintained 

in the park from 1999 until 2006 at Cadillac Brook (USGS station number 01022835) and Hadlock 

Brook (USGS station number 01022860). These gages were operated by the University of Maine, the 

NPS, the USEPA and the USGS as a part of the PRIMENet (Park Research and Intensive Monitoring

of Ecosystems Network) project focusing on the atmospheric deposition of nitrogen and mercury and 

the ecological consequences of this deposition (Nelson 2002). Atmospheric deposition and its 

ecological consequences are a concern in NETN parks and were recognized as high priority issues 

(Shriver et al. 2004) during Phase II of the NETN vital signs monitoring plan process. These stream 

flow gages provided detailed information about stream flow in small, high-elevation watersheds but 
28

did not, however, work as index gages of stream flow because they did not correlate well with the 

stream flow in many of the other streams selected for long-term monitoring (Nielsen et al. 2002; 

Nielsen, M.G., U.S. Geological Survey, personal communication 2005). In an effort to maintain the 

continuous-record history at these headwater sites, NETN has operated continuously recording 

Global WL16S water level loggers during the ice-free season since 2007.

Table 11. Stream-water quality monitoring sites at Acadia NP. Sites at ACAD are predominately cold 

water fisheries.

Sampling 

Frequency

Years 

Sampled Waterbody

NETN Site 

Code

USGS Station 

Number Latitude Longitude

Annual All Cadillac Brook (NETN

continuous)

ACCADS 01022835 44.34456 -68.21700

All Hadlock Brook (NETN

continuous)

ACHADB 01022860 44.33167 -68.28000

All Otter Creek (USGS

continuous)

ACOTRC 01022840 44.33278 -68.20722

All Stanley Brook (Partialrecord site; initially 

rotating year 2,

permanent since 2011)

ACSTNL 01022850 44.30556 -68.24306

Biennially Year 11 Hunters Brook ACHNTR 01022845 44.30939 -68.22236

Year 11Kebo Brook ACKEBO 01022829 44.37241 -68.22185

Year 11Sargent Brook ACSGTB 10228665 44.35029 -68.29020

Year 11Breakneck Brook ACBRKB 01022825 44.41123 -68.25204

Year 11Aunt Bettys Pond inlet ACABIN 01022869 44.36512 -68.27241

Year 11 Marshall Brook ACMRSL 01022890 44.27474 -68.35150

Year 11 Heath Brook ACHTHB 01022895 44.27782 -68.36817

Year 22Browns Brook ACBRWN 01022866 44.33944 -68.30169

Year 22 Duck Pond Brook -inlet 

to Long Pond

ACDKLI 10228755 44.33108 -68.37847

Year 22Lake Wood Outlet ACLKWO 01022808 44.41160 -68.27309

Year 22 Duck Brook - North of Rt. 

233 (2009- present)

ACDUCK 01022827 44.37760 -68.24509

Year 22Lurvey Brook ACLVYB 01022892 44.27889 -68.35778

Year 22Lurvey Spring Brookinlet to Echo Lake

(switched to Year 2 in 

2011)

ACLSIE 01022878 44.31242 -68.33522

1 Sampled 2006, 2008, 2010, etc.

2 Sampled 2007, 2009, 2011, etc.
29

The original Duck Brook site (ACEGLO), located several meters downstream of the dam at the 

outlet of Eagle Lake (44.37653 °N, 68.24558 °W), was sampled only during 2007. The location 

proved difficult to measure for stream flow, and water quality measurements were more 

representative of the lake than the contributions of the stream watershed. After discussion during the 

2008 protocol review meeting, the Duck Brook monitoring site was moved approximately 200 

meters downstream, on the opposite (north) side of Route 233. The site was given a new code 

“ACDUCK” to distinguish it from the outlet site. The USGS determined that the relocated site did 

not require a new station number for their records (L. Flight, U.S. Geological Survey, written 

communication 2011).

Sampling of Man of War Brook (ACMOWB, USGS station 01022880, 44.31833 °N, 68.31667 °W) 

was discontinued in 2011 when the fire road used for vehicle access to the site became impassable 

and was not scheduled for repair. August stream flow at this site was marginal at best, so it was 

decided during the 2010 protocol review meeting to suspend monitoring of this stream. Also 

effective starting in 2011, Lurvey Spring Brook (which is in an adjoining watershed to Man of War)

was moved to the Year 2 panel, and Stanley Brook was switched to permanent monitoring status. 

Concerns about potential threats from residential development in the Stanley Brook watershed made 

it a good candidate for annual sampling.

Sampling of Bubble Pond Outlet (ACBUBO, USGS station 01022826, 44.35019 °N, 68.24108 °W) 

and Jordan Pond Outlet (ACJRDO, USGS station 01022852, 44.31972 °N, 68.25580 °W) was 

discontinued after 2013 because both of these sites are immediately adjacent to lake outflows and are 

captured by the lake monitoring. ACDUCK and ACLKWO are also near lake outlets, but not as close 

and NETN will continue to monitor these sites.

Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historical Park (MABI), Vermont 

Water monitoring sites at MABI (Table 12) are depicted in Appendix A, Figure A3. One stream

sampling site was selected to represent Pogue Stream. This is the only stream within the park, and 

there are no long-term historic stream water quality stations. This site was chosen because it is the 

most downstream location within park boundaries with easy access and the ability to obtain an 

accurate discharge measurement over a range of flows. The Pogue is a pond at the headwaters of 

Pogue Stream and will be monitored at its deepest point.

Table 12. Water quality monitoring sites at Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP

Type Waterbody

NETN 

Site Code Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Streams Pogue Stream MABISA 43.63493 -72.52937 Cold water fisheries

Ponds The Pogue MABIPA 43.63336 -72.54263 Cold water fisheries

Minute Man National Historical Park (MIMA), Massachusetts 

There has been no routine water quality monitoring at MIMA. Current NETN monitoring sites are 

listed in Table 13. One river, the Concord River, and two streams, Elm Brook and Mill Brook, cut 
30

through the two park units (Appendix A, Figure A4). The monitoring site on Mill Brook is located

upstream of Lowell Road with tape-down points on the culvert and on a rock just upstream of the 

culvert. The Mill Brook monitoring site is not located within park boundaries because the brook is 

intermittent where it flows through the Wayside Unit, and it becomes a wetland where it flows 

through the North Bridge Unit.

The site on Elm Brook is within park boundaries at State Route 2A, 4.3 miles upstream from the 

confluence of Elm Brook with the Shawsheen River. The sampling site represents water quality 

conditions in Elm Brook within the Park’s Battle Road Unit. The site is accessible by vehicle. 

Discharge measurements are made using a current meter on the downstream side of Rt. 2A. A tape 

down point is located on the downstream side of the box culvert where the stream passes under Rt. 

2A. 

The Concord River site is at the Old North Bridge, 0.49 miles downstream from the confluence of the 

Sudbury and Assabet Rivers. The site is within the MIMA boundary and the site is intended to

represent water quality conditions in the Concord River within the park’s North Bridge Unit. The site 

is accessible by vehicle. Discharge measurements cannot be made by wading because of the size of 

the river but could potentially be made off of the Old North Bridge, although bridge measurements

are too expensive for NETN to cover at this time. This site also requires specialized techniques to 

obtain water quality sonde samples. During the 2007 field season, YSI measurements were taken at 

seven points (near both banks and at each of five bridge pylons, measured at half depth) on the 

bridge. Results showed that water near the banks was stagnant when the river was low, but that the 

main channel was well-mixed even when measured at low to moderate flows. The recommendation 

from the 2007 protocol review meeting was to collect a two-point measurement (at pylons 2 and 4) in 

the channel at each monitoring visit, and to obtain a cross-section of all seven points once each year, 

to confirm that the two-point measurement strategy is still representative. The cross-sectional 

measurements should be taken at varied depths. 

Table 13. Water quality monitoring sites at Minute Man NHP, Massachusetts

Type Waterbody

NETN 

Site Code Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Streams Concord River at Old North 

Bridge, Concord, MA

MIMASC 42.46902 -71.35063 Warm water 

fisheries

Elm Brook at Rt. 2A near 

Lincoln, MA

MIMASB 42.45293 -71.30422 Cold water 

fisheries

Mill Brook at Lowell Rd, 

Concord, MA

MIMASA 42.46280 -71.35142 Cold water 

fisheries

Morristown National Historical Park (MORR), New Jersey 

Five water quality monitoring sites were selected at MORR for the NETN monitoring program

(Table 14). Sites were chosen to represent the accessible, perennial streams in the Jockey Hollow and 

New Jersey Brigade Units, the two park units with significant freshwater resources. Four historic 
31

water quality sampling sites were continued as these stations met the objectives of the vital signs 

program.

Three of the selected sites are in the Primrose Brook Watershed within the Jockey Hollow Unit.

These sites are on the East Branch of Primrose Brook, the West Branch of Primrose Brook, and the 

main stem of Primrose Brook. The other sites are on the Passaic River and Indian Grove Brook in the 

New Jersey Brigade Unit (Appendix A, Figure A5). Jersey Brook is also in the park but it is 

ephemeral. The largest pond in the park, Cat Swamp Pond, has no natural outlet and is connected to 

East Branch of Primrose Brook only by an overflow outlet pipe.

In November 1996, the USGS established a water quality monitoring site at site EP1, just 

downstream of the confluence of East and West Branch Primrose Brooks, and monitors several

chemical and physical parameters including stream flow on a quarterly basis (Deluca et al. 2003).

The site has a staff gage, a stage discharge relation (rating), and is used as a water quality monitoring

site by several other State and Federal agencies. The US Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS) has 

monitored 15 water quality parameters and sampled aquatic life at this site since 1991 (Lombard

2004). Stream water quality monitoring at MORR should be coordinated with ongoing monitoring by 

other agencies at the park, especially at site EP1 (MORRSB).

Sampling of the East Branch of Primrose Brook (MORRSA, USGS station 01378778, 40.77013 °N, 

74.52412 °W, cold water fishery) and the West Branch of Primrose Brook (MORRSC, USGS station 

01378775, 40.76967 °N, 74.53620 °W, cold water fishery) was discontinued after 2013 because the 

Primrose Brook Confluence is representative of the Primrose Brook watershed and there were 

insufficient resources for continued monitoring of multiple sites in the same watershed. MORRSA 

also had very low flows in the summer months. The network has a solid baseline for the discontinued 

sites, and if water quality changes at the Primrose Brook Confluence (MORRSB), the discontinued 

sites can be revisited to help determine the source of the change.

Table 14. Water quality monitoring sites at Morristown NHP

Type

Waterbody

(Park site code)

NETN 

Site Code

USGS 

Station 

Number Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Streams Indian Grove (IG2) MORRSD 01378680 40.74465 -74.56542 Cold water 

fisheries

Primrose Brook 

confluence (EP1)

MORRSB 01378780 40.76433 -74.52937 Cold water 

fisheries

Passaic River MORRSE 01378670 40.75187 -74.55143 Cold water 

fisheries

Roosevelt-Vanderbilt National Historic Sites (ROVA), New York 

All of the basic field water chemistry parameters and nutrients identified by the vital signs program 

have been collected intermittently since 1994 at 11 stations in ROVA. Although the effort ranged 

from monthly to quarterly, there are some years that have no data (2002 and 2003), and 2 years that 
32

have only a single winter value (2000 and 2001). Prior to implementing this protocol, field 

parameters of specific conductance, pH, temperature, and DO were collected with Yellow Springs 

Instruments (YSI) probes, and grab samples were sent to a local laboratory for nutrients, alkalinity, 

total dissolved solids, chloride and bacteria analyses. Discharge measurements were not included in 

the data collection. Water quality data were checked for outliers, but were not analyzed and were not 

part of a rigorous quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) program (D. Hayes, NPS, written 

communication, 2004). 

The NPS Water Resources Management Plan for ROVA (National Park Service 1997a) contained 

recommendations for modifying the park’s existing water quality program, several of which were

similar to the design plan presented here. Six water quality monitoring sites were selected at ROVA 

for the NETN long-term monitoring program (Appendix A, Figure A6). These include five of the 

original sites mentioned above: VAMA-1, VAMA-3, HOFR-1, HOFR-3, and ELRO-3 (described in 

Table 15) (National Park Service 1997a). An additional site was chosen on the stream in the 2007 

HOFR acquisition. Sites were chosen to represent the major streams in each park unit.

Although Val-Kill Pond at ELRO was monitored (as site ROVAPA) during the 2006 season, it was 

dropped as a sample location after discussion at the first protocol review meeting in December 2006. 

The site is shallow, has detectable flow, and appears to be a wetland.

Sampling of Upper Crum Elbow Creek (ROVASC, historic site VAMA01 where the stream enters 

the park, 41.79550 °N, 68.24108 °W, warm water fishery) was discontinued after 2013 because 

discharge can no longer be measured at the site (due to flooding changes caused by Hurricane Irene), 

and because the site is duplicative of the Lower Crum Elbow Creek site (ROVASD).

Table 15. Water quality monitoring sites at Roosevelt-Vanderbilt NHS

Type Waterbody

NETN Site 

Code Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Streams Lower Crum Elbow Creek

(Historic site VAMA-3 where 

stream exits park)

ROVASD 41.78883 -73.94558 Warm waterincludes sunfish

Upper FDR Brook (Historic site 

HOFR-1 where stream enters 

park)

ROVASB 41.77000 -73.93830 Cold water 

fisheries

Lower FDR Brook (Historic site 

HOFR-3 where stream exits 

park)

ROVASA 41.76420 -73.93975 Cold water 

fisheries

Maritje Kill ROVASE 41.76287 -73.92047 Cold water 

fisheries

Fall Kill (Historic site ELRO-3, 

downstream of upper Val-Kill 

Pond)

ROVASF 41.76228 -73.89963 Warm waterincludes sunfish
33

Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site (SAGA), New Hampshire 

Three water quality monitoring sites have been selected at SAGA for the long-term monitoring 

program (Appendix A, Figure A7). The three sites represent the two streams and the major 

impoundment in the park and they are all water quality sites that have been measured by the park 

since 1997 (Walasewicz 2003). The sites are on Blow-Me-Down Brook (historic station 3), BlowMe-Up Brook (historic station 1), and behind the impoundment on Blow-Me-Down Pond (historic 

site 5) (Table 16). The NPS reviewed the existing water quality sampling strategy at SAGA, and 

made specific recommendations for its improvement (Ellsworth 2005). The sampling design included 

in this protocol is roughly in accordance with the recommendations from the water sampling review. 

A continuous-flow monitor would be beneficial to the park; however this did not receive a high 

priority in this protocol because of funding constraints. Stream flow is measured each time a water 

quality measurement is made at the two stream sites. A tape-down site was established at Blow-MeDown Pond.

Table 16. Water quality monitoring sites at Saint-Gaudens NHS

Type Waterbody NETN Site Code Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Streams Blow-Me-Up Brook

(historic Station 1)

SAGASA 43.50188 -72.37083 Cold water fisheries 

- includes trout

Blow-Me-Down Brook 

(historic Station 3: Below 

the confluence with 

Blow-Me-Up Brook)

SAGASB 43.50333 -72.37908 Warm water 

fisheries- includes 

sunfish

Ponds Blow-Me-Down Pond

(historic Station 5)

SAGAPA 43.49725 -72.37540 Warm water 

fisheries- includes 

sunfish

Saugus Iron Works National Historic Site (SAIR), Massachusetts 

The USGS has operated a continuous-record stream flow gage on the Saugus River just upstream of 

the park boundary (USGS 01102345 Saugus River at Saugus, MA) since 1994 (Table 17).

Temperature and specific conductance were measured continuously for a few years at this station, 

beginning in 2001. The park would benefit from an annual download and report of continuous stage 

measurements. Although the gaging station is just upstream of the park, because the stream reach 

within the park boundary is only 0.25 miles, this station adequately represents water quality within 

the park. Data from this station can be accessed at:

http://waterdata.usgs.gov/ma/nwis/uv/?site_no=01102345&agency_cd=USGS.

Water quality samples and sonde measurements are taken twice a year (May and August) at the 

location of the USGS gage and in the Turning Basin (Appendix A, Figure A8). NETN water 

monitoring at SAIR began in 2007, and from that year through 2011 sonde measurements are only 

available for the Turning Basin. The Turning Basin was the subject of a major restoration project 

between the 2007 and 2008 sampling years.
34

Table 17. Water quality monitoring sites at Saugus Iron Works NHS

Type Waterbody

NETN Site 

Code

USGS 

Station 

Number Latitude Longitude

Site 

Remarks

Streams Saugus River (Historic/USGS 

site just upstream of park 

boundary)

SAIRSA 01102345 42.46939 -71.00717 Warm water 

fisheries

Turning Basin SAIRSB n/a 42.46888 -71.00770 Warm water 

fisheries

Saratoga National Historical Park (SARA), New York 

There are 8 miles of perennial streams divided between four watersheds in SARA that all flow into 

the Hudson River (Appendix A, Figure A9). These watersheds include the Kroma Kill, Mill Creek, 

American’s Creek and Devil’s Hollow. In addition, the Champlain Canal Cuts across the downstream 

end of the major drainages of the park, and water from the Hudson River can back up into the park. 

There are also two distinct channels that drain the Schuyler property (north of the main park unit and 

not shown on the map), which has recently been acquired by the park. Since there are no major ponds 

or impoundments in Saratoga, NETN monitoring is designed to characterize only the streams in the 

park.

One monitoring site has been identified in each major watershed in the park where water quality

samples can be taken and stream flow measured (Table 18). In addition, there are major tributaries in 

the Mill Creek watershed within park boundaries, and thus an additional site has been identified on 

the North Fork of Mill Creek.

Kroma Kill is a third order stream in the park and is monitored upstream of the first bridge crossing 

along the Park Entrance Road from Route 4. The bridge provides an adequate staff gage site, a 

constricted area for hydraulic control, and a platform for sampling during high flows. Historic sample 

sites were deemed less desirable because of potential backwater effects from the Hudson River

(SARA0044 and SARA0045), road (SARA0050) or park boundary constraints (SARA0049) (for 

historic site information see National Park Service 1997b).

Mill Creek enters the Hudson River as a second order stream. The Upper Mill Creek site is located

on the North Fork, near where the stream enters the park, and just downstream of the park tour road. 

The stream is very small at this location but appears to be perennial and the box culvert can be used 

for accurate discharge measurements when flows are elevated.

The Lower Mill Creek site is approximately 200 m downstream of the confluence of the North and 

South Forks (historic site SARA0053). This site provides an integrated sample for the watersheds of 

the North and South Forks as the South Fork can have low flow and does not meet sampling site 

criteria. The Lower Mill Creek site has a cobbled bed and a well-defined floodplain terrace similar to 

the North Fork. This site can be accessed from the Park Tour Road by crossing the open field above 

the American River Fortifications, traversing the higher part of the wooded hill slope west of the 
35

private land holding along Route 4, and dropping into the valley formed by Mill Creek. Downstream 

sampling near private property was not feasible because of low flows and likely backwater effect

from the Old Champlain Canal. The reach from the recommended site downstream to the private 

property was meandering, braided, or otherwise not conducive to sampling. The Lower Mill Creek 

site is difficult to access but achievable within 20 minutes.

A reasonable sample site was identified for American’s Creek below Bemis Point at the end of the 

American River Fortifications. Here the stream flows through a narrow channel incised to bedrock. 

Flow was continuous when observed during the site selection visit for this protocol, but proved 

difficult to measure in very dry years, exemplified in 2008 and 2010. The historic sites SARA0056, 

SARA0057, and SARA0058 were deemed inappropriate because of Hudson River backwater and 

Champlain Canal drainage.

The following stream watersheds are a lower priority for the park and do not have fixed monitoring 

sites: (1) Two channels that drain the Schuyler property; (2) the Hudson River is not monitored 

because other agencies are monitoring it and only its backwater is within park boundaries; (3) the 

Champlain Canal is not monitored because although it may demonstrate cumulative effects of water 

pollution in the park, it would be difficult to trace effects if long-term trends are detected; (4) Fish 

Creek, adjacent to the Schuyler House, is affected by backwater from the Hudson River during high 

flow events and, therefore, deemed inappropriate for the vital signs program; and (5) Devil’s Hollow, 

which does not have year-round flow.

Sampling of American’s Creek (SARASB, 42.97717 °N, 73.63100 °W, warm water fishery) was 

discontinued after 2013. This site drains a very small watershed fully contained within the park, and 

has very low flows. NETN has a solid baseline data set for this site, and monitoring of this site is 

only warranted if a construction or other project that may impact the watershed is anticipated.

Table 18. Water quality monitoring sites at Saratoga NHP

Type Waterbody NETN Site Code Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Streams Kroma Kill SARASA 43.00583 -73.61730 Warm water fisheries

Lower Mill Creek (historic site 

SARA0053)

SARASD 42.98895 -73.62555 Warm water fisheries

Upper Mill Creek (at culvert of 

Battlefield Rd.)

SARASC 42.99738 -73.64855 Warm water fisheries

Weir Farm National Historic Site (WEFA), Connecticut 

There was almost no water quality data available that had been collected at WEFA, so a long-term 

monitoring site was set up in Weir Pond, the largest freshwater body in the park (Table 19; Appendix 

A, Figure A10). In 2005, the NPS regional hydrologist reviewed the existing water quality sampling 

strategy at Weir Farm National Historic Site, and specific recommendations from this evaluation (A. 

Ellsworth, NPS, written communication, 2005) have been incorporated into the NETN pond 

monitoring protocol.
36

Table 19. Water quality monitoring sites at Weir Farm NHS, Connecticut 

Type Waterbody

NETN Site 

Code Latitude Longitude Site Remarks

Ponds Weir Pond WEFAPA 41.25952 -73.45150 Warm water fisheries

Detectable Level of Change 

The lake and pond monitoring in this protocol is conducted as a census, and stream sites were 

selected using expert judgment rather than systematic or random sampling. A power analysis (which 

assumes a statistically sampled population rather than a census or judgment sample) is not strictly 

appropriate. Nevertheless, there will be some minimum level of change that can be statistically 

detected as data are collected over the long term at fixed index sites. Observer variation, often a 

significant contributor to variability and inability to detect trends, is controlled through adherence to 

strict QA/QC procedures documented in this protocol. However, there are some important factors 

that will affect the ability to detect change, especially the different components of temporal variation 

(daily, seasonal, and annual; generally driven by weather patterns). These temporal variations will be 

modified by site-specific factors that may be hard to quantify, making modeling of the effects of 

temporal variability difficult. Additionally, major flooding events or geologic shifts can permanently 

alter sites, making data from before and after an event difficult to compare. 

It is unlikely that trends in water quantity will be detectable using the non-continuous methods in this 

protocol (i.e., six synoptic measurements per year). The weekly stage measurements taken at some 

ACAD lakes may be sufficient for some level of trend detection, but no power analysis has been 

conducted on these data. Continuous measurements are ideal and should be pursued at all sites (using 

pressure transducers to record stage); continuous data should facilitate the detection of trends that 

exceed the amount of annual variation in water quantity. A power analysis of the existing continuous 

stream data is needed to quantify the actual detectable level of variation.

Although we do not expect to be able to detect trends in water quantity based on our synoptic water 

quantity measurements, these data are important for interpreting water quality measurements. Many

metrics of water quality that stem from fairly steady inputs (e.g., phosphorous from human 

development) will vary inversely with the water quantity. In other situations, high flows might 

“flush” the system and produce temporarily elevated readings. The availability of water quantity data 

from the time that the water quality data were collected will be needed to maximize our ability to 

detect trends in these data.

The network will conduct a power analysis by the end of 2015 to document the ability to detect 

change from baseline levels for a variety of metrics (including weekly lake levels, continuous water 

quantity, water chemistry, and nutrients). The first 5 years of data (2006-2010) will be the base years 

for determining means and the range of variability for different metrics. Bootstrap simulations will be 

conducted to determine the level of true change that must occur before the change can be detected. 

At a minimum, we expect to be able to detect a 50% change from baseline levels in any metric within 

5 years, while controlling type I error at 10% and type II error at 20%. 
37

Field and Laboratory Methods

Field Methods 

The sequence of events during the field season is described in SOP 16 – Annual Timeline of 

Activities. Field season preparations and end of season activities are described in SOP 3 –

Preparation and Equipment List and SOP 15 – Post-Season Activities.

Tables 20 and 21 summarize the parameters that are measured monthly in the field from May 

through October, with reference to the appropriate SOPs. These metrics include stream discharge, 

stream and lake stage (water level), water clarity (transparency, light attenuation, and turbidity), and 

in situ water quality (pH, specific conductance, temperature, and dissolved oxygen measured with a 

multiparameter sonde). The Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) provide specific instructions for 

techniques to obtain these measurements. NETN strives to maintain consistency of staff whenever 

possible to minimize variation from technical error. Appropriate training and consistency in the use 

of calibration and QA/QC methods is similarly important to maintaining data quality, and these 

methods are also documented in the individual SOPs.

Water samples are collected twice each season – as grab samples in streams and LNETN ponds and

as depth-integrated epilimnetic samples in ACAD lakes and ponds. The samples are sent to a central 

laboratory, currently the University of Maine’s Sawyer Environmental Chemistry Research 

Laboratory (SECRL), for analyses. These samples are collected from streams in May and August and 

from lakes and ponds in June and August. From 2006 through 2011, samples were analyzed for acid 

neutralizing capacity (ANC), apparent color, total nitrogen, total phosphorus, total dissolved 

nitrogen, total dissolved phosphorus, ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, and orthophosphate. In addition, 

portions of the ACAD lake epilimnetic samples were filtered at the park and the filters were sent to 

the laboratory for chlorophyll a extraction and analysis. In an attempt to obtain a broader range of 

information from the water sample analyses while making the collection and analysis processes more 

efficient and economical, the list of analytes was modified after the 2011 monitoring season to 

consist of ANC, apparent color, total nitrogen, total phosphorus, ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, dissolved 

organic carbon (DOC), chloride, and sulfate. Specifications for chlorophyll a testing were revised at 

the same time to include analysis of pond water samples from the lower NETN ponds. 

Implementation of the modified analytic regimen began in 2012.

Invasive aquatic plants are surveyed opportunistically at stream sites and once per year during the 

months of July through September (depending on the flowering schedules and presence of other key 

characteristics of target species) in lakes and ponds with boat access. NETN field crews conduct 

rapid hydro-geomorphic assessments of stream habitats, using a modified EPA Rapid Bioassessment 

protocol, during July stream monitoring sessions. At ACAD, park personnel sample benthic 

macroinvertebrates in five streams each August, in cooperation with the Maine Department of 

Environmental Protection (MDEP). There has been an ongoing dialogue regarding the 

implementation of benthic macroinvertebrate monitoring at other NETN parks, potentially in 

cooperation with other state agencies or I&M networks, such as the Eastern Rivers and Mountains 
38

Network (ERMN) and/or the Mid-Atlantic Network (MIDN). Plans for these expanded activities are 

highly dependent upon future budget and staffing levels.

Table 20. Monitoring parameters, methods, and frequency in lakes and ponds. 

Parameter Method Frequency SOP Number

Dissolved oxygen, temperature, 

specific conductance, pH

Multiparameter sonde 

profile

Monthly (May-October) 6

Lake stage Tape down

Leveling of monitoring

locations

Weekly (ACAD, April-Nov)

Monthly (other parks, MayOctober)

Biannual (April/May and 

October)

5

19

Clarity Secchi disk depth or LiCor Light Meter1Monthly (May-October) 8

ANC, apparent color, total 

nitrogen, total phosphorus, 

ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, DOC, 

chloride, sulfate, chlorophyll a

Depth-integrated 

epilimnetic sample

Biannually (June and Aug) 7, 12

Non-native invasive plants-early 

detection

Field surveys Annually (July, Aug, early 

Sept)

10

1

Secchi disk transparency is used at all sites where the Secchi disk depth is less than the depth of the deepest 

point. Only in cases where the Secchi disk is visible on the bottom of the pond, will a Li-Cor light meter be used.

Table 21. Monitoring parameters, methods, and frequency in streams.

Parameter Method Frequency SOP Number

Dissolved oxygen, temperature, 

specific conductance, pH

Multiparameter sonde in 

centroid of flow

Monthly (May-October) 6

Stream discharge and stream stage Current meter and staff 

gage or tape-down

Pressure sensor1

Leveling of monitoring 

locations

Monthly (May-October)

Continuous (all year)1

Biannual (April/May and 

October)

9

19

Turbidity LaMotte 2020 turbidity 

meter

Monthly (May-October) 8

ANC, apparent color, total nitrogen, 

total phosphorus, ammonia, nitrite, 

nitrate, DOC, chloride, sulfate

Grab sample Biannually (May and Aug) 7, 12

Non-native invasive plants-early 

detection

Opportunistic surveys Monthly (May-October) 10

Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic 

Assessment

EPA survey protocol Annually (July) 11

Benthic macroinvertebrates Colonization sampler Annually (5 ACAD streams 

only)

n/a

1

Pressure sensor is used at 1-3 continuous record gaging stations in ACAD, and one gaging station at SAIR, 

otherwise current meters are used.
39

Laboratory Methods

Quality and consistency of data for long-term trends depends on the selection of an accredited 

laboratory with adequate quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) procedures. It is also critical 

that the analysis methods for each analyte are specified and clarified with the laboratory staff before 

analyses begin. Before sampling begins, field and laboratory staff will discuss the correct procedures 

for pretreatments, bottle sizes, types, and holding times to ensure high quality samples are collected.

Current laboratory specifications and methods are detailed in SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses.

41

Quality Assurance and Quality Control (QA/QC)

QA/QC is important to the success of a long-term data collection and trend detection program.

Quality assurance (QA) is achieved through the establishment and use of this protocol. Specific 

procedures are used to control critical components of a project such as sampling at the right place 

with the right equipment and using the right methods. Over the years, staff will change, equipment 

may be updated, and methods may evolve. Although these changes will be kept to a minimum, 

changes are inevitable and therefore following an established and well-documented protocol will 

ensure that the data remain valid.

QA requirements incorporated in this protocol include consistency and low turnover in project

leaders and staff, consistency in staff training and oversight, consistency in equipment used and 

calibration methods, the selection of a well-established chemical laboratory with a proven track 

record, and a robust sample design that includes an adequate number of field and laboratory quality 

control (QC) samples.

QC includes the assessment of bias and variability through the use of additional samples such as 

blank and replicate samples. QC samples are an objective assessment of whether or not QA protocols 

are adequate. QA is integrated into each SOP and into the protocol narrative. A section on QC is 

included in each SOP if appropriate.

Quality Assurance 

Data representativeness and data comparability will be assured if standard protocols for lakes, ponds, 

and streams, are adopted. The most appropriate existing protocols for the goals and objectives of this 

monitoring program were selected and adapted. USGS Water Resources Division and NAWQA

(National Water Quality Assessment Program) protocols were adopted for streams. Maine 

Department of Environmental Protection (MDEP) protocols were adopted for lakes as ACAD was 

the only park in NETN that includes lakes. All versions of this protocol will be archived and dated so 

that each piece of data collected by NETN can be linked to a specific version of a protocol from 

another agency at a later date.

Some parks have already been collecting data for a number of years, using more than one version of 

a protocol. Although not all versions of all protocols were documented in the past, every attempt will 

be made to compare and quantify old methods with new methods before a change is adopted to avoid 

bias from changes in methods.

To ensure consistency in analysis results, one laboratory is used by all parks in NETN. Samples were 

sent to the USGS National Water Quality Lab (NWQL) during the first year of monitoring (2006). 

Results from the June 2006 testing showed that some of the analytical methods used by the NWQL 

were not sensitive enough to detect low nutrient concentrations in many of the NETN samples. 

Lower level methods were utilized for the August 2006 analyses, but these still produced a large 

number of “non-detect” results. Samples were sent to both the NWQL and the University of Maine’s 

Sawyer Environmental Chemistry Research Laboratory (SECRL) in 2007, and comparisons of 
42

results showed good agreement between both labs but better sensitivity of the SECRL methods. All 

NETN samples have been analyzed at SECRL since 2008.

Any laboratory chosen to analyze NETN samples must pass independent State and Federal (National 

Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program or NELAP, see http://www.nelacinstitute.org/newnelap.php) accreditation/approval QA/QC checks. These checks optimally include 

blind-sample round-robin trial analyses of proficiency test standards to see if the results the 

laboratory provides is similar to known (certified correct) ranges to pass QC performance standards. 

Rigorous and independent checks are needed to insure that the selected laboratory can produce 

accurate and comparable results. Federal and state agencies that have run round-robin testing 

programs have determined that many candidate laboratories cannot pass such checks (Irwin 2004). 

Both the NWQL and SECRL are among the central laboratories that meet these criteria.

As one of the biggest sources of data variability can be operator error, all attempts are made to 

maximize staff background, experience, and training and to minimize staff turnover. Staff 

responsible for field monitoring have the experience and training necessary to routinely perform all 

equipment calibrations, sample and data collection, and to recognize when a piece of equipment is 

not adequately meeting specifications. Furthermore, staff are trained to follow all procedures for 

processing and shipping samples including bottle types, pretreatments, and holding times.

Quality Control 

QC data are generated to estimate the magnitude of the bias and variability in the processes for 

obtaining field data. Bias is the systematic error inherent in a method or measurement caused by 

contamination of samples and can be identified and quantified through the use of blank samples. 

Precision is a measure of the variability in results when one is measuring the same (homogenous) 

factor repeatedly, whereas variability is the degree of random error in repeated measurements of the 

same quantity. Precision and variability are the opposite of each other as defined by USGS NAWQA.

Sample replicates are used to estimate precision or variability. In addition, reference samples are 

samples of sufficiently well-known composition to be used for an assessment of the measurement 

method. Calibration includes efforts to ensure an instrument is measuring with an acceptably low 

amount of systematic error or bias.

Specific sections for QC are included in individual SOPs where necessary. Field QC samples are 

submitted by field staff to measure errors in sample collection, processing and transport in the field.

Laboratory QC samples are submitted by chemists to measure errors in sample preparation and 

analysis in the laboratory. It is important that adequate QC samples be taken routinely to ensure that 

future trend analyses are assessing true environmental trends rather than the bias and variability of 

the field staff or the equipment used.
43

Data Management 

Data management is coordinated and overseen by the NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator and the 

NETN Data Manager. Wherever possible data collection is conducted digitally so that standard 

quality control practices can be used to control data entry and check for errors/omissions while the 

crew is still onsite. Data loggers (e.g. FlowTracker, Sonde, LiCor) and FileMaker databases deployed 

on iOS devices (iPads and iPhones) are the primary methods by which data are collected in the field

by both NETN and ACAD staff (NETN 2015). Data from these sources are imported into a central 

database (NETN_H2O) once out of the field. All data collected and populated in NETN_H2O are

imported to NPSTORET, the Inventory and Monitoring program database that serves as the initial

portal to the EPA’s STORET data warehouse, which is the ultimate repository for all NPS water data

(see SOP 13 – Data Management for detailed data management procedures). The data are also 

compiled and made available to the Inventory and Monitoring Program, park managers, and the 

public annually in the form of annual data reports (see SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for 

Lakes, Ponds, and Streams section on Annual Data Reporting for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams). The 

NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator is responsible for ensuring that all data collected are 

compatible between parks.

Vital signs monitoring networks collect a wide variety of physical, chemical, biological, and other 

data in support of monitoring impaired, pristine, and other high-priority waters. The Implementation 

Plan for the water quality monitoring component of the NPS Vital Signs Monitoring Program states 

that all water quality data collected by Vital Signs Monitoring Networks will be funneled through the 

NPS Water Resources Division into the USEPA modernized STORET (STOrage and RETrieval) 

database where the data will be available to parks, Regions, and the public on the Internet at 

http://www.epa.gov/storet (Tucker 2007). Modernized STORET adopts a distributed database model 

that relies on government agencies and other entities to operate local copies of STORET (“WRD 

STORET” in the case of the NPS Water Resources Division [WRD]) and the database software 

Oracle. 

The primary mechanism for I&M Network’s to enter their water quality data into WRD STORET is

a series of input screens (forms/templates) developed as part of the Natural Resource Database 

Templates (http://science.nature.nps.gov/im/datamgmt/applications/template/index.cfm), and the 

STORET Interface Module (SIM ver. 2). The input screens (called NPSTORET), developed by the 

NPS Water Resources Division, allows I&M Networks to enter data about their projects, stations, 

metadata, and results. Data from spreadsheets, datalogger output files, and other similar sources can 

also be directly imported into NPSTORET. A module of the NETN_H2O that will facilitate import 

of all NETN data directly to NPSTORET is currently under development. Both NETN_H2O and 

NPSTORET run under Microsoft Access 2002 software or higher.

NPSTORET data are transferred annually to WRD STORET, and periodically the WRD STORET 

implementation replicates the entire database on the Web-accessible STORET National Data 

Warehouse (Water Quality Exchange [WQX] System). The WRD STORET platform is being 

replaced in 2012 with a commercial database system called EQuIS.

45

Analysis and Reporting

The data reporting format and schedule are designed to meet the major goals of the Vital Signs 

program, which are (a) determine the status and trends in selected indicators of the condition of park 

ecosystems to allow managers to make better-informed decisions and to work more effectively with 

other agencies and individuals for the benefit of park resources, (b) provide data to better understand 

the dynamic nature and condition of park ecosystems and to provide reference points for 

comparisons with other, altered environments, and (c) provide a means of measuring progress 

towards performance goals.

The NETN emphasizes communication and reporting as one of its major goals. The reporting 

approach is based on the belief that a vital sign is useful only if it provides information to help guide 

management decisions or quantify the success of past decisions. This information must be presented 

clearly so that vital sign analyses are understood by managers, scientists, policy makers, and the 

public. 

Data analyses and reporting consist of two components. The first component is comprised of an 

annual data report with lake, pond, and stream water quality data that have been checked for quality 

and completeness. This report ensures that data are routinely available to the public for independent 

analyses, and to spur research projects that will be of benefit to the park and to NETN. Annual data 

reports must include all specified components listed in SOP 14 – Data Reporting for Lakes, Ponds, 

and Streams. Data reports can be digital, paper, or both as long as they are readily available to the 

public.

The second component of the data analyses and reporting for NETN includes trend analyses and 

scorecard reports. After sufficient data are accumulated, trend analyses are conducted on all 

parameters every 5 years by network staff on both individual waterbodies and on aquatic ecosystems 

as a group at a park. All measures within a vital sign are examined in the context of other measures 

within that same vital sign to determine if all eutrophication parameters (for example) such as 

nutrients, chlorophyll a and transparency have similar seasonal trends. These types of analyses help 

managers determine whether there is problem waterbody with a new or increased stressor or whether 

there is an overall regional trend to be investigated.

Communicating trends in 25 or more parameter measures that relate to multiple vital signs requires a 

framework or scorecard that clearly and concisely conveys the state of park ecosystems. The status 

and trends of parameters are used to populate an ecological integrity scorecard which includes data 

from all aquatic annual data reports from NETN parks and from all trend analyses.

47

Personnel and Operational Requirements

All NETN aquatic monitoring operations are overseen by the Water Monitoring Coordinator, whose 

time is also partially dedicated to water quality data management including a check of all data 

submitted by the field crews, data import and export, and QC. This person must have hydrologic 

training and be able to perform routine data summary statistics and trend analyses on long-term water 

quality data. This person must also have experience with spreadsheets and databases, checking and 

interpreting hydrologic data, and demonstrated experience producing and publishing reports. The 

Water Monitoring Coordinator also conducts the major administrative tasks for the program, 

including protocol development and revision; scheduling, purchasing and contracting; and hiring and 

supervision of the Field Crew Leader(s) and seasonal Field Crew. The Water Monitoring Coordinator 

is the primary point of contact with the NETN Program Manager and NETN Data Manager.

Field Crew

Many possible models are available for staffing the lakes, ponds, and streams monitoring program. In 

some parks, existing staff are able to perform some or all of the routine water quality and quantity 

monitoring, when provided training and oversight, and a part of their time is dedicated to this work. 

Alternatively, NETN has directly hired biological, hydrologic, or physical science technicians 

dedicated to collecting water quality and quantity data from May through October. Another option is 

to contract the work to an organization that routinely collects water quality and water quantity 

measurements. Where a relationship already exists with a nearby State or Federal agency, monitoring 

could be contracted to this agency. The Water Monitoring Coordinator at NETN, however, must 

remain in contact with the contracted agency to ensure that consistent protocols are being followed, 

and data are being entered or transferred appropriately. All staff decisions are evaluated for technical 

expertise, ability to collect water samples on a consistent and dependable basis, and program 

budgetary constraints.

As of 2012, NETN’s field staffing consists of two Field Crew Leaders (GS-7 Hydrologic or Physical 

Science Technician) and a seasonal GS-5 Physical Science Technician. One Field Crew Leader and 

the seasonal technician are duty stationed at Acadia NP (both positions are fiscally shared with 

ACAD since a portion of their duties includes air monitoring and other tasks that are not part of this 

protocol), and they are responsible for monitoring the 36 sites in Acadia. The second Field Crew 

Leader is duty stationed at Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP and monitors the sites in the remainder 

of NETN (“Lower NETN” or “LNETN”) parks. The LNETN Field Crew Leader is accompanied in 

the field by host park or NETN staff, interns, or volunteers.

Any staff that are responsible for obtaining water quality measurements or water-discharge 

measurements under any of the models listed will have, or obtain, training as a hydrologic technician. 

Minimum qualifications for a hydrologic technician are: (1) be highly organized, and comfortable 

interacting with a wide range of people; (2) have adequate field sampling experience under rigorous 

conditions and be able to conduct reconnaissance surveys to evaluate the best locations within sites 

for water resources data collection; (3) be experienced in operation, maintenance, and calibration of 

multiparameter water quality equipment to perform routine field water quality measurements such as 
48

water temperature, specific conductance, pH, and DO; (4) be able to use well-defined methods and 

procedures to collect and process field water quality samples and perform limited field or laboratory

analyses of sample constituents; (5) be able to collect discharge measurements, and have experience 

making routine measurements of stage and discharge under a variety of field conditions applying 

established uniform methods; and (6) be able to use, maintain, and calibrate Price Pygmy and 

SonTek FlowTracker current meters and to make judgments regarding the best instrument or method 

to use in each situation.

It is preferable to conduct all water quality and quantity sampling in teams of two because of the 

inherent safety risks involved with working around water. Monitoring can, however, be done by one 

experienced hydrologic technician who is familiar with all safety protocols if samples can be 

collected or measurements made from the shore or when the water velocity is slow and the depth is 

shallow. When two staff members are used, the Field Crew Leader is responsible for crew safety, 

sample scheduling, equipment maintenance and calibration, and performance of all sample collection 

activities in accordance with procedures and QA/QC requirements specified in the appropriate SOPs. 

Field Crew members are responsible for carrying out the instructions of the Field Crew Leader and 

informing the Field Crew Leader of any unsafe conditions, equipment, or other problems observed 

that could jeopardize the health and safety of the crew or the quality of sample collections. Shortterm or temporary Field Crew members need not have extensive training for water quality or quantity 

monitoring, but must receive safety training requirements described in the following section on

Health and Safety Training.

Training, equipping, and retaining water monitoring staff by NETN is essential to acquiring high

quality data. Staff turnover requires additional training, and could negatively affect data quality 

(National Park Service 2002).

Field Crew Training

Training includes safety training and field methods training. Hands-on training of new staff is 

scheduled, whenever possible, before the monitoring season begins.

Health and Safety Training

All monitoring staff should be physically fit and capable of conducting rigorous physical work in 

potentially adverse conditions. Hazard communication training is required for all staff working with 

chemicals or working in or around a laboratory. An online version is offered by National Oceanic 

and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) at: http://www.labtrain.noaa.gov/ (accessed 19 November 

2012). The Field Crew Leader at ACAD must obtain a U.S. Department of the Interior (DOI) 

approved Motorboat Operator Certification (MOC, 5-year certification), and all staff working in or 

near surface water should receive basic water safety training. Field crews are strongly encouraged to 

receive training in Basic First Aid (3-year certification) and CPR (1-year certification). Classes are 

offered by the Red Cross and other organizations.

Field crews are provided with, and instructed on the use of several forms of communication and 

emergency location equipment, including radios, cellular phones, and personal locator beacons. 
49

Training on communication includes preferred methods for each park or site, daily check-in and 

check-out requirements, and emergency communication procedures.

All staff must be informed that field work may expose the incumbent to extreme weather conditions 

such as rain, snow, extreme temperatures, and hazards such as flooding, ice, tick and insect bites, and 

that field work also involves moderate risks such as measuring in swift streams, and slip/trip/fall 

hazards when hiking to and from monitoring sites. Special safety precautions are required in and 

around water, and crew members must wear life jackets and other personal protective equipment

(PPE) designed for each particular work assignment. Monitoring sites are often isolated and 

occasionally difficult to reach. Field Crew members are required to discuss routine safety precautions 

and actions to be taken in an emergency with the Field Crew Leader. All staff are informed as to the 

risks and protection measures for Lyme disease. All staff are encouraged to participate in any safety 

trainings offered or required by the NPS and the park in which they are working.

Field Methods Training

All staff collecting water quality or water quantity data should have formal training and some period 

of field apprenticeship to be able to correctly calibrate and operate field equipment, implement 

sampling procedures, and document the field protocols used and sampling results with the necessary 

metadata. Field training is necessary to ensure that the most representative measurements possible

are made, and that data are consistent and comparable throughout NETN. Crews must have training 

in methodologies for (1) collecting and processing samples of surface water for water quality

analyses, (2) obtaining in situ field water quality measurements with a multiparameter probe and (3) 

collecting stage and discharge measurements. Such training includes the theory, methodology, and 

equipment used to measure stream flow, stream stage, lake levels, water temperature, specific

conductance, DO, and pH. Annual training and apprenticeship for NPS personnel are planned and 

budgeted before execution of monitoring activities by NPS staff. In addition, field crews must review 

all SOPs included in this protocol to become familiar or reacquainted with established monitoring 

methods, and any updates since the previous field season. Field staff must be familiar with travel 

directions to the sites.

Field crews are trained in the use of the water quality probes and current meters, and must become 

familiar with the manufacturer’s instructions for calibration and operation of the specific equipment 

planned for use in the monitoring effort. Experience in equipment handling, calibration, and 

operation of the sondes, probes and meters is best obtained through a combination of apprenticeship, 

trainings, testing of the equipment at the office, and becoming familiar with the manufacturers 

equipment operation and maintenance manual before entering the field. Improper handling and 

storage of the multiparameter sonde and probes can lead to equipment damage or premature sensor 

failure. All staff involved in water quality instrument calibration and maintenance should receive 

training from the vendor or be supervised by someone who has recently completed training (such as 

the Field Crew Leader).

Information on continuous-record stream flow gaging stations (continuous gaging stations) and the 

collection of discrete discharge measurements is included in this protocol (SOP 9 – Collecting 

Stream Flow and Stage Data). This SOP, however, must be used in combination with the instruction 
50

manuals for all field equipment, guides for the collection of stream flow data (Rantz et al. 1982), and 

a period of apprenticeship and training with qualified hydrologic technicians. If the collection of 

stream flow data is not to be contracted to an organization that routinely collects and analyzes stream

flow data, it is recommended that the technicians making these measurements be overseen by such an 

organization. This would include routine annual reviews of data collection and analysis methods, 

equipment calibration, and refresher courses. 

Inventory and Purchase of Supplies and Equipment

The inventory and purchase of supplies, equipment, and services are planned several months in

advance of the field season. This early planning ensures adequate lead time for equipment that needs 

to be ordered, replaced or sent for factory servicing or calibration. Preseason preparation is detailed 

in SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List and includes the following: (1) inventory equipment 

listed in SOP 3; (2) contact the laboratory to coordinate delivery of clean sample containers; (3)

confirm that any necessary vehicles, watercraft and other associated field gear will be available and 

operational for scheduled monitoring trips; (4) check expiration dates and quantities of field 

chemicals and supplies and replenish or replace as necessary; and (5) install new batteries in all 

meters and other electronic gear.

Calibration of Equipment

All equipment, including the water quality sonde and all sensors and thermometers must be 

reassembled after winter storage, calibrated, and tested for accuracy each year before the field season 

begins. All instruments must be accurate within the standards listed in Table 22. Most equipment 

needs to be regularly recalibrated throughout the field season.

Table 22. Stabilization criteria for recording field measurements. 

Measurement Parameter Standard direct field measurement

Stabilization criteria for measurements 

(variability should be within value shown)

Temperature Thermistor thermometer ± 0.2° C

Liquid-in-glass thermometer ± 0.5° C

Specific conductance When ≤ 100 μS/cm ± 5 percent

When > 100 μS/cm ± 3 percent

pH Meter displays to 0.01 ± 0.2 standard pH units

Dissolved Oxygen Amperometric method ± 0.3 mg/L

Instructions in the SOPs of this protocol for calibrating and operating sampling and field

measurement equipment are not intended to replace those of the manufacturer but are to be 

considered as supplementary information. Field staff must be familiar with the instructions provided 

by equipment manufacturers. This protocol provides only generic guidelines for general equipment 
51

use and maintenance and focuses on particular instruments that currently are in common use for 

NETN monitoring. There is a large variety of available field instruments and many are frequently 

updated or replaced with newer technology. Field staff are encouraged to contact equipment 

manufacturers for answers to technical questions. 

Field measurements will only be made with calibrated instruments. Each field instrument must have 

a permanent log book for recording calibrations and repairs. Staff must review the log book before 

leaving for the field. Monitoring staff will test each instrument (meters and sensors) before leaving 

for the field and practice the measurement method if the instrument or measurement is new to any 

member of the field crew who will be performing those measurements. Having backup instruments 

readily available and in good working condition will prevent loss of data if equipment has to be sent 

to the manufacturer for repair. Additional calibration is required at the field site for most instruments.

Sampling Schedule

Lake and pond monitoring begins before spring turnover of dimictic lakes (as soon as possible after 

maximum snowmelt runoff) and continues through fall turnover, a period that normally extends from 

late April to late October. Stream sampling occurs during the months that are generally without ice, 

from May through October. In southern parks such as parks in Connecticut and/or New Jersey, it 

may be possible to extend this season into April to catch a sample during spring runoff. In ACAD 

this earlier sampling schedule may be challenging because of inaccessibility of sites due to road 

closures, but can be considered where feasible. 

April monitoring is not currently conducted by NETN, except for the lake acidification study at 

ACAD. Inclement weather and staff workloads preclude the scheduling of sampling events to 

specific annual dates, however all lake and pond sampling is ideally accomplished during the same 2 

weeks of each month for each park (for example the middle 2 weeks from the 8th to the 21st), and all 

stream sampling during the same week of each month (for example, the 1

st week from the 1st to the 

7

th). Sampling can occur in a different 2-week period in different parks. Tentative sampling dates are

scheduled and logistics organized before the start of each field season.

Grab samples and depth-integrated epilimnetic samples (in lakes) are taken during two trips, once in 

May and once in August for streams, and once in June and once in August for lakes and ponds. These 

grab samples must be treated according to laboratory instructions with regard to filtering and chilling 

and sent to a laboratory within the specified time for analyses.

A two-person crew (ideally one person to observe and sample and one to assist and record data) is 

normally required for lake and pond monitoring. A moderately deep lake will require approximately 

2 hours for a complete monitoring visit, while LNETN ponds typically take 45 minutes. Generally 

two and a maximum of three lakes are scheduled to be monitored on each field day. All monitoring is 

performed between 0900 and 1500 hours to provide consistent observation windows for the SD 

measurement.

Stream sampling can be conducted any time during daylight hours. A one-person field crew may 

conduct stream sampling unless a discharge measurement is to be made during high water or the site 
52

is located in a very remote area. A two-person field crew is mandatory in these instances for safety

reasons. Two-person crews are preferred for all monitoring activities since it is always helpful to 

have assistance with carrying equipment, and recording data. 

Determine which sites will be sampled each day on the basis of the most efficient travel logistics. If 

monitoring a site during the narrower target window each month cannot be conducted because of 

weather or other scheduling constraints, schedule data collection later in the month. If, however, no 

data were obtained for a month, it is not worthwhile to obtain two sets of samples during the 

following month. Contact the NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator for guidance in this situation.

Facility and Equipment Needs

In addition to the equipment listed in SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List, suitable facilities are 

required for storing and calibrating equipment and supplies. This includes an appropriate way to 

dispose of standards and other chemicals used for equipment calibration. None of the standards or 

other chemicals currently used by NETN for this protocol require special disposal, and they can be 

safely discarded down a sink. Storage shelves and a bench top or table are also needed; these should 

be kept clean and placed in a low traffic area or room. 

Startup Costs and Budget Considerations

Because of the equipment required, this protocol has significant startup costs. Major equipment 

includes current meters ($9,000 each), multiparameter sondes ($9,000 each), an autolevel and 

leveling rod ($3,000), and equipment for light penetration profiles ($2,000 each). Several thousand 

dollars are needed for additional startup equipment, including turbidity probes, digital cameras, 

thermometers, waders, and other durable supplies (see SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List).

A rough budget for annual monitoring follows:

 Personnel

o Water Monitoring Coordinator - $31,000

o Field Crew Leader (ACAD) - $14,000

o Field Crew Leader (LNETN) - $43,000

o Field Crew (ACAD seasonal) - $11,000

o Field Crew (LNETN intern) - $13,000

 Travel

o GSA Vehicle Lease - $7,000

o Per Diem - $8,000

o Lab Analyses - $17,000

o Equipment and Supplies - $6,000

o TOTAL - $150,000
53

Version Control Procedures

Until version 3.00 of the protocol narrative and SOPs, all sections had the same version number. This 

system does not match the convention used for other NETN protocols, so beginning with version 

3.00, the narrative and SOPs can each have different version numbers. The entire protocol is archived 

at the beginning of each field season, so that it is clear what version of the protocol was in use at 

what time. Also beginning with version 3.00, the date of any changes will be recorded, to further 

facilitate matching procedures with the appropriate field season.

The version number of the narrative or an SOP will be changed following any major or minor 

revision. Major revisions, such as a change in method or instrumentation, are designated by whole 

numbers (e.g., version 3.00 to 4.00). Minor revisions such as editorial changes increase incrementally 

by hundredths (e.g., version 1.01to 1.02). If there are no changes to the narrative or an SOP, the 

version number does not change. All changes made to a protocol or SOP are documented in each 

new version. All revisions are provided to the Northeast Region I&M Program Manager, who will 

make a determination regarding whether internal or external review is required. Version changes to 

SOPs and protocols are tracked in the format given in Table 23:

Table 23. Version Tracking Table (Sample).

Version Number Version Date Sections changed Changes from previous version

1.00 12/30/04 NA NA

55

Literature Cited

American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water Pollution 

Control Federation. 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater (20th

ed.). Washington D.C., American Public health Association [variously paginated].

Bacon, L. C. 2004. Maine Lake Assessment, Quality Assurance Program Plan. Augusta, ME. Maine 

Department of Environmental Protection. 34 p.

Barbour, M. T., J. Gerritsen, B. D. Snyder, and J. B. Stribling. 1999. Rapid bioassessment protocols 

for use in streams and wadeable rivers: Periphyton, benthic macroinvertebrates and fish. Second 

Edition. EPA 841-B-99-002. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water,

Washington, D.C. http://water.epa.gov/scitech/monitoring/rsl/bioassessment/, link checked on 

3 January 2014.

Breen, R. M., W. G. Gawley, M. Fraser, and H. Dumais. 2002. 1998-2001 Acadia National Park lake 

monitoring. Acadia National Park Natural Resources Report 2002-03, 12 p.

Buchanan, T. J., and W. P. Somers. 1969. Discharge measurements at gaging stations. U.S. 

Geological Survey Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations, book 3, chap. A8, 65 p. 

Carlson, R. E., 1977. A trophic state index for lakes. Limnology and Oceanography 22(2): 361-369.

Carter, R. W., and J. Davidian. 1968. General procedures for gaging streams: U.S. Geological Survey 

Techniques of Water- Resources Investigations, book 3, chap. A6, 13 p. 

Dahlgren, R., E. Van Nieuwenhuyse, and G. Litton. 2004. Transparency tube provides reliable water 

quality measurements. California Agriculture 58(3): 149-153.

Davies, S. P., L. Tsomides, J. L. DiFranco, D. L. Courtemanch. 1999. Biomonitoring Retrospective: 

15 Year Summary for Maine Lakes and Streams. Maine Department of Environmental 

Protection. DEPLW1999-26.

Davies, S. P., L. Tsomides. 2002. Methods for Biological Sampling and Analysis of Maine's Inland 

Waters. Maine Department of Environmental Protection.

DeLuca, M. D., H. L. Hoppe, H. A. Heckathorn, M. L. Riskin, B. J. Gray, E. Melvin, N. A. Liu.

2003. Water resources data New Jersey water year 2003: Water-quality Data: U.S. Geological 

Survey Water-Data Report NJ-03-3, v.3: 668 p.

Ellsworth, A. C. 2005. Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site: New Hampshire Water Resources 

Information and Issues Overview Report. Technical Report NPS/NRWRD/NRTR – 2005/336. 

National Park Service, Fort Collins, CO, 31 p.

https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/659887, link checked on 14 August 2013.
56

Farris, C. N. and K. Chapman. 2000. Level I Water-quality inventories: Weir Farm National 

Historical Site. Unpublished Report 2182276. National Park Service, Fort Collins, CO.14 p.

https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/2182276, link checked on 14 August 2013.

Fisher, G. T., and S. E. Morlock. 2002. Discharge Measurements in Shallow Urban Streams Using a 

Hydroacoustic Current Meter. ASCE Conf. Proc. doi:10.1061/40655(2002)29 Proceedings of 

Hydraulic Measurements and Experimental Methods Conference 2002 ISBN: 0‐7844‐0655‐3.

Gawley, W. G. 1996. Acadia National Park lake monitoring field and laboratory methods. Natural 

Resource Report 96-01. Acadia National Park, Bar Harbor, ME. 

https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/2179022, link checked on 14 August 2013.

Gilbert, R. O. 1987. Statistical methods for environmental pollution monitoring: Van Nostrand 

Reinhold, New York.

Goransson, E., R. K. Johnson, and A. Wilander. 2004. Representativity of a mid-lake surface-waterchemistry sample. Environmental Monitoring and Assessment 95: 221-238.

Helsel, D. R., and R. M. Hirsch. 1992. Statistical methods in water resources: New York, Elsevier, 

522 p.

Irwin, R. J. 2004. Vital Signs Long-Term Aquatic Monitoring Projects: Part B: Planning Process 

Steps: Issues to Consider and then to Document in a Detailed Study Plan that Includes a Quality 

Assurance Project Plan (QAPP) and Monitoring “Protocols” (Including Standard Operating 

Procedures). National Park Service, Fort Collins, CO.

http://science.nature.nps.gov/im/monitor/protocols/wqPartB.doc, link checked on 14 August 

2013.

Keefer, J. S., M. R. Marshall, and B. R. Mitchell. 2010. Early detection of invasive species: 

surveillance, monitoring, and rapid response: Eastern Rivers and Mountains Network and 

Northeast Temperate Network. Natural Resource Report NPS/ERMN/NRR–2010/196. National 

Park Service, Fort Collins, Colorado.

Kennedy, E. J. 1983. Computation of continuous records of streamflow: U.S. Geological Survey 

Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations. Book 3, Chapter A13, 53 p.

Kennedy, E. J. 1984. Discharge ratings at gaging stations: U.S. Geological Survey Techniques of 

Water-Resources Investigations. Book 3, Chapter A10, 69 p.

Kennedy, E. J. 1990. Levels at streamflow-gaging stations: U.S. Geological Survey Techniques of 

Water-Resources Investigations. Book 3, Chapter A19, 31 p.

Kilpatrick, F. A., and Schneider, V. R., 1983, Use of flumes in measuring discharge: U.S. Geological 

Survey Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations. Book 3, Chapter A14, 46 p.
57

Kopp, B. S. and H. A. Neckles. 2004. Monitoring protocols for the National Park Service North 

Atlantic Coastal Parks: Ecosystem Indicators of Estuarine Eutrophication, draft: USGS Patuxent 

Wildlife Research Center, 159 p.

Kopp, B. S., and H. A. Neckles. 2009. A protocol for monitoring estuarine nutrient enrichment in

coastal parks of the National Park Service Northeast Region. Natural Resource Report

NPS/NCBN/NRR—2009/110. National Park Service, Fort Collins, Colorado.

Larsen, D. P., N. S. Urquhart, and D. L. Kugler. 1995. Regional scale trend monitoring of indicators 

of trophic condition of lakes. Water Resources Bulletin 31(1): 117-140.

Lombard, P. J. 2004. Freshwater Vital-Signs Monitoring Plan for National Parks in the Northeast 

Temperate Network (NETN): Phase I – A scoping report. U.S. Geological Survey Administrative 

Report, Augusta, ME. 102 p.

Lombard, P., W. Gawley, J. Caldwell. 2006. Freshwater Vital-Signs Monitoring Plan for National 

Parks in the Northeast Temperate Network (NETN) PHASE III: Water-Quality Monitoring 

Protocols in Lakes, Ponds and Streams. U.S. Geological Survey Administrative Report, Augusta, 

ME. 222 p.

Lombard, P. J., and R. M. Goldstein. 2004. Freshwater Vital-Signs Monitoring Plan for National 

Parks in the Northeast Temperate Network (NETN): Phase II – Selection of Water-QualityMonitoring Variables. U.S. Geological Survey Administrative Report, Augusta, ME. 47 p.

Long, H. K., R. L. Daddow, and J. W. Farrar. 1998. U.S. Geological Survey standard reference 

sample project—performance evaluation of analytical laboratories: U.S. Geological survey Fact 

Sheet FS-031-98. April 1998. 3 p.

Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants. 2007. Maine field guide to invasive aquatic plants and 

their common native look alikes. Maine Volunteer Lake Monitoring Program. 146 p.

Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants. 2011. Invasive aquatic plant screening survey procedures.

http://dev.yellahoose.com/yh/mevlmp2/wp-content/uploads/2013/10/2013-Screening-SurveyProcedures.pdf, link checked on 17 December 2013.

Maine Department of Environmental Protection. 2004. 2004 Integrated Water-Quality Monitoring 

and Assessment Report. Document Number DEPLW0665.

Maine Department of Inland Fisheries and Wildlife. 2012. Maine Lakes Survey Maps.

http://www.maine.gov/ifw/fishing/lakesurvey_maps/index.htm, link checked on 17 December 

2013.

Maine State Government. 2007a. Maine statutes, Title 38, Section 465.

http://www.mainelegislature.org/legis/statutes/38/title38sec465.html, link checked on 13 

December 2013.
58

Maine State Government. 2007b. Maine statutes, Title 38, Section 465-A 

http://www.mainelegislature.org/legis/statutes/38/title38sec465-A.html, link checked on 13 

December 2013.

Maine State Government. 2011. Maine statutes, Title 38, Section 464

http://www.mainelegislature.org/legis/statutes/38/title38sec464.html, link checked on 13

December 2013.

Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection. 2013. Massachusetts Surface Water Quality 

Standards. http://www.mass.gov/eea/docs/dep/service/regulations/314cmr04.pdf, link checked on 

13 December 2013.

Miller K. M. and B. R. Mitchell. 2013. Permanent freshwater wetland monitoring protocol for 

Acadia National Park: Northeast Temperate Network. Natural Resource Report. 

NPS/NETN/NRR–2013/653. National Park Service. Fort Collins, Colorado. Published Report2194537.

Mitchell B. R., W. G. Shriver, F. Dieffenbach, et al. 2006. Northeast Temperate Network Vital Signs 

Monitoring Plan. Woodstock, VT. National Park Service. Technical Report NPS/NER/NRTR–

2006/059. 

Medeiros, K. C. 2011. Long-term hydrologic monitoring protocol for coastal ecosystems: Cape Cod 

National Seashore. Natural Resource Report NPS/CACO/NRR—2011/469. National Park 

Service, Fort Collins, Colorado.

National Park Service. 1997a. Water Resources Management Plan, Vanderbilt Mansion National 

Historic Site, Eleanor Roosevelt National Historic Site, and the Home of Franklin D. Roosevelt 

National Historic Site. U.S. Department of the Interior. National Park Service.Denver, CO. 86 p.

https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/135729, link checked on 16 August 2013.

National Park Service. 1997b. Baseline Water-Quality Data Inventory and Analysis Saratoga 

National Historical Park. Technical Report NPS/NRWRD/NRTR-97/96 National Park Service, 

Water Resources Division, Fort Collins, CO.

https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/DownloadDigitalFile?code=146954&file=13811.pdf, link 

checked on 16 August 2013.

National Park Service. 2002. Recommendations for Core Water-Quality-Monitoring Parameters and 

Other Key Elements of the NPS Vital-Signs Program Water-Quality-Monitoring Component.

Freshwater Workgroup Subcommittee, Fort Collins, CO. 

https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/573285, link checked on 16 August 2013.

Nelson, S.J. 2002. Determining Atmospheric Deposition Inputs to Two Small Watersheds at Acadia

National Park. University of Maine, Orono, ME. 112 p.

New Hampshire Department of Environmental Services. 2008. State of New Hampshire Surface 

Water Quality Regulations. Chapter Env-Wq 1700.
59

http://des.nh.gov/organization/commissioner/legal/rules/documents/env-wq1700.pdf, link 

checked on 13 December 2013.

New York State Department of Environmental Conservation. 2008. Surface water and groundwater

quality standards and groundwater effluent limitations. http://www.dec.ny.gov/regs/4590.html, 

link checked on 13 December 2013.

Nielsen, M. G., J. M. Caldwell, C. W. Culbertson, and M. Handley. 2002. Hydrologic Data Collected 

in Small Watersheds on Mount Desert Island, Maine: 1999-2000. Open-file report 02-416. U.S. 

Geological Survey, Reston, VA. 47 p.

Northeast Temperate Network (NETN). 2015. Water Quality Monitoring – Data Applications. 

National Park Service. (https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/2221034)

Penoyer, P. 2003. Vital Signs long-term aquatic monitoring projects: part C draft guidance on WRD 

required and other field parameter measurements, general monitoring methods and some design 

considerations in preparation of a detailed study plan. National Park Service. 96 p.

Perrin, S. 1996. Watersheds of Mount Desert Island, Maine: Their nature, function, and importance.

Bar Harbor, Maine. https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/2179085, link checked 26 

September 2013.

Poole H. H., and W. R. G. Atkins.1929. Photo-electric measurements of the penetration of light into 

seawater. U.K. Journal Marine Biology Association. 16: 297.

Rantz, S. E., et al. 1982. Measurement and Computation of Streamflow: Volumes 1 and 2. WaterSupply Paper 2175. U.S. Geological Survey, US Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

631 p.

Rehmel, M. 2007. Application of Acoustic Doppler Velocimeters for Streamflow Measurements. 

Journal of Hydraulic Engineering 133(12): 1433-438.

Salmi, T., A. Maattaa, P. Anttila, T. Ruoho-Airola, and T. Amnell. 2002. Detecting trends of annual 

values of atmospheric pollutants by the Mann-Kendall test and Sen’s slope estimates – the excel 

template application MAKESENS. Helsinki, Finland. 35 p.

Sauer, V. B., and R. W. Meyer. 1992. Determination of errors in individual discharge measurements.

U.S. Geological Survey Open-File Report 92-144, 21 p.

Seger, E. M., W. G. Gawley, and R. M. Breen. 2005. Acadia National Park Lake Monitoring Report:

2002 to 2005. Acadia National Park Natural Resource Report 05-06. Acadia National Park, Bar 

Harbor, ME. 

Shriver, W. G., D. Faber-Langendoen, G. Tierney, P, Lombard, F. Dieffenbach, J. P. Gibbs. 2004.

Northeast Temperate Inventory and Monitoring Network Vital-Signs Monitoring Plan: Phase II 
60

Report. National Park Service, Northeast Temperate Network, Woodstock, VT. 121 p., plus 17 

appendices.

Short, F. T. and R. G. Coles. 2001. Global seagrass research methods; Elsevier, NY, 473 p.

SonTek/YSI. 2006. FlowTracker Handheld ADV, Technical Manual Firmware Version 3.7, Software 

Version 2.30. 31 Aug. 2006. SonTek/YSI, San Diego, CA.

State of Connecticut Department of Energy and Environmental Protection. 2013. Connecticut water

quality standards. http://www.ct.gov/deep/lib/deep/regulations/22a/22a-426-1through9.pdf, link 

checked 13 December 2013.

State of New Jersey Administrative Code. 2011. Surface water-quality standards.

http://www.nj.gov/dep/rules/rules/njac7_9b.pdf, link checked 13 December 2013.

State of Vermont Natural Resources Board. 2011. Vermont water quality standards.

http://www.nrb.state.vt.us/wrp/publications/wqs.pdf, link checked 13 December 2013.

Stednick, J. D. and D. M. Gilbert. 1998. Water-quality inventory protocol: riverine environments. 

Fort Collins, CO, National Park Service Technical Report NPS/NRWRD/NRTR-98/177, 107 p.

Stoddard, J., J. S. Kahl, F. Deviney, D. DeWalle, C. Driscoll, A. Herlihy, J. Kellogg, P. Murdoch, J. 

Webb, and K. Webster. 2003. Response of Surface-Water Chemistry to the Clean Air Act 

Amendments of 1990. USEPA/620/R-03/001. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, 

DC. 78 p.

Tierney, G., B. Mitchell, K. Miller, J. Comiskey, A. Kozlowski, D. Faber-Langendoen. 2009. Forest 

monitoring protocol. Northeast Temperate Network. Fort Collins, CO, National Park Service.

Natural Resource Report NPS/NETN/NRR–2009/117.

Tucker, D. 2007. Draft Part E of Aquatic Habitat Park Service Guidance for Park Service Vital Signs 

Monitoring: Draft Guidance on Data Reporting and Archiving in STORET.53 p.

http://www.nature.nps.gov/water/vitalsigns/assets/docs/wqPartE.pdf, link checked 16 August 

2013.

Urquhart, N. S., S. G. Paulsen, and D. P. Larsen. 1998. Monitoring for policy-relevant regional 

trends over time. Ecological Applications 8(2): 246-257.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1983. Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes. 

USEPA Office of Research and Development EPA 600/4-79/020 March 1983.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000a. Nutrient Criteria Technical Guidance Manual: Lakes 

and Reservoirs. First Edition. EPA-822-B00-001. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 

Washington, D.C. 
61

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000b. Nutrient Criteria Technical Guidance Manual: Rivers 

and Streams. First Edition. EPA-822-B00-002. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 

Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2002. Ecoregional Nutrient Criteria: U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency Fact Sheet. USEPA-822-F-02-008. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 

Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2004. Long Term 1 Enhanced Surface Water Treatment 

Rule, Turbidity Provisions. Technical Guidance Manual. USEPA Office of Water (4606M) EPA 

816-R-04-007 www.epa.gov/safewater August 2004.

U.S. Geological Survey. variously dated. National field manual for the collection of water-quality 

data: U.S. Geological Survey Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations, book 9, chaps. A1-

A9, accessed April 28, 2006 at http://pubs.water.usgs.gov/twri9A, link checked 17 December 

2013

U.S. Geological Survey. 2006. Collection of water samples (ver. 2.0): U.S. Geological Survey 

Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations, book 9, chap. A4, September 2006, accessed 

March 12, 2012, at http://pubs.water.usgs.gov/twri9A4/, link checked 17 December 2013. 

Walasewicz, S. 2003. 2003 Water Resources Monitoring: Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site 

Annual Report. National Park Service, Cornish, NH. 22 p.

Wetzel, R. G. 1983. Limnology: New York, Saunders Publishing Company.

Wetzel, R. G. and G. E. Likens. 2000. Limnological Analyses, 3rd ed.: New York, Springer-Verlag. 

Williams, S., 2004. Maine Volunteer Lake Monitoring Annual Report. Maine Volunteer Lake 

Monitoring Program, Auburn, ME.

63

Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast 

Temperate Network Parks 

Figure A1. Location of lake sampling sites at Mount Desert Island, Acadia National Park, Maine.
Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast Temperate Network Parks (continued).

64

Figure A2. Location of stream sampling sites at Mount Desert Island, Acadia National Park, Maine.
65

Figure A3. Location of pond and stream sampling sites at Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historical Park, Vermont.
66

Figure A4. Location of stream sampling sites at Minute Man National Historical Park, Massachusetts.
67

Figure A5. Location of stream sampling sites at Morristown National Historical Park, New Jersey.
Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast Temperate Network Parks (continued).

68

Figure A6. Location of stream sampling sites at the Roosevelt-Vanderbilt National Historic Sites, New 

York.
Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast Temperate Network Parks (continued).

69

Figure A7. Location of stream and pond sampling sites at Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site, New 

Hampshire.
Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast Temperate Network Parks (continued).

70

Figure A8. Location of stream sampling site at Saugus Iron Works National Historic Site, Massachusetts.
Appendix A. Maps of Monitoring Locations for all Northeast Temperate Network Parks (continued).

71

Figure A9. Location of stream sampling sites at Saratoga National Historical Park, New York.
72

Figure A10. Location of pond sampling site at Weir Farm National Historic Site, Connecticut.
73

Appendix B. Revision Log

Version 1.0 to 2.0 (Brian Mitchell, Bill Gawley, Emily Seger, and Joe Bartlett; March 

2007)

Updated title page and version number

1.1: Added Appalachian NST to list of parks, plus comment that A.T. is outside of the scope of this 

protocol.

1.1.7.1: Secchi Disk Depth: Added comment that SD does not work outside of ACAD, and that we 

will begin using a transparency tube in 2007. Added citation for transparency tube.

1.1.7.9: Other Nutrients: This section is new, and is a placeholder until documentation of the 

rationale for the additional nutrient measures can be added.

1.2.1: 4th paragraph: Outside of ACAD, ponds measured April (not May) to October, conditions 

permitting. Two impoundments at ROVA (rather than one) will not be monitored, due to shallow 

depth and detectable flows.

1.2.2: 3rd paragraph: Stream measurements April to October, conditions permitting, not May to 

October.

Table 9: MIMA has three sites now, with addition of Concord River.

MORR has five sites now, with addition of Passaic River.

SARA has four sites now, with removal of Devil’s Hollow.

ROVA has six sites now, with removal of ELRO pond.

Table 12: Updated with current site identifiers.

1.2.3.3: MIMA – Added information about Mill Brook site, Concord river site and methods, and Elm 

Brook site.

Table 13: Updated site identifiers and add Mill Brook site.

1.2.3.4: MORR – Updated site info in paragraph 2. Passaic River site description is still needed.

Table 14: Updated site identifiers and added Passaic river site.

1.2.3.5: ROVA – Updated site information in paragraph 2.

Table 15: Updated site identifiers and remove pond site.

Table 16: Updated site identifiers.

1.2.3.7: SAIR – Updated to reflect twice yearly nutrient samples and sonde samples, and possibility 

of samples at the turning basin.

Table 17: Updated site identifier.

1.2.3.8: SARA – Updated site information, including removal of Devil’s Hollow.

Table 18: Updated site identifiers.
Appendix B. Revision Log (continued).

74

Table 19: Updated site identifier.

1.3.1: Paragraph 2: added that pond samples will be grabs.

Table 21: Transparency tube for clarity measurements if Secchi disk can’t be used.

1.6.6: Paragraph 3: stream grab samples only in May (not earliest trip of season).

Literature Cited: Added Dahlgren paper on transparency tubes.

Appendix : This Appendix is new, and documents revisions to the protocol.

Version 2.00 to 2.01 (Brian Mitchell, March 2007):

Section 1.1.7.7: Added mg/L to ueq/L conversion factor

Version 2.01 to 2.02 (Brian Mitchell, April 2009):

1.2.3.1.1: Revised table 10 to match format of other tables in this section.

1.2.3.1.2: Revised text to include operational dates of USGS gages, and note that NPS-operated 

pressure transducers are installed at Cadillac Brook and Hadlock Brook.

1.2.3.7: Water samples and sonde measurements will be taken twice per year at Saugus, at the 

turning basin and at the USGS gage. The turning basin restoration project occurred between the 2007 

and 2008 sampling years.

Version 2.02 to 3.00 (Brian Mitchell and Bill Gawley, November 2012):

Narrative reorganized to match standardized NETN format.

Numerous edits to clarify the text.

Clarified ecoregional nutrient standards with additional text.

April sampling is no longer conducted outside of ACAD (only happened one year). ACAD April 

sampling is limited to lake acidification study.

Water clarity methods changed, effective for the 2012 field season: light penetration profiles now 

collected at all ponds where SD not found. Stream turbidity is measured at all stream sites. Use of the 

transparency tube has been discontinued.

Water quality analytes changed, effective for the 2012 field season: TDP, ortho-P, and TDN were 

dropped. Chloride and sulfate were added. Chlorophyll a is now measured in all ponds and lakes, not 

just ACAD sites. 

Changes to sites: 

o ACAD Stanley Brook (ACSTNL) is now a permanent site, sampled every year (2011)

o ACAD Man of War Brook (ACMOWB) has been discontinued (2011)

o ACAD Duck Brook Outlet of Eagle Lake (ACEGLO) moved and renamed Duck Brook –

North of Rt. 233 (ACDUCK) between 2007 and 2009 sampling years

o ACAD Lurvey Spring Brook inlet to Echo Lake (ACLSIE) switched to Year 2 panel from 

Year 1 panel to balance the number of sites in each panel (2011)
Appendix B. Revision Log (continued).

75

Added section on Detectable Level of Change to Sampling Design.

Added section on Facility and Equipment Needs to Personnel and Operational Requirements.

Added section on Startup Costs and Budget Considerations to Personnel and Operational 

Requirements.

Significantly revised Version Control Procedures: Instead of an overall “protocol version”, there are 

separate version numbers for the narrative and each SOP. These numbers are updated only if there is 

a minor (in increments of one hundredth) or major (in whole number increments) changes to the 

protocol. The new procedure matches version control methods used for other NETN protocols.

Version 3.00 to 3.01 (Brian Mitchell, December 2013):

Numerous minor edits and clarifications to address comments from Jim Comiskey, Marian Norris, 

and Hali Roy as part of the NPS review needed prior to publishing the revised protocol.

Six sites were removed from regular monitoring during the annual review (see text for each park for 

documentation): ACBUBO, ACJRDO, MORRSA, MORRSC, ROVASC, and SARASB.

Removed unused acronyms from List of Acronyms

For consistency, refer only to “non-native invasive” or “invasive” species; “exotic” is no longer used.

Revised justification text and Tables 1 and 2 for clarity and to reflect current metrics.

Revised Tables 3 and 4 and state standards section to include most recent state standards.

Updated Table 9 to reflect correct numbers of sites.

Added Temperature and Non-Native Invasive Plants sections to “Water Quality Parameters”.

Detailed directions to MORR sites removed, since this level of detail is not provided for other parks.

Removed discussion of potential trend and range of variability analyses for historic ROVA data.

Removed details of the SAGA water sampling review recommendations.

Revised power analysis section to include a 2015 due date (rather than 2014), and a new power target 

of 50% change in 5 years (rather than 2) with type I error at 10% (rather than 20%) and type II error 

at 20%.

SOP Revisions

SOP revisions are also described in the individual SOP tables. However, due to the complete 

reorganization of the protocol, revisions through version 3.00 of the SOPs are also documented here.

Version 1.0 to 2.0 (Brian Mitchell, Bill Gawley, Emily Seger, and Joe Bartlett; March 

2007):

2.3.2.1.2: Site Number = 0 (not 1) for stream sites. Pre-deployment QC check is 89 (Joe used 99 

outside of ACAD in 2006), and post-deployment QC check is 99.

2.3.2.2.5: Added informational paragraph at start of section. Acadia uses a 2-point calibration daily, 

and a 3-point calibration monthly, while other parks use a 3-point calibration daily.
Appendix B. Revision Log (continued).

76

2.3.2.2.6: Added information to start of section. Calibration should be performed weekly, with a 2-

point field check each morning.

2.3.2.2.9: In step 5, add information referring to the DO% Local option. This makes it easier to tell if 

the sensor is within specifications, since it automatically adjusts the DO% for local barometric 

pressure.

2.3.3: Refer to DO percent local rather than DO percent in step 2 and 3. Inserted step 4 – recording 

pre-deployment data to site 89. Revised step 6 to include selection of proper site code. Added step 8 

– recording post-deployment data to site 99.

2.4.3: Added first sentence; if clean filtering location is not available, samples can be stored and kept 

cold until a suitable location is available.

Table 25: Lab code changed for total phosphorus; code and reporting limit changed for total 

dissolved phosphorus, ammonia, nitrite, nitrite + nitrate, orthophosphate.

2.4.5: Added paragraph specifying numbers and times for collection of blanks and replicates, and that 

replicates should be swapped between labs if multiple labs are being used.

3.1: For first series of steps: Refer to DO percent local saturation in steps 2 and 3. Insert step 4 (log to 

89 file). Clarify step 8 (only one point needed in well-mixed, small streams; multiple points only 

needed for Concord River). Add step 9 (log to 99 file).

3.3.2.1: Added second paragraph, specifying that QC for discharge must be done monthly (one 

second measurement), plus an additional 3 measurements per field season at a USGS gaged station.

4.1A: Added this SOP (SOP 9A) to cover Transparency Tube readings.

4.2: Changed steps 3 and 4 to refer to DO percent local. Insert step 5 (pre-deployment “89” reading).

Insert step 12 (reading just above bottom for shallow ponds). Insert step 13 (post-deployment “99” 

reading).

5.2: Added information for Sawyer Lab ANC analysis, and specified that the Sawyer lab will process 

all ANC samples starting in 2007.

5.3: Title changed to apparent color. ACAD samples will be analyzed by Sawyer; others by NWQL.

Added information for Sawyer Lab color analysis.

5.4: Updated to correct lab codes. ACAD samples will be analyzed by Sawyer; others by NWQL.

Added information for Sawyer Lab color analysis.

5.5: Updated to correct lab codes. ACAD samples for total N and total dissolved N will be analyzed 

by Sawyer lab. Added information for Sawyer analysis.

5.6: Updated to state that chl a analysis is conducted by the Sawyer lab. Added Sawyer lab info.

Version 2.01 to 2.02 (Brian Mitchell, April 2009):

2.1.1: Added contributing (upstream) watershed area to the background stream data.

2.2.2: Updated to reflect monthly photographs of stream sites, and an annual panoramic set of photos 

for lakes.
Appendix B. Revision Log (continued).

77

2.3.2.2.6: Updated to reflect replacement of probe yearly, with probe from previous year as a backup.

2.3.5.6.4: New section; included info for pH calibration check, describing problem in the field at 

Acadia and specifying need for low-ionic strength standard and replacing the probe annually. 

3.3.2: Revised to reflect use of FlowTracker acoustic Doppler meter outside of Acadia NP, and the 

use of a Pygmy meter at Acadia (and clarified the discussion of Pygmy versus Price AA meters to 

indicate that only the Pygmy meter is used).

3.4: Inserted Transparency Tube procedures, SOP 9. These measurements should be made annually, 

at high flow.

3.5: Inserted placeholder for Rapid Habitat Assessment SOP (number 10). All subsequent SOP’s 

renumbered.

4.1: Incorporated 4.1A into this section, and clarified location and timing of transparency tube 

measurements.

5.3: Revised to note that all samples were analyzed by SERCL (University of Maine) starting in 

2008.

5.4: Revised to note that all samples were analyzed by SERCL (University of Maine) starting in 

2008.

5.5: Revised to note that all samples were analyzed by SERCL (University of Maine) starting in 

2008.

Version 2.02 to 3.00 (Bill Gawley, March 2012):

ALL SOPs: Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

ALL SOPs: Revision history logs are included as the last section of all SOPS. All SOP revision 

details are now documented in these locations.

ALL SOPs: Explained change to SOP version numbering procedures in first entry of each SOP 

revision history log: Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a given year all had the same 

version number. Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version numbers are allowed to vary from each 

other, and are only updated when there are changes to the SOP.

NEW SOPs: Created or renamed/restructured the following SOPs:

SOP 1 – Safety (Rename/restructure) 

SOP 2 –Establishing and Documenting Monitoring Sites (Rename/restructure)

SOP 3 - Preparation and Equipment List (New)

SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams (combined several previous SOPs)

SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds (combined several previous SOPs)

SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration (combined several 

previous SOPs)
Appendix B. Revision Log (continued).

78

SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses (combined several previous SOPs)

SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams (combined several 

previous SOPs)

SOP 15 – Post-Season Activities (New)

SOP 16 – Annual Timeline of Activities (New)

SOP 17 – Decontamination Procedures (New)
79

SOP 1 – Safety

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Definitions (alphabetical)

Designated Office Staff (DOS): Refers to the individual who is designated to remain in the office and 

available to provide daily field work plans and emergency response services for field teams. The 

default DOS for the ACAD field team is the protocol lead. The DOS for the Lower NETN field team 

is the NETN Program Manager. 

Crew member: Refers to a member of the water monitoring team who, along with the crew leader, 

conduct the majority of the field work for this protocol.

Crew leader: Refers to the field team leader for the water monitoring crew. The field crew leader is 

responsible for planning and making changes to the daily field work plans, communicating those 

changes to the DOS, and following daily check-in procedures. 

Field team: Refers to the 2-3 person group of water monitoring staff who are working together at a 

sampling location. 

Monitoring staff: Refers to all personnel engaged in field activities related to this protocol. This 

includes National Park Service (NPS) employees, contractors, and volunteers either actively 

participating in or observing monitoring activities. Volunteers are required to have read and signed a 

Volunteer Agreement and all monitoring staff must read and sign the Job Safety Analysis before 

participating in any surveys.

Protocol lead: Refers to the individual responsible for coordinating implementation of the water 

protocol (NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator). The Protocol lead is responsible for ensuring 

monitoring staff are properly trained in NPS Safety procedures, and is the default Designated Office 

Staff (DOS) for the ACAD field team.

Overview

The Northeast Temperate Network (NETN) considers the occupational health and safety of its 

employees, cooperators, contractors and volunteers to be of utmost importance, and is committed to 

ensuring that all monitoring staff receive adequate training on National Park Service (NPS) safety 

procedures, incident reporting, and emergency response prior to field work. This SOP and supporting 

appendices were designed to provide a summary of safety issues and general hazards for field 

sampling, as well as hazards that are unique to water monitoring, and to serve as a first reference in 

case of an incident. 
SOP 1 - Safety

80

Topics covered include physical hazards common around water and biological hazards, emergency 

procedures, incident reporting, field preparation, safe field procedures, vehicle safety, and workers 

compensation procedures. A Job Safety Analysis (JSA), which documents hazards associated with 

this protocol and recommends approaches to mitigate these hazards, is included as an appendix 

(Appendix S1.A) to this SOP. A Green, Amber, Red risk assessment (GAR) has been conducted for 

this protocol and is included as an appendix (Appendix S1.B). The JSA must be read and signed by 

all monitoring staff who conduct field work for this protocol, including volunteer assistants who help 

out occasionally in Lower NETN parks. In addition, Appendix S1.C identifies the nearest hospital 

facilities to each NETN park, and contains maps and written directions for the most direct route from 

the park to the hospital. This SOP does not cover first aid.

All safety procedures included in this SOP that are related specifically to working in and around 

water and water-quality sampling are adapted from Chapter A9 of the USGS National Field Manual. 

Staff performing hydrologic field work must familiarize themselves with that document found at: 

http://water.usgs.gov/owq/FieldManual/Chap9/content.html. 

Responding to an Incident

Life-Threatening Medical Emergency

 Call 9-1-1 or park emergency number. If in NETN, use park radios to contact dispatch.

Uninjured, assisting personnel: Administer first aid to the best of your knowledge, ability and 

training. If appropriate, transport to emergency room. Directions to the nearest hospital from 

each park are in Appendix S1.C and emergency numbers are provided during training.

 Uninjured, assisting personnel: As soon as it is safe and practical to do so, inform the 

Protocol Lead and the park's emergency contact (provided during training) of the incident.

 For injured NPS employees and NPS volunteers, complete Worker's Compensation 

paperwork (Appendix S1.D). For other, non-NPS Monitoring Staff (i.e., contractors and 

cooperators), follow your organization’s procedures for documenting accidents.

Non-Emergency Incidents

1. For a non-emergency incident that may require medical attention, injured monitoring staff 

must contact the protocol lead immediately after incident.

2. For injured NPS staff and NPS volunteers, complete Worker's Compensation paperwork 

(must be done within 48 hours of incident, Appendix S1.D). 

3. Injured monitoring staff should seek medical attention, if needed.

NOTE: Never discard original paperwork related to workers compensation claims (including 

information from doctor's visits, CA-1, CA-2, CA-16 or CA-17 forms).

Field Preparation

All monitoring staff are responsible for maintaining a safe work environment for themselves and 

their coworkers. 
SOP 1 - Safety

81

Job Safety

An important tool used to promote safe conduct is the Job Safety Analysis (JSA; sometimes called a 

Job Hazard Analysis or JHA). This approach is consistent with NPS Directors Order 50 and 

Reference Manual 50B for Occupational Health and Safety. The JSA process is to (1) identify 

hazards associated with field and laboratory settings, and (2) as appropriate, develop approaches to 

mitigate those hazards. All monitoring staff for this protocol must read and sign the JSA in Appendix 

S1.A. In addition, water monitoring crew leaders and crew members must read the entire Safety SOP 

during training week.

First Aid Kits and Training

Every NETN vehicle should have a first aid kit that is to remain with the vehicle at all times. In 

addition to the vehicle first aid kit, a backpacking first aid kit should be with the monitoring crew at 

all times while in the field. An inventory of first aid kits should be performed by the crew leader 

prior to each field season to ensure that all medical supplies are in sufficient quantity and haven’t 

expired. Each first aid kit will have an inventory list of the supplies it should contain. Items in first 

aid kits that are used should be promptly replaced. 

At the beginning of every field season the water monitoring team will receive basic first aid and CPR 

training if they do not already have current certifications. Having a team member with Wilderness 

First Aid or Wilderness First Responder certification is strongly encouraged.

Daily Communication and Planning

Field teams are expected to carry a functioning primary and secondary mode of communication at all 

times while in the field. Unless they are water proof, these items should be stored in a water resistant 

or water proof container (e.g. Ziploc bag). At ACAD, monitoring staff will have a radio as the 

primary mode of communication, and a cell phone as the secondary communication device (cell 

phones, however, are not reliable in many sections of the park). For Lower NETN parks, monitoring 

staff will have a park radio, cell phone, and personal locator beacon (PLB), since cell reception and 

radio usage vary significantly across the parks.

Field sampling requires planning that anticipates the risks and dangers to monitoring staff so that 

precautions can be taken to limit threats to human safety as much as possible. As a result, field teams 

must produce a trip plan, or float plan (in the case of monitoring from watercraft) before conducting 

field work. A thorough review and familiarity with the trip plan is required of all monitoring staff 

and a copy of the plan for ready reference always accompanies the field team to the field (Penoyer

2003). 

Always check weather conditions before departure, and leave itinerary copy of the trip plan with the 

protocol lead. If the protocol lead will be in the field, or otherwise unavailable, another designated 

office staff (DOS) should receive a copy of the trip plan. The protocol lead or DOS must be made 

cognizant of the absolute necessity of checking in with the team. If the field team fails to check in on 

or before the planned check-in time for completion of field work, the protocol lead or DOS will 

immediately try to reach the team by all available methods. If the field team has not been reached 

within 30 minutes, the protocol lead or designee must notify emergency services and initiate a search. 

The trip/float plan includes at a minimum, the following: 
SOP 1 - Safety

82

1. Date and purpose of trip

2. Name of all people on trip

3. Vehicle license plate number(s) and parking location(s) 

4. Destination and route

5. Time of departure and estimated time of return

6. Check-in time for completion of field work

7. Radio frequency or cell phone number

8. Type of watercraft, if applicable

If the trip is cancelled or if the plan changes while in the field, the field team must notify the protocol 

lead or DOS immediately. At the end of the day, field teams must notify the protocol lead or DOS 

that they have returned from the field.

All field teams are responsible for being aware of the time and ensuring that end of day checkins occur on schedule; the protocol lead or DOS will call emergency services if the field team

misses their check-in and cannot be located within 30 minutes of the check-in time.

Personal Gear

Each person is responsible for ensuring he/she is wearing field appropriate clothing and footwear 

such as long pants, a hat and hiking boots. Depending on the weather, rain gear or warm clothing 

should be taken into the field and it is recommended that an extra set of clothing be kept in the 

vehicle. Monitoring staff should take care to avoid over exposure to the sun by wearing sunscreen 

and/or protective clothing. Monitoring staff should always carry ample water (2-3 liters) and food 

when working in the field. Dehydration is a serious condition that can lead to more serious conditions 

if untreated, and should be avoided. It is important to drink liquid frequently to maintain hydration on 

a warm day, even before thirst sets in.

Environmental Conditions

Field work often is necessary under adverse atmospheric and other environmental conditions. Prepare 

for extreme temperature conditions. Before leaving for the field, check the weather forecast. Be 

familiar with temperature-related conditions such as hypothermia and sun exposure including how to 

recognize and treat them. 

Weather

Weather conditions in the eastern U.S. can be hazardous and can change quickly. The field team is 

responsible for planning their day according to the local weather forecast and for being aware of their 

surroundings and changing conditions.

Rain can fall at a rate of several inches per hour and rapidly create dangerous flash flood conditions. 

Use local weather forecasts to plan activities and to ensure safety. Always be aware of rapidly rising 

stages in rivers and creeks. Beware of dry creek beds that can become raging rivers in a short period 

of time.
SOP 1 - Safety

83

Working on ice requires experience, training, and knowledge of the waterbody over which the ice has 

formed. No monitoring staff for this protocol should work on ice.

Thunderstorms

Thunderstorms, which can be accompanied by hail, are common throughout the United States. Some 

are predicted by weather forecasters. Others can move into an area with almost no advance warning. 

Storms that produce strong winds and lightning are dangerous and should be avoided in the field. 

If monitoring in a boat, watch the sky for signs of thunderstorms, and seek shelter by heading to 

shore before the weather deteriorates. If caught in a lightning storm ashore, seek shelter in a building 

or car as soon as possible. If no shelter is available, spread out and move to an open space. Squat low 

to the ground on the balls of your feet with your hands on your knees (do NOT lie flat on the 

ground). Avoid high elevations, conductive materials, and tall structures such as trees or telephone 

poles. If you are in the open and feel your hair stand on end (indicating lightning is about to strike), 

immediately make yourself the smallest target possible and minimize contact with the ground.

NOTE: A person struck by lightning can often be revived by prompt administration of CPR and 

oxygen.

Excessive Heat and Sun

Over exposure to heat and sun can cause dehydration, heat exhaustion, or heat stroke. All are serious 

conditions that can be life threatening, and should be avoided. When working in hot weather, be sure 

to drink plenty of water and eat foods that can replace electrolytes. Wear loose and light colored 

clothing, including a hat to block the sun’s rays. It may help to shift the field schedule to avoid 

working outside during the hottest part of the day. 

WARNING: Signs of heat stroke include hot, red or spotted (usually dry) skin, and the sufferer may 

be mentally confused, delirious, having convulsions, or unconscious. If heat stroke is suspected, seek 

immediate medical attention!

Poor Air Quality

Summer ozone and particulate matter levels occasionally exceed federal health standards. Young 

children, seniors, and those suffering from asthma, chronic bronchitis, chronic obstructive pulmonary 

disease or heart problems are especially sensitive to poor air quality and should minimize outdoor 

activity when poor air quality warnings are posted. The risks of occasional exposure to ozone and 

fine particulate matter are minimal for healthy individuals. 

When poor air quality warnings occur, it is advisable for monitoring staff to avoid overly strenuous 

activity during the hottest part of the day (pollution levels tend to be lowest early in the morning), 

and to stick to lower elevations under a forest canopy. 

To check local air quality forecasts, or learn more about health risks of air pollution, visit the 

AIRNow intergovernmental agency website: http://www.airnow.gov/.
SOP 1 - Safety

84

Surface-water Activities

Safety of monitoring staff is always the first concern in conducting a sampling program and in the 

selection of sampling sites. The desired sampling frequency for most monitoring exposes monitoring 

staff to a variety of potentially hazardous field conditions across all seasons and climatic conditions, 

in addition to unforeseen, potentially catastrophic, short-term natural events (e.g., floods and storms) 

that can occur during the field effort. 

Wading

Examine the section of a stream or river to be waded through. Check any available site notes for 

information relating to safety, including maximum depths in relation to stage, wading-section 

anomalies such as slippery conditions and drop-offs or holes (a wading rod can be used to help assess 

streambed conditions), and velocity curves for determining wadable stages. Do not attempt to wade 

a stream for which values of depth multiplied by velocity equal or exceed 10 ft2/s. For example, a 

stream only 2 ft deep but with velocities of 5 ft/s or more can be dangerous to wade. 

1. Always wear an approved personal floatation device (PFD) when wading in streams. The 

PFD must fit properly, be properly rated for weight, be in good condition, and be kept dry 

and indoors between trips. Whenever chest waders are worn, a PFD also must be worn.

2. Wear hip boots or chest waders. Boots and waders provide protection from cold and 

pollutants, as well as from underwater objects. Be aware of the possibility of slipping and 

going underwater (feet up, head down) while wearing them. Practice wearing hip boots and 

waders in a controlled, group-training situation that includes immersion in a swimming pool 

before using for field work. Avoid hip boots with tight ankles or chest waders that are tight 

fitting at the top. These are difficult to remove in an emergency situation. Hip boots and chest 

waders with a strap that is pulled closed reduce water coming into the boot. 

Watch for debris floating downstream, such as logs, aquatic vegetation, or "rafts" of animals seeking 

higher ground. Watch for sand channels that can shift under foot and become quicksand. Watch the 

stream stage, especially when it could rise rapidly. When wading below a dam or control structure, 

contact the park resource manager or gate operator before entering the stream. 

Working from Boats

All boats must carry equipment as required by the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG). Checklists are useful 

for ensuring that all the proper equipment is in place. Safety regulations for the various types of boats 

used by the NPS when obtaining water-quality samples are comprised of USCG and Occupational 

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) rules.

Before working from a boat, obtain the appropriate training for the vessel being used. NPS staff 

operating motorized watercraft must complete the DOI Motorboat Operator Certification Course 

(MOCC), and keep their certification current. This training will cover all the specifics regarding boat 

operation as per USCG regulations. Before taking a boat on the water, ensure that the vessel is in 

operating condition. Boats are to be inspected annually. If a vehicle is being used to trailer the boat to 

the site, the vehicle and trailer are to be included in the preliminary inspection. Equip the boat with 

all items that the protocol lead deems appropriate for emergencies or equipment failures.
SOP 1 - Safety

85

General Field Safety

Teamwork

Monitoring staff should work in teams (usually pairs) when conducting monitoring activities. When 

using a boat, working in a team is mandatory. Working in a team ensures that if one person is injured 

or incapacitated, another person will be available to respond to the incident. In some situations, it is 

expected that Lower NETN parks will not always be able to provide a second person to assist the 

crew leader at stream sites; in this case the crew leader must use his or her best judgment, and only 

proceed with sampling if the work can be done safely.

Slip, Trip, Fall Prevention

Uneven terrain, slippery rocks, dense brush, and fatigue are all hazards that could result in a slip, trip, 

or fall. The following guidelines should be obeyed by monitoring staff to avoid injury from slips, 

trips, or falls:

 Always wear appropriate footwear such as sturdy hiking boots

 Pay attention to where you are going, and remain alert of potential hazards

 Walk at an appropriate pace and adjust pace for changes in terrain (e.g., slow down and take 

smaller steps on slippery surfaces)

 When hiking long distances, take breaks to avoid fatigue

 When navigating to a location off trail, choose the safest route (this may not be the shortest 

route). Avoid river crossings, excessively steep terrain and sudden drop-offs. Always be 

careful when navigating over piles of scree, and alert others of falling rocks. 

Proper use of Backpacks

Monitoring staff may occasionally be expected to carry ≥ 35 pound packs over uneven terrain, and it 

is important for monitoring staff to understand appropriate ways to pack, lift and carry a heavy 

backpack to avoid serious back, neck and shoulder injuries. Monitoring staff must follow these 

guidelines:

 All monitoring staff are expected to use a sturdy field pack with padded and adjustable hip 

and shoulder straps. Packs will be provided for each field team member. 

 Pack heavy items in the center of the pack and close to your back. 

 Make sure weight is evenly distributed from side to side.

 Once equipment is packed, tighten the compression straps to minimize movement inside the 

pack during travel. 

 When picking up a heavy pack, use your legs to do the lifting, and use slow, smooth 

movements. Keep your back straight, and keep the pack close to your body. Do not twist or 

bend at the waist, and do not swing the pack quickly over one shoulder. 

 Always carry a pack with both shoulder straps and with the hip belt and chest straps secured.
SOP 1 - Safety

86

 The pack should be positioned near the center of the back, and most of the weight should rest 

on your hips.

 Keep your pack organized, and only carry the necessary equipment, food and water to reduce 

weight.

Carrying Other Gear

In addition to backpacks, some gear will be hand-carried (e.g., Hilti drill, wading rod). Whenever 

possible, put heavier items (e.g., drill batteries) into backpacks. If you must hand-carry heavy items, 

remember to slow down and rest frequently to avoid hand and arm fatigue. Any person hand-carrying 

a heavy item should always have one hand free for balance, and so that the item can be shifted 

between hands. If carrying a long item like a wading rod, be careful not to allow it to extend upwards 

and behind you, where it could injure a colleague.

Deer ticks and Lyme Disease

Several species of ticks are commonly encountered in eastern U.S. parks while working in the field

(Figure S1.1). This includes the deer tick (Ixodes scapularis), which is a known vector of Lyme 

disease and Ehrlichiosis. Monitoring staff must take the precautions outlined below to help minimize 

the chances of having an embedded tick that could lead to illness:

 Clothes treated with tick and insect repellents have been found to be fairly effective tick 

repellant. Monitoring staff are strongly encouraged to treat their clothing with permethrin 

prior to conducting monitoring. Monitoring staff should carefully follow the application 

instructions on the spray bottles to ensure their safety. Permethrin will remain active for 

several weeks and through several washings.

 Monitoring staff should take additional precautions to protect themselves from ticks, 

including tucking pants in socks and tucking in shirts. Long sleeves and gaiters (especially 

when treated with permethrin) have been found to help. Monitoring staff may consider other 

barrier devices, such as RynoSkinTM, Under Armor®, elastic bands, and duct tape, when they 

are an option.

 Check clothes and skin for ticks at the end of every field day. Ticks typically need to be 

embedded for at least 24 hours for disease transmission to occur; therefore, the earlier ticks 

are found and removed, the lower your chances are of acquiring a tick-borne illness.

 It is recommended that monitoring staff obtain a specialized tick remover spoon and use it to 

remove embedded ticks. If a spoon is unavailable, use fine-tipped tweezers to firmly grasp 

the tick close to your skin. Slowly and steadily pull the tick’s body away from your skin. Be 

careful not to crush the tick’s body to minimize the chances of it regurgitating fluids into the 

wound. Clean the bite area once the tick is removed with soap and water. 

 NPS staff or NPS volunteers who receive a deer tick bite should notify the protocol lead to

start a worker's compensation CA-1 claim to get a CA-16. 

 Keep an eye out for any early symptoms of tick borne diseases. If you start to notice 

symptoms, use the CA-16 to seek medical attention.
SOP 1 - Safety

87

 Be sure to tell the doctor that you had an embedded tick, and that you regularly come in 

contact with ticks at work. Show the tick, if you saved it.

Signs and symptoms of tick-borne diseases:

 Lyme disease symptoms may include a characteristic "bull's-eye" rash that develops a few 

days or weeks after the tick bite. At the same time, flu-like symptoms such as fever, malaise, 

fatigue, headache, muscle and joint aches appear. Other symptoms may include tingling or 

numbness in extremities, a spotted rash on extremities, bad headaches, high fever, joint 

aches, stiff neck, fatigue, or swollen glands. Ixodes ticks are most likely to transmit infection 

after feeding in skin for 2 or more days.

 Rocky Mtn. Spotted Fever symptoms include sudden onset of fever, headache, and muscle 

pain, followed by development of spotted rash at wrists or ankles.

 Ehrlichiosis symptoms are similar to Lyme disease, but differ with a rapid on-set of fever 

and severe headache and the absence of the rash around the tick bite.

 Babesiosis: Most infected people have no symptoms. For those that do, there is a gradual onset of not feeling well and loss of appetite and fatigue.

 Red Meat Allergy symptoms may include an initial painful, itchy lesion greater than 50mm 

that lasts at least a week after the tick bite. Within 6 months a severe anaphylactic reaction 

may occur as much as 3-6 hours after eating beef, pork or lamb.

Figure S1.1. Tick species found in the eastern US.
SOP 1 - Safety

88

Considerations for using repellents containing DEET:

 DEET products have been widely used for many years; these products have occasionally 

been associated with some adverse reactions. Frequently, reported reactions are about skin or 

eye irritation. There have been reports of central nervous system problems.

 By using products with lower concentrations of DEET and by applying as little of the product 

as needed for your outdoor work, you can reduce your expose to DEET.

 Products with about 20 - 30% DEET are considered effective for most insects, but do not 

seem to be effective against the black-legged or deer tick (Ixodes scapularis) 

 Generally, products with about 20 - 30% DEET are considered safe for adults (except for 

those with allergies to DEET products) when applied as directed.

Considerations for using repellents containing permethrin:

 Products containing permethrin are for use on clothing only – not for use on skin. If 

permethrin is used improperly (e.g., sprayed directly on the skin), it can have negative health 

effects.

 Permethrin kills ticks that come in contact with treated clothing and one application lasts 2

weeks or more. Do not treat the clothing more than once every 2 weeks.

 Carefully read and follow manufacturer’s instructions for application, and refer to the MSDS 

sheet if you have questions.

 Do not apply while clothing is being worn.

 Apply to clothing item in a well-ventilated outdoor area, protected from wind.

 Lightly moisten the fabric with permethrin – do not saturate the fabric.

 Allow clothing item to dry outdoors for at least two hours before wearing (4 hours in humid 

conditions).

 Keep treated clothes in a separate bag for storage and transport.

 Launder treated clothing, separately from other clothing.

More information on permethrin:

http://www.epa.gov/oppsrrd1/REDs/factsheets/permethrin_fs.htm

http://drugsafetysite.com/permethrin/

Prophylactic (preventative) use of antibiotics: 

In addition to treating early stages of Lyme and other tick borne diseases, a new approach involves 

administering antibiotics to prevent Lyme disease transmission from the deer tick. While evidence is 

still preliminary, a single dose of antibiotics may reduce chances of Lyme transmission following a 

deer tick bite if 1) the tick was attached for 24 or more hours, 2) the bite occurred in an area where 

Lyme disease is common, AND 3) antibiotics can be started with 72 hours (3 days) of the time the 
SOP 1 - Safety

89

tick was removed. It is only after symptoms of Lyme develop that a longer duration of antibiotics 

should be administered.

A few things to keep in mind about antibiotic therapy:

According to the US Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control:

 Every time a person takes antibiotics, sensitive bacteria are killed, but resistant germs may be 

left to grow and multiply. Repeated and improper uses of antibiotics are primary causes of 

the increase in drug-resistant bacteria. 

 Misuse of antibiotics jeopardizes the usefulness of essential drugs. Decreasing inappropriate 

antibiotic use is the best way to control resistance. 

 Antibiotic resistance can cause significant danger and suffering for people who have common 

infections that once were easily treatable with antibiotics. When antibiotics fail to work, the 

consequences are longer-lasting illnesses; more doctor visits or extended hospital stays; and 

the need for more expensive and toxic medications. 

More information on Lyme Disease and Ticks:

Center for Disease Control:

http://www.cdc.gov/lyme/

(also a free webinar on tickborne diseases)

American Lyme Disease Foundation:

http://www.aldf.com/

Tick Management Handbook:

http://www.ct.gov/caes/lib/caes/documents/publications/bulletins/b1010.pdf

Poisonous Plants and Animals

Both for safety and protection of park resources, it is never advisable for monitoring staff to eat wild 

plants while working in a National Park, regardless of their confidence in plant identification. 

Monitoring staff should also keep a safe distance from wildlife. 

Poison Ivy

Poison ivy (Toxicodendron spp.) is present in most NETN parks, and can be very abundant in 

localized areas. Abundance of poison ivy is not a justification for excluding a sample site. However, 

if anyone is susceptible to extreme allergic reactions to poison ivy, this person should avoid working 

in areas infested with poison ivy, and all gear that has been near poison ivy needs to be carefully 

cleaned. When working in areas with poison ivy, it is advisable that monitoring staff take precautions 

to avoid skin contact with any part of the poison ivy plant. Using a pre-exposure cream and wearing 

long sleeves and long pants, hats, and work or rubber gloves can help reduce amount of skin contact 

with the plant, and if needed, use poison ivy wipes after contact. Monitoring staff should be careful 

not to rub their faces when working around poison ivy. After working in an area with abundant 

poison ivy, monitoring staff should gently wash exposed skin in cool water with the specially 
SOP 1 - Safety

90

provided poison ivy soap, and should change into fresh field clothes. At the end of a field day, 

monitoring staff should also wash (with cool soapy water) potentially contaminated equipment. If 

someone has a minor allergic reaction, use the provided cream. If a severe allergic reaction occurs, 

the person should seek medical attention, notify the protocol lead as soon as possible, and if an NPS 

employee or NPS volunteer, file a workers compensation claim. 

Venomous Snakes

The following species of venomous snakes may occur in some NETN parks: copperhead 

(Agkistrodon contortrix), and timber rattlesnake (Crotalus horridus). The best course of action is to 

avoid all snakes by keeping them at a safe distance. When in venomous snake country, pay attention 

to where you put your hands and feet, and be aware around rock piles and bedrock outcrops. Note 

that many snake bites are purely defensive, and contain no venom. Bites from immature snakes are 

much more likely to contain a more dangerous amount of venom than bites from adult snakes. 

Should you receive a snake bite from a potentially venomous snake, follow the procedure below: 

 Treat all bites as if envenomation has occurred.

o Time is of the essence

o The field team should assign one person to use the radio or cell phone to call for 

assistance. This person should identify the call as a snakebite incident, and identify 

the victim's location and the closest possible point of access for responders.

o In treating the victim, quickly remove rings, watches, shoes etc., before swelling 

begins.

o Immobilize the bitten limb firmly with a splinted elastic (Ace) bandage and get the 

victim out of the woods and to a hospital as quickly as possible.

o Do not use thin circulation restrictive cords, pack with ice for long periods (more 

than five minutes) or attempt to cut open or otherwise enlarge the fang punctures.

 Reassure the victim that they will be OK and try to remain calm both for the victim and for all 

others involved.

o In a field team situation, begin leading the victim slowly out of the woods as soon as 

the bitten limb has been immobilized. Move as slow as necessary to maintain a 

normal heart rate for the victim. Waiting for assistance will only prolong the 

process of getting proper medical treatment.

o In a solitary situation, establish radio contact and relay the necessary information as 

you walk slowly out of the woods. Focus on remaining calm and maintaining a 

normal heart rate.

 It is better to spend your time getting to proper medical treatment facilities than it is to attempt

field therapy or wait for assistance to reach you.

The range of the copperhead covers the following NETN parks: Morristown NHP (MORR), 

Roosevelt Vanderbilt NHS (ROVA), Saratoga NHP (SARA) and Weir Farm NHS (WEFA). The 
SOP 1 - Safety

91

likelihood of encountering a copperhead is low in NETN parks. Copperhead bites are not typically 

considered life threatening, and in most cases antivenin is not administered. 

The range of the timber rattlesnake covers all NETN parks except Acadia NP (ACAD). This species 

is listed by NatureServe as "critically imperiled" (S1: New Hampshire, Vermont, Massachusetts, and 

Connecticut) or "vulnerable" (S3: New York, Pennsylvania) throughout NETN, and the likelihood of 

encountering a timber rattlesnake in NETN parks is very low. Adult timber rattlesnakes are capable 

of delivering a lethal dose of venom. 

Bees, Wasps, and Yellow Jackets

If any monitoring staff are allergic to bee stings, they should alert the protocol lead and crew leader, 

and make sure to carry appropriate medications. If they carry an epinephrine injector and are working 

in a team, they should make sure all members of their field team know where it is carried. Be alert to 

potential hive and nest locations while hiking to plots and working on plots. Look for insects 

travelling in and out of one location (e.g., brush, ground holes, and hollow logs). If someone is stung, 

Benadryl and a cold compress may bring relief. If stinger is left behind, scrape it off of skin. Do not 

use tweezers as this squeezes the venom sack, worsening the injury. If the victim develops hives, 

asthmatic breathing, tissue swelling or a drop in blood pressure, seek medical help immediately.

Black Bears

Black bears range throughout the Northeast, but an encounter with a bear in the field is not likely 

since bears generally avoid people. Nevertheless, be alert for bears near dawn or dusk, and be 

especially aware of mother bears with cubs. Never approach cubs or come between a mother bear 

and her cubs. If a bear is encountered, face the animal and continually make noise – do not freeze or 

remain silent. Appear larger by standing tall, waving arms or jacket over your head, and slowly back 

away. Never run from a black bear; if charged or attacked, throw objects and shout loudly, and fight 

back aggressively.

Chemicals

Monitoring staff may be routinely exposed to chemicals during the water-quality sampling process. 

Chemicals—as solids, liquids, or gases—range from dilute salt solutions to strong acids, bases, dyes, 

and organic compounds. Virtually all of the chemicals used in this protocol are not hazardous. 

However, field measurements and the processing of sample water can cause chemical reactions that 

generate dangerous fumes and by-products. Crew leaders will identify to members of the field team 

any substances that require special care and handling prior to their use, and will explain and 

demonstrate precautionary measures.

Be cognizant of the regulations that govern the use, transportation, and disposal of chemicals and 

wastes. Because regulations vary greatly from state to state, contact your safety officer or state 

agency for the proper procedures in your locality. Use proper personal protective equipment, and 

apply common sense when working with dangerous substances. Adhere to the following safety 

guidelines:

 Avoid unnecessary exposures and spills. Never place chemical containers where they can be 

knocked over. 
SOP 1 - Safety

92

 Clean up chemical residues or spills immediately and appropriately. Keep chemical spill kits 

near the work area. 

 Work with adequate ventilation or under a hood when working with hazardous or reactive 

chemicals and gases. 

 Keep eye wash kits readily accessible while working with chemicals.

 Handle and mix chemicals and compounds appropriately (check the MSDS). For example: 

when transferring flammable liquids, all metal containers must be grounded to eliminate 

igniting the liquid with an electrical spark. When preparing a hydrochloric or nitric acid 

cleaning solution, the sequence is to put water in the vessel first and then add the acid.

 Open chemical containers slowly and carefully, wearing proper personal protective 

equipment. Open frozen or encrusted lids with caution. For example, to open fused-glass 

ampules, break the ampule at the base of neck, in a direction away from you and others. Use 

an ampule breaker if it is safer for you, and wear latex gloves. Check containers and ampules 

for contents lodged near the container top or neck. Dislodge trapped material by gently 

tapping the container at the top. 

 Properly dispose of all wastes. Do not let any wastes accumulate in your vehicle or work area 

– they can produce corrosive and/or potentially explosive fumes. Do not discard any wastes 

into the environment. 

Vehicle Safety

Responsibilities of NPS Vehicle Operators

Field teams are responsible for inspecting their vehicles before every use to ensure the vehicles are in 

safe working condition. This includes visually checking tire pressure, adjusting mirrors, and making 

sure equipment is secure. Field teams must perform preventative maintenance in a timely manner 

(e.g., having oil changed by a qualified mechanic), and report any potential hazards or needed repairs 

to the protocol lead. 

Rules that must be followed when operating an NPS vehicle:

 Everyone in a government vehicle is required to wear a seat belt. 

 Cell phone use and texting is strictly prohibited while driving. 

 Only NPS employees or authorized volunteers, cooperators and contractors are allowed to 

operate a government vehicle.

 Passengers who are not NPS employees or authorized volunteers, cooperators and contractors 

are forbidden from riding in a government vehicle.

 Drivers must adhere to all federal and state vehicle regulations, including all posted speed 

limits.
SOP 1 - Safety

93

Because government vehicles are self-insured, damage resulting from government vehicle accidents 

are generally paid by the driver’s program (e.g., NETN). However, in cases of severe negligence, the 

driver found at fault for the accident may be personally liable.

GSA Rental Information

Preventative maintenance records are monitored by GSA Fleet. When service is required, the contact 

person for the rental (likely the NETN program manager) will receive an e-mail that identifies the 

maintenance service required and when the vehicle is due for that service. Field teams must have 

requested services performed promptly after the notification.

Procedures for reporting a motor vehicle accident

A copy of this SOP (including all appendices) should be in every NPS and GSA vehicle at all times. 

Note that some procedures are different if vehicles are National Park Service (NPS) owned versus 

Government Services Administration (GSA) owned. Therefore GSA vehicles should also have a 

GSA Motor Vehicle Accident Reporting Kit (GSA Form 1627) in the glove compartment.

In case of automobile accident in a GSA-owned vehicle, locate the GSA Motor Vehicle Accident 

Reporting Kit (GSA Form 1627) in the glove compartment, and follow the instructions therein. Also 

contact Duane Vallee, NETN’s GSA Representative at 603-666-7955. 

In the event of an automobile accident in an NPS-owned vehicle, follow the procedures listed in 

Appendix S1.E to respond to the accident, follow the NER guidelines for reporting an accident 

(Appendix S1.F), and complete the corresponding forms (SF-91 and SF-94) in Appendices S1.G and 

S1.H. Note that this SOP and corresponding appendices address Federal guidelines and requirements 

for accident reporting only. Cooperators and contractors may have additional reporting requirements. 

Contact Information

Northeast Temperate Network:

Brian Mitchell , NETN Program Manager

Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP

54 Elm Street

Woodstock, VT 05091

work: (802) 457-3368 x37

e-mail: brian_mitchell@nps.gov

References and Additional Information

Acadia National Park. 2008. Acadia National Park Health and Safety Program Plan. Internal 

Document # A7619(ACAD-PB). U.S. Department of Interior, National Park Service, Acadia 

National Park, Bar Harbor, Maine.

American Lyme Disease Foundation. 2000. Tick ID Card. Tim Peters and Company Inc., Peapack,

New Jersey.
SOP 1 - Safety

94

Cass, W. 2007. Shenandoah National Park Long Term Ecological Monitoring System. SOP #2, 

version 1.2. U.S. Department of Interior, National Park Service, Shenandoah National Park, 

Luray, Virginia.

Sonoran Desert Network, National Park Service. 2008. SODN Field Safety Plan. Version 6.00. U.S. 

Department of Interior, National Park Service, Sonoran Desert Network Office, Tucson, Arizona.

U.S. Geological Survey, variously dated, National field manual for the collection of water-quality 

data: U.S. Geological Survey Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations, book 9, chaps. A1-

A9, accessed April 28, 2006 at http://pubs.water.usgs.gov/twri9A.
95

Appendix S1.A. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for Water 

Monitoring Field Work

JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS:

JOB TITLE:

Water Quality/Quantity Field Monitor

DEPARTMENT:

Northeast Temperate Network 

ANALYSIS BY:

Elizabeth A. Arsenault, ACAD/NETN 

Physical Science Technician

NEW

REVISED

REVIEWED

William G. Gawley, 

ACAD/NETN Biologist

Required and/or Recommended Personal Protective Equipment:

Required: At least two methods of communication (i.e., park radio and cell phone in most parks; Personal 

Locator Beacon as backup), driver’s license, personal flotation device (PFD), throw-bag lifeline, first aid kit.

Recommended as appropriate: Rain gear, condition-appropriate gloves, footwear and clothing, safety glasses, 

sunglasses, sunscreen, insect repellent, sufficient food and water.

Tasks Potential Hazards Recommended Action or Procedure

Planning and 

Communication

Not being prepared and following 

plan/itinerary.

Communication breakdowns.

Plan ahead. Know where you will be going, the 

stream, lake or pond to be monitored, and any 

particular hazards associated with the monitoring 

site. Check the weather forecast and plan 

accordingly.

Check in with DOS prior to field work with a trip plan, 

and after field work to confirm the work is safely 

completed. Contact the DOS with any changes, 

including cancellation of field work. If return will be 

delayed, contact DOS before agreed-upon check-in 

time to establish a new check-in time.

Always carry at least two methods of 

communication, and verify that they are full charged

before starting field work.

Emergency 

Preparedness

Not knowing emergency 

procedures.

Not having emergency supplies.

Know who to contact and how to reach them in the 

event of a life-threatening or non-life-threatening 

emergency. 

Have directions to emergency medical facilities

Have current CPR and first aid certification.

Carry a well-maintained first aid kit.
Appendix S1.A. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for Water Monitoring Field Work (continued)

96

Tasks Potential Hazards Recommended Action or Procedure

Working outdoors 

during storms

Being struck by falling trees or 

branches; being struck by lightning; 

being caught on lakes during high 

wind and wave conditions; being 

caught in flash floods/high 

streamflow

Listen to the weather forecast each morning (park 

radio and/or internet).

Plan or adjust field work to avoid being out in 

thunderstorms. Water monitoring is never conducted

during thunderstorms. 

If you see or hear a thunderstorm coming, retreat 

from high ground and exposed areas. Go inside a 

sturdy building or vehicle, if possible.

If you can’t get inside and if you feel your hair stand 

on end, lightning is about to strike. 

Make yourself the smallest target possible and 

minimize contact with the ground. 

Crouch down on your pack on the balls of your feet 

and keep your feet close together. Place your hands 

on your knees and lower your head.

During a thunderstorm, members of the field team

should stay separated by at least ten feet.

Postpone lake or pond monitoring when excessive 

wind speeds or whitecaps exist.

Postpone work if safety will be compromised by 

storm and/or flooding conditions.

Working in heat, 

humidity, or cold

Heat exhaustion, sunburn, 

dehydration, hypothermia

Evaluate the weather forecast each morning and 

plan field work accordingly.

Carry and drink plenty of water.

Take extra breaks during extreme weather events.

Adjust the work routine to minimize exposure to 

extreme heat and humidity.

Take adequate garments for all possible weather 

conditions. Choose clothing that will keep you warm 

even if it gets wet.

Wear sunglasses to avoid eye damage.

Apply sunscreen and lip balm.

Hazard trees Being struck by falling trees or 

branches

Look up. Be alert for widow-makers, storm damaged 

trees with large broken limbs, and unstable standing 

dead trees.

Do not spend extended time in an area with hazard 

trees.

Poisonous plants, 

especially poison 

ivy 

Contamination/toxicity from contact 

with poisonous plants

Learn to identify poison ivy in its many growth forms.

Wear long sleeves and pants.

Be aware of poison ivy and avoid coming in direct 

contact with it.

Thoroughly wash hands, equipment, and clothes 

with Tecnu or similar specialized soap if you come 

into contact with poison ivy.
Appendix S1.A. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for Water Monitoring Field Work (continued)

97

Tasks Potential Hazards Recommended Action or Procedure

Bee, wasp, or 

yellow-jacket 

stings

Multiple stings from disturbing or 

stepping into nest areas

Be alert to hives in brush, ground holes, or hollow 

logs. Watch for insects traveling in and out of one 

location.

If you are allergic to bee stings, tell your partner (if 

working in a pair). Make sure you carry emergency 

medication with you at all times and that your partner 

(if applicable) knows where you keep it.

Wear long sleeve shirts and trousers, tuck in shirt.

Bright colors and metal objects may attract bees or 

wasps.

If you are stung, a cold compress may bring relief.

If stinger is left behind, scrape it off of skin. Do not 

use tweezers as this squeezes the venom sack, 

worsening the injury.

If the victim develops hives, asthmatic breathing, 

tissue swelling or a drop in blood pressure, seek 

medical help immediately.

Bites from 

mosquitoes,

black flies, and 

other insects

Itchy reactions to multiple bites Wear long sleeves and pants.

Avoid sitting on the ground or on logs, especially in 

dry sunny grassy areas.

Use insect repellants. Do not apply Permethrin, 

Permanone, or greater than 30% DEET directly to 

skin, only to clothing.

Carry after-bite medication to reduce skin irritation.

Ticks Contracting diseases transmitted 

from ticks

Use tick avoidance precautions, including pretreating clothing with Permethrin, tucking pants into 

socks and shirt into pants when hiking. 

Wear clothes (including pants and long-sleeved 

shirts) that are light colored and check for ticks on 

clothing after traveling through vegetation.

Conduct a thorough tick check every evening after 

completing field work.

Know how to identify tick life forms, and the signs & 

symptoms of tick-borne diseases.
Appendix S1.A. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for Water Monitoring Field Work (continued)

98

Tasks Potential Hazards Recommended Action or Procedure

Venomous 

snakes

Being bitten by a venomous snake Venomous snakes are rare in NETN parks. 

Be alert for snakes in thick vegetation and rocky 

habitats.

Look before putting hands or feet in places out of 

immediate view.

Treat all bites as if envenomation has occurred.

Immobilize the bitten area and keep it lower than the 

heart.

Apply a bandage, wrapped two to four inches above 

the bite, to help slow the venom. This should not cut 

off the flow of blood from a vein or artery - the band 

should be loose enough to slip a finger under it.

Remove rings, watches, shoes, etc. before swelling 

begins in earnest.

Seek medical attention immediately and/or call for 

help. Remain calm.

Rattlesnake bites are more likely to be lifethreatening.

Working in bear 

territory

Black bear encounter Be especially alert near dawn or dusk.

Be especially aware of mother bears with cubs.

Never approach cubs or come between a mother 

bear and her cubs.

Face the animal, continually make noise – do not 

freeze or remain silent.

Appear larger by standing tall, waving arms or jacket 

over your head.

Slowly back away – do not approach a bear.

Never run from a bear.

Throw things and shout loudly.

Fight back aggressively.

General foot 

travel

Falling or tripping due to wet areas, 

poor footing, uneven terrain, 

loose/rolling rocks and heavy pack. 

Use caution at all times. Walk carefully, watching 

footing.

Wear appropriate boots for conditions. Stay aware of 

your feet. Address blisters and hot spots promptly.

Avoid carrying excessive weight loads or 

unbalanced loads.

When walking on a steep slope, lean upslope.

Ensure that stems and vines are alive and can 

support your weight before relying on them.

Use extreme caution traversing wet rocks, streams, 

steep slopes or blowdown areas. 
Appendix S1.A. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for Water Monitoring Field Work (continued)

99

Tasks Potential Hazards Recommended Action or Procedure

Walking through 

thick vegetation

Cut, scratched, or bruised by 

vegetation; eye or ear injuries

Shield your eyes and face with your hands, glasses, 

or hat when moving through tall thick brush. Keep 

your head and eyes pointed somewhat downward so 

your head hits obstacles before your eyes.

Wear pants and long-sleeved shirts to protect bare 

skin. 

Look before you grab vegetation to avoid grasping 

thorny stems. 

Do not follow closely behind other people to avoid 

having branches snap back and hit you.

Carrying a pack 

and other 

equipment

Injuries from improper packing, 

adjustment, and lifting of backpacks.

Injuries from improper carrying of 

gear

Learn how to properly pack, adjust, lift, and carry a 

pack.

When hand-carrying gear, keep one hand free.

If carrying long equipment, be aware of other people 

and never swing around quickly. Avoid allowing a 

long piece of equipment to project up and behind 

you, where you cannot see it.

Working in

streams

Injuries from slipping, tripping, falling 

and/or drowning, upstream and 

downstream hazards, such as dam 

releases, downstream rapids or 

outlet into large river

Attend wader safety training.

Wear PFD when wading, and have throw bag 

available.

Check with park resource manager about upstream 

conditions such as scheduled or other releases from 

impoundments, or construction.

Be aware of downstream conditions such as swift 

water or rapids, or confluence into a large river. 

Do not monitor a stream if the velocity x depth is 

greater than 10 ft2/sec.

Conduct a visual inspection of stream site for 

potential hazards.

Wear appropriate foot gear for stream monitoring. To 

ensure safety and to stay dry, use the appropriate 

knee boot, hip, or chest wader.

If crossing a stream, unbuckle your pack and be 

prepared to jettison gear should you lose your 

balance or fall in.

Be aware of shifting sandy bottoms, slippery rocks, 

and holes between rocks. Be aware of and avoid 

underwater hazards such as snags, trash, broken 

glass and rusted metal.

Use a sturdy pole or walking stick for balance.
Appendix S1.A. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for Water Monitoring Field Work (continued)

100

Tasks Potential Hazards Recommended Action or Procedure

Working from a 

boat

Injuries from improper carrying of 

boat, motor and other equipment, 

falling and/or drowning, equipment 

malfunctions

Do not overload boat with people or equipment.

Wear PFD when working in and around water and 

have throw bag available.

Attend the one-time DOI Motorboat Operations

Certification Course (MOCC) and refresher training 

every 3 years.

Attend canoe and wader safety training and 

refreshers.

Learn how to properly lift and carry a boat and 

motor. Consider using canoe dolly to transport boat 

if possible.

Have motor inspected each year prior to monitoring 

season and fire extinguisher inspected monthly.

Regularly check inflatable boat for leaks. 

Conduct a visual inspection of boat launch and 

surrounding area for noticeable hazards.

Maintain a low center of gravity, especially in 

canoes. Use extreme caution when standing in 

canoes and small boats.

Use caution when reaching overboard to obtain 

samples, retrieve the anchor, etc. and know selfrescue techniques.

Calibrating 

instruments and 

other lab work

Injuries from slips, trips, and/or 

falling, chemical spills and exposure

Attend hazard communications training, which 

includes proper labeling procedures, use of MSDSs, 

spill procedures and emergency lab procedures.

Obtain training to ensure proper equipment use 

techniques.

Utilize lab ventilation and wear proper personal 

protective equipment (PPE) when using chemicals.

Keep lab or other workspace clean and uncluttered. 
101

Northeast Temperate Network 

Please sign your name below to certify that you have read the Job Hazard Analysis and fully 

understand the Safety Standard Operating Procedures for the NETN water quality monitoring 

protocol.

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

Print Name:___________________ Signature:____________________ Date:______________

103

Appendix S1.B. Green-Amber-Red Analysis (GAR) for Water 

Monitoring Field Work

This appendix describes application of the GREEN-AMBER-RED (GAR) Risk Assessment Model 

as outlined in the NPS Operational Leadership Student Manual (Version 2; July 2011) to the NETN 

Lake, Pond, and Stream Monitoring Protocol. This GAR was written by the Acadia Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader (Elizabeth Arsenault) and William Gawley (Water Monitoring Protocol 

Lead) on 29 March 2012 and approved by the NPS Northeast Region I&M Program Manager (John 

Karish) on April 2012

The GAR model allows for a general assessment of a task or operation and generates communication 

concerning the risks of an activity (in this case, conducting the field-based activities of the NETN 

Lake, Pond, and Stream Monitoring Protocol). The most important parts of the process are the team 

discussions leading to an understanding of the risks and how they will be managed. 

The GAR analysis is a seven step process. Each step is defined and explained in the context of the 

NETN Lake, Pond, and Stream Monitoring Protocol below.

Step 1: Define the Mission or Task

The NETN Water Monitoring protocol includes two field-based monitoring activities: stream 

monitoring while wading, and lake monitoring from a boat or lake’s edge. Monitoring staff are part 

of two-person field teams who work independently from each other. One field team samples in 

ACAD, and one team samples in Lower NETN. The activity may be conducted away from roads and 

trails but no site includes a hike more than 30 minutes from the parked vehicle. 

Step 2: Define the Threats

The threats/hazards for this activity along with mitigation measures are described in the associated 

JSA (Appendix S1.A). Of specific concern is that monitoring staff will regularly be working on 

uneven and possibly slippery streambed surfaces. In lakes and ponds, staff will be working from a 

canoe or inflatable boat or at the water’s edge. A fatality through drowning or a severe slip and fall is

possible and is the most significant risk encountered when conducting this activity.

Step 3: Assess Risk and Assign a Numerical Value

The numerical ranks (Error! Reference source not found. S1.B.1) were assigned by Elizabeth 

Arsenault, the Acadia Water Monitoring Crew Leader, and William Gawley, the NETN Water 

Monitoring Protocol Lead. NETN staff reviewed the ratings and analysis and their suggestions were 

incorporated. It should be noted that at the time final numerical values were assigned (April 2012),

the protocol had been implemented for several years and considerable time and effort had already 

gone into evaluating and mitigating risks.

The activity risk can be visualized using the colors of a traffic light. If the total risk value falls in the 

GREEN ZONE (1-35), risk is rated as low. If the total risk value falls in the AMBER ZONE (36-60), 

risk is moderate and you should consider adopting procedures to minimize the risk. If 
104

the total value falls in the RED ZONE (61-80), you should implement measures to reduce the risk 

prior to starting the event or evolution.

The ability to assign numerical values or “color codes” to hazards using the GAR Model is not the 

most important part of risk assessment. The critical steps in the process are team discussions leading 

to an understanding of the risks and how they will be managed.

Table S1.B.1. NETN Water Monitoring Protocol assigned risk codes of 0 (For No Risk) through 10 (For 

Maximum Risk) to each of the eight Green-Amber-Red Risk Assessment elements.

Element Rating

Supervision 2

Planning 2

Communication 2

Contingency Resources 5

Team Selection 3

Team Fitness 3

Environment 6

Event/Evolution Complexity 6

Total Risk Score 29

Step 4: Identify Risk Control Options

Supervision

The NETN Lake, Pond, and Stream Protocol clearly identifies personnel, roles and responsibilities, 

and a chain of command. The NETN protocol lead is responsible for the safety of both the Acadia 

and Lower NETN (LNETN) field teams and is available to answer questions from all monitoring 

staff during normal operational hours (i.e., 8:00 am to 4:30 pm, Monday-Friday). The crew leaders at 

Acadia and in the LNETN are the safety officers for their respective field teams, and conduct a daily 

briefing to ensure that safety procedures are explained, understood, and followed. If a crew leader is 

not present in the field, the next most senior crew member is the designated safety officer. All 

monitoring staff are required to work with a partner in the field. Monitoring staff are required to 

follow check-in procedures with the NPS staff at their assigned park. Additionally, there is a NPS 

Safety and Environmental Protection Specialist stationed at Acadia who is available for consultation 

and who provides safety training for all staff based in the park. A score of 2 was assigned due to the 

availability of on-site supervision and the fact that the team is not large, and work is conducted in 

pairs with regular check-ins.

Planning

The NETN Lake, Pond, and Stream Protocol includes numerous SOPs that explain hiring, training, 

personal safety, emergency communication (equipment and contacts), and appropriate field activities. 
105

Crew members are required to review these materials during training, and crew members are 

encouraged to have first aid and CPR training. Due to this advance planning, written documentation, 

and training procedures, a low score (2) was assigned.

Communication

Routine and emergency communication equipment and procedures are explained in manuals and 

instructions supplied with the equipment. Contact information for appropriate park staff and 

emergency services, and most effective communication methods for each park and sample site are 

provided during training at the beginning of the season and reviewed upon arrival at each park. 

Communication includes early coordination by the crew leader with park natural resource managers, 

rangers, and dispatch at least one month in advance of a visit to schedule field assistance and 

logistics. Daily monitoring and sampling plans are agreed upon and communicated to all crew 

members and the protocol lead at the beginning of the day. A daily check-in procedure is in place for 

the field team to ensure that a responsible party knows if someone has not returned from the field 

activity in a timely manner. Due to this advance planning, written documentation, and training 

procedures, a low score (2) was assigned.

Contingency Resources

Contingency resources include communication equipment and procedures that explicitly involve park 

rangers, park dispatch, and 9-1-1. Crew members must always have at least two modes of 

communication (park radio, cell phones, and/or Personal Locator Beacon). Acadia crews are assigned 

park radios and have access to park cell phones, and Lower NETN crews are assigned a park cell 

phone and a park radio. Notification of emergency services should happen within minutes of an 

incident, but emergency services may not be able to reach the crew quickly due to the remoteness of 

some sites. A score of 5 was assigned instead of a lower score because of the potential delay before 

emergency services could reach the crew. This score was also assigned because neither crew 

currently has access to a Personal Locator Beacon or SPOT GPS Messenger, and cell reception is not 

always reliable in ACAD.

Team Selection

The monitoring protocol clearly identifies the essential skills and abilities required to execute this 

protocol in a competent manner. Prior experience with sampling water chemistry and performing 

field work is required for most team members. Each year before the field season, permanent ACAD 

and LNETN staff attend a refresher training as well as training on new or modified activities. 

Seasonal employees entering duty later in the season and temporary field assistants in the LNETN 

receive on-site training by the crew leader while monitoring if they are unavailable for pre-season 

training. This is due to the long field season (April through October) and limited hours available for 

seasonal employees. A score of 3 was assigned (instead of a lower score) because some crew 

members may have limited experience and a lack of extensive pre-season training. Learning job 

skills in the field can distract from attention to safety issues, even though a review of hazards and 

safety practices is conducted at the beginning of each site visit.
106

Team Fitness

Team selection seeks to strive for an overall high level of initial team fitness. Water monitoring field 

teams are in the field for approximately six hours per day at ACAD (not including drive times) and 

up to eight hours per day (not including drive times) in the LNETN. Teams may be required to hike 

several miles through rough terrain and work during harsh weather conditions (i.e. high 

heat/humidity, cold, and rain). Team members are instructed to carry adequate water and food, rain 

gear, and changes in clothes, as there is a potential to get wet while working in, near, or on the water.

Team members also check daily weather forecasts and the crew leader has the option to adjust the 

daily field schedule during days with high heat, high humidity, high air pollution, or other hazardous 

weather conditions. Sampling always occurs during daylight hours. A score of 3 was assigned 

because the shifts are not long, even though the work can be strenuous. Monitoring staff must be 

diligent about adequate rest and nourishment to ensure that fatigue does not become a factor.

Environment

Environment was assigned a higher score (6) primarily because of the inherent dangers associated 

with working in streams and on lakes or ponds. Streams often have a very uneven and slippery 

substrate, and caution is needed to avoid slipping and falling in this environment. Activities occur 

during a variety of weather conditions, but are cancelled during thunderstorms and high winds. The 

crew leader is responsible for deciding when to cancel field activities due to weather or otherwise 

hazardous conditions. The protocol lead may also call off field activities, and will communicate 

decisions to field teams through the crew leader. Unexpected encounters with dangerous wildlife are 

possible (e.g., black bears, venomous snakes, etc.), mostly at the LNETN parks. Despite training, 

working in pairs, and using a life vest on lakes/ponds and streams the possibility exists for an 

individual to slip and be rendered unconscious, potentially leading to a drowning. 

Incident Complexity

Incident complexity was assigned a higher-medium score (6) because daily field conditions vary 

constantly due to weather, and water conditions (waves, currents, flash flooding) can change quickly 

and unpredictably. Individual monitoring staff must use judgment and experience to respond 

appropriately. In addition, field teams can be (or perceive themselves to be) under considerable 

pressure to complete the field workload within stringent time intervals to accommodate water sample 

holding times and shipping requirements, and travel schedules. These administrative and operational 

pressures may tempt field teams to become careless or work longer hours, which can lead to 

accidents and injury caused by fatigue. The protocol lead must communicate regularly with field 

teams and adjust schedules or program goals if they cannot be accomplished or achieved safely. 

Step 5: Evaluate Risk vs. Gain

The NETN Water Monitoring Protocol Lead has determined that the activity, if carried out in 

accordance with all SOPs, has an acceptable level of risk.

Step 6: Execute Decision

The decision made by the NETN Water Monitoring Protocol Lead is to conduct the activity in 

accordance with NETN Lake, Pond, and Stream Monitoring Protocol Standard Operating Procedures 

(SOPs).
107

Step 7: Supervise – Watch for Change

The NETN Water Monitoring Protocol Lead continually solicits feedback from all members of the 

water monitoring field team on safe execution of the protocol, including risk control options not 

considered thus far.

109

Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each 

park.

Acadia National Park – Headquarters

Directions to nearest hospital start at the Headquarters building (A) in Acadia National Park and 

end at the Mount Desert Island Hospital (B) in Bar Harbor, Maine. Destination is 1.6 miles and 

five minutes away:

Phone Number: (207) 288-5081.

Location: 10 Wayman Lane, Bar Harbor, ME 04609

Directions:

1. Head East (turn right) on Eagle Lake Road/ ME- 233 toward Arata Drive. Continue to follow 

ME-233 for 1.3 miles

2. ME-233 turns right and becomes Main St./ ME -3. Continue for 0.2 miles.

3. Turn left at Wayman Ln. MDI Hospital will be on the left (115 ft). 

Figure S1.C.1. The route from Acadia NP Headquarters to the Mount Desert Island Hospital in Bar 

Harbor, Maine.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

110

Acadia National Park – Seawall

Directions to nearest health clinic start at the Seawall Park Housing (A) in Acadia National Park 

and end at the Community Health Center (B) in Southwest Harbor, Maine. This clinic has been 

good for treating Lyme disease, but does not have emergency services. Destination is 2.3 miles and 

four minutes away:

Phone Number: (207) 244-5630.

Location: 9 Village Green Way, Southwest Harbor, ME 04679

Directions:

1. Head east on ME-102 Alt N/Seawall Road toward Seascape Ln for 2.2 miles.

2. Turn right onto ME-102 N/ Main St. and go 0.7 mi.

3. Turn left onto Village Green Way and go 0.1 mi. Community Health Clinic is at 9 Village 

Green Way.

Figure S1.C.2. The route from Acadia NP Seawall Park Housing to the Community Health Center in 

Southwest Harbor, Maine.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

111

Acadia National Park– Schoodic

Directions to nearest health clinic start at the Schoodic Education and Research Center Entrance

(A) in Acadia National Park and end at the Eleanor Eidener Dixon Memorial Clinic (B) in 

Gouldsboro, Maine. Destination is 11.5 miles and 24 minutes away.

Phone Number: (207) 963-4066.

Location: 37 Clinic Road, Gouldsboro, ME 04607

Directions:

1. Head south out of parking lot and go about 240 feet.

2. Take the 1st left and go 0.1 miles.

3. Turn left toward Moore Rd and follow 3.3 miles.

4. Continue straight onto Moore Rd for 1.5 miles.

5. Turn left onto ME-186 W/Main St and proceed 0.6 miles.

6. Turn right onto ME-186 W/Newman St and follow for 6.0 miles.

7. Continue onto Clinic Rd and go 0.1 miles. Clinic will be on the left.

Figure S1.C.3. The route from Schoodic Education and Research Center (A) in Acadia National Park to 

Eleanor Widener Dixon Memorial Clinic (B) in Gouldsboro, Maine.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

112

Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller National Historic Park

The nearest hospital to Woodstock, Vermont is Dartmouth Hitchcock Medical Center (DHMC) in 

Lebanon, New Hampshire, and is about 22 miles and 31 minutes away. Directions to nearest 

hospital start at the Billings Farm parking lot (A) in Woodstock, Vermont and end at the 

Dartmouth Hitchcock Medical Center (B) in Lebanon, New Hampshire:

Phone Number: (603) 650-5000

Location: 1 Medical Center Drive, Lebanon, NH.

Directions: 

1. From the Billings-Farm parking lot, turn left at the Y onto Elm Street/ VT-12. Continue for 

0.4 miles.

2. Turn left at Pleasant St./ VT-12. Continue for 0.6 miles.

3. Turn left at US-4/VT-12/Woodstock Rd. Continue to follow US-4 for 9.4 miles.

4. Turn right and go 0.1 miles. 

5. Take the ramp onto 1-89 South and go 8.1 miles.

6. Take exit 18 for NH-120 toward Hanover and go 0.2 miles.

7. Turn left at Centerra Pkwy/Lahaye Drive and continue on Lahaye Drive for 0.5 miles.

8. Turn right at the Hitchcock Loop Road/ Medical Center Drive and continue for 0.3 miles.

9. Turn left at DHMC East Entrance, and turn right to stay on DHMC East Entrance. 

Figure S1.C.4. Route from Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NPS in Woodstock, Vermont to Dartmouth 

Hitchcock Hospital in Lebanon, New Hampshire.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

113

Minute Man National Historic Park

Directions to nearest hospital start at the Brooks Village parking lot (A) on 2A (N Great Road) in 

Minute Man National Historical Park, and end at Emerson Hospital. Destination is 4.7 miles and 

about 7 minutes away.

Phone Number: (978) 287-3690 (Hospital) or 978-287-3690 (Polo Emergency Center)

Location: 133 Old Road to Nine Acre Corner, Concord MA 01742

Directions: 

1. Head northwest on Massachusetts 2A W/N Great Rd toward Bedford Ln. Continue to follow 

Massachusetts 2A W. Continue for 4.6 miles.

2. Turn left onto Old Road to 9 Acre Corner. Continue for 433 feet.

3. Turn left. Continue for 0.1 miles.

4. Destination will be on the right.

Figure S1.C.5. Route from Minute Man NHP Brooks Village parking lot in Concord, Massachusetts to 

Emerson Hospital.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

114

Morristown National Historic Park

Directions to nearest hospital start at the Jockey Hollow Visitor Center (A) in Morristown National 

Historic Park, and end at Morristown Memorial Hospital (B). Destination is 6.5 miles and about 18 

minutes away:

Phone Number: (973) 971-5000.

Location: 100 Madison Ave, Morristown, NJ 07962.

Directions: 

1. Head northwest on Cemetary Rd. toward Sugarloaf Rd. Continue 1.2 miles.

2. Turn left at Sugarloaf Rd. Continue 1.3 miles

3. Turn left on Jockey Hollow Rd. Continue 0.8 miles

4. Continue on Western Ave. Continue 1.9 miles.

5. Turn right on NJ-24/ Washington St. Continue 0.2 miles.

6. Continue on NJ-53/ South St. for 0.7 miles.

7. Turn slight left at Madison Ave/ NJ-53. Continue 0.5 miles. Destination is on the left.

Figure S1.C.6. Route from Morristorn NHP Jockey Hollow Visitor Center to the Morristown Memorial

Hospital, both in Morristown, New Jersey.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

115

Roosevelt-Vanderbilt National Historic Sites (ELRO, HOFR, VAMA)

Directions to nearest hospital start at the Visitor Center parking lot (A) at the Home of FDR 

National Historic Site, and end at St. Francis Hospital (B). Destination is 4.8 miles and about 9 

minutes away:

Phone Number: (845) 483-5000.

Location: 241 North Road, Poughkeepsie, NY 12601.

Directions: 

1. Head south on Albany Post Rd./ Rte-9/ US-9 toward Kessler Dr. Continue for 3.7 miles.

2. Turn left onto Delafield St. Continue for 0.2 miles.

3. Turn left onto Spruce St. Continue for 308 ft.

4. Spruce St. turns right and becomes Talmadge St. Continue for 0.2 miles.

5. Turn left at NY-9G/ Washington St. Continue for 0.4 miles.

6. Destination is on the right side of Washington St.

Figure S1.C.7. Start point at Home of FDR NHS Visitor Center parking lot. 

Figure S1.C.8. End point at St. Francis Hospital.

Figure S1.C.9. The entire route.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

116

Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site (Option 1)

Directions to nearest hospital start at the Visitor Center parking lot (A) at Saint-Gaudens National 

Historic Site, and end at Mount Ascutney Hospital (B). Destination is 3.8 miles and about 10 

minutes away:

Phone Number: (802) 674-6711.

Location: 289 County Road, Windsor, VT 05089.

Directions: 

1. Head southwest on St. Gaudens Rd. toward NH-12A/ NH Rte 12A/ Wilson Rd. Continue for 0.6 

miles.

2. Take a slight left at NH-12A/ NH Rte 12A/ Wilson Rd, and continue for 1.5 miles.

3. Turn right onto Bridge St. and continue for 0.3 miles.

4. Turn left on State St. and go 0.7 miles.

5. Turn right at County Rd. and go 0.3 miles. 

6. Destination is on the left side of County Rd. 

Figure S1.C.10. Option 1 route from Saint-Gaudens NHS Visitor Center parking lot to Mount Ascutney 

Hospital.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

117

Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site (Option 2)

An alternative to Mount Ascutney Hospital is the Dartmouth Hitchcock Medical Center in Lebanon, 

New Hampshire. For injuries that are not life-threatening, DHMC is the better option. Directions to 

DHMC start at the Visitor Center parking lot (A) at Saint-Gaudens National Historic Site, and end at 

Dartmouth Hitchcock Medical Center in Lebanon, NH (B). Destination is 19.5 miles and about 33 

minutes away:

Phone Number: (603) 650-5000 

Location: 1 Medical Center Drive, Lebanon, NH.

Directions: 

1. Head southwest on St. Gaudens Road toward NH-12A/NH Route 12A/ Wilson Rd. Continue for 1 

mile.

2. Turn sharp right at NH-12A/NH Route 12A/ Wilson Road, and continue on NH-12A for 11.4 

miles.

3. Merge onto I-89 S via the ramp to Concord/Lebabon and go 3.8 miles.

4. Take exit 18 for NH-129 toward Hanover and go 0.2 miles. 

5. Turn left at Centerra Pkwy/Lahaye Drive and continue on Lahaye Drive for 0.5 miles.

6. Turn right at the Hitchcock Loop Road/ Medical Center Drive and continue for 0.3 miles.

7. Turn left at DHMC East Entrance, and turn right to stay on DHMC East Entrance.

Figure S1.C.11. Option 2 route from Saint-Gaudens NHS to Dartmouth Hitchcock Medical Center.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

118

Saratoga National Historic Park

Directions to nearest hospital start at the Saratoga National Historic Park entrance on NY- 32 (A),

and end at Saratoga Hospital (B). Destination is 11.6 miles and about 24 minutes away.

Phone Number: (518) 587-3222

Location:.211 Church Street, Saratoga Springs, NY 12866

Directions: 

1. Turn right onto NY-32 N and go 0.8 mi.

2. Turn left onto Co Rd 71 and go 1.5 mi.

3. Turn right onto Sweer Rd. and go 1.4 mi.

4. Continue on Nielson Road for 0.9 mi.

5. Turn right onto Chapman Hill Rd and go 0.5 mi.

6. Continue onto Fitch Rd.

7. Turn right onyo New York 9P N and continue 2.2 mi.

8. Turn right onto Gilbert Rd. and go 1.3 mi.

9. Turn left onto Lake Ave. and go 2.1 mi.

10. Continue onto Church Street. After 0.6 mi, destination will be on the right.

Figure S1.C.12. Route from Saratoga NHP entrance on NY-32 to Saratoga Hospital.
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

119

Weir Farm National Historic Site (Option 1)

Directions to nearest hospital start at Weir Farm National Historic Site on Nod Hill Road (A), and 

end at Danbury Hospital (B). Destination is 12.2 miles and about 22 minutes away.

Phone Number: (203) 739-7000

Location: 24 Hospital Avenue, Danbury, CT 06810

Directions:

1. Exit park North onto Nod Hill Road. Head North on Nod Hill 

Road toward Pelham Ln. Continue for 0.7 miles.

2. Turn right at Old Branchville Rd, and continue 0.5 miles

3. Turn right at Branchville Rd/CT-102, and continue 0.3 miles.

4. Turn left at Danbury Norwalk Rd/US-7 Continue to follow US-7 

for 8.6 miles

5. Take the exit onto 1-84 E/ US-7 N toward New

Milford/Waterbury and continue for 1.7 miles.

6. Take exit 5 toward CT-37/Bethel/CT-39/CT-53. Go 0.2 miles.

7. Merge onto Downs St. and go 0.7 miles.

8. Continue on CT-37/North St. / Rte-37 for 0.7 miles

9. Turn right at Hayestown Avenue and go 0.3 miles.

10. Turn right at Tamarack Avenue and go 0.6 miles.

11. Turn left at Hospital Avenue.

Figure S1.C.13. Route from Weir 

Farm NHS to Danbury Hospital

Figure S1.C.14. End point at Danbury Hospital
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

120

Weir Farm National Historic Site (Other options)

WEFA has requested that we also include Norwalk Hospital, which is the same distance away:

1. Exit park South onto Nod Hill Road- Follow Nod Hill Road down to the end where it meets 

with CT-33.

2. Take a left on CT-33 S/Ridgefield Rd and follow it down to US-7

3. Take a right onto US-7 S for about 3.5 miles and follow signs toward Norwalk until you 

come to a traffic light with the D.M.V. on your left and the Interstate 95 connector on your 

right.

4. By this time you will see blue hospital directional signs on your right – take right then left to 

get onto connector .

5. Follow the connector south to Exit #1(again, look for blue hospital sign) go left at the end of 

the exit onto VanBuren St.- then at second light take right onto Maple St.- hospital is on the 

left.

Urgent care centers in Norwalk and Ridgefield are closer and can handle most situations where 

monitoring staff would be transporting someone (as opposed to an ambulance):

Urgent Care of Norwalk 

346 Main Ave.

Norwalk, CT 06851

Phone: (203) 846-0005 Fax: (203) 846-0012

1. Head south on Nod Hill Rd toward Granite Dr (2.0 mi) 

2. Turn left to stay on Nod Hill Rd (1.3 mi) 

3. Turn left onto CT-33 S/Ridgefield Rd (2.0 mi) 

4. Turn right onto CT-33 S/US-7 S/Danbury Rd (1.2 mi) 

5. Slight right onto US-7 S/Danbury Rd. Continue to follow US-7 S (2.0 mi) 

6. Continue onto Main Ave. Destination will be on the left (1.4 mi) 

Urgent Care of Ridgefield 

10 South Street

Suite 101

Ridgefield, CT 06877

Phone: (203) 431-4600 Fax: (203) 431-4601

1. Head north on Nod Hill Rd toward Pelham Ln (443 ft) 

2. Turn left onto Pelham Ln (0.9 mi) 

3. Turn right onto Whipstick Rd (0.2 mi) 

4. Continue onto Nod Rd (1.4 mi) 
Appendix S1.C. Directions to nearest hospital from each park (continued).

121

5. Continue straight onto Branchville Rd (1.2 mi) 

6. Turn right onto Main St (1.0 mi) 

7. Turn right onto Danbury Rd (0.3 mi) 

8. Take the 2nd right onto South St. Destination will be on the right (171 ft)

123

Appendix S1.D. Workers compensation procedures for each 

park, Version 1.1.

Workers compensation procedures

March 21, 2012

Human Resources contacts for workers compensation are Cecelia Neugebauer (410-962-4290), the 

NER regional contact; and Carol D. Moore (202-619-7297), the contact for NER/NCR combined. A 

useful resource on Worker’s Compensation is the NPS 2007 Supervisor’s Guide to Worker’s 

Compensation.

EXTREMELY IMPORTANT: Make sure that the employee gets prompt medical treatment, if 

medical attention is needed. If the injury is life-threatening, the employee should be taken to an 

emergency room immediately; the paperwork can wait. For non-life-threatening injuries, it is OK to 

issue a CA-16 and CA-17 before the on-line information is entered.

IMPORTANT: Makes sure the employee sees a doctor, not a nurse, nurse practitioner, or physician’s 

assistant. The Worker’s Compensation Program tends to deny payment when a doctor is not seen, 

according to Frank Alvarez (7/11/2008).

Initial Reporting

If the injured person is a volunteer, Cecelia Neugebauer will likely need to set up a profile for them 

in SMIS. A volunteer who is a foreign national (and does not have a social security number) will 

need to be processed on paper; Frank will need to help with this as well.

1. If an employee has an accident or other workers compensation incident (e.g., bitten by a deer 

tick), the first step is for them to report the incident. THIS MUST BE DONE WITHIN 48 

HOURS, AND MUST BE DONE FOR EACH INCIDENT. Note that if there is a recent 

claim in the system for this employee, he or she may not be able to start a new report. 

Contact Cecelia Neugebauer for assistance.

2. Go to https://www.smis.doi.gov, and click on Accident Reporting.

3. Click on “File a Worker’s Compensation Claim (CA1/CA2)”.

4. Log in using your last name and the last four of your Social Security Number

5. Enter your e-mail address if needed, then click “Verify E-mail and Request a Claim ID”. This 

can be any e-mail address that you have regular access to.

6. Check your e-mail to get your claim ID, then enter the claim ID in the box on the web site.

7. Verify or input all information requested on the next page. Tick bites would be an 

injury/traumatic injury rather than an occupational disease or illness.

8. On the next page, enter the details that are asked for, including date, location, and cause and 

nature of injury.
124

9. Fill out the employee certification. I have not been able to get solid guidance on this, but 

apparently checking “Continuation of Regular Pay (COP)” will allow employees to claim 

doctor’s visits and other lost time due to the incident as regular pay (i.e., not use sick or 

annual leave). This box should probably be checked. Make sure to read all the statements, 

10. and click the check box that you have read the statements. Then click “Complete your claim 

submission”.

11. Make sure to send a note to your supervisor. Don’t forget to include the claim number

generated by the system. He or she will need to enter information into the same system 

12. about your report, and will also need to issue the CA-16 form that you will need to bring to 

any doctor’s appointment.

Once the employee fills out the CA-1 or CA-2, the supervisor needs to go into SMIS (Safety 

Management Information System) to fill out the supervisor portion of the form. The supervisor 

should receive an automated message from the SMIS system.

1. Go to https://www.smis.doi.gov, and click on Accident Reporting.

2. Click on “Perform All Supervisor Safety Activities”, and click “Proceed”.

3. Log in using your last name and the last four of your Social Security Number

4. Enter your e-mail address if needed, then click “Submit/Verify your E-mail Address”. This 

can be any e-mail address that you have regular access to.

5. Choose “Complete the supervisor section of a CA-1 or CA-2” and click “Perform”.

6. Enter the Claim Identifier provided by the employee, and click “Submit”.

7. Fill in the Supervisor’s Report and Certification, and click “Submit”. Each box has hyperlinked help if you have any questions about what is needed. 

8. Fill in the additional information requested about the supervisor’s investigation into the 

accident, and click “Submit”.

9. Next, print and sign the CA-1, and also have the employee sign the CA-1. Keep the form on 

file in the employee’s local personnel file.

10. Print the OSHA Form 301, and save this with the CA-1

Fill out form CA-16. The CA-16 MUST be issued within seven days of the incident. DO NOT post 

this form on any web site; it should not be accessible to employees (it was described as a “blank 

check” by Carol Moore).

1. Fill in blocks 2 through 14. Box 1 can be filled in by the employee.

2. NOT CLEAR on whether tick bites require OWCP approval (box 7). 

3. Cecelia Neugebauer will fill in box 12 at a later date.
125

Fill out form CA-17. This form is available at http://www.dol.gov/libraryforms/go-us-dolform.asp?FormNumber=367. It is the supervisor’s statement about the injury, and information about 

the employee’s job. 

1. Fill out all information on Side A.

2. On page 2, supply the agency address (e.g., network mailing address). Cecelia Neugebauer 

will supply the OWCP address at a later date.

Give the CA-16 and CA-17 to the employee. The employee will need the doctor to fill in the back of 

form CA-16 (boxes 15 – 39), side B and address on page 2 of form CA-17, and return the form to the 

employee. Things to keep in mind:

1. Employees need to ask the doctor’s office whether they accept federal Worker’s 

Compensation BEFORE they go for their appointment.

2. Employees should be provided with the information at 

http://www.dol.gov/esa/owcp/dfec/regs/compliance/infoinjuredwrkers.htm.

3. Employees should provide the information at 

http://www.dol.gov/esa/owcp/dfec/regs/compliance/infomedprov.htm to the doctor. Among 

other things, the doctor must be aware that they are responsible for signing up in an online 

system (ACS) in order to be paid for the Worker’s Compensation case.

If possible, a typed medical summary (from the doctor’s office) should be attached to the medical 

form; at the very least, employee should ensure that doctor’s responses on the CA-16 are legible.

When the employees return forms CA-16 and CA-17 to you:

Everything needs to go to Cecelia Neugebauer. Keep copies and send her the originals at the address 

below. 

Cecelia R. Neugebauer

National Park Service/Northeast Region

Central Servicing Human Resources Office

2400 E. Fort Avenue

Baltimore, MD 21230-5393

(410) 962-4290 x111 (voice)

(410) 962-2182 (fax)

Other important information

Use this link to find forms used by OWCP: 

http://www.dol.gov/owcp/dfec/regs/compliance/forms.htm

Employees can use this link for tracking the progress of their claim:

http://owcp.dol.acs-inc.com/portal/main.do

Jim Comiskey compiled information about billing from a series of interactions with Frank Alvarez 

(previous OWCP contact). The document covers information on billing for the employee, and 

information on billing for doctors, hospitals, and pharmacies.
126

Alternative Work Assignment (AWA)

1. If the doctor says that the employee cannot return to regular work, then it is important to set 

up an Alternative Work Assignment for the employee. 

2. Use the AWA template to describe the alternative work assignment. The Supervisor’s Guide

has a filled-out example.

3. Use the AWA physician letter template to create a letter to the employee’s doctor.

4. Use the AWA employee letter template to create a letter to the employee.

5. Send the above documents to the employee, along with a copy of their PD. Copy Frank 

Alvarez on the e-mail.

6. The employee should return to the doctor with the AWA, physician letter, PD, and CA-17, 

and discuss the alternative work assignment with the doctor. The doctor will need to sign off 

on the AWA or make suggestions.

7. Once you receive the doctor’s input, discuss the AWA with Frank Alvarez, to ensure that the 

AWA is within the doctor’s restrictions before the employee returns to work.

Time sheets

Make sure that the employee’s time sheet is filled out correctly to reflect any lost time due to the 

injury; this is required under FECA, the Federal Employees Compensation Act. 

1. Time lost on the day of injury due to a traumatic injury is coded as Administrative Leave 

(060).

2. Lost time (“Continuation of Pay” or COP) after the day of injury includes time spent going to 

doctor’s appointments, physical therapy, or time the employee is not able to work due to the 

injury. 

3. Record the amount of hours lost due to the injury on the employee’s time sheet using the 

appropriate code. NOTE: Frank Alvarez (7/11/2008) recommended claiming the full day that 

has any time lost as COP. Even if the employee only spends 1 hour at a doctor’s 

appointment, he thought that the full day should be coded COP. This advice seems to run 

counter to the pay code information that Carol Daye supplied: “Code the T&A Record with 

the actual number of hours absent.”

4. If the employee is unable to work for a period that includes lieu days, use the codes for 

Unpaid COP on each lieu day.

5. Continuation of Pay codes:

a. 160 – FECA/COP Paid (1st Occurrence)

b. 164 – FECA/COP Paid (2nd Occurrence)

c. 166 – FECA/COP Paid (3rd Occurrence)

d. 168 – FECA/COP Paid (4th Occurrence)
127

e. Other codes are available for 5th through 11th occurrences; starting at 16L

f. My assumption is that an “occurrence” is any time related to a specific accident or 

injury. So if an employee has a tick bite and then sprains an ankle, you’d use the 

“first occurrence” codes for the tick bite and the “second occurrence” codes for the 

sprain.

6. Unpaid Continuation of Pay codes:

a. 161 – FECA/COP Unpaid (1st Occurrence)

b. 165 – FECA/COP Unpaid (2nd Occurrence)

c. 167 – FECA/COP Unpaid (3rd Occurrence)

d. 169 – FECA/COP Unpaid (4th Occurrence)

7. Other codes are available for 5th through 11th occurrences; starting at 16M

8. There are separate codes for “Light Duty” work, but the NPS 2007 Supervisor’s Guide says 

to use code Regular Hours (010) for “Light Duty” or an AWA.

Revision Log

June 26, 2009 – Added a paragraph about handling injured volunteers.

January 7, 2010 – Added section “Other important information”.

March 21, 2012 – Changed NPS OWCP contact to Cecelia Neugebauer.

129

Appendix S1.E. Instructions for responding to an automobile 

accident in an NPS-owned vehicle.

1. Stop immediately and turn on emergency flashers.

2. Take steps to prevent another accident at the scene.

3. Call 911 or ambulance if necessary.

4. Notify police, NPS law enforcement and your supervisor.

5. In the event of death, actual or potential serious injury, or significant property damage 

(damage greater than $2,500), the employee involved must immediately notify the NER 

Regional Tort Claims Officer (TCO), Cyrille Young (215-597-7701), in addition to their 

supervisor.

6. In reporting an accident, employee should state the facts to the best of her/her knowledge. 

Conclusions as to fault or responsibility should not be stated. The employee should report 

the accident only to authorized representatives of the Government, the employee’s insurance 

company, and police officers investigating the accident. The employee shall also file any 

report required by law.

7. Get name and address of witness (preferably two witnesses). Ask witness to complete 

Standard Form (SF) 94, Statement of Witness, contained in vehicle glove compartment.

8. State/provide your name, address, place of employment, name of your supervisor, and upon 

request show your driver’s license and vehicle registration information.

9. Complete Standard Form (SF) 91, Motor Vehicle Accident Report at the scene. If conditions 

prevent this, make notes of the following:

a. Registration information for other vehicle(s) (owner’s name, owner’s address, tag 

number, VIN, and vehicle description)

b. Information on other drivers (name, address, operator’s permit, and expiration date)

c. Name and address of each person involved and extent of injury, in any.

d. Name and address of company insuring other vehicle(s) and insurance policy number

e. General information such as location, time, measurements, weather, damage, etc.

10. Encourage police to provide a Police Report and, if available, submit a copy with SF 91.

11. If you have a camera, take pictures of the accident scene and any damage to the vehicles 

involved. Submit along with SF 91.
Appendix S1.E. Instructions for responding to an automobile accident in an NPS-owned vehicle. 

(continued).

130

12. If vehicle is unsafe to operate, arrange for a towing services and pay for these services on 

vehicle charge/gas card.

13. Submit all reports and data to your supervisor within one working day. 

14. If federal employee is injured, workers compensation process needs to be initiated within 48 

hours of incident. Supervisor will assist with this process. It is important for injured 

employee to receive prompt medical treatment. Make sure the employee sees a doctor, not a 

nurse, nurse practitioner, or physician’s assistant.

15. Supervisor will submit copies of all reports and data to the employee’s regional TORT 

Claims Officer (TCO) [Cyrille Young 215-597-7701] as soon as possible but no later than 10 

calendar days after the accident.

Accident/collision reports should be filed for:

1. All motor vehicle accidents involving federally owned or leased vehicles and employeeowned or rented vehicles while being used on official business, regardless of the amount of 

damage.

2. All public/visitor accidents will be reported on a SF-91 when a government-owned vehicle is 

involved, government property is damaged, fatality occurs, medical treatment is required 

and/or a reasonable possibility of a tort claim is expected.

3. Thefts and Vandalism should be reported to Park Law Enforcement Officials rather than 

reported on SF-91.

4. Reporting Multiple Vehicle Accidents – when a privately owned vehicle damages 

Government property, two reports (SF-91) are required: one report for the Government 

property and one for the private operator.
Appendix S1.F. Northeast Region accident/incident reporting process (continued).

131

Appendix S1.F. Northeast Region accident/incident reporting 

process.

Northeast Region

Tort Claims – Accident/Incident Reporting Process

Regional office employees travel on official government business and may be injured and/or 

involved in a motor vehicle accident while in travel status. Use this checklist to ensure all required 

report information is gathered and proper notifications have been made immediately following an 

injury and/or accident that may result in a possible tort claim against the Government in accordance 

with Departmental Manual, Part 451, Claims.

REPORTING GUIDELINES

□ Employees will immediately report any incident or accident involving a private person or 

private property which may give rise to a tort claim against the Government.

□ In the event of death, actual or potential serious personal injury or significant property

damage the employee involved will immediately notify his or her supervisor and the 

Regional Tort Claims Officer (TCO), Cyrille Young (215-597-7701).

□ Employee supervisor will immediately follow up with the regional TCO to ensure the 

employee report was received and determine if additional information is needed.

□ Damage to a government motor vehicle (GMV), as defined by Reference Manual 50B, 

Occupational Safety and Health Program as any vehicle owned, leased, rented or otherwise 

acquired for official purposes, or to private property resulting from GMV operation will be 

reported immediately as described above. 

□ Standard Form (SF) 91, Motor Vehicle Accident Report, and SF 94, Statement of Witness, as 

necessary must be completed for all motor vehicle accident cases and promptly submitted to 

the regional TCO. These forms should be printed and kept with you while on official 

government travel when operating a GMV. Copies of all accident reports will be furnished to 

the employee’s regional TCO as soon as possible but no later than 10 calendar days after the 

accident.

□ In reporting an accident, employee should state the facts to the best of his/her knowledge. 

Conclusions as to fault or responsibility should not be stated. The employee should report the 

accident only to authorized representatives of the Government, the employee’s insurance 

company, and police officers investigating the accident. The employee shall also file any 

report required by law.

□ If an employee involved in an accident carries liability insurance which may cover the 

employee or the Government, the employee shall report the accident to the insurance 
Appendix S1.F. Northeast Region accident/incident reporting process (continued).

132

company and shall also furnish the regional TCO a copy of the insurance policy together with 

applicable endorsements and amendments.

DEFINITIONS

Government Motor Vehicle: Any vehicle owned, leased, rented or otherwise acquired for official 

purposes.

Incident: An event involving National Park Service employees or other personnel directly 

supervised by the NPS, that results in a near-hit, injury, illness, fatality, damage to government 

property, or damage to other property being used for government business.

Minor Incident/Accident: An event involving National Park Service employees, or other personnel 

directly supervised by the NPS, that results in: 

1) Injury or illness requiring only first-aid treatment (per OSHA definition) and is not otherwise 

a recordable injury/ illness; and/or 

2) Property damage of less than $2,500.

NPS Employee: All NPS employees, or other Federal, State, or local agency employees under NPS 

supervision/jurisdiction, and/or contractors and volunteers directly supervised by NPS or under NPS 

jurisdiction.

Significant Property Damage/Operating Loss Incident: Incidents that result in property damage or 

operating loss from $2,500 up to, but less than $250,000.

Serious Accident: An incident involving National Park Service employees, or other Federal, State, 

or local agency employees under NPS supervision/jurisdiction, and/or contractors and volunteers 

directly supervised by NPS (e.g. volunteers, SCA, emergency workers, etc.), that results in:

1. One or more work-related fatalities, or imminently fatal injuries or illnesses; 

2. Hospitalization of three or more employees from a single occurrence;

3. Property damage under Departmental/NPS control, and/or operating loss of $250,000 or 

more; and/or consequences that the NPS Designated Agency Safety and Health Official 

(DASHO) or the Regional Designated Safety and Health Official (RDSHO) judges to warrant 

investigation under the serious accident investigation procedures.
133

Appendix S1.G. SF-91 Motor Vehicle Accident Report.
Appendix S1.G. SF-91 Motor Vehicle Accident Report (continued).

134
Appendix S1.G. SF-91 Motor Vehicle Accident Report (continued).

135
Appendix S1.G. SF-91 Motor Vehicle Accident Report (continued).

136
137

Appendix S1.H. SF-94 Statement of Witness. 
Appendix S1.H. SF-94 Statement of Witness (continued).

138

SOP 1 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN 

standard

1.00 2006 N/A Initial version. Originally numbered SOP 5

3.00 December 

2011

Bill Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Re-numbered as SOP 3 to increase prominence.

Added and adapted much of Safety SOP from 

NETN Forest Monitoring and Landbird Monitoring 

Protocols.

Expanded sections on water-based activity safety.

Added Appendices containing JHA and GAR

Aquatic 

Protocol v2.02 

safety SOP 

inadequate.

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits for clarity

New directions and info for hospital near MIMA, 

per Lou Sideris (MIMA)

Internal review

3.02 August 2013 E. Sharron Minor grammatical and edits

Renumbered as SOP 1 for consistency with other 

NETN protocols.

NETN 

standards
139

SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting 

Monitoring Sites

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

This SOP details the requirements and procedures for physically establishing a freshwater monitoring 

site and the documentation of the site’s geographic location and characteristics.

Background and Inventory of Streams 

The physical and morphological characteristics of stream channels and basins in NETN are compiled 

or collected and entered into the NETN water database (NETN_H2O) before a given stream is 

monitored. Watershed area, contributing (upstream) watershed area, basin geologic composition, and 

elevation data are obtained from current GIS and other data clearinghouses. In many cases, and 

particularly at historical monitoring sites, this information has already been documented in park data 

records, or those of cooperating agencies. The accuracy of these records should be verified against 

modern data layers whenever possible. 

Cumulative watersheds are one of several physical characteristics compiled and entered into the 

NETN water database (NETN_H2O) and represent the geographic extent from which surface water 

may have traveled to reach the monitoring site. Periodicity, flood attenuation, chemical buffering 

capacity, nutrient load, contaminants, invasive species, and water volume are just a few of the 

metrics that can be better understood when viewed from a cumulative watershed context. Cumulative 

watershed information for all ACAD stream and LNETN stream and pond monitoring sites were 

modeled in 2013. Cumulative watershed areas can be found in Tables S2.1 and S2.2 below. 

Geospatial data (cumulative watershed boundaries) can be obtained from the DataStore 

(https://irma.nps.gov/DataStore/Reference/Profile/2204539) or can be viewed in Google Earth Park 

Modules (http://science.nature.nps.gov/im/units/netn/googleMaps/googleEarth_NETN.cfm).

Modeling procedures can be found in SOP 20 – Calculating Cumulative Watersheds for Water 

Monitoring Sites.

With cumulative watershed modeling complete, verification and updating of the remainder of the site 

attributes is planned for FY 2016. This SOP will be updated with more specific information and 

procedures once they are available, including data sources and the Hydrologic Unit Code (HUC) 

level (or other definition) used for “watershed” and data processing steps (e.g., determination of 

basin geologic composition). Potential data sources include: USGS HUC map, USGS or NPS 

geologic map, and National Hydrology Dataset (NHD) layers. 

This morphological information in NETN_H2O is supplied, like the monitoring data, to the EPA

STORET database via NPSTORET or EQuIS. When the morphological data in NETN_H2O are 

updated, these data will be transferred to STORET in the next export cycle. 
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

140

Table S2.1. Cumulative watershed areas for ACAD stream monitoring sites. 

Park Primary Waterbody Pour point

Area

sq. km acres

Acadia NP Aunt Betty Pond Inlet/Gilmore Meadow Outlet ACABIN 2.5 612.9

Breakneck Brook ACBRKB 3.7 921.5

Browns Brook ACBRWN 1.2 292.6

Eagle Lake Inlet/Bubble Pond Outlet ACBUBO 2.1 510.7

Cadillac Stream ACCADS 0.6 153.8

Duck Pond Brook/Inlet to Long Pond ACDKLI 0.5 119.1

Duck Brook - N. of Rt 233 ACDUCK 9.6 2,378.8

Duck Brook - Outlet of Eagle Lake ACEGLO 9.5 2,357.7

Hadlock Brook (Upper Hadlock Pond) ACHADB 0.5 125.6

Hunters Brook ACHNTR 3.5 874.7

Heath Brook ACHTHB 2.5 614.7

Jordan Stream/Jordan Pond Outlet ACJRDO 3.1 767.9

Kebo Brook ACKEBO 2.0 491.6

Lake Wood Outlet ACLKWO 1.5 381.1

Lurvey Spring Brook/Inlet of Echo Lake ACLSIE 1.6 406.3

Lurvey Brook ACLVYB 0.4 94.0

Man O'War Brook ACMOWB 0.8 208.7

Marshall Brook ACMRSL 5.2 1,288.2

Otter Creek ACOTRC 5.6 1,372.6

Sargent Brook ACSGTB 0.7 170.5

Stanley Brook ACSTNL 3.7 922.7
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

141

Table S2.2. Cumulative watershed areas for LNETN pond and stream monitoring sites.

Park Primary Waterbody Pour point

Area

sq. km acres

Marsh-Billings Rockefeller NHP Pogue Pond MABIPA 0.4 89.0

Pogue Brook MABISA 1.0 245.8

Minute Man NHP Mill Brook MIMASA 406.6 100,463.3

Elm Brook MIMASB 1.59 392.47

Concord River MIMASC 860.7 212,688.7

East Primrose Brook MORRSA 0.5 117.7

Primrose Brook MORRSB 2.8 690.7

West Primrose Brook MORRSC 0.8 186.7

Indian Grove Brook MORRSD 5.6 1,390.4

Passaic River MORRSE 10.9 2,695.9

Roosevelt-Vanderbilt NHS's FDR Brook Tributary ROVASA 0.3 70.9

FDR Brook ROVASB 1.4 335.5

Upper Crum Elbow Creek ROVASC 49.1 12,135.5

Lower Crum Elbow Creek ROVASD 50.5 12,467.8

Maritje Kill ROVASE 7.8 1,924.4

Fall Kill ROVASF 32.2 7,995.3

Saint-Gaudens NHS Blow-Me-Down Pond SAGAPA 72.8 17,987.3

Blow-Me-Up Brook SAGASA 4.0 991.9

Blow-Me-Down Brook SAGASB 67.7 16,737.6

Saugus Iron Works NHS Saugus River SAIRSA 58.3 14,398.8

SAIR Turning Basin SAIRSB 58.6 14,472.5

Saratoga NHP Kroma Kill SARASA 17.4 4,295.6

Upper Mill Creek SARASC 2.3 576.2

Lower Mill Creek SARASD 7.6 1,865.9

American's Creek SARSB 1.0 245.3

Weir Farm NHS Weir Pond WEFAPA 0.2 54.9
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

142

Background and Inventory of Lakes and Ponds

The physical and morphological characteristics of all lakes and ponds in NETN are compiled or

collected and entered into the NETN water database before a given lake or pond is monitored. If

available, bathymetric data, surface area, maximum depth and location, perimeter, inlet and outlet 

locations, watershed area, basin geologic composition, and elevation data are entered.

All of the long-term trend sites in ACAD have bathymetric maps with the maximum depth location 

and sampling site identified (https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/2207910). The data source 

for these maps is the Maine Department of Inland Fisheries and Wildlife web site:

http://www.maine.gov/ifw/fishing/lakesurvey_maps/index.htm (Maine Department of Inland 

Fisheries and Wildlife, 2012). Lacking historical maps, bathymetric maps were created for all three 

LNETN pond sites during the winters of 2012-13 and 2013-14. The waterbodies were gridded and 

plumbed to collect depth data at a sufficient spatial density to derive a bathymetric model. Geospatial 

data, maps, and methods used for LNETN ponds can be obtained from the DataStore 

(https://irma.nps.gov/App/Reference/Profile/2207910) or can be viewed directly in Google Earth 

Park Modules (http://science.nature.nps.gov/im/units/netn/googleMaps/googleEarth_NETN.cfm). 

New bathymetric maps will take several years to complete at ACAD (target completion FY 2018). 

This SOP will be updated with more specific information and procedures during the 2016 update, 

including data sources and the Hydrologic Unit Code (HUC) level (or other definition) used for 

“watershed” and data processing steps. Potential data sources include: USGS HUC map, USGS or 

NPS geologic map, Digital Elevation Models (DEM), and National Hydrology Dataset (NHD) layers. 

Establishing a Stream Site

Site selection 

Although a core panel of stream monitoring sites was selected during the original development of 

this protocol (following the process detailed in the narrative section entitled General Sampling 

Design in Streams), occasionally sites must be relocated or new sites have to be established for 

logistical or administrative reasons. If a site has to be relocated to ensure better access or safer 

monitoring conditions, more consistent streamflow, or for other reasons, the new site should be 

located as close as possible to the original to ensure consistency and comparability of the water 

quality and quantity data measured at the two locations.

If conditions influencing the original and relocated sites are markedly different (e.g. shift from 

upstream to downstream of a major road, introduction of streamflow from a tributary), the new 

location should be assigned a new site code, and considered a “new” site. Even if the relocated site is 

not assigned a new site code, the new location and morphology data, as well as the reason for the 

move and any other pertinent information, should be documented in the NETN water database and 

the protocol narrative.

If a totally new site is established (in a new network park, or additional area of concern), it should be 

selected using the same criteria as the original sites, which are documented in the General Sampling 

Design in Streams section in the narrative of this protocol. When selecting a new site, strong

consideration should be given to reactivating a historic monitoring site, if available.
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

143

Establishing site infrastructure

As explained in SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data, each stream monitoring site should 

have a permanent datum point for measuring stream stage in order to establish and maintain a stagedischarge rating for the stream. Also, continuous dataloggers to record temperature and water level 

can be deployed to increase the resolution of physical data for the stream. Each of these infrastructure 

items should be installed as soon as possible after establishment of the site and maintained according 

to the following procedures. All details of the establishment and maintenance of infrastructure for 

each site are documented in a Site Record Form containing site sketches and photos, locations and 

descriptions of datum and reference points, elevation summary tables, and level-summary tables.

Installing stream stage measurement points

Establish tape down sites in pools that can be measured at a range of flows and that have a single 

stable controlling feature at their outflow. The measurement point (“tape-down point”, “tape-up 

point”, or “datum”) can be a hole drilled in bedrock or other solid object in which a bolt has been 

installed, or a metal or fiberglass staff gage or plate bolted to a secure post or bridge abutment. A 

range of one to three additional stable reference points should also be established and maintained, 

depending on site characteristics. Set reference marks in boulders, bedrock or manmade structures 

that are anchored below the frost line and marked for easy identification. These reference points are 

used to determine whether the measurement point has shifted, and should ideally be within line-ofsight of the measurement point to facilitate use of an autolevel. If necessary, reference points can be 

placed such that both the reference point and the measurement point can be seen from a third location 

(where the autolevel will be placed).

Rock and concrete can be drilled with a portable impact (“hammer”) drill using hardened masonry 

bits. A small (3/4” to 1” long) stainless steel hex head bolt is inserted into a 1⁄4” diameter hole using a 

plastic anchor. Leave a flat portion of the bolt head on top (when bolts are installed in a vertical

surface) to provide a horizontal line to which to measure. NOTE: Be sure to consult park staff before 

drilling into structures to avoid damaging important cultural resources.

Staff gages should be either bolted to a permanent structure like a bridge abutment or pier, or 

securely fastened to a free-standing metal post that has been driven deep into the stream bed to 

minimize movement from frost, ice, or high streamflow. Free-standing staff gages should be installed 

plumb (vertically level), and periodically (i.e., annually or after a flooding event) checked for plumb 

with a carpenters level. If the staff gage is out of plumb, it must be reset and then surveyed with an 

autolevel to determine the new datum.

After installing a stage measurement benchmark, document the location by obtaining GPS 

coordinates (in decimal degrees) of the datum, and a general elevation (using a RTK GPS or 

barometric altimeter – NOT a standard GPS unit). Also obtain coordinates for all supplemental 

reference points, and take photos (both close up and in context) of the datum and all reference points. 

Draw a site sketch documenting the relative locations of the benchmark and reference points to 

geographic and morphological features of the site. Perform an initial survey of all points (using an 

autolevel) to determine the exact differences in elevation for the site records. The procedure in which 

surveying instruments are used to determine the differences in altitude between points is known as 
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

144

“leveling” and is described in detail in Kennedy (1990). The use of an autolevel to determine relative 

elevations is described in the Cape Cod Long-Term Hydrologic Monitoring Protocol (Medeiros 

2011; section 2.3.5.2). In this protocol, SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites specifically 

documents the use of a Sokkia SDL30 or SDL50 Digital Level with a bar code staff to level water 

monitoring sites. Document all datum and reference point levels on the level-summary table of the 

Site Record Form.

Deploying continuous dataloggers

When possible, continuous water level and/or temperature loggers should be securely mounted to the 

stream bed near the stage datum point, or (preferably) mounted to the same permanent submerged 

structure as the datum or stream gage. This arrangement provides better opportunities for comparing 

automated and manual measurements for quality control purposes, and also consolidates the 

equipment in one physical area.

Mounting techniques will vary depending on the types and models of dataloggers employed, but 

generally the equipment can be fastened to the appropriate substrate with bolts or heavy duty, UVstabilized plastic cable ties. In streams, a “stilling well” will be needed so that flow over the logger 

does not lead to erroneous water level data. Consult the manufacturer’s operation manuals for 

specialized mounting instructions.

When determining a mounting location, use care to select an area in which the logger will remain 

submerged in all flow levels. Avoid areas with heavy, turbulent streamflow which can affect the 

accuracy of the measurements as well as threaten the security of the mounting system. Try to find 

mounting locations that will be accessible to field crews for maintenance and data downloads during 

a wide range of flow levels, and that meet the same surveying requirements as other benchmark 

locations.

Be sure to record the serial number of each logger in the Site Record Form before deployment. After 

installation, take photos of the loggers in situ, and record coordinates and survey the elevation as for 

the stage measurement datum. Add the logger location(s) to the site sketch, and also note the time 

and date the datalogging routine was initiated.

Take tape-up or tape-down measurements at all available datum points and compare to the logger 

water level measurement to determine the relative elevation of the logger to the datum points: 

ElevationLogger = QmDatum – QmLogger + ElevationDatum (where QmDatum is the water level 

measurement from the datum point, and is a negative number if the datum is above the water,

and QmLogger is the water level measurement from the logger).

The relative elevation difference between the datum and the logger should be checked at each 

monthly site visit to determine if the logger has moved during the previous sampling interval. This 

elevation difference can be checked by looking for a change in the value of Qmdatum – Qmlogger. 

Values of Qmdatum – Qmlogger calculations from previous site visits are recorded on the stage 

calculation worksheet on page 2 of the Site Record Form. 
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

145

Maintaining stream stage measurement points

The datum point, reference marks, and any other infrastructure (e.g., loggers or staff gages) should be 

surveyed (“leveled”) every year to ensure that the datum point or infrastructure has not shifted in 

elevation over time. The supporting structures of the gage, such as backings, shelters, bridges, and 

other structures, tend to settle or rise as a result of earth movement, frost action, static or dynamic 

loads, vibration, or battering by floodwaters and flood-borne ice or debris. Vertical movement of a 

structure makes the attached gages read too high or too low and, if the errors go undetected, can lead 

to increased uncertainties in streamflow records. 

It is the responsibility of the crew leader to ensure that all stage measurement points are leveled 

annually. The level information is entered in the level-summary table of the Site Record Form 

maintained for each site. A level-results table, which shows the results of each set of levels at a 

station by year, is also maintained in the NETN_H2O database. 

A datum can have supplementary marking using paint, or another method such as a plastic tab, to aid 

re-identification. These markings should be inspected and reapplied as necessary at each site visit, 

especially at the beginning and end of each monitoring season. Check the graduations and other 

markings on staff gages to ensure they are intact and legible. Replace the staff gage if necessary. The 

elevation of the stream level logger should be checked at every site visit.

Establishing a Lake or Pond Site

Site selection 

The same caveats outlined in the section on stream site selection apply to lakes and ponds. Although 

there is generally little need to relocate a lake or pond site, new sites may have to be established if 

new parks join the monitoring network or as a result of a review of the sampling design. As discussed 

in the section on stream site selection, if a new lake or pond site needs to be established, it should be 

selected using the criteria detailed in the General Sampling Design in Lakes and Ponds section in the 

narrative of this protocol. Again, strong consideration should be given to reactivating a historic 

monitoring site, if available.

Establishing and maintaining site infrastructure

Lake and pond monitoring sites should have permanent datum points for measuring water levels 

(stage), and can also employ continuous dataloggers to record temperature and water levels. 

Installation, documentation, and maintenance procedures for these infrastructure items are similar to 

the procedures outlined in the previous sections for stream sites. Lake stage datum points require 

only one associated reference mark for annual elevation verification.

The deepest point (“deep hole”) of a lake or pond is the preferred monitoring location in these 

waterbodies. It may be difficult and time consuming to locate the deep hole of some larger lakes, 

even with the aid of bathymetric maps and GPS coordinates. In these cases, a small buoy (attached 

by a stout line to a cinder block) can be deployed at the deep hole in the beginning of the monitoring 

season to ensure easy relocation and a secure point to tie off the boat or canoe during monitoring 

sessions. Field crews should consult with park staff and/or other local authorities before installing 

buoys, and all buoys should be clearly marked as “NPS-NETN Water Monitoring Site”.
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

146

Site Documentation

Thorough documentation of qualitative and quantitative information describing each water 

monitoring site is required. This documentation, in the form of a site description and photographs, 

provides a permanent record of site characteristics, structures and facilities, equipment, 

instrumentation, altitudes, location, and changes in conditions at each site. 

Site descriptions

A site description is prepared for each monitoring site, and becomes part of the permanent record for 

each site. The site description is started at the time the site is established and completed when the 

first year's records are computed. Site descriptions are written and updated by the field personnel that 

normally monitor the site. Site descriptions are reviewed and updated annually.

The description should include a sketch or diagram of the stream section showing the location of all 

stage and reference marks and measuring locations (or a lake/pond depth map marked with the deep 

hole and stage monitoring site locations); photos of the stream cross-section most commonly 

measured and upstream and downstream views from this point (or a 360 degree panorama photo 

series from the deep hole), and a description of the site in paragraph format. The physical and 

morphological information detailed in the first two sections of this SOP can also be included in the 

site description. All site descriptions are prepared and maintained in the NETN_H2O database as 

well as in notebooks to be used as field references.

Photographs

Photographs of newly installed gages and tape down marks, station controls, reference marks, and 

buoys are made by field staff for the purpose of documenting monitoring locations, changes in 

control or shoreline conditions, or to supplement various forms of written descriptions. Each digital 

photograph that becomes part of the station record can be supplemented by appending descriptive 

information such as location, date, lake stage and/or depth, or flow rate on the electronic photograph. 

Electronic photographs are named using conventions detailed in SOP 13 – Data Management, and

are stored in files maintained on the NETN network server. Historic paper photographs, if present,

are kept in office photograph files. Whenever possible, these historic photos should be scanned and 

stored on the NETN server.
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

147

Figure S2.A.2. Example Site Record Form, page 1 (Site and datum information).

Figure S2.A.3. Example Site Record Form, page 2 (Monthly stage and elevation calculations).
SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites

148

SOP 2 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.02 April 2009 B. Mitchell Added contributing (upstream) watershed area to 

the background stream data. 

Updated to reflect monthly photographs of stream 

sites, and an annual panoramic set of photos for 

lakes.

Version 2.01 to 

2.02

3.00 December 

2011

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Changed title from “Background and Inventory of 

Freshwater Resources”

Changed focus of SOP to physical and 

administrative tasks needed to establish and 

document a water monitoring site

Copied/moved text from v2.02 SOP #s 2, 8, and 

16.

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Numerous clarifications

Additional detail on site-level information needs

Internal review

3.02 March 2015 A. Kozlowski Added cumulative watershed and bathymetry 

updates.

Internal review
149

SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

This SOP outlines and describes the tasks and procedures that must be completed before the start of 

the freshwater monitoring field season, and the basic equipment that will be utilized. Some sections 

were adapted from the NETN Forest Monitoring Protocol (Tierney et. al. 2009).

Protocol Revisions

The NETN water monitoring staff, Program Manager, and Data Manager meet (in person or via 

conference call) at the end of each monitoring year to discuss the successes and shortcomings of the 

past water monitoring season and suggest changes and improvements to be made in the next 

monitoring year. If a proposed change is a substantial departure from the existing protocol, the 

protocol must be revised to reflect the new procedures. If necessary, database metadata documenting 

sites and procedures is also updated.

The NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator will assign the task of revising the protocol to the 

appropriate member of the staff during the review meeting/call. All revisions should be complete 

before March 31st of the next monitoring year. After the protocol has been revised, all network 

personnel will receive a summary of the changes, and any new procedures and/or responsibilities for 

the upcoming season. Minor program changes that do not require protocol revisions will be made on 

the same timetable, and will be communicated in the same document as the protocol revisions. 

Annual Reports for Previous Year

All field data from the previous year should be entered, proofed and validated by January 31. Once 

validated, the data can be queried by the NETN_H2O database reporting module to provide the 

framework for annual data summary reports. The NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator will assign 

the task of constructing annual reports for each park. Annual reports for all parks should be 

completed and submitted for publication before March 31st of the next monitoring year. See SOP 14 

– Data Reporting and Analysis for more information on annual reports.

Administrative Needs

Any administrative actions necessary for the upcoming year should be identified and initiated as 

early as possible. Servicing human resource offices and administrative staff often require significant 

lead time (e.g., up to 6 months for a new hire), and contracting and human resource procedures are 

often subject to considerable delays. Staff hiring should be accomplished at the earliest possible 

opportunity. Review expiration dates of all contracts and agreements and renew/renegotiate as 

necessary. 
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

150

Routine personnel actions are required to be scheduled up to 6 weeks in advance. Consider staff 

furlough and detail needs and make these arrangements as early as possible to ensure maximum 

flexibility.

Planning and Coordination

The water monitoring coordinator or the field crew leader should ensure that each park natural 

resource manager has a current version of the water monitoring protocol including all SOPs, as well 

as a current map of monitoring locations. Park resource managers should be contacted at least a 

month prior to the beginning of the field season to discuss schedules for monitoring visits, field 

assistants, and any other concerns. Park lodging, if available, should also be arranged at this time. 

Network personnel or the crew leader should reserve or acquire a field vehicle for transport to and 

within parks.

The water monitoring coordinator will contact the laboratory that will be analyzing water samples at 

least a month in advance of the first scheduled sample collection dates to order sample bottles and 

other needed supplies. He or she will also review preservation and shipping requirements, holding 

times, and any other logistical issues. Contact information for delivery of data results and other 

coordination is updated at this time, if necessary.

Schedule

Though not essential, it is strongly suggested that the order in which parks are visited during the field 

season should be consistent from month to month. This will minimize the seasonal variation when 

the data are compared from year to year. Travel schedules and lodging arrangements should be made 

accordingly. Wherever possible, lodging should include access to kitchen facilities and internet. 

Lodging space should be sufficient to comfortably accommodate all crew members and their gear.

The water monitoring coordinator and the crew leaders should carefully consider the field crew’s 

capabilities when deciding upon a workday schedule. Flex-time (e.g., four 10-hour days) offers some 

advantages—but is not appropriate if crew members tire too much to maintain data quality on a long 

workday. The crew schedule should start as a standard work week (e.g., five 8-hour days, starting at 

8:00 or 8:30 am), and only convert to flex-time if both the crew leader and the water monitoring 

coordinator agree that it will work well for that particular crew.

Network personnel and collaborators should hold a meeting with the crew to discuss the crew's 

progress and any concerns that have surfaced. This meeting should take place after the first round of 

sampling has occurred. 

Training

Prior to commencement of each field season, the network must ensure that all members of the field 

crew fully understand this protocol by conducting in-situ training sessions. Crew preparation should 

involve careful review and discussion of all protocols, in addition to field training sessions led by 

experienced personnel. Crew must be given sufficient time to read the entire protocol thoroughly. It 

may be useful to divide the training into discrete "phases"—so that a particular SOP or set of SOPs 

can be read, learned and practiced before moving onto the next. Some discussion of how the data will 
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

151

be used to assess water quality and quantity should also be included to help the crew better 

understand the process.

Training should cover:

 water safety procedures such as wading and boat safety

 safe field practices to avoid injury such as how to properly pack and wear a field pack and 

work in areas with poison ivy and ticks

 emergency procedures

 introduction to network stream, lake, and pond ecosystems

 proper use of water quality sonde, current meters, light and turbidity meters, and Secchi disk

 proper use of water samplers (core sampler and churn splitter, VanDorn sampler)

 collecting grab samples

 filtering and preserving water samples

 proper use of all auxiliary equipment including iPad, GPS, field weather instruments, and 

digital camera

 orientation to monitoring site locations

 rules for selecting discharge measurement locations

 alternate methods of discharge measurement (volumetric and flume) 

 collecting accurate stage measurements

 leveling procedures

 procedures for conducting invasive aquatic plant surveys

 practice using procedures for careful data collection and quality assurance/quality control 

(QA/QC)

 procedures to minimize resource damage (Leave No Trace)

 data entry procedures (e.g., use of paper data sheets and use of iPad applications)

 expectations of crew behavior

 proper use and maintenance of park radios and emergency communication devices

Training should include both demonstration of all measurements by trainers, and hands-on practice 

of all measurements by trainees. Training groups should be small to ensure that all trainees have 

sufficient opportunity to practice measurements thoroughly and question the trainer as needed. 

Training should thoroughly demonstrate how to enter data into the water monitoring database 

(NETN_H2O). Training materials should include screen captures of each form in the database.
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

152

Training must emphasize the critical importance of careful, accurate and steady data collection to this 

long-term monitoring program. Trainers must stress the importance of exact adherence to SOP 

instructions to prevent bias in measurements among years, which will inhibit the networks’ ability to 

detect long-term trends. Trainees should be encouraged to discuss with network supervisors any 

concerns that arise over field procedures or the datasheet or database recording systems during 

training or later during the field season—the crew should never deviate from established protocols or 

alter the datasheet or database without first getting approval from the water monitoring coordinator.

Training must emphasize the critical importance of avoiding transfer of invasive aquatic species and 

aquatic pathogens between sites. Decontamination procedures should be demonstrated and conducted 

between each site visit. Instruction will be provided on appropriate gear selection (e.g., no felt-soled 

waders). Training must also include techniques (e.g., “Leave No Trace”) to avoid trampling the 

surrounding habitat when hiking to and from a monitoring site. Extra care should also be taken at 

sites with a delicate or moss-covered forest floor.

Field crews are encouraged to seek out training to recognize priority aquatic invasive plant species 

that is offered in the areas in which they will be conducting the invasive aquatic plant surveys. Crew 

should also carry Early Detection ID cards to help with priority species identification (Keefer et al. 

2010). 

All NPS personnel shall complete required annual service-wide training including IT Security, 

Records Management, Non-Discrimination, and Whistle-blowing.

Communication and Crew Oversight

It is essential for the field crew to keep in regular contact with the water monitoring coordinator and 

any other supervisors throughout the field season. The crew should carry NETN radios in parks 

where there is a radio use agreement (currently: Acadia NP, Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP, 

Minute Man NHP, Morristown NHP, Saint-Gaudens NHS, Saratoga NHP, and Weir Farm NHS). 

The crew should also carry a cell phone in the field every day in any parks with cell coverage—both 

for safety and to attempt to call in if any important questions arise. The crew leader for the Lower 

NETN parks will carry a personal locator beacon (PLB) for use in emergencies at locations where 

there may not be radio or cell phone communication. A regular (perhaps twice weekly) telephone call 

or meeting should be set up between the field crew and supervisors to discuss the week’s events 

while they are still fresh. This regular update should include discussion of any questions or problems 

encountered with sites, protocol, logistics, etc. 

The water monitoring coordinator and any other supervisors should endeavor to join the crew in the 

field at least twice during the course of the field season for direct observation of data collection.

Equipment

The basic field equipment and supplies that should be obtained are listed below. Equipment should 

be organized and maintained in good working condition. At the end of each season, the crew leader 

should inventory the condition of all equipment and prepare a list of equipment that needs to be 

repaired or replaced.
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

153

The field computers, iPads/iPhones, and dataloggers must be handled carefully and their screens 

protected from injury at all times. When traveling between sites, the devices should be placed in 

cases. During hard rain, the field computer should be put away in a waterproof bag and datasheets 

should be used instead. The iPad and iPhone (in waterproof cases) can be used in rain.

 General Field Equipment

o Maps showing site locations

o Protocol

o Digital camera, batteries

o Datasheets (on waterproof paper)

o Clipboard and/or looseleaf binder

o Field computer, iPad, and/or iPhone

o Garmin Etrex GPS unit with RS232 cable

o Sharpened pencils and permanent markers

o Compass

o Digital thermometer

o Portable anemometer (optional for LNETN)

o NETN Park Radio, cell phone, and/or PLB

o Extra batteries: 9v (4), AA (12), C (4)

o Sunscreen and polarized sunglasses

o Daypacks

o First aid kit

o Insect repellant

o Deionized water

o PFD vests

o Boat (or raft), oars, and anchor

o Raingear

o Boots/waders

o Screwdriver and/or multi-tool

o Invasive aquatic plant species list/ ID cards

 Leveling

o Autolevel, tripod, and leveling rod
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

154

 Water Quality Sonde

o YSI 600XL Sonde, 650 MDS Datalogger

o 3m and longer cables, RS232 cable

o Calibration cup and cap

o pH 4, 7, 10 buffers. pH 4.63 check sample

o 1,000, 100, 501μS/cm conductance standards

 Discharge & Stage Measurements

o Pygmy current meter w/wading rod, earphone

o FlowTracker current meter w/wading rod

o 50 foot vinyl engineer’s tape

o 2 wire stakes or long screwdrivers

o USGS discharge Qm forms/ DISCHARGEcalc app

o Stopwatch

o Folding engineer’s ruler

o Level stick

o Site description forms

o Download cable/data shuttle for level loggers

o Plastic bin and plastic sheet for volumetric Qm

 Water Sample Collection

o Sample bottles from lab

o Gloves (vinyl, non-powdered)

o 10m Tygon core sampler

o Teflon churn splitter

o VanDorn bottle sampler

o Throw bottle

 In Field Office

o Pump, tubing, filters, funnels, and flasks for chlorophyll a filtering

o

o Blue ice packs for sample shipment

o FedEx forms
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

155

o Contact info for network and park staff, analytical lab, etc.

o Small tool kit, including multimeter, precision screwdrivers

 Light Penetration Profiles

o LI-1400 Datalogger Deck cell, PAR submersible cell

o Lowering frame and cable

 Turbidity

o Turbidity meter and supplies

1

50 μS/cm conductance standard is only used at ACAD

Equipment Repair/Replacement 

Major equipment and equipment components that require service or replacement should have these 

needs addressed well before the beginning of the field season. Some sonde probes require periodic 

replacement (pH probes should be replaced annually), and Li-Cor radiation sensors should be sent to 

the manufacturer for calibration and recertification every 3 years. Any piece of equipment that is not 

performing within desired specifications should be evaluated by qualified repair technicians and 

repaired or replaced during winter “down time”.

Equipment that is assumed to be in good working order should be taken out of storage, tested, and 

prepared in advance of its anticipated use in the field. Fresh batteries should be installed, and 

measurement cells and probes should be filled with fresh electrolyte solutions, where applicable. 

Dataloggers should be updated with the current date and time, and should be tested to ensure that 

they can store data (and that the data can be downloaded/retrieved). Necessary firmware updates 

should also be performed at this time. Perform pre-season accuracy checks on sondes to compare 

their performance and accuracy when measuring known standards.

Boats, canoes, and other watercraft should be checked for leaks or other damage, and repaired as 

necessary. Outboard motors should be de-winterized, serviced, and filled with fresh fuel and other 

fluids. Check all boots and waders for leaks and repair or replace if needed.

The condition of small equipment such as digital thermometers, wooden engineer rulers, and Secchi 

disks should not be overlooked. Replace any of these items that are worn or damaged enough to

affect data quality. Check tape marks used as depth guides on Li-Cor and sonde cables and core 

samplers for accuracy and missing marks. Clean Secchi disks and viewing scopes. Perform accuracy 

comparison checks on digital thermometers, and replace outliers.

Supplies

Expendable supplies such as buffers, standards, filters, and blank water should be inventoried (and 

expiration dates noted) at the end of each monitoring season. Sufficient quantities of new solutions to 

last through the upcoming season should be ordered in late winter. Keep in mind that some standard 

solutions and other reagents are “made to order” by the chemical companies. Allow sufficient time 

for preparation and shipping of these products when placing orders.
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

156

Clean bottles for water samples are provided by the analytical laboratory and shipped to NETN 

offices before each sampling month. Provide a complete list of required container types and 

quantities (for the month) to the lab manager at least a month prior to the first anticipated date of 

sample collection. Be sure to order a few spares of each type of container in case of breakage or 

contamination.

Check and resupply small expendables (waterproof paper and labels, markers, vinyl gloves, etc.) at 

the beginning of each season. There is often a significant savings in shipping charges when multiple 

supplies can be obtained from the same supplier. Be sure all portable data storage media (thumb 

drives, external hard drives, data cards, etc.) are functional and replace when needed.

Preparing Field Infrastructure

In some instances (particularly in the Lower NETN parks) it is difficult to conduct site visits prior to 

the beginning of the monitoring season to ensure that site infrastructure (benchmarks, dataloggers, 

etc.) are intact and re-surveyed after being unattended during the winter. There are decided 

advantages to these preliminary visits (more time available to accomplish site work, ensuring 

uninterrupted data collection from the beginning of the sampling season, etc.), and field staff should 

exercise this option whenever possible.

The following tasks should be performed as early in the season as possible, either during a 

preliminary site visit or during the first monitoring visit of the year:

 Check integrity of access to site. Make sure there are no current or planned road/trail 

closures or washouts, or other impediments to traveling to the monitoring site.

 Make sure all benchmarks (datum bolts, staff gages, etc.) are present and survey their 

locations (see SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites and

SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data for further information) to document any 

change in elevation. Replace and survey any missing benchmarks and update site records. 

 Re-deploy temperature and/or water level loggers that have been removed to avoid damage 

from freezing. Be sure to document initial water level logger measurements to enable 

calibration with fixed reference points. If loggers have been left in place over the winter, 

make sure they are operational, in the proper locations, and securely fastened.

 Take a new set of site photos and document any changes to the site and surrounding area in 

the site records.

Final Preparation for Fieldwork

Print labels and field forms on waterproof paper/label stock. Assemble miscellaneous gear in field 

packs and bags. Ensure that all equipment has both fresh batteries installed and available spares and 

double check inventory of sample bottles. Check in via email with park resource management staff 

and the contact(s) at the analytical lab to discuss any last minute changes in logistics. 
157

SOP 3 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version numbers 

are allowed to vary from each other, and are only 

updated when there are changes to the SOP. 

Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect changes 

specific to this SOP; if numbers are missing, there 

were no changes between the original procedures 

and version 3.00.

Convert version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 December 

2011

B.Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Changed title and focus of SOP 2 from “Metadata” 

(v2.02+) to “Preparation and Equipment List” (tasks 

and equipment needed in preparation for each field 

season).

Some sections adapted from NETN Forest 

Monitoring Protocol Safety SOP.

Version 2.02+ to 

3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell 

and B. 

Gawley

Minor edits for clarification

Addition of turbidity gear to equipment list

Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Noted that database metadata may need an update 

along with protocol, in “Protocol Revisions” section

12.9 μS/cm conductivity standard replaced by 50 

μS/cm standard (and that only used at ACAD). 

Anemometer is optional for LNETN.

Reviewer 

comment

3.03 February 

2015

B. Mitchell Revise equipment to reflect use of iPad.

Training needs to cover data entry on the iPad.

New field 

equipment

159

SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

This standard operating procedure (SOP) for monitoring streams includes instructions for the 

collection of streamflow (water quantity) data and for the collection of stream water-quality data, 

including the water chemistry and nutrient vital signs. Water-quality procedures are adapted from the 

USGS’s National Field Manual for the Collection of Water-quality Data (U.S. Geological Survey 

variously dated; http://water.usgs.gov/owq/FieldManual/index.html) and from a Water-quality 

Inventory Protocol for Riverine Environments prepared for the NPS (Stednick and Gilbert 1998) 

unless otherwise noted. Properties such as temperature, pH, specific conductance, and DO

concentration are measured directly in situ. Other parameters such as color, nutrients, algal 

biomass, and acid neutralizing capacity (ANC) are collected as grab samples and analyzed in a 

laboratory. Water quantity or streamflow SOPs follow USGS protocols in all cases (Rantz et al.

1982). Water-quality measurements in streams are taken according to the schedule outlined in the

Sampling Design section of the protocol narrative.

Before Field Activities

Several activities should be performed before field monitoring:

 Check current weather conditions and forecast. Postpone monitoring if conditions are unsafe 

or are expected to become unsafe.

 Provide supervisor or designee with the trip/float plan of the day’s field work.

 Pre-deployment sonde calibrations and quality checks detailed in the “Pre-Deployment 

Preparation” and “Calibration and Quality Assurance” sections of SOP 6 – In Situ WaterQuality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde should be performed in the laboratory, 

office, etc., as appropriate, before each day in the field. 

 Calibrate the LaMotte 2020e turbidity meter according to the schedule and instructions in the 

“Measuring Turbidity with a Turbidity Meter” section of SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, 

Turbidity, and Light Penetration. The meter should be calibrated before arriving at the site 

using a standard with a concentration similar to expected turbidity values.

 Choose a current meter based on guidance in Table S9.1, and perform pre-deployment 

inspection and quality checks of the current meter as described in SOP 9 – Collecting 

Streamflow and Stage Data.

 Turn the digital thermometer on to verify that it is operational and the display is legible. 

Carry an extra battery in the field bag. If using a liquid-in-glass thermometer, inspect to be 
SOP 3 – Preparation and Equipment List

160

certain liquid columns have not separated, inspect bulbs to be sure they are clean and inspect 

protective cases to be sure they are free of sand or debris. 

 Turn on all electric devices to verify that they are fully charged (e.g. camera, iPad, iPhone, 

survey equipment, laser distance measurer). For devices with limited on-board or removable 

memory (e.g. camera, survey equipment) verify there is sufficient space for upcoming survey 

work. 

 Double check that sufficient quantities and types of sample bottles have been packed, 

including several extras in case of breakage or contamination. 

Field Data Forms

Upon arrival at the monitoring site, observers must note weather conditions, general descriptions of 

site and streamflow conditions, and all pertinent metadata (times, dates, logger filenames, etc.) for 

the monitoring visit. A field data form (Appendix S4.A) or iPad Lake/Pond data entry application 

(NETN 2015) is used to document all information collected during water-quality monitoring. All 

notations on paper data forms are made in either pencil or waterproof pen. Fill in all blanks provided 

that pertain to the data that you will be collecting. Indicate with a “–” if the data are not available or 

not applicable but do not leave the entry blank. Blank entry lines leave the QA/QC checker to 

wonder if the data were forgotten or not available. The following information is to be completed on 

all field data forms:

 Name and NETN site code- Full name and 6-character code of waterbody being monitored.

 Surveyor(s)- Name of person(s) doing the observations.

 Date and Time- Date, start time and end time of monitoring visit.

 Cloud Cover (ACAD only)- Estimate amount of sky obscured by clouds, in 10% 

increments.

 Wind Velocity and Direction (ACAD only)- Determine wind direction and record the 

appropriate code using the diagram on the left side of the data sheet. Determine the average 

wind velocity using a hand-held anemometer or estimate the velocity using tree 

movement/wave height as a guide. Record the corresponding Beaufort Scale (Table S4.1) 

code in the space provided.

 Air Temperature- See Section below on Temperature Measurements

 Surface-water Temperature- See Section below on Temperature Measurements

 Gage Height- Note stage height from staff gage or stage datum mark at beginning and end of 

site visit. If you measure DOWN to reach the water from a reference bolt, the value must be 

recorded as a negative number.

 Photographic Documentation- Note picture number and description of all pictures. See 

section on Photographic Documentation.
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

161

 Observations- This portion of the data sheet includes specific observations about water 

appearance (including clarity and color) and algae. Any additional information pertaining to 

the sampling session should be described in the notes, such as amount of emergent/floating 

vegetation, unusual occurrences, or equipment problems. Be sure to note any conditions that 

may cause distractions, or affect the quality of the measurements, like the presence of biting 

insects, rain, extreme heat/cold, new crew members or guests. Other observations that may be 

relevant are encouraged, such as observations of organisms (e.g., fish, macroinvertebrates, 

frogs). Observations should be relevant to the immediate monitoring site, which is 

approximately 50 m of stream (shorter if there is a nearby hydrologic change like a dam or 

culvert).

Table S4.1. Beaufort Scale codes and associated descriptive information.

Code # km/h mph Description (Land) Description (Sea)

0 <2 <1 Smoke rises vertically 0 ft waves; flat

1 2 to 5 1 to 3 Wind direction shown by smoke drift 0-1 ft waves; ripples without crests

2 6 to 11 4 to 7 Wind felt on face; leaves rustle 1-2 ft waves; small wavelets, crests 

not breaking

3 12 to 20 8 to 12 Leaves, small twigs in constant 

motion; light flag extended

2-3.5 ft waves; large wavelets, crests 

begin to break, scattered whitecaps

4 21 to 32 13 to 18 Small branches are moved 3.5-6 ft waves; small waves, 

frequent whitecaps

5 33 to 30 19 to 24 Small trees begin to sway 6-9 ft waves; moderate waves, many 

whitecaps

All information included on the field form is entered electronically into an MS Access data entry 

module (e.g., Figure S4.1). Although not mandatory, electronic data entry in the field can also be 

accomplished by running the data entry module on a ruggedized notebook computer, or by using an 

iPad with FileMaker Pro applications for field data collection (beginning in 2014; NETN 2015).
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

162

Figure S4.1. MS Access stream data entry screen for ACAD.

Photographic Documentation

Regular digital photographic documentation of all monitoring sites is mandatory. An initial photo or 

screen shot is taken of the data sheet (to document site name and date), then two sets of photos are 

taken at each stream site during every monitoring visit. Tag line photos help document the conditions 

and stream morphology where flow was taken. Photos taken from established photopoints can help 

show changes over time for the site in canopy cover, flow, and other habitat and channel conditions.

 Three “tag line” photos are taken documenting the cross section of the stream used to obtain 

flow measurement. These photos are taken across the stream at the measurement location

(AC), with downstream to the left; looking upstream from downstream of the measurement 

site (US); and looking downstream from upstream of the measurement location (DS). All of 

these photos must show the full tag line (measuring tape) and can include people. Do not use 

a flash, hold the camera at between 5 and 6 feet above the ground (i.e., head height), and take 

the photo in landscape (wider horizontally) mode while holding the camera level (i.e., do not 

aim up or down). Tag line photos are named using standard NETN file-naming conventions 

described in SOP 13– Data Management, using the template:

NETN Site code _ YYYYMMDD_qmUS (or) qmDS (or) qmAC_#

An example using an upstream tag line photo from Saratoga NHP Stream A, taken on July 

25, 2010 is:

SARASA_20100725_qmUS_1.jpg

 Photopoint records are taken from a consistent, documented location during each monitoring 

visit. The stage datum (benchmark) or one of the associated reference points is often used for 

a photopoint location. Standing mid-stream, if possible, over or next to the datum, take one 

panoramic photo facing upstream and one panoramic photo facing downstream. Use the
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

163

widest angle possible within the camera’s zoom range. There should be no people in the 

photopoint pictures. Do not use a flash, hold the camera at between 5 and 6 feet above the 

ground (i.e., head height), and hold the camera level (i.e., do not aim up or down). Center the 

stream as much as possible; if the stream reach is straight, it should be visible in the center of 

the image; if the reach is curved then the image may be shifted to include more of the reach. 

Bring a set of earlier photos into the field, and try to match them as closely as possible. 

Photopoint records are named using standard NETN file-naming conventions, using the 

template:

NETN Site code _ YYYYMMDD_ppUS (or) ppDS _#

An example using a downstream photopoint picture from Saratoga NHP Stream A, taken on 

July 25, 2010 is:

SARASA_20100725_ppDS_1.jpg

Descriptions of the locations and coordinates of the designated photopoints are documented 

in the NETN_H2O database and in the site reference information section of the field 

notebook.

Additional photographic documentation is encouraged. Take photographs of changes in the site after 

construction, erosion, flooding, or debris in the channel.

Temperature measurements

Water-quality sampling includes an air-temperature measurement and a water-temperature 

measurement, preferably taken with a digital thermometer (thermistor). Read air temperature with a 

dry, calibrated thermometer, prior to taking water temperature. 

1. Place the thermometer about 5 ft above the ground in a shaded area protected from strong 

winds but open to air circulation. Avoid areas of possible radiant heat effects, such as metal 

walls, rock exposures, or sides of vehicles. 

2. Allow time for the thermometer to equilibrate (usually less than a minute for a thermistor, but 

possibly up to 3 to 5 minutes for a liquid-in-glass thermometer), and then record the 

temperature and time of day. 

3. Measure the air temperature as close as possible to the time when the water temperature is 

measured. 

4. Report and record routine air temperature measurements to the nearest 0.1°C (to the nearest 

0.5°C with liquid in glass thermometer).

5. Place the metal part of the digital thermometer in the water (do not submerge the 

thermometer completely) and record the water temperature in degrees Celsius after the 

display stabilizes. For the Concord River (MIMA), this measurement is taken in a sample of 

water collected with the Van Dorn sampler.

Water Clarity

Streamwater clarity is measured electronically using a portable turbidity meter. Water clarity should 

be measured as early as possible during the monitoring visit, before observers stir up sediment or 
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

164

create disturbance that could alter the stream turbidity. Samples should be taken from a few feet 

upstream of the site, and in an area where there is running water.

Detailed instructions on the use of the LaMotte 2020e turbidity meter can be found in the 

instrument’s instruction manual and in SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light 

Penetration. The meter should be calibrated prior to the field site visit, and data should be collected 

according to the procedures in “Measuring Turbidity with a Turbidity Meter,” in SOP 8 – Measuring 

Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration. At the Concord River (MIMA), clarity is measured 

on water collected from the middle of the bridge with a Van Dorn sampler.

Measuring Stream Stage (Water level) and Flow (Discharge)

Each stream site has an established benchmark (datum) from which to measure to the water surface 

(“tape-up” [positive] or “tape-down” [negative] measurement) to determine stream stage. The datum 

may be a staff gage or a bolt, and some sites have multiple datums to facilitate measurements at 

different water levels. All datums must be leveled biannually (April/May and October) as described 

in SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites. Stream stage is measured from at least one location on 

each visit. If a staff gage is installed, measurements should be from the staff gage. Otherwise one or 

two benchmarks are selected for the stage measurement. Stream stage should be measured 

immediately before and after each discharge measurement to determine if the stream flow is rising, 

falling, or stable; and to contribute to the body of data that will enable the establishment of a stagedischarge relationship (rating curve). If the site has an automatic water level logger, the logger 

elevation should be checked following procedures in the “Deploying Data Loggers” section of SOP 2

– Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites at each monthly site visit to 

determine if the logger has moved during the previous sampling interval. 

Discharge measurements are necessary for the interpretation of water-quality measurements and the 

calculation of loads of those water-quality parameters, and should be taken at each site visit. Specific 

instructions for measuring stage and discharge are detailed in SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and 

Stage Data and other references described in SOP 9.

Determining Discharge Measurement Method and Location

Several methods can be used to measure discharge, depending on the amount of stream flow, channel 

conditions, and other factors. Consequently, measurement location at each site can vary according to 

the measurement method used. The first decision when beginning a water quantity monitoring 

session is a) which method to use and b) where to take the measurements. 

As detailed in SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data, direct measurements of discharge in 

NETN parks are generally made with the current-meter method. A current-meter measurement is the 

summation of the products of the subsection areas of the stream cross section and their respective 

average velocities (Rantz et al. 1982). Discharge is measured in cubic feet per second and most often 

is determined by making measurements of a particular cross-sectional area of the stream and the 

velocity of the water past that cross section, using one of two types of current meters. The Price 

pygmy meter utilizes cups that are rotated by the action of flowing water. The speed of the rotation 

depends on the velocity of the water passing by the cups. The other meter (SonTek FlowTracker) 
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

165

uses the acoustic Doppler effect to calculate water velocity. Discharge then is calculated by 

multiplying the width, depth, and velocity of each section of the stream.

Both types of current meters have limitations in certain conditions (explained in SOP 9 – Collecting 

Streamflow and Stage Data) that affect the accuracy of their measurements. After selecting the most 

appropriate instrument for the available channel and flow conditions, choose a cross section that will 

provide the most accurate measurement possible. The spacing of observation verticals in the 

measurement section can affect the accuracy of the measurement (Rantz et al. 1982). Make 

observations of depth and velocity at 25-30 verticals, to ensure that no more than 5 percent of the 

total flow is measured in any one vertical. Even under the worst conditions the discharge computed 

for each vertical should not exceed 10 percent of the total discharge and ideally not exceed more than 

5 percent (Rantz et al. 1982). Exceptions to this policy are allowed in circumstances where accuracy 

would be sacrificed if this number of verticals were maintained, such as for measurements during 

rapidly changing stage (Rantz et al. 1982). Fewer verticals than are ideal are sometimes used for very 

narrow streams (about 5 ft wide when a pygmy meter is used). Measurement of discharge is 

essentially a sampling process, and the accuracy of sampling results typically decreases markedly 

when the number of samples is less than about 25.

If conditions are adverse to finding a suitable site on the stream to conduct a discharge method with a 

current meter, consider an alternate method. Direct volumetric measurements are often possible if the 

total stream flow is confined within a culvert during very low flow conditions, assuming all flow 

from the downstream side of the culvert can be captured in the measuring vessel. When performed 

properly, this method is more accurate than measurements using current meters, since it is a direct 

measurement of the volume of water passing over a given point during a specific time period. 

Specific instructions can be found in SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data. Alternatively, 

an artificial control, such as a Parshall flume, can be used to isolate or concentrate the streamflow 

enabling a more reliable measurement. Details on using these specialized techniques can be found in 

Kilpatrick and Schneider (1983).

Conducting Discharge Measurement

The majority of NETN discharge measurements will be obtained with a current meter. The following 

steps supplement the generic procedures detailed in SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data, 

which should be consulted for additional information about current meter measurements, or 

instructions on measuring discharge with alternate methods. 

1. Take an initial stream stage measurement from the tapeup/tapedown datum or staff gage. 

Record the value on the field data sheet.

2. Once a suitable measurement section has been selected, the tagline (measuring tape) is 

stretched across the stream, perpendicular to the stream flow. Be sure the tagline is taut, and 

does not droop into the water, potentially altering the stream flow. Secure both sides on the 

stream banks with stakes or rocks.
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

166

3. If it is necessary to move rocks or make any minor modifications to the stream bed in order to 

provide better measurement conditions, do so with extreme caution. Allow sufficient time for 

the streamflow to equilibrate before beginning measurements. 

4. Set up the current meter and conduct the appropriate pre-measurement quality control checks. 

In the case of the Pygmy meter, this is a spin test (ensuring that the Pygmy bucket wheel 

spins freely for over 45 seconds when manually spun). Record the initial spin test results on 

the field data sheet. 

a. When using the FlowTracker, first check the <Setup Parameters Menu> to check that 

the instrument settings (units, averaging time, equation, etc.) are set to the proper 

values. Next, enter the <System Functions Menu> to check operational parameters 

such as temperature, battery voltage, clock, and signal to noise ratio (SNR).

5. After the meter has passed all quality control checks, begin the measurement. Enter all the 

required preliminary information in the FlowTracker datalogger (initiated by pressing the 

<Start Data Run> button) or after starting the DISCHARGEcalc app on the iPad or iPhone. 

The FlowTracker needs to be in the water and at the correct height during the initiation 

procedure, and will run for 20 seconds to determine SNR and other parameters.

6. Record the tagline reading and depth at the initial edge of water in the datalogger (on the 

<Starting Edge> screen) or iPad/iPhone. 

7. Move the current meter and wading rod to the first vertical section. Record the tagline 

reading and depth at the first section in the datalogger or iPad/iPhone. If possible, obtain an 

at-point velocity measurement by either counting clicks in a 40 second interval (Pygmy) or 

pressing the <Measure> button (FlowTracker). If the water is too shallow or there are other 

factors precluding measurement, estimate the section’s velocity (as the percent of the next 

section’s velocity) and record the estimate in the appropriate location on the 

datalogger/iPad/iPhone.

8. When using the Pygmy, record the number of clicks and the exact averaging time from the 

stopwatch in the appropriate fields of the DISCHARGEcalc application and then click the 

<Next> button to advance to the screen for the next station. 

a. The FlowTracker will automatically display a summary of the station measurement 

when complete. Press <1> to accept the measurement and advance to the next station,

or <2> to repeat the measurement to address errors displayed in the summary. 

9. Continue this process for each subsequent section. Be sure to include data and notes on 

observations of factors that affect the measurement (angled flow, eddies, obstructions, etc.). 

It may be necessary to estimate the final vertical section(s) depending on the configuration of 

the stream channel.

10. Record the tagline reading and depth at the final edge of water in the iPad/iPhone and select 

the <End Measurement> option when using the Pygmy to complete the measurement. 
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

167

a. On the FlowTracker, first press the <End Section> button, then enter the ending edge 

information. Press <Calc Discharge> to compute the total discharge for all completed 

stations

11. Perform a final spin test (Pygmy only) and enter any required final information (final spin 

test value, measurement quality assessment, notes, etc.) into the iPad/iPhone program.

12. Record the total discharge, total area, and average velocity values that were calculated by the 

program on the field data form. For FlowTracker measurements, also record the percent 

uncertainty.

13. Be sure to save the DISCHARGEcalc application (iPad/iPhone) or datalogger (FlowTracker) 

files before exiting the program. On the FlowTracker, you must always return to the <Main 

Menu> to make sure all data is saved. 

14. Take a final stream stage measurement from the tapeup/tapedown datum or staff gage. 

Record the value on the field data sheet.

Remove the tagline, and pack all equipment. If any modifications were made to the stream bed, 

restore it as close as possible to conditions before modification.

Measuring Water Quality

Measurement Sites

Make measurements on predefined waterbodies at predefined sampling sites according to the

Sampling Design section of the protocol narrative. Flowing-water sampling sites optimally are 

located: 

 At or near a streamflow-gaging station, to obtain concurrent surface-water discharge data 

required for computing constituent-transport loads and to determine discharge/constituentconcentration relations. Measure discharge at time of sampling if a gaging station is not at or 

near the sampling site or if discharge cannot be rated or estimated with sufficient accuracy; 

 In straight reaches with uniform flow, with a uniform and stable-bottom contour, and where 

constituents are mixed along the cross section. Sample streams at a pool below a riffle or 

quickwater section. This ensures mixing just before the sample site, resulting in a more 

integrated sample, and minimizes inclusion of large particles of litter, soil, etc. in the sample;

 Far enough upstream and downstream of confluences of streamflow or point sources of 

contamination to avoid sampling a cross section where flows are poorly mixed or not 

unidirectional;

 In reaches upstream from bridges or other structures, to avoid contamination from the 

structure or from a road surface; 

 In unidirectional flow that does not include eddies. (If eddies are present within the channel, 

sample only the unidirectional flow); 
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

168

 At or near a transect in a reach where other data are collected (such as data for suspended 

sediment, bedload, bottom material, or biological material) and (or) for which historical data 

are available; or 

 At a cross section where samples can be collected at any stage throughout the period of 

study, if possible.

Note that the optimal flowing-water-sampling site can vary depending on the flow. Adjust sampling 

site, if warranted, on each trip as long as the sampling site consistently remains within the same 

reach, there are no inflows or outflows between the original sampling site and the new sampling site, 

and there is reason to believe the stream is well-mixed at various stages.

In Situ Multiparameter Sonde Measurements in Streams 

Detailed operating and quality control procedures for the water-quality sonde are outlined in SOP 6 –

In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde. 

Upon arrival at the monitoring site, the sonde must be allowed to warm up for 4 to 5 minutes before 

taking measurements. During this warm-up period, turn on the sonde by powering up the 650MDS 

and verify that the date and time settings are correct. If an ETrex GPS is connected to the 650MDS, 

make sure GPS readings are displayed on the datalogger. During the warm-up period, the sonde does 

not need to be in the water but should be dipped in the water and then kept in a shady and DOsaturated environment.

Use the procedures in the “Making Measurements” section of SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality 

Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde to verify and record the DO calibration values and obtain 

the in situ water quality measurements. At Minute Man NHP, where sampling is from the bridge over 

the Concord River, samples are logged at mid-depth at bridge pylons 2 and 4 to obtain a 

representative sample of the river. 

Grab Samples in Streams 

Grab samples are often used for small streams where a grab sample taken at the centroid of flow 

represents the water quality throughout the cross-section (Stednick and Gilbert 1998). Single point 

grab samples are sufficient for well-mixed streams that are less than 2 ft in depth, which includes 

virtually all NETN streams. All samples should be collected directly into the sample bottle (except 

for the Concord River). 

Grab samples and width-integrated sampling at the Concord River are made at predefined sampling 

sites (listed in the Sampling Design section of the protocol narrative) according to procedures 

outlined in section SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples. 

Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment

An assessment for habitat and physiochemical characterization is conducted in July at each stream in 

the yearly rotation. Details can be found in SOP 11 – Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment, which 

explains how NETN has adapted assessment techniques from the EPA Rapid Bioassessment 

protocol. Detailed descriptions of procedures, methods and data forms can be found in the original 

EPA document (Barbour et. al. 1999), which is available at: 
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

169

http://water.epa.gov/scitech/monitoring/rsl/bioassessment/index.cfm. The sections of this protocol 

used by NETN include Chapter 5: “Habitat Assessment and Physiochemical Parameters” and the 

field data forms in Appendix A-1. The major departure from EPA methods is NETN assesses a 20 

meter reach of stream (upstream of the measurement site) rather than the EPA-prescribed 100 meters.

Benthic Macroinvertebrate Monitoring

Macroinvertebrate monitoring has been identified as a high priority for streams. Because of funding 

constraints, however, addition of this vital sign to the protocol would depend on collaboration with 

other agencies. Park staff at Acadia NP have been monitoring macroinvertebrates in cooperation with 

the Maine Department of Environmental Protection (MDEP) since 1997 using MDEP protocols 

(Davies and Tsomides 2002). Other parks may become involved in macroinvertebrate monitoring in 

the future in cooperation with other monitoring programs.

Macroinvertebrate monitoring by Acadia supplements data collected through this standardized 

program, which was first implemented by the DEP in 1983 (Davies et al. 1999). Acadia began 

sampling macroinvertebrates in NETN rotating stream sites in 2006. Samples are collected in 

association with other NETN monitoring such as YSI measurements, nutrient sampling and discharge 

measurements. 

Didymo

During visits to all NETN parks, monitors are increasingly attentive for the presence of Didymo 

(Didymosphenia geminata), also known as “rock snot”, a highly invasive alga that has recently 

invaded the northern reaches of the Connecticut River in New Hampshire and the White River and 

Battenkill River in Vermont. This species has a great potential to alter habitats and displace native 

species, and is of great concern to officials in regions where infestations have been established. 

Didymo is easily spread by even just one cell of the alga breaking off in infested reaches and drifting 

downstream. It is also very easily spread by waders, and potentially, water monitoring equipment and 

other gear that touches the bottoms of streams in infested areas. Enhanced equipment cleaning and 

decontamination procedures are included in SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures. 

Post Field Activities

Several “wrap-up” activities should be performed at the end of each day:

 Check in with supervisor or designee with the trip/float plan promptly upon completion of 

field work.

 If water samples were taken during the day, these samples should be packed with ice packs 

and a chain of custody form (SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses, Appendix S12.A) in coolers and 

shipped via Federal Express to the analytical lab, or (if it is too late to meet the day’s 

shipping deadline) the samples should be refrigerated until they can be shipped as early as 

possible on the next day.

 Send an advance copy of the chain of custody form to the lab (via email) listing the number 

of samples that are being shipped, and the sample dates and locations. 
SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams

170

 All field equipment should be cleaned with fresh water (deionized water not required) to 

remove any residual mud, dirt, silt or other contamination. Perform additional 

decontamination tasks described in SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures after the 

initial rinse; proper decontamination will prevent the spread of pathogens and invasive 

species.

 Wash all tubes used with the turbidity meter during the monitoring activities.

 Check DO probe membranes for wrinkles and bubbles – the membrane should be 

immediately changed if either condition is present to allow enough time for the membrane to 

stretch and/or “burn in”.

 Take the YSI sonde out of the saturated DO environment (typically a wet towel or PVC tube 

with sponge) and replace the probe guard with the calibration cup. Place approximately 0.5 

inch of water in the calibration cup and screw the cup onto the sonde. Place the sonde in a 

clamp stand or other secure storage location. The cap for the calibration cup should be 

loosely screwed on (1-2 threads engaged) to prevent evaporation but allow some air flow so 

the DO probe will be in a 100% saturated environment.

 Data files and photos should be downloaded from dataloggers, cameras, iPads/iPhones, etc. 

onto computer hard disks, and backed up to removable media (thumbdrive, external hard 

drive, etc.). Rename these files following the NETN file-naming conventions described in 

SOP 13 – Data Management. The FlowTracker can only store files for 63 discharge 

measurements, and the files should be deleted monthly (after downloading and backing them 

up) to make room for new data.

 Enter data from all field data sheets in to the NETN_H2O Field Data Entry Module or the 

iPad stream data entry application (NETN 2015).

 Any critical observations (detection of invasive species, water quality issues, resource 

damage, etc.) should be relayed to park resource management staff as soon as possible, 

preferably before traveling to the next park (or site at ACAD).
171

Appendix S4.A. NETN (ACAD) water monitoring field form.
Appendix S4.A. NETN (ACAD) water monitoring field form (continued).

172
Appendix S4.A. NETN (ACAD) water monitoring field form (continued).

173

SOP 4 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 2007 B. Mitchell Section 3.1: For first series of steps: changed 

reference to DO percent local saturation in steps 

2 and 3. Inserted step 4 (log to 89 file). Clarified

step 8 (only one point needed in well-mixed, small 

streams; multiple points only needed for Concord 

River). Added step 9 (log to 99 file). (Originally 

part of SOP 6- In Situ Measurements in Streams)

Protocol review 

meeting 

2.01 April 2009 B. Mitchell - Section 2.2.2: Updated to reflect monthly 

photographs of stream sites. (Originally part 

of SOP 2- Metadata collection)

- Section 3.4: Inserted Transparency Tube 

procedures, SOP 9. These measurements 

should be made annually, at high flow. 

(Originally part of SOP 9- Transparency 

Tube)

Protocol review 

meeting

3.00 January 

2012

B. Gawley - Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

- Combined all or sections of v2.02 SOP #s 2, 

3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 to consolidate tasks 

for a stream monitoring session.

- Re-assigned as SOP 4.

- Added procedures for sampling Concord 

River with YSI sonde.

- Added/expanded references to:

 CyberTracker 

 NETNH2O_FieldDE

 Turbidity meter

 FlowTracker 

 Didymo- decontamination

 Post-field activities

- Added copies of field forms as Appendix.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits, including link to USGS manual.

Eliminate “Sun” measurement, since duplicative 

with “Cloud” measurement.

Measurements DOWN from a bolt must be 

recorded as negative numbers.

Wind speed will be measured with Beaufort Scale 

rather than in mph to eliminate need for wind 

meter and to save time in field.

Added more detail to photo procedures.

Decontamination procedures should be followed 

daily.

Internal review
Appendix S4.A. NETN (ACAD) water monitoring field form (continued).

174

SOP 4 Revision History Log (continued)

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

3.02 December 

2013

Brian Mitchell - Minor edits

- Noted that choice of current meter is needed 

in “Before Field Activities”

- Removed detailed turbidity instructions since 

these are in SOP 8.

- Removed detailed sonde instructions since 

these are in SOP 6

- Removed detailed grab sample instructions 

since thes are in SOP 7

- Station, Cloud Cover, and Wind information 

is no longer collected by LNETN. 

- Stream stage is measured from a staff gage 

preferentially, otherwise from one or more 

benchmarks.

- Stage is measured immediately before and 

after the discharge is measured.

- Record percent uncertainty for FlowTracker 

measurements.

- Temperature and turbidity for the Concord 

River (MIMA) are measured on water 

collected with a Van Dorn sampler.

- Grab samples for the Concord River (MIMA) 

are a composite, collected with a Van Dorn 

sampler.

- FlowTracker files must be cleared monthly to 

make new for new data

- Removed “Station” from required data since 

this is part of the metadata and is duplicative 

with NETN site code.

- Updated photopoint procedures to clarify and 

allow panoramic photos.

Reviewer 

suggestions

Clarification

3.03 February 

2015

Brian Mitchell - Leveling should be biannual (April/May and 

October)

- Remove reference to PDA and Q-Calc, 

replaced with iPad/iPhone applications

Detect whether 

changes are 

occurring 

during field 

season or over 

winter.

Change in 

equipment.
175

SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

This SOP for measuring lakes and ponds is adapted from the MDEP’s Lake Assessment Program 

Standard Operating Procedures (Bacon 2004) unless otherwise noted. The SOP is consistent with 

Maine’s Volunteer Lake Monitoring Program (VLMP) protocols (Williams 2004). Properties such 

as specific conductance, pH, temperature, and DO concentrations are measured in situ. Other 

parameters such as color, nutrients, algal biomass, and ANC are collected as a grab or depthintegrated composite sample and analyzed in a laboratory. Lakes and ponds are sampled at the 

deepest point (“deep hole”) of the lake.

Before Field Activities

Several activities should be performed before field monitoring:

 Check current weather conditions and forecast. Postpone monitoring if conditions are unsafe 

or are expected to become unsafe.

 Provide supervisor or designee with the trip/float plan of the day’s field work.

 Pre-deployment sonde calibrations and quality checks detailed in the Pre-Deployment 

Preparation section of SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter 

Sonde should be performed in the laboratory, office, etc., as appropriate, before each day in 

the field. 

 Turn the digital thermometer on to verify that it is operational and the display is legible. 

Carry an extra battery in the field bag. If using a liquid-in-glass thermometer, inspect to be 

certain liquid columns have not separated, inspect bulbs to be sure they are clean and inspect 

protective cases to be sure they are free of sand or debris. 

 Turn on all electric devices to verify that they are fully charged (e.g. camera, iPad, iPhone, 

survey equipment, laser distance measurer). For devices with limited on-board or removable 

memory (e.g camera, survey equipment) verify there is sufficient space for upcoming survey 

work.

 Double check that sufficient quantities and types of labeled sample bottles have been packed, 

including several extras in case of breakage or contamination. 

Field Data Forms

Upon arrival at the monitoring site, observers must note weather conditions, general descriptions of 

site, lake level, and all pertinent metadata (times, dates, logger filenames, etc.) for the monitoring 

visit. A field data form (Appendix S5.A) or iPad Lake/Pond data entry application (NETN 2015) is 
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

176

used to document all information collected during water-quality monitoring. All notations on paper 

data forms are made in either pencil or waterproof pen. Fill in all blanks provided that pertain to the 

data that you will be collecting. Indicate with a “–” if the data are not available or not applicable but 

do not leave the entry blank. Blank entry lines leave the QA/QC checker to wonder if the data were 

forgotten or not available. The following information is to be completed on all field data forms:

 Name and NETN site code- Full name and 6-character code of waterbody being monitored.

 Station (ACAD only)- Numbered location of sample site (needed for Maine DEP data 

sharing; refers to whether site is deep hole or some other location on the lake).

 Surveyor(s)- Name of person(s) doing the observations.

 Date and Time- Date, start time and end time of monitoring visit.

 Sun- Choose and circle the selection that best describes current conditions. At ACAD the 

choice is “Bright”, “Cloudy”, or “Overcast” for compatibility with Maine DEP; in LNETN 

parks the choice is “Steady” or “Variable” light.

 Cloud Cover- Estimate amount of sky obscured by clouds, in 10% increments.

 Wind Velocity and Direction- Determine wind direction and record the appropriate code 

using the diagram on the left side of the data sheet. Determine average wind velocity using a 

hand-held anemometer (ACAD; required for data sharing with Maine DEP) or estimate the 

velocity using tree movement/wave height as a guide (LNETN parks). Record the wind speed 

or corresponding Beaufort Scale (Table S5.1) code in the space provided.

Table S5.1. Beaufort Scale codes and associated descriptive information.

Code # km/h mph Description (Land) Description (Sea)

0 <2 <1 Smoke rises vertically 0 ft waves; flat

1 2 to 5 1 to 3 Wind direction shown by smoke drift 0-1 ft waves; ripples without 

crests

2 6 to 11 4 to 7 Wind felt on face; leaves rustle 1-2 ft waves; small wavelets, 

crests not breaking

3 12 to 20 8 to 12 Leaves, small twigs in constant motion; 

light flag extended

2-3.5 ft waves; large wavelets, 

crests begin to break, scattered 

whitecaps

4 21 to 32 13 to 18 Small branches are moved 3.5-6 ft waves; small waves, 

frequent whitecaps

5 33 to 30 19 to 24 Small trees begin to sway 6-9 ft waves; moderate waves, 

many whitecaps

 Air Temperature- See Section below on Temperature Measurements
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

177

 Surface-water Temperature- See Section below on Temperature Measurements

 Gage Height- Note stage height from staff gage or stage datum mark at beginning of site 

visit. If you measure DOWN to reach the water from a reference bolt, the value must be 

recorded as a negative number.

 Photographic Documentation- Note picture number and description of all pictures. See 

section on Photographic Documentation.

 Observations- A notes field is provided for any additional information pertaining to the 

sampling session, such as water clarity, amount of emergent/floating vegetation, unusual 

occurrences, or equipment problems. Be sure to note any conditions that may cause 

distractions, or affect the quality of the measurements, like the presence of biting insects, 

rain, extreme heat/cold, new crew members or guests. A section is also provided for profile 

data, such as a Li-Cor light penetration profile.

All information included on the paper field form is entered electronically into an MS Access data 

entry module (Figure S5.1). Although not mandatory, electronic data entry in the field can also be 

accomplished by running the data entry module on a ruggedized notebook computer, or by using an 

iPad with a FileMaker Pro application for field data collection (beginning in 2014, NETN 2015).

Figure S5.1. MS Access lake and pond data entry screen for ACAD.
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

178

Measuring Lake/Pond Stage (Water level)

Each lake and pond site has an established benchmark (datum) from which to measure to the water 

surface (“tape-up” or “tape-down” measurement) to determine lake stage. The datum may be a staff 

gage or a bolt, and some sites have multiple datums to facilitate measurements at different water 

levels. All datums must be leveled biannually (April/May and October) as described in SOP 19 –

Leveling Water Monitoring Sites. In some NETN parks, park staff measure lake stage on a weekly 

basis during the entire open-water season. At a minimum, lake stage should be measured at the 

beginning of each monthly monitoring site visit to contribute to the body of data documenting 

seasonal and annual ranges of lake water levels, which are useful for the interpretation of waterquality data. Specific instructions for measuring stage using tape-up and tape-down techniques are 

detailed in SOP 9– Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data. If the site has an automatic water level 

logger, the logger elevation should be checked following procedures in SOP 2 – Establishing, 

Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites at each monthly site visit to determine if the logger 

has moved during the previous sampling interval. 

Photographic Documentation

Annual digital photographic documentation for lake and pond monitoring sites consists of a 

“panorama” series of photographs, beginning at North, taken while anchored at the sampling site 

during the July site visit (at a minimum). If changes to the site are expected or time permits, monthly 

photos can be taken. Use the panoramic photo feature of the camera, or take individual photos and 

mosaic them later. These photos document changes to shoreline conditions. Use the widest angle 

possible within the camera’s zoom range. Try to avoid getting people in the pictures. Take 

photographs from a sitting position, do not use a flash, and take the photo while holding the camera 

level (i.e., do not aim up or down). Bring a set of earlier photos into the field, and try to match them 

as closely as possible. Panoramic photos are named using standard NETN file-naming conventions 

described in SOP 13 – Data Management, using the template:

NETN Site code _ YYYYMMDD_PNR_#

An example using a north-facing picture from a panorama series taken at Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller 

NHP Pond A, taken on July 19, 2010 is:

MABIPA_20100719_PNR_1.jpg

Additional photographic documentation is encouraged. Take photographs of changes in the site after 

shoreline alteration/construction, erosion, flooding or drought conditions, algal blooms, etc. 

Temperature measurements

Water-quality sampling includes an air-temperature measurement and a water-temperature 

measurement, preferably taken with a digital thermometer (thermistor). Read air temperature with a 

dry, calibrated thermometer, prior to taking water temperature. 

1. Place the thermometer in a shaded area protected from strong winds but open to air 

circulation. Avoid areas of possible radiant heat effects, such as warm outboard motors, boat 
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

179

seats, or sides of the boat, raft, or canoe. A possible location is on the bottom of the boat, 

shaded by the seat.

2. Allow time for the thermometer to equilibrate (usually less than a minute for a thermistor, but 

possibly up to 3 to 5 minutes for a liquid-in-glass thermometer), and then record the 

temperature and time of day. 

3. Measure the air temperature as close as possible to the time when the water temperature is 

measured. 

4. Record the air temperature value on the field data form. Report all temperature measurements 

to the nearest 0.1°C (to the nearest 0.5°C with liquid in glass thermometer).

5. Place the metal part of the digital thermometer in the water (do not submerge completely) 

and record the value in degrees Celsius after display stabilizes.

Water Clarity

Water clarity (transparency) is generally measured visually using a Secchi disk and viewing scope, 

but can also be measured electronically using a Li-Cor light meter in ponds that are too shallow for 

the use of a Secchi disk. Water clarity should be measured as early as possible during the monitoring 

visit, before observers stir up sediment or create disturbance that could alter the measurement. 

Detailed instructions for using both the Secchi disk and Li-Cor meter can be found in SOP 8 –

Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration.

Secchi Transparency

Transparency, measured by viewing a Secchi disk as it descends through the water column, is one of 

the simplest methods for estimating lake-water quality. Transparency measured in this manner is 

recorded as “Secchi depth” (or “SD”), expressed in meters. Secchi disk measurements are affected by 

the presence of algae, plankton, water color, or suspended sediment. Transparency is inversely 

related to lake productivity – thus a shallow SD indicates a productive lake. Procedures for

measuring Secchi transparency in a pond or lake are found in “Measuring Transparency with a 

Secchi Disk,” in SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration.

Light Penetration Profiles using Li-Cor

A light penetration profile is taken using two solar radiation sensors and a datalogger. One of the 

sensors (with a spherical diffuser to enable accurate collection of photosynthetically available 

radiation- “PAR”) is lowered into the water column on a weighted lowering frame, suspended from a 

graduated cord. The second sensor ("deck cell") is left on the surface to record ambient light. The 

datalogger records and processes readings from both sensors, calculating the percentage of the total 

light that reaches any given depth. Measurements are taken just below the surface, then at 0.5 m, 1.0 

m, and then one-meter intervals (or smaller intervals if the site is a pond less than 3 m deep) until the 

light penetration drops below 1%. To obtain a light penetration profile, use the procedures in “Light 

Penetration Profile Field Method,” in SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light 

Penetration.
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

180

Measuring Water Quality

In Situ Sonde Measurements in Lakes and Ponds

Detailed operating and quality control procedures for the water-quality sonde are outlined in SOP 6 –

In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde. 

Upon arrival at the monitoring site, the sonde must be allowed to warm up for 4 to 5 minutes before 

taking measurements. During this warm-up period, turn on the sonde by powering up the 650MDS 

and verify that the date and time settings are correct. If an ETrex GPS is connected to the 650MDS, 

make sure GPS readings are displayed on the datalogger.

Use the procedures in the “Making Measurements” section of SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality 

Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde to verify and record the DO calibration values and obtain 

the in situ water quality measurements. 

Collecting Water Samples

Grab Samples in Lakes and Ponds

Grab samples are collected just below the surface of the water (0.5 m) from a boat at the deepest 

point in any of the non-stratified ponds in NETN. Although lake samples for NETN nutrient analysis 

are generally collected as depth-integrated composite (core) samples, there may be instances (such as 

that of a very shallow epilimnion) where collecting a grab sample from a lake is necessary. Follow 

the procedures in “Collecting Grab Samples in Sample Bottles” of SOP 7 – Water Samples: Grab 

and Depth Integrated. 

Collecting Grab Samples with a Throw Bottle

For samples in lakes with poor accessibility by boat, a throw bottle can be used to collect epilimnion 

grab samples at a depth of 0.6 meters, and a distance of about 9 meters from shore. Use this method 

only when necessary as it does not allow for in situ field measurements of SD or lake profiles. The 

sonde measurements of specific conductance, pH, temperature, and DO are made from the shore. If 

possible, make in situ measurements without stirring up bottom sediments and note the location of 

the measurements. To collect the sample, follow the procedures in “Collecting Grab Samples with a 

Throw Bottle” of SOP 7 – Water Samples: Grab and Depth Integrated.

Depth-Integrated Samples of Epilimnion in Lakes and Ponds

Depth-integrated composite samples contain water that represents a range of depths, or a specific 

layer of the lake. Depth-integrated epilimnion samples are collected from stratified ACAD lakes and 

ponds using a 10 meter by half-inch inside diameter, flexible, weighted tube (core sampler) and a 

churn splitter. The procedure to take a depth-integrated “core” sample is described in the “DepthIntegrated Samples of Epilimnion in Lakes or Ponds” section of SOP 7 – Water Samples: Grab and 

Depth Integrated.

Invasive Aquatic Plant-Screening Survey Procedures

The survey techniques for screening parts, or all, of a waterbody for target invasive plants have been 

adapted from Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants (MCIAP) screening survey procedures 

(Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants 2011). This semi-quantitative survey process is described 

in detail in SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures. Surveys are done from mid-July 
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

181

through September so that plants will be sufficiently developed to allow for identification. 

Questionable plants are inspected in the field, and sent to professionals for positive identification.

Level I surveys of all monitored lakes in NETN with a public boat launch are conducted annually. 

Level II surveys are done on all monitored ponds and impoundments in NETN every year except for 

in ACAD (where sites without boat launches are not monitored). It is important that field staff who 

conduct invasive plants surveys attend a training that includes invasive plant identification methods 

and a tutorial field survey in a lake or pond. This training is offered by the MCIAP. Crew should also 

carry Early Detection ID cards to help with priority species identification (Keefer et al. 2010).

Level I and Level II surveys include the following:

Level I: Survey points are at public access and other areas of concentrated boat traffic such as 

marinas and narrow navigation channels. Boat launch survey areas extend horizontally along the 

shoreline at least 100 meters (~300 ft) on either side of the boat launch area, and offshore along the 

entire length to the depth at which rooted plants are no longer observed (the outermost extent of the 

littoral zone.) If the access area is in a distinct cove, the survey includes the entire littoral zone of the 

cove, even if the shoreline distance from the launch area to the mouth of the cove is greater than 100 

meters.

Level II: Survey all Level I areas, plus all areas of the shoreline that are likely to provide suitable 

habitat for aquatic plants, such as shallow, sheltered coves. Floating leaved plants are often a good 

indicator of a rich plant community below the surface. In addition to supporting native plants, these 

areas can provide suitable habitat for invaders.

Step by step procedures for conducting invasive aquatic plant surveys can be found in SOP 10.

Post Field Activities

Several “wrap-up” activities should be performed at the end of each day:

 Check in with supervisor or designee with the trip/float plan promptly upon completion of 

field work.

 Water samples collected for chlorophyll a analysis should be filtered as soon as possible (no 

longer than 24 hours after collection) and the filters should be frozen in preparation for 

shipping. A detailed description of filtering methods can be found in SOP 7—Grab Samples 

and Depth-Integrated Samples.

 Any water samples collected during the day should be packed with ice packs and a chain of 

custody form (SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses, Appendix S12.A) in coolers and shipped via 

Federal Express to the analytical lab, or (if it is too late to meet the day’s shipping deadline) 

the samples should be refrigerated until they can be shipped as early as possible on the next 

day.

 Send an advance copy of the chain of custody to the lab (via email) listing the number of 

samples that are being shipped, and the sample dates and locations. 

 All field equipment should be cleaned with fresh water (deionized water not required) to 

remove any residual mud, dirt, silt or other contamination. Perform additional 
SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds

182

decontamination tasks (detailed in SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures) after the 

initial freshwater rinse; proper decontamination will prevent the spread of pathogens and 

invasive species.

 Take the YSI sonde out of the saturated DO environment (typically a wet towel or PVC tube 

with sponge) and replace the probe guard with the calibration cup. Place approximately 0.5 

inch of water in the calibration cup and screw the cup onto the sonde. Place the sonde in a 

clamp stand or other secure storage location. The cap for the calibration cup should be 

loosely screwed on (1-2 threads engaged) to prevent evaporation but allow some air flow so 

the DO probe will be in a 100% saturated environment.

 Check DO probe membranes for wrinkles and bubbles – the membrane should be 

immediately changed if either condition is present to allow enough time for the membrane to 

stretch and/or “burn in”.

 Data files and photos should be downloaded from dataloggers, cameras, iPads, etc. onto 

computer hard disks, and backed up to removable media (thumbdrive, external hard drive, 

etc.). Rename these files following the NETN file-naming conventions described in SOP 13 –

Data Management.

 Enter data from all field data sheets in to the NETN_H2O Field Data Entry Module or iPad 

lake and pond date entry application.

 Any critical observations (detection of invasive species, water quality issues, resource 

damage, etc.) should be relayed to park resource management staff as soon as possible, 

preferably before traveling to the next park (or site at ACAD).
183

Appendix S5.A. Sample Lake/Pond Monitoring Field Data 

Form for ACAD.
Appendix S5.A. Sample Lake/Pond Monitoring Field Data Form for ACAD (continued).

184
Appendix S5.A. Sample Lake/Pond Monitoring Field Data Form for ACAD (continued).

185

SOP 5 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for 

a given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, 

and are only updated when there are changes to 

the SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 2007 B. Mitchell Section 4.1A: Added to SOP to cover 

Transparency Tube readings (Originally part of 

SOP 11- Secchi Disk).

Section 4.2: Changed steps 3 and 4 to refer to 

DO percent local. Inserted step 5 (predeployment “89” reading). Inserted step 12 

(reading just above bottom for shallow ponds). 

Inserted step 13 (post-deployment “99” reading).

(Originally part of SOP 12- Profiles...)

Protocol Review 

Meeting

2.02 April 2009 B. Mitchell Section 2.2.2: Updated to reflect an annual 

panoramic set of photos for lakes. (Originally 

part of SOP 2 – Metadata collection)

Section 4.1: Clarified location and timing of 

transparency tube measurements. (Originally 

part of SOP 11- Secchi Disk).

3.00 January 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Combined all or sections of v2.02 SOP #s 2, 3, 

4, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 to consolidate tasks 

for a lake or pond monitoring session.

Re-assigned as SOP 5.

Corrected reference for MDEP Lake Assessment 

SOPs.

Added/expanded sections on:

CyberTracker 

NETNH2O_FieldDE 

Post-field activities

Removed instructions for filtering 

Added copies of field forms as Appendix.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+ to 

3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits.

Measurements DOWN from a bolt must be 

recorded as negative numbers.

Wind speed will be measured with Beaufort 

Scale rather than in mph to eliminate need for 

wind meter and to save time in field.

Added more detail to photo procedures.

Decontamination procedures should be followed 

daily.

Internal review
Appendix S5.A. Sample Lake/Pond Monitoring Field Data Form for ACAD (continued).

186

SOP 5 Revision History Log (continued)

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Removed Secchi Transparency instructions 

since they are repeated in SOP 8.

Removed light penetration profile instructions 

since they are repeated in SOP 8.

Removed sonde instructions since they are 

repeated in SOP 6.

Removed grab sample instructions since they 

are in SOP 7.

Removed throw bottle sample instructions since 

they are in SOP 7.

Removed depth-integrated sample instructions 

since they are in SOP 7.

Clarified photo procedures and specifically

request use of the panoramic photo mode on the 

camera.

Reviewer 

recommendation

3.03 February 

2015

Brian Mitchell Leveling should be biannual (April/May and 

October)

Replaced references to PDA with iPad

Detect whether 

changes are 

occurring during 

field season or 

over winter.

New equipment.
187

SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using

Multiparameter Sonde

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

This SOP describes operation of the Yellow Springs Instrumentation (YSI) 600XL multiparameter 

water-quality monitor (sonde) for measuring water-quality parameters in lakes and streams. These 

procedures are adapted from SOP 5 – Spatial Water Quality Monitoring with the YSI Sonde in Kopp 

and Neckles (2004). Although this SOP is written specifically for the YSI model 600XL and the YSI 

650 Multiparameter Display System (MDS) display/logger, other sondes that meet the requirements

of this SOP can also be used. However, use of comparable instrumentation by NETN will simplify 

data management and QA/QC procedures which are integrated into the SOP and include calibration 

methods. The general calibration methods discussed herein are applicable to other manufacturer’s 

sondes and displays/loggers, but consult the manufacturer’s instruction manuals for specific 

procedures.

Background and Familiarization with Instruments

Data are collected using the YSI 600XL sonde connected to a YSI 650 MDS using a field cable. This

SOP describes a standard procedure on how to prepare, calibrate, program, and upload data from 

these instruments. It also provides detailed methods for operating the instrument in the field. 

It is beyond the scope of this SOP to review all of the information and methods that are required to 

operate the YSI 600XL sonde and the YSI 650 MDS and to make effective and accurate 

measurements. It is important that all field and laboratory staff familiarize themselves with the entire 

YSI 6-Series Multiparameter Water Quality Sondes User Manual

(http://www.ysi.com/media/pdfs/069300-YSI-6-Series-Manual-RevH.pdf), the 650 MDS 

Multiparameter Display System Operations Manual (http://www.ysi.com/media/pdfs/655228-YSI650-Operations-Manual-RevB.pdf), and the Technical Notes and Technical Documents available 

from YSI at their Web site (http://www.ysi.com/productsdetail.php?600XL-V2-and-600XLM-V2-6).

The purpose of this instrumentation SOP is to standardize instrument handling, maintenance, 

calibration, and use for all NETN parks. The SOP provides step-by-step instructions specifically 

pertaining to this monitoring protocol; however, it does not provide adequate guidance to ensure 

consistent and accurate measurements. YSI, Inc offers courses on instrument calibration and 

maintenance and all NETN staff involved in instrument calibration are encouraged to receive training 

from YSI, Inc.

YSI, Inc. offers three different depth models of the 600XL: shallow (9 m), medium (61 m), and deep 

(200 m). Although all three models have the same resolution (0.001 m), the depth measurement 

accuracy of the shallow depth model (± 2 cm) is considerably better than that of the medium depth 

model (± 12 cm). The shallow model is appropriate for parks where depths are not expected to 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

188

exceed 9 m; the medium depth unit is appropriate for the remaining park (ACAD). In either case, the 

sonde will be non-vented for pressure, and equipped with the following sensors:

 YSI 6562 Dissolved Oxygen Probe with rapid pulse technology

 YSI 6561 pH Probe

 YSI 6560 Conductivity and Temperature Probe

YSI, Inc. also offers several options on the 650MDS. This SOP calls for the “650-04” configuration, 

which includes the 1.5 MB high-memory option and an integrated barometer. The rechargeable 

battery pack is optional, but always carry four extra C-cell batteries (third-party rechargeable C-cells 

can be used). With the C-cell configuration, the 650MDS can be powered for about 45 hours of 

continuous operation. The YSI rechargeable battery pack will allow for roughly 15 hours of 

operation.

Firmware should be updated at least annually from the YSI Web site http://YSI.com/edownloads.

Confirm that the YSI instrument has a good power source or new batteries before initiating a 

firmware update. If power fails during the update, contact YSI technical support. Sondes and 

dataloggers should be sent to YSI bi-annually for a “winter tune-up”.

Pre-Deployment Preparation

Preparation and programming of the YSI 650MDS Data Logger and Display

The YSI 650MDS serves several functions. It provides a user interface to the sonde while in the field, 

it logs data from the sonde, and it provides a real-time display of the output from each of the sonde 

sensors. At the beginning of each field season, install four fresh C-size alkaline batteries according to 

the directions in the 650 MDS Multiparameter Display System Operations Manual. Pay particular 

attention to the installation of the battery cover O-ring. These batteries can last for the duration of the 

field season, but the charge level (see charge level bar at bottom right corner of display) must be 

monitored and the batteries replaced as needed. Bring a spare set of batteries into the field. 

Before the instrument can be deployed, it must be properly programmed. There are three menu 

sections that need to be programmed: <File>, <Logging Setup> and <System Setup>.

650MDS <File> menu

For ACAD monitoring, the following procedures should be performed before beginning each day of 

monitoring (LNETN keeps files on the sonde for the entire monitoring season):

1. Check to confirm that there are no remaining data (.dat) files stored in the 650MDS memory.

All files will have been removed previously as part of the SOP for downloading data to 

computer; therefore, the presence of any data files will indicate a failure to follow the SOP.

Proceed with caution!

2. Download any files to a specially labeled directory and annotate the calibration log to this 

effect. Use YSI EcoWatch (or EcoWatch Lite for 64-bit operating systems) software to open 

the date files and examine them to ensure they have not been corrupted and rendered 

unreadable in the upload process.
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

189

3. Immediately create a back-up of the data files on a server folder and/or removable media and 

confirm that they too are readable using EcoWatch. After these steps have been completed, 

select <Delete all files> from the 650MDS <File> menu.

650MDS <Logging Setup> menu

The following settings should be entered at the beginning of each monitoring season, and checked 

monthly. From the main menu in the 650MDS, go to <Logging Setup> and program as follows:

1. Set the sampling interval to one second (= 00:00:01)

2. Enable “Use site list”

3. Enable “Store Barometer”

4. Enable “Store Lat and Long”

5. Enable “Store site number”

6. Select <Edit Site List> and create a new file for each site

a. As a standardized naming convention, each ACAD file name will start with a 2-character 

park code followed by a 4-character site name or number and a 2-digit year. LNETN file 

names start with a 4-character park code followed by a 2-character site code and a 2-digit 

year.

b. In the “Site Number” field for each site use 0 for lake, pond, or stream water quality data, 

899 for QC data before sonde is deployed, and 999 for QC data taken after stream/lake 

data obtained, at that site. 

c. The “Site Name” field is for your convenience only. It does not get appended to the data 

file, but it can be useful for differentiating between multiple stations or for keeping track 

of dates associated with each unique file name for the logging station.

650MDS <System Setup> menu

The following settings should be entered at the beginning of each monitoring season, and checked 

monthly. From the main menu in the 650MDS, go to <System Setup> and program as follows:

1. Set the correct date and LOCAL TIME. For all anticipated uses of this SOP, this will be 

Eastern Daylight Savings Time. Select the “4 digit year” option.

2. Make certain that the “Comma radix” option is NOT selected.

3. Set the “Shut off time” to 0 minutes. This will keep the unit on until manually shut off.

4. This menu also provides for user calibration of the barometer. Check the barometer annually 

for drift. Recalibration is a delicate procedure, therefore carefully follow the guidance in the 

650MDS Operations Manual and be certain that you are calibrating in mmHg against 

barometric pressure that has not been corrected for altitude (the National Weather Service 

generally reports barometric pressure corrected to sea level). If in doubt, return the unit to 

YSI Inc. for a factory recalibration.
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

190

650MDS <Sonde Menu>

The following settings should be entered at the beginning of each monitoring season, and checked 

before beginning each day of monitoring:

1. From the main menu in the 650 MDS, choose <Logging Setup> and set the Interval to 1 

second.

2. The following report parameters must be enabled in the <Report> menu:

Date, Time, Temperature, Specific conductance, DO saturation, 

DO saturation (Local), DO concentration, DO charge, and Depth.

3. Go back to the main menu and choose <Sonde Menu>, <Advanced>, <Data Filter>, and set 

the time constant to 12 seconds. This will average values over the previous 12 seconds and 

update to the screen every 1 second. DO is re-calculated every 4 seconds, so an average over

12 seconds will be made up of three DO values. All other parameters are updated more 

frequently and will be made up of running averages. 

Calibration and Quality Assurance

During the calibration procedure, never accept any calibrations that have produced a warning 

message. Instead, determine the cause of the problem, correct it, and recalibrate following this SOP 

and the instrument manual. Each field season, batteries and DO membranes must be replaced. The 

batteries may last for the duration of the field season, but the DO membrane is easily damaged and 

will likely need to be replaced several times during the field season. 

Since DO membranes are unstable for the first 3 to 6 hours after installation, it is important to check 

their condition and performance in advance of any planned field work. This SOP calls for the DO 

membrane to be examined (and replaced if necessary) and the sonde run for 10-15 minutes. After this 

stabilization period, just the DO sensor is recalibrated, and the sonde is ready for use. 

Digital/luminescent/optical DO is beginning to replace Clark cell membrane type DO probes and this 

likely will add longevity to the DO sensor stability and reduce drift in longer deployments (not 

currently required for NETN monitoring). It is possible that this new DO measurement system will 

replace the older technology Clark cells in the next several years, particularly as costs come down, 

but this type of sensor is not compatible with the 600XL.

Standard solutions

Except where explicitly noted in the SOP, standards are NOT to be used for more than one 

calibration. They can, however, be saved and used to pre-rinse the sensors and the calibration cup 

before putting them into fresh standard solutions. Rather than measure calibration solutions with 

graduated cylinders each time they are dispensed, mark the outside of the calibration cup at the 

appropriate levels for each probe. Dispensing standards directly into the calibration cup will also help 

prevent contamination from dirty glassware. For many of the calibration steps, reaching a stable 

calibration point requires the probe and calibration solution to thermally equilibrate. This occurs 

more quickly if both the sonde and all the calibration solutions are at laboratory temperature. Be sure 

to prepare deionized water in advance and store an ample supply in a carboy. Consult the Material 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

191

Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all standards for health and safety information and proper storage and 

disposal requirements. 

Deionized Water

Deionized (“DI”) water is required for calibration of many of the sensors so some guidance is 

provided here on the quality of water that should be used for these purposes. Purchase water or purify 

it on site to a quality equal to, or better than American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

standards for Type III (Laboratory Grade) water. Deionized water used must have a maximum 

conductance of 2.0 μS/cm. Note that a sampling of supermarket distilled waters from around the 

country found hydrologic conductivity values well outside the standard for even ASTM Type III 

Laboratory Grade water (USGS Office of Water-quality Technical Memorandum 92.01; 

http://water.usgs.gov/admin/memo/QW/qw92.01.html). 

NETN uses water filters hooked up to sinks on site to produce DI water; the output of these filters 

should be tested monthly and tested with a benchtop conductivity meter to ensure that conductivity is 

below 2.0 μS/cm. A new filter should produce water with a conductivity of 0.5 to 0.6 μS/cm. Higher 

readings indicate that there may be a leak in the system (e.g. the filter cartridge is not properly seated 

and some source water is flowing around it) or the source water is too "dirty" (in which case a 

standard household inline water filter can be used as a pre-filter). Additionally, it is important to not 

try to run the water through the filter too fast. A fairly slow flow rate is needed to allow enough 

contact time between the water and the filter media. Once the system is connected to the tap you can 

fill it quickly in order to purge all the air from the system (be sure to use the bleeder lever on the top 

of the filter holder) then slow the flow down to a steady trickle.

Use ASTM Type II (Reagent Grade) water for mixing buffer solutions. This SOP calls for the use of 

pre-prepared conductivity standards for calibration of the sonde. Do not prepare or dilute customized 

standards. Water prepared by distillation or ion exchange includes a polishing step by passing the 

water through a 0.45μm filter to remove bacteria and any ion-exchange medium that escapes the 

columns. 

Instrument Preparation

Prepare and calibrate the 600XL while it is secure in a ring stand or custom-mounted hook. All 

procedures must be completed in the order they are presented in the following sections. Allowable 

variations in sonde readings are listed in Table S6.1.

Before the water-quality sonde can be used, it must be calibrated and several maintenance steps 

performed. Assemble the individual sensors onto the sonde per instructions in the manual using extra 

care not to cross-thread the sensors when installing them onto the softer PVC sonde bulkhead. Before 

calibration, visually inspect the sonde for any abnormalities. Attach the Dry Calibration Cable 

between the sonde and the 650MDS, and establish communication with the sonde.

Before beginning, verify the accuracy of your sonde’s temperature probe with a traceable 

thermometer or other reference. Temperature compensation is used in almost every sonde 

measurement so its accuracy must be verified and recorded each time the sonde is calibrated. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

192

Table S6.1. Allowable variations in YSI 600XL sonde readings.

Measurement Parameter Standard direct field measurement

Stabilization criteria for 

measurements (variability should 

be within value shown)

Temperature Thermistor thermometer ± 0.2° C

Liquid-in-glass thermometer ± 0.5° C

Specific conductance When ≤ 100 μS/cm ± 5 percent

When > 100 μS/cm ± 3 percent

pH Meter displays to 0.01 ± 0.2 standard pH units

Dissolved Oxygen Amperometric method ± 0.3 mg/L

Calibration of Dissolved Oxygen Sensor

The dissolved oxygen sensor should be calibrated in the laboratory before each field deployment day 

and at each field site prior to taking in-situ measurements. 

1. Inspect the DO probe anodes. If they are darkened or gray in color, recondition using the 

6035 reconditioning kit that is supplied with the probe.

2. Inspect the DO membrane. It must be undamaged, tightly stretched, wrinkle free, and free of 

air or gas bubbles beneath the membrane. If necessary, install a new membrane following 

guidance in the YSI 6-Series Operations Manual and Technical Notes. To install the

membrane it is often easier to remove the sensor from the sonde and then install the 

membrane.

3. Place the sonde in the ring stand or custom support bracket. Put approximately 0.5 cm of 

water in the bottom of the calibration cup (do not allow water to touch the membrane) and 

loosely attach it to the sonde (engaging several threads). Make sure that the 650 datalogger 

displays the DO Charge and DO Local values. If necessary, go to the sonde <Report> menu 

and enable these options. 

In the field, the probe end of the sonde (with probe guard in place) is wrapped in a wet, white 

towel or placed in a PVC tube with a sponge to provide the saturated DO environment, rather 

than using the calibration cup. During the following steps, keep the wrapped probe out of direct 

sunlight and sheltered from strong wind exposure.

4. Go to the sonde <Advanced> <Setup> menu and confirm that the “RS-232 auto-sleep” 

function is disabled.

5. If a new membrane has just been installed, go to the <Run> menu and start the sonde in the 

<Discrete Sample> mode with a 4-second sample interval. Allow the sonde to run for 10 

minutes to “burn in” the new membrane. Record the DO charge on the calibration log or field 

data sheet. The number should be 50 plus or minus 25. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

193

6. Perform a High-to-Low Transmission Test: Start the sonde in <Discrete Sample> mode with 

a 4-second sample interval. Disregard the first two DO percent saturation samples, and then 

record the next 10 samples. The DO percent saturation values must start high and drop with 

each 4-second reading. It does not matter if the readings do not reach 100percent, but there 

must be a high to low trend. If the recorded values start low then climb upward, the sensor 

has a problem and must be reconditioned or replaced. Record the 10 readings and the passfail status of the test on the calibration log or field data sheet. Escape from the <Run> mode.

7. Wait at least 5 minutes in the idle (not <Run>) mode before proceeding. Wait at least 10 

minutes from the time the calibration cup (with 0.5 cm water in bottom) was attached to the 

sonde body (or sonde was placed in a saturated DO environment). Once these minimum 

times have been reached, calibrate the DO sensor using the <DOpercent> method: 

a. From the 650MDS Main Menu, select <Sonde Menu>

b. Select <Calibrate>

c. Select <Dissolved Oxy>

d. Select <DOpercent>

e. Update the barometric pressure used for the calibration (large font numerals) so that it 

exactly matches the barometric pressure as measured by the 650MDS (small font 

numerals in the bottom right corner of the screen). Record the pressure value on the 

calibration log or field data sheet.

f. Press <enter> and wait for the sensor to stabilize. Record the DO Charge on the 

calibration log or field data sheet. It should be 50 ± 25. 

g. If the sonde is properly programmed (auto-sleep off) you will be prompted to press 

<enter> to initiate the calibration once the values have stabilized (display will update 

with each reading). The “Continue” message should display in the upper right corner of 

the 650MDS screen when calibration is complete. After calibration, DO% Local readings 

should be 100% ± 2%. This value should be recorded on the calibration log or the field 

data sheet. 

h. If the probe needs to be recalibrated, go to the <Calibrate> menu and repeat the last two 

steps from the DO calibration section. Should the sensor fail to calibrate, follow troubleshooting guidance in the YSI 6-Series Environmental Monitoring Systems Operations 

Manual.

i. Press <Enter> or <Esc> to escape back to the 650MDS sonde menu.

8. Check the “DO local gain” for the sensor and record it on the calibration log. This is found 

under the sonde’s <Advanced Menu> under the <Cal Constants> option. The target value for 

gain is 1.0, with an acceptable range from 0.7 to 1.4. 

9. In the field, the 100% saturation measurement after calibration should be logged in the “899” 

site of the datalogger file. The calibration information should also be entered in the 

appropriate section of the field data sheet.
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

194

Note: If technicians are seeing DO values less than roughly 2 mg/L, a zero DO solution can be 

prepared in the field or can be taken to the field to check the DO sensor. A sodium sulfite solution is 

made by dissolving 1 gram of sodium sulfite (Na2S03) and a few crystals (about 1 mg) of cobalt 

chloride (CoC12) in 1 liter of distilled water. The zero DO solution is used as a check standard and 

should read less than 0.5 mg/L. Sodium sulfite can compromise the gold cathode of the DO sensor so 

use only as necessary.

Calibration of Conductivity Sensor

Check and/or calibrate conductivity in the laboratory before calibrating pH. The sensor should be 

calibrated a minimum of monthly, using 1 mS/cm (1,000 μS/cm) standard. At Acadia, perform a onepoint calibration check (typically using 50 or 100 μS/cm standards) at the beginning of each 

sampling week. At other parks, perform this one-point check using 100 or 250 μS/cm standards. The 

check sample should use a standard similar to the conductivity that is expected in the field based on 

previous monitoring data. If the check sample is out of the acceptable range specified in Table S6.1, 

recalibrate the sensor and recheck.

Calibration of the conductivity probe is very vulnerable to contamination. Before performing the 

calibration, the calibration cup and all the surfaces of all the probes must be triple rinsed with DI 

water, followed by a triple rinse using a small amount of conductivity standard. Using standard saved 

from a previous conductivity calibration is acceptable for this step. 

1. Pour approximately 50 mL of 1 mS/cm (1,000 μS/cm) conductivity standard into a clean and 

dry calibration cup and attach it to the sonde body. Swirl, tip, and gently shake the sonde to 

thoroughly wet all of the probe and bulkhead surfaces. Discard this standard solution (do not 

re-use rinse standards). Repeat this step two more times.

2. Pour enough fresh 1 mS/cm conductivity standard into the calibration cup to fully cover the 

conductivity probe. 

3. Ensure that the conductivity probe is completely submerged in the standard. The hole in the 

side of the probe must be under the surface of the solution and not trap bubbles in the 

opening.

4. Initiate calibration of the probe by selecting the <specific conductance> option and entering 

the conductivity of the calibration standard. (Note: Be sure to enter the conductivity of the 

standard in mS/cm, not μS/cm. The NETN calibration standard is 1 mS/cm). 

5. Allow the sonde to run for at least 1 minute to ensure thermal equilibration (wait longer if the 

sonde, the conductivity standard, and the deionized water from previous steps are not all at 

the same laboratory temperature). After no changes occur in the reading for approximately 30 

seconds, accept the calibration (hit <enter>) and record on the calibration log the last value 

reported before pressing <enter>. With an NBS-traceable thermometer, verify the accuracy of 

the sonde temperature reading and record it on the calibration log.

6. When the calibration has been accepted, check the “Conductivity Cell Constant” for the 

sensor and record it on the calibration log. This is found under the sonde’s <Advanced 

Menu> under the <Cal Constants> option. The target value for this probe is 5.0 ± 0.45. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

195

Numbers outside this range usually indicate a problem in the calibration process or a 

contaminated standard. Never override a calibration error message and investigate any “Out 

of Range” report. Typical causes for error messages are incorrect entries. For example, 

entering 1,000 microsiemens (μS) instead of 1.0 millisiemens (mS) (Note: the sonde requires 

the input in millisiemens). Low fluid level in the calibration cup and (or) air bubbles in the 

probe cell can also cause error messages to appear. 

Calibration of pH Sensor

YSI pH probes can last up to 2 years and cost approximately $250, but response time and accuracy 

tends to decline relatively early in the second year of service. To be safe, replace the pH probe every 

year, and use the old probe as a back-up for one year. Older probes can be cleaned in the laboratory 

to improve performance but cannot be factory reconditioned. Calibrate the pH sensor in the 

laboratory before each field sampling day. 

1. Make sure that the 650 datalogger displays the pH mV value. If necessary, go to the sonde’s 

report menu and enable the pH mV output. This will allow the sonde to display both the 

millivolts (the probe’s raw output) and the pH units during the calibration process.

2. Clean or replace the probe if a slow response in the field has been reported.

3. Select the “ISO pH” option from the <Calibration > menu, then select the calibration type (1 

to 3-point). A two point calibration is standard for most situations. Use buffers that bracket 

the expected in situ pH values. Always use a primary pH 7 buffer and then select a secondary 

pH 4 buffer (if acidic conditions are expected) or pH 10 buffer (for alkaline waters). Use the 

three-point calibration only if the in situ pH value is unknown. 

4. Type in first pH buffer value (7.##) when prompted. Exact buffer values vary with 

temperature. Determine the temperature of the buffer solution and enter the appropriate pH 

value from the chart on side of the buffer bottle. Ensure that the temperature probe is fully 

submerged in the buffer solution.

5. When the pH value is stable hit the <Enter> key to calibrate, and record the pH millivolts on 

the calibration log. The millivolt output is the unprocessed pH output; the acceptable 

tolerance for each buffer is shown below. 

Buffer 4 = +180 +/-50mV

Buffer 7 = 0 +/- 50mV

Buffer 10 = -180 +/-50mV

When a probe is new, the millivolt values are close to the 0 and 180. As the probe begins to 

age, the numbers will shift to the higher side of the tolerance range. Buffer 4 response has a 

tendency to drift slightly out of the acceptable range of 180 mV ± 50. If this occurs, 

recondition the pH probe per the procedure in the YSI manual. If the probe has a response 

time of less than 60 seconds in buffers and the slope remains within spec, you can continue to 

use it. If you start to see slow response in the field or in the standards when checking 

calibration, then consider replacement.
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

196

6. Hit the <Enter> key again to continue to the next calibration point. Repeat steps 4 and 5 with 

the second buffer. 

7. After recording the pH millivolts for the calibration points, determine the slope of the sensor. 

The slope is the difference between the two calibration points that were used. For example, if 

a +3mV was recorded for buffer 7 and a -177 for the buffer 10, then the slope would be 180. 

The acceptable range for the slope is 165 to 180. Once the slope falls out of this range, the 

sensor must be taken out of service. 

WARNING: Never override any “calibration error” or “out of range” warnings without fully 

understanding the reason for the message. In most cases, the warning indicates that there is a 

problem that will result in suspect field readings. 

pH Check Sample

After calibrating the pH probe, use a low ionic strength pH 4.63 standard (buffer) solution to verify 

the accuracy of the probe in this range, since many NETN waters are low ionic strength. 

“Challenging” the probe with such a solution is also likely to detect accuracy degradation sooner than 

just monitoring the sensor slope and other performance indicators. Use the check sample during the 

first calibration session of each monitoring week. If the check sample results are out of range (> ±0.2 

pH units), verify the check sample pH with a second meter. If the standard is within range of its 

certified value, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning/reconditioning the probe. If the 

reconditioned probe continues to fail the check sample test, replace the probe.

Calibration of Pressure/Depth Sensor

The pressure sample is calibrated in the field to facilitate more accurate depth measurements.

During the calibration process the sonde should be partially submerged in the water, with the round 

pressure port just above the water surface.

1. From the <Calibrate> menu, select <Pressure-Abs>.

2. Input 0.00. 

3. Wait until no significant change in depth reading on the datalogger occurs for approximately 

30 seconds, then press <enter> to confirm the calibration.

4. Calibrate pressure/depth again at each new site just before taking sample measurements

Final Preparation of the Sonde for Field Work

1. Remove the calibration cup from the sonde body and install the sensor guard. It is best not to 

attempt this in the field since the oxygen membrane is vulnerable to being damaged if it is 

bumped by the guard.

2. Wrap the sonde in a white towel that has been soaked in tap water. Cover the entire sensor 

guard with the towel and wrap it around it at least twice. Alternatively, place it in a PVC tube 

with a wet sponge. This will provide a humid environment for the sensors, protection from 

thermal extremes, and some degree of shock protection. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

197

3. Transport the sonde to the field in a short section of 6” PVC pipe, capped on one end and 

cushioned on the bottom with a large damp sponge. The open end of the pipe can be fitted 

with a rubber cap with X-shaped slits to hold the sonde securely in place.

Making Measurements 

Data can be logged either as a discrete point (after the user has verified stabilization) or as a 

continuous data stream at a fixed sample interval. Both of these types of data can be recorded in the 

same file. Most, if not all, data collected by NETN water monitors will be logged as discrete points. 

Set up a user site list on the YSI 650 MDS before taking readings in the field by selecting <Logging 

Setup> and activate <Use site list> (see 650 MDS Multiparameter Display System Operations 

Manual, section 3).

1. The 650 MDS can be connected to a GPS unit (set to use NMEA communication protocol) via a 

pair of RS-232 adapter cables. This feature enables GPS coordinates to be saved with each water 

quality reading. Connect the GPS unit to the 650 MDS and turn both instruments on. Once the 

GPS begins receiving satellite data, the current coordinates (in decimal degree format) appear at 

the bottom of the 650 MDS display. Make sure the GPS unit is in communication with the 650 

MDS before beginning water quality data collection.

2. Check the date and time on the 650 MDS display. These values are also saved with the water 

quality readings, and must be correct. 

3. Allow the sonde electronics to “warm up” for 4 to 5 minutes before taking measurements. Turn 

on the sonde by powering up the 650MDS and selecting <Sonde run> from the main menu and 

run in <Discrete Sample> mode. Check the first few 650MDS display updates and verify that the 

DO readings drop from high to low.

4. During the warm up period, re-wet towel or sponge in the water at the sample site and wring out 

until damp. Submerge the sonde briefly in the water, and then rewrap with the towel or place it 

back in the PVC tube with the sponge in order to bring it closer to sampling temperature 

(especially if it has been in a hot vehicle). 

5. Once the oxygen saturation readings have equilibrated (up to an additional 10 minutes), and with 

the unit still in a saturated DO environement and in a shady location, check the DO percent local 

saturation (“DO% L”). Confirm that it reads 100% ± 2%. If the DO% local saturation has drifted 

beyond these tolerances, the DO channel must be recalibrated on the spot. 

6. After confirming that the DO% local saturation (“DO% L”) reads 100% ± 2%, fill in the 

calibration information on the field data form.

7. Enter the 100% saturation readings into the 650MDS data file for the sample site. With the sonde 

still out of the water and in a saturated DO environment, select Log one sample (upper left) and 

press enter, choose the correct file and pre-deployment site number (899) from the list and press 

enter to log the sample. This reading is also recorded on the data sheet.

8. Remove the towel or take the sonde out of the PVC tube and place the sonde in the water and 

wait for readings to stabilize.
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

198

9. For lake or pond sampling, ensure that the small, circular pressure sensor on the side of the sonde 

is just above the water level to prepare for depth calibration. Then go to the <Calibrate> menu 

and select <Pressure-Abs>. Input 0.00 (or a known sensor offset in ft if working far from sea 

level). Wait until no significant change in depth reading on the datalogger occurs for 

approximately 30 seconds, then press <Enter> to calibrate. Return to the <Sonde run> <Discrete 

Sample> mode and submerge the sonde probes just below the surface of the water to obtain the 

surface reading

10. When readings are stable select Log one sample (upper left) and press enter. Select the correct 

file and site number (0) from the list and press enter to log the sample.

11. For stream or river sampling, record at as many points as is appropriate for the given site and 

cross section. If the stream is fully mixed and small, only one point is needed from the middle of 

the channel. The only site within NETN that needs multiple points is the Concord River.

12. For lake or pond sampling, lower the sonde to the next depth station (one meter for Acadia lakes 

and ponds, 0.5 meters for Lower NETN ponds) and repeat the process above. Use the tape marks 

on the sonde cord as guide to depth and log the sample when both the water quality and depth 

values are stable on the datalogger display.

13. For lake or pond sampling, use care when obtaining readings near the bottom – avoid burying the 

probe tip in bottom sediments. Watch the datalogger closely when approaching the expected 

bottom depth – sharply increasing conductance and decreasing DO readings can be indicators 

that the probes are nearing sediment.

14. For ACAD lake or pond sampling when a depth-integrated core sample is to be collected, note 

the temperature and DO readings on the field data sheet to document the depth of the epilimnion 

to help determine the core sample depth.

15. Remove the sonde from the water and shake off excess water droplets from probes. Wrap probe 

in freshly wetted towel or re-wet the sponge and place the sonde back in the PVC tube and wait 

for readings to stabilize. When readings are stable select Log one sample (upper left) and press 

enter. Select correct file and the post-deployment site number (999) and press enter to log the 

sample. The post-deployment DO percent L should read 100 percent ± 2 percent.

Data Upload 

Upload data from the 650MDS to a computer at the end of each field day. Connect the 650MDS to 

your computer using the YSI 655174 PC interface cable and launch YSI EcoWatch Lite software.

1. Select data storage location.

 Click the <File> menu and then “Options”. 

 On the “Terminal” tab, users can set the folder location to which EcoWatch Lite files will 

be saved. Click “Browse” to open a file menu in which users can select the default 

“Data” folder.

2. Select data parameters. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

199

 Click the <Parameters> menu and then “My template...” option.

 Choose the parameters to display when files are views in EcoWatch Lite by doubleclicking the available parameters from the right-hand column or using the arrow buttons. 

If a parameter is moved to the left-side “Selected:” column, then data for that particular 

sensor will also appear in the exported report.

 Selected parameters for the YSI 600XL are: Date M/D/Y, Temp C, SpCond uS, DOsat%, 

DOsat%Local, DO mg/L, DOchrg, Depth meters, pH, pH mV, Baro mmHg, Latitude 

Deg, Longitude Deg, and SiteNum.

3. Establish a connection with the 650MDS Handheld by selecting the “New Connection” 

option in the EcoWatch Lite <File> menu. 

 Use the drop-down menus in the lower left hand side of the terminal window to select 

the appropriate Com port and baud rate (9600) associated with your instrument.

4. To transfer data from the 650MDS to your PC, select the “Upload to PC” option from the 

650MDS Main Menu <File> menu to view a list of available files.

 Highlight the file you wish to transfer and press the Enter button on the 650MDS 

keypad. 

 Both the 650MDS and PC displays will show the progress of the file transfer until 

completion.

4. Immediately create a back-up copy of the data files on external storage media and confirm 

that they too are readable using EcoWatch Lite. 

5. For ACAD (and LNETN at the end of the monitoring season): After these steps have been 

completed, delete all files from the 650MDS by selecting the <File> menu and <Delete all 

files>. Note that file names and site numbers entered as part of the “Site List” are not deleted 

in this process, only the data contained within the files are deleted. 

6. Use an Excel spreadsheet stored with the data files to describe any data issues, like incorrect 

site codes or explanations for extra samples. This will facilitate identifying the correct data 

records to import into the water monitoring database.

Data Reduction and Quality Control

The PC6000 format data files uploaded from YSI sondes are not readily editable, making them ideal 

for archiving purposes. To perform the data-reduction steps in this SOP, use the <Export> feature in 

EcoWatch Lite to create a comma-delimited file (using the “CSV” export option in the EcoWatch 

Lite process), which can then be imported by most spreadsheet and database programs:

1. Open the file you want to export in EcoWatch Lite.

2. Choose the then “Export” option from the EcoWatch Lite <File> menu, and select the “CSV” 

option (necessary to properly separate the time and date in the export file). 

3. Chose the location in which to save the file, and then click “Save.”
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

200

To assist in file tracking and management, change only the file extension when converting from one 

format to another, but do not alter the filename. Also create a text document (.txt) with this same 

filename for documenting all data-reduction steps that are specific to that data file (data rejection). 

For each station sampled perform the data checks and data-reduction steps described below.

Dissolved Oxygen Calibration Check 

Check the calibration of the DO sensor before and after taking field measurements at each site. These 

calibrations are part of the data stream for each station since the sonde starts logging while still in 

water-saturated air. The in-air data (identified using the site numbers 899 and 999) at the beginning 

and end of each site should read between 97-103 percent. If this is not the case, then proceed as 

follows:

1. If the pre-deployment DO percent saturation fails this test, then omit the entire profile 

from the data analysis. This occurrence will be rare since the operator is instructed to 

perform a check in the field and take corrective action if necessary.

2. If only the post-deployment DO percent saturation fails this test, if bottom water DO 

concentrations were less than 1 mg/L, or if there is a record of the sonde having hit the 

substratum, then use only the downcast for data analysis. 

3. If only the post-deployment DO percent saturation fails this test but a low DO 

concentration was not encountered, examine the DO and DO charge channels carefully 

and use best professional judgment on whether data can be salvaged.

Dissolved Oxygen Membrane Check

Check the “DO charge” for each reading to see that it ranges between 25 and 75. If the reading is 

outside this range, discard the DO readings (percent saturation and concentration) associated with 

this failed “DO charge” reading.

Sulfide-Interference Check

The presence of hydrogen sulfide will interfere with the Clarke-type electrode used for DO and make 

the output “jumpy”. This effect is seen when the bottom water is anoxic and H2S is present or when 

the sensor is run into anoxic sediments. Reject faulty data as follows:

1. Check to see if the sonde encountered low DO during the profile. If so, and the readings in 

the low DO portion of the profile are erratic, use best professional judgment to clean up DO 

data for further analysis.

2. Check to see if the sonde touched the bottom during the deployment (reported on the Field 

Data Sheet). If so, and if the DO channels show erratic performance on upcast measurements 

(not normally collected during NETN monitoring), use only the downcast DO data for further 

analysis.

Sensor-Performance Specification Check

Reject data outside the design specification range for each sensor. These specifications are currently 

as follows:
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

201

Temperature.........................................-5 to 45  ̊C

Conductivity........................................0 to 100 mS/cm

Dissolved Oxygen, percent saturation.........0 to 500% air saturation

Dissolved Oxygen, mg/L.........................0 to 50 mg/L

Dissolved Oxygen charge........................25-75

Absolute Data Rejection

Absolute data rejection is a means of removing erroneous values from the data record because the 

data do not meet basic principles of sensor behavior or proper sonde deployment. Because absolute 

data rejection is based upon basic principles, data can be rejected using automated computer scripts 

with conditional arguments. Data must be rejected when the recorded value for any sensor is outside 

its performance specifications. Environmental specifications for each sensor are listed in the previous 

section (Sensor Performance Specification Check). Any data that fall outside the specification 

intervals must be removed from the official record. 

Discretionary Data Rejection, Drift Correction, and Data Reduction

Data rejection, drift correction, and data reduction must be carried out manually under the 

supervision of the water monitoring coordinator, who has experience in water-quality monitoring and 

knowledge of the YSI sonde and its application in this data-collection SOP. Ideally, these steps are 

taken as soon as possible after completing a site so that corrective action can be attempted for any 

subsequent measurements. A rapid evaluation for any gross problems with the data record can be 

made using the graphing features of YSI’s EcoWatch software. Examine the output from each sensor 

individually for any discontinuity in the data, which generally indicates catastrophic failure during 

the measurement. Sensor-specific details for data rejection and drift correction are provided in the 

following sections.

Temperature

The temperature sensor on the YSI 6560 temperature and conductivity probe is robust and unlikely to 

fail. Rare failure has been observed, however, and is most often associated with an irreversible 

malfunction from leakage of the sensor housing. Incorrect temperature data are indicated by a clear 

point of temperature discontinuity followed by unreasonable and erratic values or unreasonable drift. 

If clearly incorrect temperature data are observed, all data from that point on must be removed from 

the official record. Since all the other sensors are temperature compensated using values from the 

6560 thermistor, ALL data following failure of a temperature probe are suspect and must be removed 

from the official record.

Conductivity

Like the thermistor on the YSI 6560 temperature and conductivity probe, the conductivity cell is 

robust and rarely shows catastrophic failure. If an error occurs, it is usually a drift of the output from 

biofouling within the water ports of the conductivity cell. This results in a change in the effective 

volume of the cell, which, in turn, results in drift of the output. The post-deployment calibration 

indicates whether such a drift has occurred. Cleaning of the sensor ports usually resolves the issue. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

202

In the unlikely event of catastrophic sensor failure, a sharp discontinuity is evident in the output, and 

all subsequent data must be removed from the record. 

Dissolved Oxygen

The YSI 6562 DO probe is susceptible to both drift and catastrophic failure. Catastrophic failure of 

the DO probe is more common, and is usually the result of a puncture in the membrane, either by 

debris or organisms, or from an improperly installed membrane. Under these scenarios, output is 

generally characterized by a large discontinuity. Readings then become unreasonably high quickly 

and either become noisy or drift. The likely cause of this behavior is “crosstalk” through the 

membrane hole caused by electrical continuity between the DO and conductivity sensors. All data 

after the initial discontinuity must be removed from the record, regardless of later probe behavior. 

After this type of catastrophic failure, recondition the probe surface before it is put back in service. 

Follow guidance in the YSI 6-Series Environmental Monitoring Systems Manual. Occasionally the 

DO probe fails because of structural failure of the Clark-type electrodes. The symptoms are similar, 

and are accompanied by high DO-charge values. All data after the initial discontinuity must be 

removed from the record.

pH

The YSI pH probe is generally usable for two years, and should provide trouble-free performance. 

However, at Acadia in 2007, staff noticed that they were getting unusual readings during the second 

year of their probe’s life, despite the acceptable calibration data. The problem was that the probe 

behaved differently in the field at Acadia (where the water has a very low ionic strength) than it did 

in the high ionic strength calibration standard. Because of this issue, calibration checks at Acadia 

should always use low-ionic strength standard, and the probes should be retired after one year of use.

YSI Sonde Accuracy Checks

In addition to weekly checks using certified standards, verify the accuracy of the YSI sonde pH and 

conductance readings using benchtop meters with traceable accuracy, and use a LaMotte dissolved 

oxygen test kit #5860 (Winkler Titration) to validate dissolved oxygen measurements.

During each sampling set, or twice per month, use one water sample collected in the field at a 

randomly-selected site (this sample is collected in addition to samples sent for nutrient analysis) to 

conduct several comparison measurements using any YSIs used during that sampling set and 

benchtop pH and conductivity probes that have been demonstrated to be accurate through 

manufacturers (re)certification, interlab comparison with a certified laboratory, and/or successful 

checks with certified standards.

1. In a lab setting, perform appropriate pH and conductivity calibrations on the YSI sonde using 

procedures found in the previous sections of this SOP. Also perform the appropriate 

calibrations on lab benchtop meters prior to comparison measurements. Record all calibration 

information on calibration logs and on the accuracy check worksheet.

2. Triple rinse the YSI calibration cup and all surfaces of probes with DI water, then triple rinse 

with water sample. Pour enough water into each calibration cup to cover all probes. 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

203

3. Prepare benchtop probes with the same rinsing procedures, and put probe in a sample of the 

same water.

4. Compare pH and conductivity measurements from all instruments. If using more than one 

YSI sonde, also compare temperature and barometric pressure values from each. Use a NBStraceable thermometer to verify the accuracy of the sonde temperature. Check that the date 

and time are correct in all YSI data loggers.

5. Regardless of whether you are comparing readings between the YSI sondes or a YSI and a 

benchtop meter, the difference between the two measurements should be no more than the 

sensor specifications of both probes when added together. Record all values on the accuracy 

check worksheet.

YSI 600XL Accuracy:

a. pH accuracy: ±2% of reading or 0.2 pH units

b. Conductance accuracy: ± 0.5% of reading + 0.001 mS/cm

c. Temperature: ±0.15°C

d. Dissolved Oxygen mg/L: 0 to 20 mg/L: ± 0.2 mg/L or 2% of reading,

e. whichever is greater; 20 to 50 mg/L: ±6% of reading

A dissolved oxygen accuracy check should be done in the field to allow an in-situ YSI reading. To 

compare DO measurements, place the YSI in the waterbody being measured, and turn the 650 on to 

the run screen. While the DO probe equilibrates, collect a water sample and immediately perform the 

DO Winkler Titration using a LaMotte dissolved oxygen test kit, Code 5860. Refer to the procedure 

booklet enclosed in the kit for more details.

1. Rinse the provided glass bottle and cap three times with sample water.

2. Cap the bottle, and submerge to desired depth. Remove the cap under water and let the bottle 

fill. Tap the sides of the bottle to release any air bubbles clinging to the inside. Be sure to cap 

the bottle underwater to ensure no atmospheric oxygen interferes with the sample water.

3. Quickly and immediately add eight drops of Manganous Sulfate Solution and eight drops of 

Alkaline Potassium Iodide Azide. Cap and invert several times. A precipitate will form.

Allow the bottle to sit until the precipitate settles below the shoulder of the bottle.

4. Add eight drops of Sulfuric Acid 1:1, cap, and mix until the precipitate has dissolved. The 

water will turn clear-yellow to brown-orange depending on the amount of dissolved oxygen 

in the sample. 

5. After this step, the water sample is “fixed” and contact with the atmosphere will not affect 

the test result.

6. Pour the “fixed” sample into the titration tube to the 20 mL line.

7. Fill the Direct Reading Titrator (small syringe) with Sodium Thiosulfate, 0.025N, to where 

the plunger tip meets the zero mark on the scale. Insert the Titrator into the hole of the 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

204

titration tube cap. Gently swirl the tube and slowly press the plunger to titrate until the 

sample is reduced to a faint yellow (“straw”) color. If the color is faint yellow before adding 

Sodium Thiosulfate, skip directly to step 8.

8. Remove cap and Titrator, without disturbing the plunger, as the titration begun in step 6 will 

be continued.

9. Add eight drops of Starch Indicator Solution, turning the sample blue or purple

10. Replace the cap and Titrator. Titrate drop by drop until the blue color just disappears. Read 

results where the plunger tip meets the scale, and record as ppm dissolved oxygen. 

11. Record comparison results on field form.

Enter all accuracy comparison results from the accuracy check worksheet into the appropriate 

table(s) in the NETN_H2O water monitoring database. If comparison values are outside of accepted 

limits examine, clean and/or repair equipment suspected of being inaccurate and then repeat all check 

procedures. If the second comparison is still unacceptable, take the equipment out of service until the 

problem has been diagnosed and corrected.

Probe Care and Storage

Of the probes used for this protocol, the pH probe electrode has the most limited life expectancy, and 

must be kept clean and stored properly. If the response of the probe seems slow or contaminants or 

deposits appear on the glass or platinum surfaces, carefully clean the probe. Use clean water and a 

soft clean cloth or a cotton swab to remove all foreign material from the glass bulb. Be careful not to 

wedge swab tips between the guard and the glass sensor. If good pH response is not restored by the 

above procedure, perform the following additional procedure:

1. Soak the probe for 10-15 minutes in clean water containing a few drops of commercial 

dishwashing liquid.

2. GENTLY clean the glass bulb and platinum button by rubbing with a cotton swab soaked in 

the cleaning solution.

3. Rinse the probe in clean water, wipe with a cotton swab saturated with clean water, and then 

re-rinse with clean water.

If good response is still not restored by the above procedure, clean with hydrochloric acid or return to 

YSI for cleaning or replacement. Because pH probes can dry out if improperly stored it is important 

for both short and long-term storage to make sure that the reference electrode junction does not dry 

out.

The YSI 5662 Dissolved Oxygen probes also have limited life expectancy. Under normal 

circumstances, the probe performs well for at least 2-3 years, and requires resurfacing during this 

period. 

Consequently, it is important to keep replacement probes on hand to replace a probe that fails to 

calibrate properly. The NETN replaces pH probes annually, and the “replaced” probe is kept as a 
SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

205

spare for one year. Note, however, that both the pH and DO probes have limited shelf lives, so do not 

purchase replacements too far in advance of need.

YSI recommends that short-term storage of all multiparameter monitoring instruments be 

accomplished by placing approximately 0.5 inch of water in the calibration cup that was supplied 

with the instrument, and screwing the sonde (with all of the probes attached) into the cup. The use of 

a moist sponge instead of a half-inch of water is also acceptable as long as its presence does not 

compromise the attachment of the calibration cup to the sonde. The calibration cup should be sealed 

to prevent evaporation.

The long-term storage protocol for model 600XL, 6820, 6600 and 6920 systems is as follows:

1. Remove batteries from the 650MDS.

2. Remove the pH or pH/ORP probe from the sonde and seal the empty port with the provided 

plug.

3. Place the pH probe in the storage vessel (plastic boot or bottle) which was in place on 

delivery. The vessel should contain a 2 molar potassium chloride solution. Make certain that 

the vessel is sealed to prevent evaporation of the storage solution. Electrical tape can be used 

to provide a removable seal between the boot and the module body.

4. Store the sonde and remaining probes in the moist calibration cup, as in short-term storage.

Health and Safety Warnings 

The standard solutions for calibrating conductivity contain Iodine and Potassium Chloride. Standard 

solutions for the calibration of pH contain the following compounds: pH 4 Solutions-- potassium 

hydrogen phthalate, formaldehyde, water; pH 7 solutions-- sodium phosphate (dibasic), potassium 

phosphate (monobasic), water; pH 10 Solutions-- potassium borate (tetra), potassium carbonate, 

potassium hydroxide, sodium (di) ethylenediamine tetraacetate, water. 

When using the above mentioned standards, avoid inhalation, skin contact, eye contact, or ingestion. 

If skin contact occurs remove contaminated clothing immediately. Wash the affected areas 

thoroughly with large amounts of water. If any solutions are inhaled, ingested or contact eye 

surfaces, consult the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) that are sent with the standards for prompt 

action, and immediately seek medical attention. 

SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde

207

Appendix S6.A. Sample Calibration log form.

209

Appendix S6.B. Sample Accuracy check worksheet.
Appendix S6.B. Sample Accuracy check worksheet (continued).

210

SOP 6 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for 

a given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, 

and are only updated when there are changes to 

the SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 2007 B. Mitchell Section 2.3.2.1.2: Site Number = 0 (not 1) for 

stream sites. Pre-deployment QC check is 89 

(Joe used 99 outside of ACAD in 2006), and 

post-deployment QC check is 99.(Originally part 

of SOP 3- In situ Measurements...using...sonde)

Section 2.3.2.2.5: Added informational 

paragraph at start of section. Acadia uses a 2-

point calibration daily, and a 3-point calibration 

monthly, while other parks use a 3-point 

calibration daily.

Section 2.3.2.2.6: Added information to start of 

section. Calibration should be performed weekly, 

with a 2-point field check each morning.

Section 2.3.2.2.9: In step 5, add information 

referring to the DO% Local option. This makes it 

easier to tell if the sensor is within specifications, 

since it automatically adjusts the DO% for local 

barometric pressure.

Section 2.3.3: Refer to DO percent local rather

than DO percent in step 2 and 3. Inserted step 4 

– recording pre-deployment data to site 89.

Revised step 6 to include selection of proper site 

code. Added step 8 – recording post-deployment 

data to site 99.

Protocol Review 

Meeting

2.01 April 2009 B. Mitchell Section 2.3.2.2.6: Updated to reflect 

replacement of probe yearly, with probe from 

previous year as a backup. .(Originally part of 

SOP 3- In situ Measurements...using...sonde)

Section 2.3.5.6.4: New section; included info for 

pH calibration check, describing problem in the 

field at Acadia and specifying need for low-ionic 

strength standard and replacing the probe 

annually.

Protocol Review 

Meeting

3.00 January 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Re-assigned as SOP 6. 

Updated to reflect one-point calibration of 

conductivity on a high-conductivity standard, 

followed by verification at two low conductivity 

standards.

Expanded section on check sample using lowionic strength standard.

Added section on sonde accuracy checks, 

including DO titration instructions.

Added calibration worksheet and accuracy 

check forms as appendices.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+ to 

3.00 (major 

revision)
Appendix S6.B. Sample Accuracy check worksheet (continued).

211

SOP 6 Revision History Log (continued)

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits for clarity Internal Review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell “Making Measurements” section revised to 

incorporate information previously found in SOP 

5.

“<File> Menu” check is only needed for ACAD; 

LNETN keeps files on the sonde for the whole 

season.

ACAD site codes are two character park codes + 

4 character site; LNETN has 4 characters for 

park and 2 for site.

In “Data Upload”, added a step about using an 

Excel spreadsheet to document the YSI data 

files, such as incorrect site codes and 

explanations for extra samples.

A one-point check sample for conductivity is 

acceptable (previously a two-point check was 

conducted)

Added details on using a filter to produce DI 

water

Minor edits

Reviewer 

recommendation 

to eliminate 

inconsistencies 

and duplicated 

information; 

clarification of 

procedures.

3.03 March 2015 B. Gawley Changed YSI file download/export procedures to 

reflect change from EcoWatch to EcoWatch Lite 

software.

Protocol review 

meeting.

213

SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

This SOP provides descriptions of the methods for collecting grab samples in streams, lakes, and 

ponds, and methods for collecting depth-integrated epilimnetic samples in lakes (composite samples

that contain water which is representative of a range of depths, or a specific layer of the lake). A grab 

sample is a discrete sample taken at a selected site, depth, and time; and analyzed for the constituents 

of interest (Table S7.1). A depth integrated sample is a composite sample taken with a collection 

bottle or tubing across a range of depths at a single vertical, and a width integrated sample is taken at 

more than one vertical in a stream cross-section. The decision on what sampling method to use will 

be dictated by the guidelines in SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams and SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and 

Ponds and the existing field conditions.

Sample Container Preparation 

For single point grab samples, the sample bottle can be used as the sampling device. For composite 

samples such as depth or width integrated samples, a plastic core sampling tube or an isokinetic 

bottle sampler (e.g. VanDorn-type sampler) is used in conjunction with a churn in order to collect the 

sample and ensure it is well-mixed. Sample bottles are labeled with preprinted, waterproof labels that 

only require sample date and time to be filled out in the field (Figure S7.1). Samples should be taken 

in a prearranged priority so that all sample handling and preservation can take place as rapidly as 

possible. Numbers, types, and sizes of sample containers, as well as lists of analytes for each 

container are presented in Table S7.1. Pre-cleaned bottles are provided by the analytical laboratory. 

Figure S7.4. Sample bottle labels.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

214

Table S7.1. Containers for water sample analytes.

Container Number Analyte(s)

500 ml white HDPE 1 ANC, Apparent color,

Cl, SO4, NO3

120 ml brown glass

 Black label (unfiltered)

3 Total P, Total N, DOC, NO2, NH3

1 L brown HDPE

 (Lakes and ponds only)

1 Chlorophyll a

Cleaning of Sampling Equipment

Clean the churn splitter, core or isokinetic samplers, and all other sampling containers before each 

field trip. Use a non-phosphate detergent (such as Liquinox) with tap water. Soak in detergent 

solution for 30 minutes. Wearing disposable, powder-free vinyl or latex gloves, scrub with a soft 

brush. Rinse well with tap water and then rinse with deionized water. Place cleaned equipment in 

clean storage bags. Upon arriving at each field site rinse the samplers and churn with native water. 

Rinse all sample collection equipment three times before filling with sample water. After sampling, 

rinse equipment used with deionized (DI) water.

Collecting Water Samples

Collecting Grab Samples in Sample Bottles

Grab samples are used to study the water quality unique to a specific depth. Grab samples are

collected in either wide mouth sample bottles or syringes just below the surface of the water (0.5 m) 

from a boat at the deepest point in any of the lakes and ponds in NETN. For streams, collect the 

sample from the centroid of flow and where the water is well mixed, immediately downstream from a 

point of hydraulic turbulence such as a knick point or flume or where the stream flow appears 

laminar. Do not sample streams immediately below tributaries or other significant points of inflow. 

Sample far enough downstream for thorough mixing to have occurred (approximately 6 - 8 stream 

widths downstream should be adequate). For the Concord River, see “Width-Integrated Samples in 

Streams”, below.

Generally, preservation and analytical methods do not allow the submission of one sample in a single 

container to the laboratory for analysis. The sample must be collected in a number of bottles of 

various types and sizes appropriate to the individual analyses. Each of these bottles (or other 

collection containers for samples that are to be filtered) can be filled using the following procedure:

1. Fill in all information (lake, pond, or stream site name; site code; sample date; time, etc.) on 

bottle labels with permanent marker while labels are still dry.

2. Put on vinyl or latex gloves (do not use nitrile gloves for nutrient samples). Avoid 

contaminating the gloves’ outer surface.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

215

3. Remove cap from sample container (bottle or syringe); fill with lake, pond, or stream water;

and empty away from the sample site (downstream or on the opposite side of the boat). 

Repeat this THREE TIMES to rinse container. Do not touch inside or rim of bottle, tip of 

syringe, or cap!

4. For streams, do not walk on, or in any way disturb the stream bottom upstream from the 

sampling site. Collect the sample upstream of where the sample taker is standing. Clear 

surface debris if present. Avoid water-quality sampling in pools or standing water where 

floating solids tend to accumulate.

5. Fill sample container a final time at about 0.5 m (18 inches) below the surface of the water. 

Point the container opening in the direction of the waves or current. Avoid collecting 

sediment or debris floating in the water.

6. For streams, if the depth is inadequate for submersion of bottle, move upstream or 

downstream within the same reach. If the entire stream reach is of insufficient depth, water 

can be carefully pumped directly from the stream using a peristaltic pump. Collecting 

flowing water from flow off of a rock or small waterfall is an alternate possibility.

7. Cap the sample container while it is still underwater. Fill container completely, allowing no 

air in the container.

8. Record sample type (grab), depth, and collection time on field data form.

9. Store sample container in a cooler packed with ice until/during transport to the laboratory, 

following instructions in the “Shipping Samples to the Laboratory” section of SOP 12 –

Laboratory Analysis.

Collecting Grab Samples with a Throw Bottle

For samples in lakes with poor accessibility by boat, a throw bottle can be used to collect epilimnion 

grab samples at a depth of 0.6 meters, and a distance of about 9 meters from shore. To collect the 

sample:

1. Choose a location along the shore that is free of aquatic vegetation, snags, or other 

obstructions that will interfere with throwing the bottle, near water deep enough so the

deployed throw bottle will not rest on the lake bottom. Rock ledges and steep drop-offs are 

usually good locations.

2. Fill in all appropriate information (lake or pond, sample date, time, etc.) on bottle labels with 

permanent marker while labels are still dry.

3. Put on vinyl or latex gloves. Avoid contaminating the gloves’ outer surface.

4. Replace the lid of a 500-mL HDPE bottle (which has been acid washed and is part of the set 

of bottles provided to send samples to the analytical laboratory) with a special lid with two 

holes cut into it (one holding a short piece of tygon tubing to let water flow into the bottle) 

and insert the bottle into the weighted bottle-holder, securing it with rubber bands. Store the 

original bottle lid in a clean location, away from possible contamination.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

216

5. Uncoil the tether rope attached to the bottle holder and check for tangles. Swing the throw 

bottle several times to build momentum, and release the assembly in the direction of the 

desired sample location. Be sure to have a firm grip on the end of the tether rope (or tie it to 

a fixed object)!

6. The bottle holder and sample bottle will sink to the desired depth, suspended by a float. 

Bubbles will be visible on the lake surface as the bottle fills through the hole in the lid. When 

the bubbles stop, quickly retrieve the throw bottle assembly by pulling it in by the tether rope. 

7. Throw, retrieve, and empty the apparatus three times to rinse the bottle holder, sampling lid, 

and 500 mL sample bottle. It will take about three to four additional throws to obtain

samples, pouring water from the 500 mL bottle to the other sample bottles and syringes (that 

have been rinsed three times with lake water from the shore). After the final throw (and all 

bottles on shore have been filled) retain the sample in the bottle in the sampler and cap the 

bottle with its original lid.

8. Record sample type (grab), depth, and collection time on field data form.

9. Store sample containers in a cooler packed with ice for transport.

10. Filter chlorophyll a samples and ship all samples to the laboratory as soon as possible, 

following instructions in the “Shipping Samples to the Laboratory” section of SOP 12 –

Laboratory Analysis.

Depth-Integrated Samples of Epilimnion in Lakes or Ponds

Depth-integrated composite samples contain water that represents a range of depths, or a specific 

layer of the lake. To take a depth-integrated sample of the epilimnion, lower a 10 meter by half-inch

inside diameter, flexible, weighted tube into the water column (subsequently referred to as the “core 

sampler”). When the bottom of the core sampler reaches the desired depth, pinch off clamp at the top 

of the tube to trap all the water inside. Lift the core sampler into the boat and release the clamp to 

transfer the sample to a churn to further homogenize the sample. Transfer water from the churn to 

bottles for transport. The procedure to take a depth-integrated sample is as follows:

1. Take temperature and DO profiles to determine the depth of the epilimnetic layer according 

to Figure S7.2. Carefully consider the temperature profiles to avoid sampling from an 

ephemeral epilimnion caused by calm, warm, weather. This condition is characterized by a 

temporary thermocline (1oC/m change), which will quickly disappear when the wind blows. 
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

217

Figure S7.5. Method for determination of depth-integrated sample for lake water-quality samples

2. Fill in all appropriate information (lake, sample date, time, etc.) on bottle labels with 

permanent marker while labels are still dry.

3. The person in contact with the water should put on powder-free vinyl or latex gloves.

4. Start with a clean churn splitter.

5. Rinse the churn splitter and sample bottles three times with native water to be sampled and 

let the water sit in the churn while other work is being accomplished at the site. This allows 

the churn splitter to equilibrate to the temperature and to any ionic exchange capacity.

6. Rinse core sampler with lake water by lowering the weighted end of tube into water at least 1 

meter deeper than the epilimnetic depth. Then lift the core sampler so that all water drains 

back into lake. REPEAT THREE TIMES.

7. Empty the churn splitter of all water before beginning to collect a sample. 

8. Clear surface debris if present.

9. Slowly lower the core sampler to the desired depth, guided by the demarcations on the tube. 

Check to make sure the water level inside the tube equals the level outside the tube.

10. Close the top of the tube with the pinch clamp and carefully raise the weighted end into the 

boat.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

218

11. Hold the weighted end over the mouth of the churn and open the pinch clamp to empty 

sampler contents into the churn. Do not pour water over hands since this will contaminate the 

sample.

12. Take a sufficient number of samples (repeat steps 8-11) to fill the churn. If a large sample 

volume must be obtained from a relatively shallow depth (less than or equal to 2 m) a 

composite sample made up of grab samples from several depths in the water column can be 

used. For example, a 2 m composite can be made up from 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m, and 2.0 m 

grab samples.

Note: The following steps can be completed back at the vehicle, but as soon as possible after 

obtaining samples. 

1. Empty the rinse water from all of the sample containers to be used and place them within 

easy reach of the churn splitter. 

2. Rinse sample bottles once with water from the churn while operating the churn. 

3. Continue to operate the churn and withdraw subsamples for all analytes

Width-Integrated Samples in Streams

For sampling sites located on a nonhomogeneous reach of a river or stream, it is necessary to sample 

the channel cross section at multiple points and depths in order to obtain a composite sample. The 

Concord River is the only current NETN site requiring a width-integrated sample. One water sample 

is collected with a throw bottle or Van Dorn sampler at each of the bridge pylons (2 and 4) at which 

sonde measurements have been taken. All sampling containers (throw bottle, Van Dorn sampler, 

churn splitter, and/or 4 L bottle) must be rinsed three times with native water. The water samples are 

collected at a depth of 0.5 meters, and equal amounts of sample water from both locations are 

composited in a churn splitter or 4 L wide-mouth HDPE (high density polyethylene) bottle. The 

water in the churn splitter or 4 L bottle is gently mixed, then distributed to the appropriate sample 

bottles. For more information on width-integrated sampling, refer to U.S. Geological Survey (2006).

Sample Filtering and Preservation

Portions of the water collected during sampling for chlorophyll a analysis must be filtered to capture 

algal biomass on the filter. Water for chlorophyll a analysis is drawn from the churn splitter in the 

field with the other nutrient samples and filtering is accomplished in the laboratory or field station at 

the end of the day. In this case, the filters are retained for analysis and the filtrate (liquid) is 

discarded. Procedures for filtering and preserving (through freezing) chlorophyll a samples are 

described below.

NETN discontinued analyzing samples for dissolved constituents in 2011, eliminating the need for 

filtering nutrient samples in the field, and the associated acid-washing of filters and tubing. However, 

if more rigorous sampling is required as part of a special project or investigation it may be necessary 

to use filtering procedures for dissolved constituents described in Appendix S7.A. Acid washing 

procedures are detailed in Appendix S7.B.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

219

Sample Collection / Filtration for Chlorophyll a Analysis

Sample collection, filtration, preservation, and storage methods for chlorophyll a samples are based 

on preparation for analysis using Standard Methods 10200H (American Public Health Association 

1998). Collect duplicate samples to assess accuracy. Use membrane filters with an effective pore size 

of 0.45μm (supplied by the laboratory). Check that all apparatus are clean and acid free.

Procedures for collecting and filtering chlorophyll a samples are as follows:

1. In the field, collect enough water from the composite sample in the churn splitter to 

concentrate phytoplankton on at least two filters which will be the duplicate samples. 

Filtration volume size will depend on the particulate load of the water, but 1 L or less is 

generally sufficient for a lake (500ml/filter). The sample is subsampled from a churn into a 1 

L amber polypropylene bottle.

2. Chill the chlorophyll a sample bottle with the other water samples collected during the 

monitoring visit. 

3. Filter water samples in subdued light as soon as possible (several hours maximum) after 

sampling. Algal populations, thus chlorophyll a concentration, can change in relatively short 

periods of time.

4. Assemble the filtration apparatus and attach the vacuum source with vacuum gauge and 

regulator. Vacuum filtration should not exceed 6 inches Hg (20 kPa). Higher filtration 

pressures and excessively long filtration times (greater than10 min) can damage cells and 

invalidate the analyses.

5. Agitate the container thoroughly, but gently, before drawing a subsample from the water 

sample container, to suspend the particulates (stir or invert several times).

6. Pour the subsample into a graduated cylinder and accurately measure the volume. Then pour 

the subsample into the filter tower of the filtration apparatus and add an eyedropper-full of 

supersaturated MgCO3 solution to prevent acidification. The MgCO3 solution is made at the 

beginning of the year using powder supplied by the analytical lab. Put a teaspoon of powder 

in a small (e.g. 50 mL bottle) and add DI water with a dropper. The solution should be cloudy 

when the bottle is shaken. Apply a vacuum (not to exceed 20 kPa). 

7. A sufficient volume has been filtered when a visible green or brown color appears on the 

filter. Do not suck the filter dry with the vacuum; instead slowly release the vacuum as the 

final volume approaches the level of the filter and completely release the vacuum as the last 

bit of water is pulled through the filter. 

8. Remove the filter from the fritted base with tweezers and place it on a small square of

aluminum foil (folding once with the particulate matter inside and sealing the edges) to 

protect the phytoplankton from light, and freeze immediately.

9. Label each foil packet containing a filter with information on the lake name/code, sample 

time and date, amount of sample (ml) filtered in this replicate, and replicate number (e.g. “1 

of 2”). 
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

220

Field Quality Assurance for Water Samples

The Field Quality Assurance (QA) program is a systematic process which, together with the 

laboratory and data storage QA programs, ensures a specified degree of confidence in the data 

collected for an environmental survey. The Field QA program involves a series of steps, procedures, 

and practices described in the following sections.

General Measures

All equipment, apparatus, and instruments must always be kept clean and in good working condition 

by means of the methods and practices given elsewhere in this protocol. Records are kept of all 

repairs to the instruments and apparatus and of any irregular incidents or experiences that affect 

operation. It is essential that standardized and approved methodologies, such as those recommended 

in this protocol, be used by field staff. If any changes to the approved methods are made, they must 

be documented and experimental data obtained to ensure that the results are valid and comparable to 

the earlier data.

Prevention of Sample Contamination

The quality of data generated in a laboratory depends primarily on the quality of the samples 

received at the laboratory. Consequently, the field investigator must take the following precautions to 

protect samples from both contamination and deterioration. There are numerous routes by which 

samples can become contaminated. Potential sources of trace-metal contamination during sampling 

include metallic or metal-containing sampling equipment, containers, labware, reagents, and 

deionized water; improperly cleaned and stored equipment; atmospheric inputs such as dirt and dust 

from automobile exhaust, cigarette smoke, nearby roads, and wires. Human contact can also 

contaminate the samples. The following are some of the basic contamination prevention methods: 

1. Clean collection bottles according to recommended methods.

2. Use only the recommended type of sample bottle for each parameter.

3. Use only water sample bottles for water samples. Do not use bottles that have been used for 

other purposes, such as storing concentrated reagents.

4. Follow recommended preservation methods. All preservatives must be of analytical grade 

and included as field blanks for identification of potential contamination.

5. Minimize the possibility of adding the wrong preservative to a sample or cross-contaminating 

the preservative stocks when preserving samples by preserving all the samples for a 

particular group of parameters together.

6. Do not touch the inner part of sample bottles and caps with bare hands, gloves, or mitts.

7. Keep sample bottles in a clean environment, away from dust, dirt, fumes and grime. Vehicle 

cleanliness is an important factor in eliminating potential contamination of samples and 

equipment.

8. Keep petroleum products (gasoline, oil, exhaust fumes), prime sources of contamination, 

away from samples. Exhaust fumes and cigarette smoke can contaminate samples with lead 

and other heavy metals. Air conditioning units are also a source of trace-metal contamination.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

221

9. Keep filter units and related apparatus clean using procedures such as acid washes and 

soaking in special solutions, and protected from field contamination.

10. Keep bottles or sample bags, which have been sterilized, sterile until the sample is collected.

11. Keep all foreign, especially metal, objects out of contact with acids and water samples.

12. Store samples out of the sunlight at 4oC in a cool place, ice chest, or equivalent.

13. Ship samples to the laboratory without delay.

14. Keep hands clean while working with water samples and field equipment.

Field Quality Control for Water Samples

The total number of field QC samples will be at least 10% of the number of samples collected. At 

Acadia, one blank and one replicate will be collected in May (one stream), June (one lake/pond), and 

two blanks and two replicate will be collected August (one stream and one lake/pond). An identical 

number of QC samples (following the same schedule) will be collected from the combined “Lower 

NETN” sites. Given an overall number of 110 or 111 samples per year, these numbers mean that QC 

samples equal approximately 14% of the total samples. Collection sites for QC samples should be 

selected randomly. If multiple labs are used for any analyses, replicates will be swapped between 

labs to provide a check on procedures plus laboratory results. In the event of a discrepancy, 

additional replicates will be needed to isolate the source of the problem (e.g. lab versus field 

procedures).

Blanks for the assessment of contamination

Blank QC samples are free of the analyte(s) of interest and are used to test for bias from the 

introduction of contamination into field samples during collection, handling, and processing. 

Contamination results in a positive bias in the concentration. Field blanks measure nearly all of the 

sources of error that can affect field samples, and thus they are used to document data quality and to 

identify data-quality problems. If a data problem is found, topical blanks are used to locate the source 

of the problem and could consist of equipment blanks, source water blanks, trip blanks, or laboratory 

blanks. Protocols for grab samples must be followed for the collection of blank samples to ensure 

that blanks are representative of the type of field sample being tested. All blanks that are taken must 

be well documented as to how, when, why, and where they were taken. Environmental samples are 

labeled with the time to the nearest 5 minutes. Add a time tag for each blank sample that is 2 minutes 

after the time for the grab sample so that these blank samples can be easily identified. 

See section on deionized water in SOP 6 – In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using 

Multiparameter Sonde for a justification of the importance of purchasing a laboratory grade water to 

be used for blank samples. Use inorganic blank water or universal water. 

Blanks are submitted for all analytes by each monitoring team at the beginning of each month in 

which samples are being collected, or each time there is a change in equipment and staff. For 

example, if one technician is collecting samples from all of the “Lower NETN” parks in May, June, 

and August, collect one blank on each of these trips, at different parks each time. In Acadia, blanks 

are collected at different sites during each sampling month. 
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

222

Initially, blanks are used singly to compare blank analysis to critical concentrations such as waterquality standards, and to alert staff of contamination problems and identify the need for topical 

blanks, if necessary. The laboratory has been instructed to notify NETN staff immediately if high 

analyte concentrations are detected in blank samples. As enough blanks are collected throughout 

each park and throughout NETN, nonparametric statistics can be done on the blanks to obtain 

confidence limits for selected percentiles of contamination that can be estimated based on 

concentrations of the analytes in the blanks (see Quality Control Reporting section in SOP 14 –

Annual Data Reporting for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams).

Examine blank samples when returned from the laboratory so that if contamination is occurring, 

topical blanks or adjustment of methods can be made as soon as possible. Confidence limits for 

selected percentiles of contamination and bias are calculated and reported annually as a part of the 

annual data report. 

Replicate Samples for the Assessment of Precision

Each monitoring team collects field replicates during each month in which samples are being 

collected, or there is a change in equipment or staff. If possible, have old staff members and new staff 

members collect replicate samples to ensure that each staff member is following protocols adequately 

and not introducing additional variability. Collect one field replicate for every 10 samples to assess 

measurement precision. Collect one set of replicates on each trip around NETN, making sure that it is 

collected in different parks on different trips so that over time, the set of replicates can be used to 

determine QC across NETN. Do not to take replicate samples in waters in which one would expect a 

non-detect because the usefulness of two replicate “non-detects” is limited. 

Measurement Sensitivity and Detection Limits

Censoring to quantitative detection limits, though not often optimal or even desirable for trend 

assessment, is appropriate when a data user is assessing compliance with environmental regulations 

or trying to determine if a concentration or summary statistic is below a concern threshold for 

endangered species or other special-value resources in National Parks. If such especially high-value 

resources are at risk, it is appropriate to apply the precautionary principle and avoid false negatives 

(saying the contaminant is below a certain concentration, when it really is not).

Some pristine waters in the NPS have low concentrations of nutrients, and the parks want to ensure 

that nutrient levels remain low. Thus it is beneficial to document and control measurement sensitivity 

with the lowest practicable low-level detection limits. For some parameters measured in the field 

such as pH, temperature, conductivity, biological observations, and physical habitat observations, 

extremely low levels are rare. In the high measurement ranges, the smaller the (true) change that a

measuring system can reliably and accurately detect the more sensitive the instrument is.
Appendix S7.A. Sample Filtering (continued).

223

Appendix S7.A. Sample Filtering

Portions of the water collected during sampling may (depending on laboratory specifications and 

preferences) need to be filtered in the field prior to being analyzed for dissolved constituents. 

Sample filtering and splitting should be done as soon after collection as possible. If an appropriately 

clean location for filtering is not available, samples can be stored in bottles and kept cold until a more 

suitable filtering location is available. Some laboratories require samples to be preserved by 

acidification in the field. This procedure is not required by the current analytical laboratory (Sawyer 

Environmental Chemistry Research Lab, University of Maine-Orono).

Composite (e.g. depth-integrated epilimion core) samples can be filtered directly from the churn after 

the raw samples have been drawn off. Grab samples that will be filtered (dissolved constituent 

samples) can be collected into a clean glass collection bottle and then pumped directly from the 

collection bottle, through the filter and into the sample bottle. All samples should be immediately 

chilled and remain under chilled conditions until analysis.

Filtering for Dissolved Constituents: 

A battery-powered peristaltic pump is commonly used for filtration of samples for the analysis of 

dissolved constituents. The pump forces the water through tygon tubing and through a 0.45-mmpore-size capsule filter. The particulate matter is retained by the filter while the filtered water passes 

through to the sample bottle. Use filters for one site only and then discard. Filters are not to be 

reused. 

1. Ensure that all filters and tubing have been acid washed, according to the instructions in 

Appendix S7.B.

2. Filtered samples are drawn directly out of the collection bottle (or directly from a stream if 

stream depth is too shallow to submerge a collection bottle), through the filter and into the 

sample bottle. If a churn is being used for a composite sample, filter the water remaining in 

the churn after all “total” samples have been drawn off from the churn splitter. The sample to 

be filtered does not need agitating.

3. Connect the pump discharge tube to the capsule filter. Be sure that the direction of flow 

through the capsule filter matches the arrow on the side of the filter. Rinse the intake tube 

with sample water and place the tube into the sample to be filtered.

4. Connect the pump to the appropriate power supply with power switch off.

5. Turn the pump on at low speed and allow air to vent. Do this by holding the filter so that the 

arrow is pointing up.

6. Flush the system (tubing and filter) with at least three times the filter capacity of sample 

water. If the sample water is full of particulate matter, first filter deionized water through the 

system. 

7. Rinse the bottles three times. Fill all appropriate subsample bottles with the filtered sample.

Include total dissolved nitrogen, total dissolved phosphorus, ammonia, nitrite, nitrate, and 
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

224

orthophosphate samples. Fill the container to the desired volume (leave about 1 percent of the 

container's capacity to allow for the addition of preservatives (if necessary) and expansion if 

samples are to be shipped).

8. Ensure that all bottle caps are screwed on tight. Verify the sample labels are correct and 

complete. Place the labeled sample container in a cooler packed with ice.

9. Rinse the container's outside surface with clean water and dry with a paper towel. Rinse the 

hoses with deionized water.

10. Record notes on the filtering process on the field data form, including information on

equipment settings, staff roles, equipment used, unusual environmental conditions, potential 

contamination sources, and problem areas.
225

Appendix S7.B. Acid-washing procedures

Acid-washing of sample bottles and sampling equipment is not required under current NETN water 

monitoring SOPs. The bottles used for nutrient sampling are supplied by the analytical laboratory, 

and have been cleaned to the proper QA/QC specifications prior to shipping. The NETN 

discontinued analyzing samples for dissolved constituents in 2011, eliminating the need for filtering 

samples in the field, and the associated acid-washing of filters and tubing. However, if more rigorous 

sampling or re-sampling is proscribed as part of a special project or investigation it may be necessary 

to use the procedures described below in preparation for specialized sampling.

Acid-washing filters and tubing

To ensure the purity of filters and tubing for peristaltic pumps, acid wash both prior to use. Filters 

and tubing can be washed as a group and stored in zip-top bags until ready for use or up to two 

weeks.

1. Using concentrated ACS grade or Trace Metal Grade Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) and deionized 

water (DI water), make up a quantity of 5% HCl by volume based on the amount of filters 

and tubing to be washed. For example, add 5mL of concentrated HCl to 95 mL of deionized 

water to make 100 mL of 5% HCl. ALWAYS ADD ACID TO WATER. If water is added to 

acid, the mixture can boil and splash, potentially causing serious injury.

2. Use as short a length of tubing as possible and connect the pump discharge end of the tube to 

the nozzle, and the nozzle to the input side of the capsule filter. Be sure that the direction of 

flow through the capsule filter matches the arrow on the side of the filter. 

3. Turn on the peristaltic pump, and using a syringe, squeeze 10 mL of the HCl solution through 

the tubing and filter.

4. Follow the mixture with at least 60 mL of DI water and a squirt of air to remove residual 

moisture.

5. Pack the acid-washed filters and tubing in clean (new) zip-top bags for transport to the field.

Health and Safety

 HCl is an acid, and should be stored in a protective corrosives cabinet in its own secondary 

containment bin, separate from other acids and bases. It can cause burns and can be harmful 

if inhaled or ingested. If skin contact occurs, wash off the affected area with water for 15 

minutes and seek medical attention. If this chemical is inhaled, ingested or contacts eye 

surfaces, consult the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for prompt action, and immediately 

seek medical attention.

 Precautions should be taken by wearing chemical safety goggles, lab coats and by wearing 

powderless latex or nitrile gloves.

 When mixing the HCl solution, work under a chemical fume hood.
SOP 7 – Grab Samples and Depth-Integrated Samples

226

SOP 7 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 

2007

B. Mitchell Section 2.4.3: Added first sentence; if clean 

filtering location is not available, samples can be 

stored and kept cold until a suitable location is 

available.(Originally part of SOP 4- Grab Samples 

and Depth-Integrated Samples)

Table 25: Lab code changed for total 

phosphorus; code and reporting limit changed for 

total dissolved phosphorus, ammonia, nitrite, 

nitrite + nitrate, orthophosphate.

Section (2.4.5): Added paragraph specifying 

numbers and times for collection of blanks and 

replicates, and that replicates should be swapped 

between labs if multiple labs are being used.

Protocol Review 

Meeting

3.00 January 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Combined all or sections of v2.02 SOP #s 4, 

7,13,and 14 to consolidate all instructions for 

preparation, collection, processing, and QA/QC of 

water samples.

Re-assigned as SOP 7.

Added photo of sample bottles.

Updated analytes in Table 1 to reflect tests 

beginning in 2012.

Added section on use of throw bottle.

Added Appendix S7.B on acid washing of filters 

and tubing (including Health and Safety 

statement).

Updated chlorophyll a filtration section to reflect 

current methodology and lab requirements.

Moved field filtration instructions to Appendix 

S7.A to reflect current lab (SECRL) requirements 

for analytes beginning 2012.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+ to 

3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits Internal review.

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Updated depth-integrated sampling procedures to 

match those formerly in SOP 5. Steps 10-12 are 

new, as is the need in step 2 to rinse the splitter 3 

times.

Grab sample rinse water is emptied away from 

sample site (downstream or opposite side of 

boat).

Revised “Collecting Grab Samples in Sample 

Bottles” section to incorporate stream site 

procedures that were formerly listed in SOP 4.

Sampling containers for width-integrated sampling 

all need to be rinsed 3 times with native water.

Limit duplicated 

material and 

correct 

inconsistencies.

Clarification.
227

SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light 

Penetration 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

This SOP describes techniques for determining water clarity (transparency), using a Secchi disk; 

turbidity, using a LaMotte Model 2020e turbidity meter; and light penetration and attenuation, using 

a Li-Cor light meter. All of these metrics can provide either a direct or indirect assessment of lake 

productivity. Turbidity measurements can be used to help quantify the amount of suspended material 

in the water column. 

Background and Scope

Transparency, measured by viewing a Secchi disk as it descends through the water column, is one of 

the simplest methods for estimating lake-water quality. Transparency measured in this manner is 

recorded as “Secchi depth” (or “SD”), expressed in meters. Secchi disk measurements are attempted 

at all lakes and ponds at every sampling event. If the bottom is reached before the SD is reached, 

then a light penetration profile is taken. Secchi disk measurements are affected by the presence of 

algae, plankton, water color, or suspended sediment. Transparency is inversely related to lake 

productivity – thus a shallow SD indicates a productive lake.

Secchi depths in NETN lakes and ponds can range from 1 to 20 meters (Breen et al. 2002, Farris and 

Chapman 2000). Generally a SD of greater than 8 meters indicate an oligotrophic lake, between 4 

and 8 meters indicate a mesotrophic lake and less than 4 meters indicates a eutrophic lake (Maine 

Department of Environmental Protection 2004). The annual mean of the six monthly Secchi 

transparency measurements can be used to calculate a Trophic State Index (TSI) for the lake. Further 

discussion of the TSI is found in “State and Regional Water-Quality Standards” in the narrative of 

this protocol and in the “Lake Water Quality Analysis” section of SOP 14 – Data Reporting and 

Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams. 

Ponds outside of Acadia are too shallow for use of a Secchi disk, and a transparency tube was used to 

measure water clarity (see Appendix S8.A) at these sites from 2006 to 2011. This method was 

selected because there is a loose relationship between SD and transparency tube values, plus 

transparency tubes can be used in streams as well as ponds (Dahlgren et al 2004). However, the water 

at most NETN pond (and stream) sites was too clear for effective use of the transparency tube.

Light penetration profiles can tell us much about the conditions affecting lakes and ponds. Nearly all 

the energy that drives and controls lake processes is derived from solar energy. It is converted to 

chemical energy via photosynthesis, and then transported to other areas of the ecosystem in various 

forms of organic matter. Solar energy, absorbed by the lake and dissipated as heat, plays a large role 

in defining a lake's thermal structure, stratification, and circulation patterns. These factors in turn 
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

228

affect nutrient cycling and the distribution of dissolved gasses. By understanding the quantity and 

behavior of the light entering a lake system, we can learn more about how the light is utilized in the 

system (Wetzel and Likens 2000). Light penetration profiles are used to measure light attenuation in 

all ponds outside of Acadia (starting in 2012) and Jordan Pond plus the Acadia ponds that are 

typically too shallow for use of a Secchi disk (Aunt Betty’s Pond, Bear Brook, Lake Wood, and 

Seawall). 

A light penetration profile is obtained using two solar radiation sensors and a datalogger. One of the 

sensors (with a spherical diffuser to enable accurate collection of photosynthetically available 

radiation- “PAR”) is lowered into the water column on a weighted lowering frame, suspended from a 

graduated cord. The second sensor ("deck cell") is left on the surface to record ambient light. The 

datalogger records and processes readings from both sensors, calculating the percentage of the total 

light reaching any given depth. 

Turbidity is the measure of how clear a liquid is and how much light is scattered by the sample. It is 

measured in nephelometric turbidity units (NTU). It is caused by suspended matter or impurities that 

interfere with the clarity of the water. These impurities may include clay, silt, finely divided 

inorganic and organic matter, soluble colored organic compounds, and plankton and other 

microscopic organisms. Turbidity is an expression of the optical property that causes light to be 

scattered and absorbed by particles and molecules and should not be confused with suspended solids, 

which expresses the weight of suspended material in the sample (U.S. Environmental Protection 

Agency, 2004). In natural waters, turbidity is often used as an indicator of water quality and 

productivity.

Turbidity in the water can create aesthetic, ecological, and health issues. Turbid water may indicate 

runoff from construction, roads, agriculture or other types of pollution. Suspended sediment can 

carry nutrients and pesticides throughout the water system. Suspended particles near the surface 

absorb additional heat from sunlight, raising the water temperature. High turbidity levels can reduce 

the amount of light reaching lower depths of lakes and streams, which can inhibit growth of 

submerged aquatic plants, and can affect the ability of fish gills to absorb dissolved oxygen. 

Turbidity is measured monthly at all stream sites using a LaMotte 2020e turbidity meter (beginning 

in 2012).

Measuring Transparency with a Secchi Disk

1. Take transparency readings between 9:00 AM and 3:00 PM (0900-1500) local time (Eastern 

Daylight Time). 

2. Lower Secchi disk on the shady side of the boat while observing its descent with the viewing 

scope. DO NOT WEAR SUNGLASSES!

3. STOP lowering when the Secchi disk disappears completely from view. If the disk hits the 

bottom before it disappears (or is obscured by vegetation but would otherwise still be 

visible), note on the data sheet that the disk hit bottom.
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

229

4. Pull disk up slightly until it is just visible. (The disk may be seen as just a whitish-green 

"glow".)

5. Lower disk until it just disappears again.

6. Note the demarcation on the measuring tape at the point where the tape meets the surface of 

the water. Record this value to the nearest hundredth of a meter (0.01 m) in the space marked 

"SECCHI DEPTH" on the field-data form. Record a depth even if the disk hits bottom (in 

this case it is the lake or pond depth).

7. If the disk did not hit bottom, take a duplicate reading by a second staff person (if a trained 

individual is available), and mark the results in the field data form in the space marked "QC 

READING". Check to ensure readings are within 0.1 m. Repeat duplicate readings until + 0.1 

m agreement is obtained.

Measuring Turbidity with a Turbidity Meter

Calibration

Detailed instructions on the use of the LaMotte 2020e turbidity meter can be found in the 

instrument’s instruction manual (http://www.lamotte.com/images/pdf/instructions/1979.pdf). The 

meter should be calibrated at the beginning of each sample week in the laboratory. For ACAD, use a 

1 NTU standard in most situations and a 10 NTU standard after a rain event. For LNETN, use a 10 

NTU standard for most situations. The standard should have a concentration similar to expected 

turbidity conditions.

1. Press ON to turn meter on. Press *|OK to select the “Measure” option from the Main Menu.

2. Be sure tubes are clean and dry before using. Rinse tube three times with blank water, then 

carefully fill to the fill line with blank water and dry outside of tube. Avoid creating bubbles. 

Put a dry positioning ring on the tube, aligning the index notch on the ring with the index 

mark on the tube, and cap.

3. Wipe the outside of the tube with a lint-free cloth or Kimwipe to remove fingerprints and 

smudges.

4. Place sample tube into the meter, aligning the index notch on the ring with the index arrow 

on the meter housing.

5. Close the lid and Press *|OK to select the “Scan Blank” option. Remove the tube when the 

scan is complete and discard the blank water.

6. Select a standard in the range of the samples to be tested. NOTE: Only use LaMotte AMCO 

Standards specific to the 2020e Turbidity Meter. Rinse the tube 3 times with the standard, 

then fill with standard to the index line, cap, and wipe the tube clean with a lint-free cloth.

7. Place the tube into the meter, aligning the index notch on the positioning ring with the index 

arrow on the meter housing.

8. Close the lid and press *|OK to select the “Scan Sample” option. If the displayed value is the 

same as the value of the standard, skip to step 12. If the displayed value is not the same as the 
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

230

value of the standard (within specification limits: below 100 NTU, ±0.05 or 2%, whichever is 

greater; above 100 NTU, ±3%) continue with the calibration procedure. 

9. Press the ▼button to scroll to the “Calibrate” option. Press *|OK to calibrate.

10. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to change the highlighted digits to match the concentration of the 

standard. Press *|OK to accept a digit and move to the next digit.

11. When the value of the display matches the concentration of the standard, press the *|OK

button to set the calibration. Calibration is complete.

12. Press ◄to exit to a previous menu or press OFF to turn the meter off.

Measuring Turbidity in the Field

Turbidity measurements should be taken early in the site visit, before observers begin wading in the 

stream or cause other disturbance that could affect measurements. The following steps apply to a 

calibrated meter:

1. Press ON to turn meter on. Press *|OK to select the “Measure” option from the Main Menu.

2. Be sure tubes are clean and dry before using. Rinse tube three times with blank water, then 

carefully fill to the fill line with blank water and dry outside of tube. Avoid creating bubbles. 

Put a dry positioning ring on the tube, aligning the index notch on the ring with the index 

mark on the tube, and cap.

3. Wipe the outside of the tube with a lint-free cloth or Kimwipe to remove fingerprints and 

smudges.

4. Place sample tube into the meter, aligning the index notch on the ring with the index arrow 

on the meter housing.

5. Close the lid and Press *|OK to select the “Scan Blank” option. Remove the tube when the 

scan is complete and discard the blank water.

6. Rinse the tube three times with water from the sample bottle. Gently mix sample in the bottle 

by inverting before pouring into tube but avoid introducing air bubbles. Fill with water 

sample a fourth time (to the fill line). Wipe the outside of the tube with a lint-free cloth or 

Kimwipe to remove fingerprints and smudges. 

7. Place sample tube into the meter, aligning the index mark on the tube with the index mark on 

the meter housing.

8. Close the lid and press *|OK to select the “Scan Sample” option. 

9. Record the result on the Field Data Form. 

10. Press ◄to exit to a previous menu or press OFF to turn the meter off.

11. Remove tube, empty sample, and store used tube upside-down in a designated location until 

it can be washed.
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

231

Light Penetration Profiles

Configuring the Li-Cor Datalogger

The configuration settings for the Li-Cor 1400 datalogger should be checked at the beginning of each 

monitoring season and after each battery change, factory servicing, or system reset. Time and date 

settings should be correct, and values for averaging time, etc. should be set to NETN defaults. Cell 

types and multipliers should be entered from the factory QA certification tags and/or forms. 

In the beginning of the monitoring season, install four fresh AA-size alkaline batteries according to 

the directions in the LI-1400 Data Logger Instruction Manual. These batteries are likely to last for the 

duration of the sampling season, but it is wise to check the voltage on a regular basis. The best 

approach to tracking battery charge is to activate the battery voltage channel and check it regularly. 

As a backup to manually checking the battery voltage, the LCD display on LI-1400 will blink on and 

off when the voltage drops to 4.0 V (the nominal full-charge voltage is 6.0 V). The unit will then shut 

off when the voltage falls to 3.8 V. Batteries should be replaced well before this occurs, with the goal 

of avoiding the need to replace batteries in the field.

Programming the LI-1400 can be done either directly using its membrane keypad, or indirectly by 

downloading programming instructions from a personal computer running LI1400 PC 

Communications Software. Consult the manufacturer’s manual for detailed configuration 

instructions. NETN default configuration values for the Li-Cor datalogger are displayed in Table 

S8.1. The following instructions are for setting the LI-1400 configuration using the PC software:

1. Connect the LI-1400 to the computer’s COM port using a 9-pin RS-232 cable. Note: If the 

computer does not have a serial COM port, it may be possible to connect the LI-1400 by 

using a serial to USB converter.

2. Launch the LI1400 software on the computer. Turn on the LI-1400 datalogger using the 

<On/Off> button.

3. Click the “Remote” option on the computer program menu, then click “Connect” from the 

drop-down list.

4. Choose the appropriate COM port number to connect to (usually COM 1). A small dialog 

box will open and display a “Synchronizing” message. The box will disappear when the 

datalogger is connected.

5. Click the “Remote” option on the computer program menu again, then click “Receive Setup” 

from the drop-down list. This command uploads the current setup configuration from the 

datalogger to the left-hand pane of the computer software window.

6. When a channel number (I1, I2, etc.) is highlighted in the left-hand pane of the software, a 

dialog box containing the settings becomes visible in the right-hand pane. Enter the correct 

values from Table S8.1 (if necessary). Repeat for each channel until the full configuration 

matches the values in Table S8.1.
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

232

7. Click the “Remote” option on the computer program menu, then click “Send Setup” from the 

drop-down list. This will replace the datalogger’s configuration with the edited configuration 

from the PC software.

8. The configuration settings from the computer program can be saved in a file so that the next 

time the datalogger needs to be restored to the saved configuration the settings do not have to 

be re-entered to the program. Choose “Save” from the “File” menu option list, then enter a 

file name and save location in the dialog boxes. A suggested file name is monitoring crew 

assignment and the year (e.g. “ACAD_2011” or “LNETN_2012”). 

9. After the settings have been transferred to the LI-1400, click the “Remote” option on the 

computer program menu, then click “Disconnect” from the drop-down list. The LI-1400 

datalogger can now be shut off, and the LI1400 computer program can be shut down.

Table S8.1. NETN Default LiCor 1400 Datalogger Configuration Values.

Channel Parameter NETN Default Value

Channel I1 Sensor Type Light

Description DECK

Channel Label D

Multiplier from calibration cert.

Average 15 seconds

Logging options None

Channel I2 Sensor Type Light

Description PAR

Channel Label UW

Multiplier from calibration cert.

Average 15 seconds

Logging options None

Channel M1 Sensor Type General

Description PTRANS

Channel Label PCT

Input Channel I2

Average 15 seconds

Math Function None

Channel M1 Operation Settings Operator /

Channel I1

Function Type NONE

Description Leave blank

Parameter A1 Leave all parameters blank

VB BATT VOLTAGE Sensor Type Battery

Logging routine None
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

233

Light Penetration Profile Field Method

1. Connect both the deck cell (LI-190SA) and the submersible PAR sensor (LI-193SA) cables 

to the appropriate BNC connectors on the LI-1400 datalogger (deck connects to Channel 1, 

PAR to Channel 2).

2. Note the start time for the profile on the grid on page 2 of the field data form.

3. Secure the deck cell to a level spot on the boat, in full sun. In LNETN, where inflatable boats 

are used and the deck cell cannot be easily secured, an assistant can hold the cell in place.

4. Put the lowering frame in the water, on the sunny side of the boat (ACAD), or suspend the 

PAR globe sensor from an oar on the sunny side of the boat (LNETN).

5. Turn the data logger on and wait at least a minute for the logger to begin averaging readings. 

Keep the top of the PAR globe cell (on the lowering frame) barely below the surface of the 

water. Scroll through the datalogger readings and note when they begin to stabilize.

6. When readings become relatively stable (often hard to tell!) press the "Enter" key to record 

values to memory. Record the values on the field form in the spaces for the appropriate depth 

(in this case 0.1 meters). Note: The datalogger DOES NOT record depth values (or site 

names) in the saved measurements. It is imperative to accurately record the values for each 

measurement so that depth data can be added during post-processing.

7. Repeat this procedure at a minimum of six to eight depths within the photic zone. Readings 

should be spaced closer together near the surface where PAR attenuates the fastest.

a. At deeper (>3m) lakes at Acadia, take the next reading at 0.5 meters (upper loop of 

lowering frame just below water surface) and then at 1 meter (first graduation on the 

cord). Repeat at one-meter intervals until the percent transmission drops below 1% 

for two consecutive readings.

b. At shallower lakes and ponds (< 3 m), take readings at the following depths: 0.1 m, 

0.25 m, and then at 0.25 m intervals. The deepest measurement should read below 

5% on channel M1. Add additional depth readings up to 3.0 m until this is achieved 

or the bottom is reached. For very turbid and/or shallow stations, compress the six to 

eight readings into less depth. Do the opposite for stations with clear deep water.

Downloading Data from Datalogger

At the end of each day in the field, the light profile data should be downloaded from the datalogger to 

a PC and backed up to removable media and/or a data server. It is downloaded using the LI-1400 

software via a RS-232 cable. The data are then pasted to a .txt file which is subsequently opened in 

Excel. 

1. Connect the LI-1400 datalogger to the computer serial port using a 9-pin RS-232 cable.

2. Launch the LI1400 software on the computer. Turn on the LI-1400 datalogger using the 

<On/Off> button.
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

234

3. Click the “Remote” option on the computer program menu, then click “Connect” from the 

drop-down list.

4. Choose the appropriate COM port number to connect to (usually COM 1). A small dialog 

box will open and display a “Synchronizing” message. The box will disappear when the

datalogger is connected.

5. Click the “Remote” option on the computer program menu, then click “Receive Data” from 

the drop-down list. This command downloads all (or selected portions) of the data from the 

LI-1400 memory to a text file.

6. Choose between downloading all data or a selected range and click “OK”.

7. Save the text file using a file name in the format “SITENAME_DATE_LPP.txt”, such as 

“MABIPA_8-15-2010_LPP.txt”.

8. After the File Transfer dialog box closes indicating the save is complete, click the “Remote”

option on the computer program menu, then click “Disconnect” from the drop-down list. The 

LI-1400 datalogger can now be shut off, and the LI1400 computer program can be shut 

down.

Post-Processing Downloaded Data

The LI-1400 datalogger does not record the depth of each light measurement nor the sample site at 

which the measurement was taken. These data must be added in post-processing (after the text file 

has been opened in Excel), by associating the information from the field sheet (using the date and 

time stamps in the profile, and the values for each reading which should approximate those recorded 

in the datalogger file). Extra columns are added for site name and depth, and blank rows are removed 

(see Figures S8.1 and S8.2) and the file is saved in the .xls format. 

1. Launch MS Excel spreadsheet software and open the appropriate text file for post-processing. 

Note: be sure the Excel browse window is set to display “Text files” or “All files” in the 

“Display file type” dropdown box.

2. The Text Import Wizard will open to help determine how to properly open the text file. 

Select “Delimited” as the Original Data Type in the first screen, then click “Next”.

3. Choose “Tab” (usually already checked) and “Space” as the data delimiters, then click 

“Finish”.

4. The data will be displayed in a worksheet resembling Figure S8.1.
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

235

Figure S8.6. Light profile data before post-processing

5. Insert extra columns in the worksheets to accommodate depth values and lake or pond name 

(6-letter NETN code). Delete rows and columns containing unnecessary information. 

6. Add the depth and site codes from the field data sheet. When finished, the data should be 

formatted like the worksheet displayed in Figure S8.2. 

7. Save the processed worksheet as an Excel spreadsheet (.xls format). Do not save any changes 

to the text (.txt) file from the datalogger. The text file should be archived with the other raw 

digital data from the sampling season (see the Backup and Archiving section of SOP 13 –

Data Management).

8. All Excel worksheets will be merged prior to import into the NETN_H2O database. It is 

imperative that column order and formatting be consistent in all files.

Figure S8.7. Light profile data after post-processing.
SOP 8 – Measuring Water Clarity, Turbidity, and Light Penetration

236

Determining the Attenuation Coefficient

LiCor light data can be used to calculate the attenuation coefficient of downwelling PAR (Kd) for 

each profile. Procedures detailed below are from Kopp and Neckles (2009).

1. Kd should be first calculated as the slope of the least squares regression of ln(Iz/Iair) against 

depth in meters, where Iz is the irradiance at depth z, and Iair is the irradiance in air. Units of 

Kd are m-1.

2. Iz/Iair is recorded on the data output from the Li-Cor 1400 under the column labeled 

“PTRANS (PCT)”.

3. Calculate the coefficient of determination (r-squared) for the fit of this least square linear 

regression.

a. If the r-squared is 0.95 or greater, report the slope of this line as Kd for this site. This 

method accounts for variation in ambient irradiance caused by changes in cloud 

cover.

b. If the r-squared is less than 0.95, then calculate Kd as before, but substituting Iz for 

the ratio Iz/Iair. This data is labeled “PAR(UW)” from the Li-Cor 1400 data. If the rsquared for the new regression is 0.95 or greater, then use this new slope as Kd for the 

site. This method may yield better results if the readings in air (“deck” sensor) were 

faulty, but does not account for changes in cloud cover.

c. If neither approach yields a coefficient of determination ≥ 0.95, then select the slope 

of the regression with the higher r-squared, provided it is ≥ 0.9. If this condition 

cannot be met, then use best professional judgment to determine whether a 

representative Kd can be calculated by eliminating outliers in the data or including 

data that had originally been struck through by the field technician.
237

Appendix S8.A: Transparency Tube

A transparency tube was used from 2006 through 2011 as an alternative method for measuring water 

clarity in streams and ponds that were too shallow for use of a Secchi disk. The transparency tube 

was only used outside of Acadia NP, and the only park streams tested in which the Secchi pattern 

was not always visible at the end of the tube were at Saratoga NHP.

There is a loose relationship between SD and transparency tube values, and transparency tubes can

be used in streams as well as ponds (Dahlgren et al. 2004). 

Measuring Transparency with a Transparency Tube

A 120 cm transparency tube can be used as a surrogate for water clarity measurements in streams or 

ponds that are too shallow to obtain a Secchi disk measurement. The clear tube is filled with sample 

water, which is slowly drawn off until the target (a black and white pattern resembling a miniature 

Secchi disk) at the bottom of the tube becomes visible. 

1. Fill a clean sample container at about 0.5 m (18 inches) below the surface of the water. Point 

the container opening in the direction of the waves or current. Avoid collecting sediment or 

debris floating in the water.

2. Gently shake the sample bottle to re-suspend any sediment that may have settled.

3. Pour contents of sample bottle into transparency tube to the 120 cm mark.

4. If the black and white Secchi pattern at the bottom of the tube is visible through 120 cm of 

water, the water is too clear for transparency to be measured using this method. Record the 

120 cm value on the field data sheet, and record “B” in the box after “Did disk hit bottom?” 

5. If the Secchi pattern is NOT visible through the 120cm of water, open the clamp on the hose 

at the bottom of the tube to begin draining the water from the tube. It is often helpful to have 

a second person operate the hose clamp.

6. Immediately re-clamp the drain hose when the Secchi pattern becomes visible at the bottom 

of the tube. 

7. Record the water height in the tube at the point when the Secchi pattern becomes visible.
Appendix S8.A: Transparency Tube (continued).

238

SOP 8 Revision History Log

Version 

# Date

Revised 

by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version numbers 

are allowed to vary from each other, and are only 

updated when there are changes to the SOP. Entries 

in this table prior to 3.00 reflect changes specific to 

this SOP; if numbers are missing, there were no 

changes between the original procedures and version 

3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 2007 B. Mitchell Section 4.1A: Added SOP (SOP 9A) to cover 

Transparency Tube readings.

Literature Cited: Added Dahlgren paper on 

transparency tubes.

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting

2.02 April 2009 B. Mitchell Section 3.4: Expanded Transparency Tube 

procedures. These measurements should be made 

annually, at high flow. (orig: SOP 9– Transparency 

Tube)

Section 4.1: Incorporated 4.1A into this section, and 

clarified location and timing of transparency tube 

measurements. (orig: SOP 11– Secchi disk & 

transparency tube)

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting

3.00 January 2012 B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Combined all or sections of v2.02 SOP #s 9, 11, 15, 

and 26 to consolidate all instructions for water clarity 

determination.

Re-assigned as SOP 8.

Added sections on LaMotte 2020e turbidity meter.

Expanded sections on light penetration profiles, 

including configuration values, data download and 

post-processing instructions.

Moved section on transparency tube to Appendix 

S8.A.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Minor edits

Rearrange some content in the Background and 

Scope section, specify what techniques are used 

when and where, and add information about 

transparency tube and the collection of stream 

turbidity since 2012.

Revised Secchi section for clarity: note when disk hits 

bottom, record depth even if the disk hits bottom, and 

don’t take a QC depth if the disk hits bottom.

Added specification limits for turbidity calibration.

For Li-Cor profile, in LNETN an assistant can hold the 

deck cell in place.

In LNETN the PAR globe sensor is suspended from 

an oar to keep it away from the side of the boat.

Adjusted depth intervals for light penetration profile in 

shallow ponds to be at even 0.25 m intervals.

Reviewer 

comments
239

SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

The purpose of this SOP is to document the standards, policies, and procedures for the collection, 

processing, storage, and analysis of streamflow and stream stage. Use this SOP in concert with more 

specific instructions as outlined in sources such as Rantz et al. (1982) and the technical manual for 

the FlowTracker (SonTek/YSI 2006).

Background and Scope

Streamflow is one of the most fundamental measurements of a stream ecosystem, and is necessary 

for the interpretation of water-quality measurements and the calculation of loads of those waterquality parameters including total maximum daily load (TMDL) calculations as specified in the 

Clean Water Act. It is useful to normalize water chemistry and water-nutrient measurements by flow 

in freshwater streams because many constituents tend to have strong relations with flow. Therefore, 

trend work in running waters is difficult unless one calculates flow-adjusted concentrations.

Discharge measurements can be made each time an estimate of streamflow volume is desired, using a 

current meter or direct volumetric measurement. Streamflow can also be calculated from continuous 

or discrete readings of stage. A continuous record of stage is obtained by installing instruments that 

sense and record water-surface elevations. Stage can also be obtained for discrete measurements by 

reading water levels off of a staff gage or tape-down from a fixed point (datum) whenever the site is 

visited. 

Continuous measurement of stage verified by several annual measurements of discharge to define or 

verify the rating is the most accurate and complete method for estimating temporal fluctuations in 

streamflow. The installation and maintenance of this type of continuous gaging station may be cost 

prohibitive for most parks. Where a continuous gaging station is not feasible, or where additional 

streamflow information is desired to interpret water-quality measurements across the park, there are 

two options. 

 Option 1 is to measure discharge each time an estimate of streamflow is desired. The 

advantages of this option are that an on-site or roving hydrologic technician can make these 

discharge measurements if given the proper training and support. One disadvantage of this 

option is that the streamflow measurements must be made on the same day that the waterquality sample is collected. If one agency is collecting streamflow data and another agency is 

collecting water-quality samples, these efforts must be closely coordinated. Another 

disadvantage is that ideally more than one field staff member must be trained and available at 

each park (or in NETN) to make discharge measurements when the first field staff member is 

sick or on vacation. Training, support and a back-up plan for when the trained staff member 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

240

is unavailable is critical to the success of this option. Following QA procedures is vital, 

including periodic check measurements by another qualified individual. 

 Option 2 is to install a staff gage or tape-down point, develop a rating based on several 

calibration streamflow measurements per year, and then read off of the staff gage each time 

an estimate of streamflow is desired. The advantages of developing a rating are that just 

about any field staff member can quickly take a reading or make a tape-down from a fixed 

point, as many times as necessary throughout the year (including every time a water-quality 

sample is collected), once the rating is established. This option requires a lesser degree of 

training and thus more field staff members can be efficiently trained to obtain the reading. 

The disadvantages include the expense of obtaining and maintaining the rating. The 

establishment of a rating curve requires several measurements per year for at least the first 3 

years. If the rating is stable, discharge measurements can be made less frequently in 

subsequent years. 

NETN’s approach is a combination of the two options. Discharge measurements are made each time 

water-quality measurements are taken (Option 1 as explained above), and tape-down points have 

been established at all stream water-quality-monitoring stations in all parks that do not have a 

continuous-record streamflow-gaging station (Option 2 as explained above) so that a rating can be 

developed sometime in the future. Small battery powered water level loggers (e.g., Hobo or Global 

loggers) are also being deployed in NETN streams to increase the resolution of stream stage data, as 

budget allows.

Measuring Discharge

Acceptable equipment 

Direct measurements of discharge are made with any one of a number of methods; the most common 

being the current-meter method. Discharge is measured in cubic feet per second by making 

measurements of a particular cross-sectional area of the river and the velocity of the water past that 

cross section. Two types of current meters are used within NETN parks to measure stream velocity. 

The Price pygmy meter utilizes a horizontal “cup wheel” that is rotated by the action of flowing 

water. The speed of the cup wheel rotation is used to determine the velocity of the water passing by 

the cups. Alternatively, the SonTek FlowTracker uses acoustic (Doppler effect) measurements to 

calculate water velocity. Regardless of meter choice, discharge then is calculated by multiplying the 

width, depth, and velocity of each section of the river. A comparison of the features, strengths and 

limitations of the Pygmy and FlowTracker meters is presented in Table S9.1. Detailed procedures 

used for current-meter measurements are described in Rantz et al. (1982), Carter and Davidian 

(1968), Buchanan and Somers (1969), and SonTek/YSI (2006).

In NETN parks, the Price pygmy meter is the only cup-type current meter used, since all streams are 

shallow. However, staff should be aware of the types of cup meters available and their optimal 

operating conditions, presented in Buchanan and Somers (1969) and Rantz et al. (1982). In general, 

the larger Price AA meter is used when most depths are greater than 1.5 ft across the section, and a 

Pygmy meter is used for depths between 0.3 and 1.5 ft.
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

241

When field staff make measurements of stream discharge, attempts are made to minimize errors. 

Sources of errors are identified in Sauer and Meyer (1992). These include random errors such as 

depth errors associated with soft, uneven, or mobile streambeds, or uncertainties in mean velocity 

associated with vertical-velocity distribution errors and pulsation errors. These errors also include 

systematic errors, or bias, associated with improperly calibrated equipment or the improper use of 

equipment. Current meters are also inspected before and after each measurement and tested at the 

conclusion of each field trip. The test results are recorded in the current meter log (Appendix S9.A)

maintained for each meter and reviewed annually by the crew leader. All meters are also inspected 

annually by someone other than the person to whom the meters are assigned.

Table S9.1. Comparison of Pygmy and FlowTracker current meters.

Criteria Price Pygmy meter FlowTracker Comment

Minimum depth for 

measurement

0.20 ft 0.10 ft (2 cm) FlowTracker usually 

better in shallower 

streams

Low velocity threshold 0.2 ft/sec 0.003 ft/sec FlowTracker usually 

better in lower flows

High velocity threshold 2.5 ft/sec. maximum 

measureable velocity is 

limited by the ability to count 

audible clicks

13 ft/sec, assuming no 

angles. (Ex: 6.5 ft/sec with a 

20° angle)

FlowTracker usually 

better in higher flows

Particles in the water 

(Signal to Noise Ratio)

Can be used in any water, 

although the clearer, the 

better. Water with a lot of 

particles (i.e. suspended 

clay or detritus) can muck 

up moving parts. 

Measurement is determined 

by Signal to Noise Ratio 

(SNR), which measures the 

strength of the acoustic 

reflection from particles in 

the water. SNR should 

ideally be above 10 dB 

(logarithmic units), but must 

be above 4 dB in order to 

take a reliable 

measurement. Take a 

measurement to determine 

the SNR, do not guess 

based on a visual 

observation of the water 

clarity. 

FlowTracker needs 

more particles in the 

water, Pygmy does 

better in clearer water. 

Do not necessarily 

make this decision 

based on visual 

observations, take 

sample 

measurements.

Substrate and boundary 

errors

The more even the 

substrate, the better for both 

meters, but measurements 

on uneven substrate are 

more easily taken with 

pygmy meter than the 

FlowTracker

The more even the 

substrate, the better. 

Boundary errors will occur if 

measurement is taken less 

than 2 inches away from a 

boundary, such as a rock. 

Close boundaries can have 

impact on system 

performance

Pygmy will do better in 

narrower, shallower 

streams with uneven 

substrate. Accuracy of 

FlowTracker is 

compromised by close 

boundaries. Acoustic 

reflections can affect 

velocity data when 

working in shallow, 

narrow streams
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

242

Pygmy meter 

The Pygmy meter can be used for depths between 0.3 and 1.5 ft, and is capable of measuring 

streamflow velocities from 0.1 to 4.9 feet per second (ft/s) (http://www.rickly.com/sgi/pygmy.htm).

Rantz et al. (1982) point out that at depths below 0.75 ft, the Pygmy meter under-registers the 

velocity because of the boundary effects of the surface and stream channel. Despite this, the Pygmy 

meter is still recommended at depths down to 0.3 ft as the error associated with under-registration, 

estimated in Rantz et al. (1982) to be up to 5 percent at 0.3 ft, is considered acceptable when 

compared to the complexity of other measurement methods at these depths. When depths are 

consistently below 0.3 ft, the section can be slightly modified to produce the desired depths or an 

alternative measuring method must be used. In general, meters are used with caution when a 

measurement must be made in conditions outside of the recommended ranges. Any deviations from 

these criteria are noted and the measurement accuracy is downgraded accordingly

The Pygmy works well in moderate to low flows, although when flows are very low, there may not 

be enough energy to turn the meter cups. Alternatively, since the velocity is determined by counting 

the clicks produced as the Pygmy cups make each complete revolution, very high flows can make it 

difficult to get an accurate click count.

Operating principles:

The pygmy meter measures stream velocity using a mechanical method. As the bucket wheel turns 

one full revolution, a thin wire “whisker” makes contact with a flat spot on the axle shaft of the 

bucket wheel, registering an audible electronic click that can be heard through attached headphones. 

Each click indicates that the bucket wheel has been pushed a specified distance by the streamflow. 

Thus, the number of clicks recorded in a standard time interval (no less than 40 seconds) divided by 

the time in seconds produces the at-point velocity for the measured section (V=Distance/Time).

The meter is positioned at the proper measurement depth (0.6 of the water depth for stream depths 

less than 2.5 feet) by matching two sets of graduated marks on opposing sections of the adjustable 

wading rod. 

Preparation and deployment notes:

All parts of the Pygmy assembly must be closely examined prior to each use to ensure that they are 

clean, intact, and in proper working order. These checks should be performed in the lab or home base 

before each field visit: 

 Check pivot pin, shaft, and bearing surfaces to ensure they are clean, properly lubricated 

(over-lubrication is to be avoided as it can attract fine dirt and debris), and free of burrs, 

wobbles, and other signs of wear.

 Check pivot pin for magnetization with a steel paper clip (the pin should NOT attract the 

paper clip when touched).

 Remove the shipping plug and replace with pivot pin. Adjust pivot adjustment nut on pivot 

pin until there is only a slight amount of play in the bucket wheel. The bucket wheel must 

turn freely with minimum resistance.
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

243

 Attach the meter and the earphone to the wading rod, spin the bucket wheel, and listen for 

clicks after each full rotation. If no clicks are heard, first check/replace the battery in the 

earphone and check all wires and connections.

 If electronics are in good order, remove the contact chamber cap and check/adjust the binding 

post wire (“whisker”) to ensure it engages properly with the shaft trigger spot.

 Once clicks have been re-established, perform a timed spin test by manually flicking the 

bucket wheel so it spins at a high rate of speed and measure the amount of time elapsed until 

the wheel comes to a complete stop. The minimum acceptable spin test time is 45 seconds. If 

the spin test is consistently near or below this value, disassemble, clean (using lint-free 

tissues), and/or repair meter and do not use until you obtain acceptable test results.

 Remove pivot pin and replace shipping plug in preparation for transport to the field.

 Record spin test results and details of any maintenance/repair activities performed in the 

equipment log sheet (see Appendix S9.A) for that meter.

 When in the field, avoid banging the Pygmy on rocks, roots, the stream bed, etc. since most 

of the moving parts are very fragile and easily damaged. Consider using a different discharge 

measurement method if there is a lot of silt or debris in the stream which will reduce the 

accuracy of the measurement and quickly foul and/or damage the Pygmy meter. 

 Perform a spin test before and after each discharge measurement and record the results on the 

field data form.

 When taking measurements, hold the wading rod level (plumb) and loosely enough to allow 

the Pygmy to turn with any angle of the current. Be sure to document the angle coefficient on 

the data entry for the measurement(s) in which there was an angle deviation.

iPad/iPhone DISCHARGEcalc Application:

This FileMaker Pro-based database application was developed by NETN to facilitate discharge data 

collection in the field. The application was designed for an iPhone but will run on an iPad. The 

application calculates section areas and at-point velocities, and makes final calculations of total 

discharge, average velocity, and total area. It also incorporates quality control checks and allows 

users to graphically display their cross-section. The application exports an Excel spreadsheet that can 

be e-mailed or downloaded to a computer. All calculations used in this application are based on the 

USGS's midsection method for computing discharge (http://hydroacoustics.usgs.gov/midsection/).

Several items users should keep in mind:

 Be sure iPad/iPhone batteries are fully charged before each field visit. If battery life drops 

much below 10% the iPad or iPhone will shut down and data may be lost. Strongly consider 

recording data on a paper form as a backup if battery reserves are questionable. 

 ALWAYS transcribe the total discharge, average velocity, and total area values to the field 

data form or iPad stream visit application as soon as they are calculated and displayed.
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

244

FlowTracker

Mechanical current meters like the Pygmy have limitations, including: 1) a shallow depth limit of 

0.30 ft, 2) a low velocity threshold of 0.10 ft/s (feet per second), 3) extensive maintenance is required 

to maintain meter accuracy, 4) sensitivity to vertical velocities, and 5) disturbance of the flow

measured by the meter. These limitations can hamper the usefulness of mechanical meters,

particularly at very low flows when streams can be shallow and slow (Fisher and Morlock 2002). The 

SonTek FlowTracker, a “hydroacoustic” meter, can provide an attractive alternative to mechanical 

current meters for shallow-water discharge measurements.

The standard FlowTracker uses a 2D side-looking probe. The sampling volume is located 10

cm (4 in) to the side of the probe, and can operate in as little as 2 cm (1 in) of water (SonTek/YSI 

2007). Hydroacoustic current meters use the Doppler principle applied to underwater sound to 

measure water velocities. Advantages of hydroacoustic current meters include: 1) no moving parts 

provides simple maintenance, 2) instrument calibration remains stable provided components are not 

damaged, 3) velocity accuracies of 0.01 ft/s are attainable, 4) high sample and data output rates, and 

5) quality-assurance data not available for mechanical current meters can be collected (Fisher and 

Morlock 2002). 

Disadvantages of hydroacoustic current meters include: 1) higher acquisition cost than mechanical 

meters, 2) damage or malfunctions cannot usually be repaired without return to the manufacturer, and 

3) these instruments may function poorly or not at all in clear water (Fisher and Morlock 2002).

According to the technical manual (SonTek 2007), the FlowTracker is capable of measuring 

streamflow velocities as low as 0.003 ft/s and up to 13 ft/s. Fisher and Morlock (2002) state that 

based on laboratory and field tests, velocity measurements with hydroacoustic meters cannot be 

validated below about 0.07 ft/s. However, hydroacoustic meters provide valuable information on 

direction and magnitude of flow even at lower velocities, which otherwise could not be measured 

with conventional measurements.

The FlowTracker has a potential for acoustic interference from underwater objects. The system tries 

to avoid this interference, but you must be aware of system limitations. Reflections can occur from 

the bottom, the water surface, or submerged objects (e.g., rocks). If the sampling volume is on top of 

or beyond an underwater object, velocity data will be meaningless (SonTek 2007).

Acoustic reflections can potentially affect velocity data when working in very shallow water or near 

underwater obstacles (with the sampling volume within 15 cm [6 in] of the obstacle), At each 

measurement location, the FlowTracker looks for these conditions, and if necessary, adapts its 

operation to avoid interference. For most locations, any required changes do not affect system 

performance. In some environments, changes may result in a lower maximum velocity (SonTek 

2007).

Operating principles: 

The FlowTracker uses acoustic Doppler measuring technology (rather than a mechanical means like 

the Pygmy) to indirectly measure the velocity of the water. The FlowTracker measures the velocity of 

particles, sediment, small organisms, and bubbles suspended in the flow, assuming that these 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

245

particles travel at the same velocity as the water. Therefore, the quality of the measurement is 

dependent on the presence of particles within the sampling volume that reflect a transmitted signal 

(Rehmel 2007). 

The meter is positioned at the proper measurement depth (0.6 of the water depth for stream depths 

less than 2.5 feet) by matching two sets of graduated marks on opposing sections of the adjustable 

wading rod. 

Preparation and deployment notes:

It is beyond the scope of this SOP to explain the step-by-step operation of the FlowTracker. All field 

personnel should become familiar with the instructional resources (manuals and training video) 

supplied with the meter. The following checks should be performed, as noted, either in the lab or 

home base before field visits or in the field prior to measuring discharge:

 Before the first discharge measurement trip of each month, conduct a “BeamCheck” 

diagnostic procedure in the lab or office. The BeamCheck utility tests all aspects of system 

performance, and requires the FlowTracker to be connected to an external computer. The 

Beam Check must be performed in a controlled environment using the Beam Check 

application within the Flow Tracker software. For a more detailed description of Beam 

Checks see section 6.5 in the Flow Tracker technical manual or on-line at 

https://www.uvm.edu/bwrl/lab_docs/manuals/Flow_Tracker_Manual.pdf . Using the 

BeamCheck for the first time should take about 30 minutes- experienced users should require 

5 to 10 minutes.

 In the field, first check the setup parameters. Turn the FlowTracker on, then press <ENTER> 

to display the Main Menu. Press option 1 to enter the Setup Parameters Menu. Review the 

settings and change if needed. Default settings for NETN monitoring are:

Units: English Averaging Time: 40 seconds

Mode: Discharge Salinity: 0.0 ppt (freshwater)

Discharge Equation: Mid Section 

 Press 0 to return to the Main Menu. Next press 2 to enter the System Functions Menu.

 Check the Recorder Status (option 2 in the System Functions menu) to verify the amount of 

available storage space and recorder setup parameters.

 Check Temperature Data (option 4 in the System Functions menu) to make sure it is 

reasonable for the environment.

 Check Battery Data (option 5 in the System Functions menu). Expected battery life at 20 oC 

(70 oF) is around 25 hours for alkaline batteries and about 15 hours for NiMH rechargeable 

batteries.

 Check Raw Velocity Data (option 6 in the System Functions menu). Place the probe in the 

area to be measured. SNR (signal to noise ratio) should ideally be above 10 dB, and no less 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

246

than 4 dB. Note: Choose an alternative measurement method, such as the Pygmy, if SNR 

value is very low. The velocity reading should appear reasonable for the environment.

 Check System Clock (option 9 in the System Functions menu) for the correct time and date.

Establishing measurement sections

 When selecting an area of the stream in which to establish a measurement cross-section, care 

should be taken to avoid in-stream features that will hinder accurate velocity measurements. 

Boulders or large cobbles upstream of the measurement section can impede streamflow or 

cause angles and eddies. Try to utilize cross-sections with relatively uniform depth and 

bottom composition to enable more accurate measurements of cross-sectional area. Look for 

well-defined stream banks, since undercutting, braiding, and seepage through loosely packed 

substrate can contribute to the loss of measurement of considerable amounts of streamflow. 

 Some manipulation of the stream bed (e.g. removing or re-arranging cobbles, plugging leaks 

with sand bags, etc.) is acceptable to create a more suitable measurement section, but extreme 

care must be taken to avoid resource damage. Allow the streamflow to equilibrate for several 

minutes after manipulation before beginning measurements.

 Set up the tagline (measuring tape) perpendicular to the majority of streamflow, anchored on 

each bank with stakes or heavy objects. Be sure the tagline is taut, so measurement intervals 

are accurate, and so the tape does not sag into the stream and affect the flow.

Measuring discharge

Depending on the type of meter used, specific details of this procedure will vary. Consult Rantz et al. 

(1982) for instruction on the use of the Pygmy meter, and the FlowTracker technical manual (SonTek 

2007) for more information on using the FlowTracker.

 Perform a spin test (Pygmy) or field diagnostics (FlowTracker) and any other prescribed predeployment QA procedures. 

 The measurements can be started on either the REW (right edge of water, determined while 

looking downstream) or the left edge of water (LEW). 

 The observer should be standing (wading) downstream of the tagline, looking upstream. 

 The observer’s feet should be offset from the measurement point, and preferably one behind 

the other to minimize the disturbance to the streamflow.

 At each observation vertical (measurement section), the observer measures stream depth 

using the graduations on the wading rod, then sets the correct measurement height using the 

marks on the wading rod handle. Observation depth for current meter measurements is 

dependent on water depth. If the depth is less than 2.5 feet, then the one point method should 

be used. In this method the current meter measurement is taken at a depth on the vertical that 

is equal to 60% of the total depth when measured from the surface of the water. To set the 

0.6-point, move the sliding rod so that the foot measurement on it lines up with the tenth of a 

foot measure on the Vernier. For example, if the first increment is 1.3 feet deep, take the 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

247

sliding rod and line the number one on the sliding rod to the three on the Vernier. The 

average velocity of the first increment would be found 0.8 feet (60%) down from the surface 

of the water. 

If the depth is greater than 2.5 feet than the two-point method should be used. In this method 

the current meter measurement is taken at a depth on the vertical that is equal to 20% and 

80% of the total depth when measured from the surface of the water. To set the 0.2-point, 

multiply the depth of the water by 2 and then move the sliding rod so that the foot 

measurement on it lines up with the tenth of a foot measure on the Vernier. For example, if 

the first increment is 2.6 feet deep, multiply this number by 2, which give you 5.2 feet. Then, 

take the sliding rod and line the number five on the sliding rod to the two on the Vernier. To 

set the 0.8-point, divide the water depth by 2 and then move the sliding rod so that the foot 

measurement on it lines up with the tenth of a foot measure on the Vernier. For example, to 

calculate the 0.8-point, use the same depth from the 0.2- point measurement of 2.6 feet and 

divide by 2, which gives you 1.3 feet. Then, take the sliding rod and line the number one on 

the sliding rod to the three on the Vernier.

 Velocity is then measured by either counting the number of clicks produced by the bucket 

wheel in an approximately 40-second time interval (when using the Pygmy) or is determined 

automatically by the FlowTracker datalogger routine.

When using narrowly spaced observation verticals (0.2 to 0.3 feet) it is often necessary to 

estimate the amount of flow in the first measurement section if a depth can be measured but 

the meter sensor cannot be positioned close enough to take an actual measurement. Both the 

FlowTracker datalogger and the DISCHARGEcalc application for the Pygmy have utilities 

that will calculate and record this estimate, which will be based on a percentage of the flow 

of the next observation. If recording observations on a paper form, record the estimated 

percentage, and calculate the estimated value when making the final flow calculations.

 Section location measurement, stream depth, and (for Pygmy) number of clicks and time 

interval are recorded either on iPad/iPhone, field form, or FlowTracker datalogger. 

 The measurement process is repeated at each observation vertical until reaching the opposite 

stream bank (where an estimation may again be necessary). The spacing of observation 

verticals in the measurement section can affect the accuracy of the measurement (Rantz et al. 

1982). Make observations of depth and velocity at a minimum of about 30 verticals where 

possible, to ensure that no more than 5 percent of the total flow is measured in any one 

vertical. Even under the worst conditions the discharge computed for each vertical should not 

exceed 10 percent of the total discharge and ideally not exceed more than 5 percent (Rantz et 

al. 1982). Exceptions to this policy are allowed in circumstances where accuracy would be 

sacrificed if this number of verticals were maintained, such as for measurements during 

rapidly changing stage (Rantz et al. 1982). Fewer verticals than are ideal are sometimes used 

for very narrow streams (about 12-ft wide when an AA meter is used and about 5 ft wide 

when a pygmy meter is used). Measurement of discharge is essentially a sampling process, 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

248

and the accuracy of sampling results typically decreases markedly when the number of 

samples is less than about 25.

 After taking measurements at the final observation vertical, enter the necessary information 

to complete the iPad/iPhone or FlowTracker software routine (or complete and perform the 

calculations on the paper form) and record the total discharge, average velocity, and total area 

values on the primary field form for the monitoring visit. 

 Conduct post-measurement QA procedures (spin test, etc.) and rate the accuracy of the 

measurement.

Use procedures for the computation of mean gage height during a discharge measurement presented 

in Rantz et al. (1982). Mean gage height is one of the coordinates used in describing the stagedischarge relation at a streamflow-gaging site. The FlowTracker makes these calculations 

automatically, and the iPad/iPhone software used with the Pygmy meter also makes these 

calculations.

Quality Control

When a stage-discharge relationship exists, a second discharge measurement is made for the purpose 

of checking a first discharge measurement when the first measurement differs from the current stagedischarge relation by more than the estimated accuracy of the measurement. This should be 

determined in the field, from a printed copy of the relationship, stage measurement, and discharge 

and discharge accuracy estimates provided by the DISCHARGEcalc application or the FlowTracker 

software. When a check measurement is made, as many factors affecting the measurement as 

possible are changed, including staff, instruments, and measuring section.

Until the stage-discharge relationship is established and maintained for all NETN streams, field staff 

should verify their accuracy with one second measurement each month at a randomly selected site, 

and three measurements per season taken at a USGS gaged station. Accuracy comparison 

measurements should agree within 10%.

Field Notes

Thorough documentation of field observations and data-collection activities performed by field staff

is a necessary component of data collection and analysis. To ensure that clear, thorough, and 

systematic notations are made during discharge measurements, observations are recorded by field 

staff on the discharge-measurement paper forms (use the USGS standard form found in S9.B) or in 

an electronic format (such as the iPad/iPhone DISCHARGEcalc application). Some examples of 

required discharge measurement data include gage (stage datum or staff gage) readings, depth, 

distance from initial point, revolutions, vertical or horizontal angles, and time. Other information

required to be included by field staff on the measurement note sheet includes, at minimum, the 

initials and last name of all field-party members; date; times associated with gage readings and other 

observations; coefficients used; type of meter used; meter number; location of measuring site;

measurement rating; condition of the meter before and after the measurement; and descriptions of the 

cross-section, flow, weather conditions, and control. Information on a discharge-measurement note 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

249

sheet that is derived from original data, such as total discharge, mean gage height, area, and velocity, 

should also be recorded on the primary field data form for the monitoring visit. 

Compute all discharge measurements before leaving the measurement site, unless emergency 

evacuation is required for reasons of safety. A review of field note sheets is required after each field 

trip by the crew leader. Field notes are also reviewed as a part of records computation to ensure that 

all computations have been checked and that numbers have been transferred correctly from the 

interior of the measurement form to the front sheet. 

Low-Flow Conditions

Streamflow conditions encountered by field staff during periods of low flow are typically quite 

different from those encountered during periods of medium and high flow. Low-flow conditions can 

be roughly characterized by from 1 to 2 cubic ft per second per square mile (cfsm); flows typically 

seen from June through September in most streams during a typical year. Low-flow discharge 

measurements are made to define or confirm the lower parts of stage-discharge relations for gaging 

stations, to identify channel gains or losses as part of seepage runs, and to help in the interpretation of 

associated data. Additionally, low-flow measurements are made to define the relation between lowflow characteristics in one basin and those of a nearby basin for which more data are available.

In many situations, low flows are associated with factors that reduce the accuracy of discharge 

measurements. These factors include algae growth that impedes the free movement of current-meter 

buckets and larger percentages of the flow moving in the narrow spaces between cobbles. When 

natural conditions are in the range considered by the field staff to be undependable, the cross section 

is physically improved for measurement by removal of debris or large cobbles, construction of dikes 

to reduce the amount of non-flowing water, or other such efforts (Buchanan and Somers 1969). After 

modification of the cross section, the flow is allowed to stabilize before the discharge measurement is 

initiated. Channel modifications are noted on the measurement sheet, including whether or not the 

stage at the gage was affected by the modification. The use of alternative flow measurement methods 

such as the use of flumes or volumetric methods are encouraged as alternative methods for measuring 

low-flow conditions when appropriate for the situation (Kilpatrick and Schneider 1983).

Controls are cleaned of debris or aquatic growth whenever it is possible to completely clean the 

control. A measurement is made before cleaning the control to document the effect of the debris or 

aquatic growth on the stage-discharge relation.

Volumetric Measurements

Volumetric measurements can be obtained when streamflow is completely contained within a 

discrete channel and can be totally captured in a measurement vessel (e.g. low to moderate flow 

through a perched culvert). The technique entails filling a bucket or other large container with all of 

the stream water that passes through the channel for a specified amount of time (approximately 8 

seconds), measuring the exact volume of water that has been captured in the container, and 

performing the calculations to determine discharge in cubic feet per second (cfs). 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

250

When using this method, it is imperative that no streamflow leaks around or under the control that 

directs flow into the collection vessel. A large flexible sheet of plastic, or similar device, can be used 

to help isolate and direct the stream flow. The procedure works best with two observers: one (“the 

timer”) to operate the stopwatch and direct the beginning and end of the sample collection, and the 

other (“the collector”) to physically capture the stream water in the container. The procedure is 

detailed in the following steps:

1. Carefully inspect the area in which you plan on taking the volumetric measurement. Is ALL 

the streamflow contained within the pipe, culvert, or stream channel? Is there enough 

physical space to place the container under the stream flow to collect it all? Do you have a 

large enough container (and is the flow low enough) to contain all the flow for 8 seconds? If 

you answer “No” to any of those questions, you may have to direct or isolate the flow with a 

plastic sheet, etc., or choose another method of discharge measurement.

2. Once the site is deemed suitable for a volumetric measurement, the timer checks that the 

stopwatch is on zero, and collector readies the collection container near, but not under, the 

streamflow.

3. The timer announces “One, Two, Three, GO”, and starts the stopwatch on “Go”.

4. The collector places the container in the streamflow (capturing it all without spilling, 

splashing, or missing any) on “Go”.

5. As 8 seconds approaches, the timer announces “and.... STOP”, and stops the watch on 

“Stop”.

6. The collector removes the container from the streamflow on “Stop”, and then proceeds to 

measure the volume of water in the container by carefully decanting into a graduated 

cylinder.

7. The timer records the exact time elapsed and total water volume captured during the 

collection repetition on the Volumetric Measurement field form or spreadsheet (Appendix 

S9.C) and calculates the discharge.

8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for a total of 10 repetitions. Average the 10 discharge values and 

record the average value on the primary field form for the monitoring visit.

Measurement of Stage

Many types of instruments are available for measuring the water level, or stage, at gaging stations. 

There are non-recording gages and recording gages (Rantz et al. 1982). Collect surface-water stage 

records at stream sites with instruments and procedures that provide sufficient accuracy to support 

computation of discharge from a stage-discharge relationship. In general, operation of gaging stations 

for the purpose of determining daily discharge includes collecting stage data at the accuracy of ± 0.01 

foot. 

Staff gage/Tape-down

The simplest measurement of stage is a discrete measurement taken off of a staff gage with numbers 

marked on it or taping down from a fixed benchmark or bolt (tape-down). Establish a staff gage or 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

251

tape-down sites in pools that can be measured at a range of flows and that have a single stable 

controlling feature at their outflow. Instructions for installing a stage benchmark (datum point) are 

found in SOP 2 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites. The preferred stage 

measurement device is a staff gage. If a staff gage cannot be installed (due to substrate or park 

requirements), stage measurements are made from benchmarks (typically bolts, where the top flat 

edge of the bolt is the reference point). If a staff gage reading or vertical benchmark measurement 

(directly from benchmark to water surface) cannot be taken, use an extension wand. At the Concord 

River (MIMA), the stage measurement is made using the Secchi disk from the highest point of the 

bridge (the footpath, not the railing) to the surface of the water (where the Secchi disk just touches 

the water). All measurements are made to the nearest hundredth of a foot (nearest cm, for the 

Concord River). 

Procedures for taking a tape-down measurement using an extension wand (leveling stick) are:

1. Note weather conditions and surface-water temperature on stage monitoring field form. 

Weather conditions (especially the wave conditions) are important for interpreting the 

accuracy of the stage measurement.

2. Place one of the nails in the end of the extension wand into the benchmark hole or on the top 

flat surface of the bolt head. Use the level bubble (keep bubble in the center of the circle) to 

keep wand straight and level.

3. Use folding ruler to measure from the exact surface of the water to the lower edge of the nail 

on the other side of the extension wand. Double check to make sure the wand is level at the 

time of measurement.

4. Write the measurement on the field sheet (to the nearest hundredth of a foot), along with all 

other required information.

5. Two gage readings (before and after measuring discharge) are taken during stream 

monitoring visits to determine if water level is rising, falling, or stable.

Note: Do not use the extension wand if it is possible to obtain a true vertical measurement 

from the stage datum to the water surface.

Procedures for taking a ‘tape-down’ measurement using a Laser Distance Measurer (Bosch 

DLR130), laminated target, and extension wand (leveling stick) are:

1. Note weather conditions and surface-water temperature on stage monitoring field form. 

Weather conditions (especially the wave conditions) are important for interpreting the 

accuracy of the stage measurement.

2. Before taking measurements confirm:

a. The laser is checked annually to read within 1/16” of a known measurement at a scale 

appropriate for its use (from between 0.5 - 1.5 ft)

b. The laser is set to measure from the rear edge of the tool (Figure S9.1)

c. Units of measurement are in decimal feet (Figure S9.1).
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

252

3. Next lay a waterproof/laminated 4” x 4” target on the surface of the water. This provides a 

positive surface from which the laser can take its reading.

4. Position the laser pointing vertically down with the rear edge of the tool even with the top,

flat surface of the benchmark/bolt head. If the bolt head does not stick out enough to provide 

a clear measurement to the water using direct contact with the bolt, follow step 2 in the tapedown procedures above to extend the bolt’s reference using the level.

5. Press the large red measuring button (Button 3) once to turn on the tool’s LCD and then 

again to turn on the laser. Aim the laser straight down so it shines on the target on the surface 

of the water. NOTE: Do not point the laser beam at persons or animals and do not look into 

the laser beam, not even from a long distance.

6. Briefly press the large red button a third time to take a measurement and lock the results on 

the LCD. Tip: Pressing and holding the large red button at this point will turn on the 

continuous measurement mode. Distances will continually update until the button is briefly 

pushed again.

7. Measurements can be cleared from the screen by briefly pushing the power button (Button 4). 

Holding the power button for 3 seconds will turn the device off.

Figure S9.1. Location and function of important features on the Bosch DLR130 Lasrer Distance 

Measurer.

Continuous-Record Streamflow-Gaging Stations

Continuous-record gaging stations consist of the instrumentation necessary to have continual (at least 

every 15-minute) readings of water level or stream stage. Sites for installation of continuous-gaging 

stations are selected with the intent of achieving ideal hydraulic conditions to the greatest extent 

possible. This includes unchanging natural controls that promote a stable stage-discharge relation, a 
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

253

stable pool to monitor stage, a satisfactory reach for measuring discharge throughout the range of 

stage, and the means for efficient access to the gage and measuring site (Rantz et al. 1982).

Typically, pressure-sensor recorders are installed as water-level recorders. Proper maintenance of 

gage instrumentation or replacement, if appropriate, of equipment is the responsibility of the 

individual or agency who services the gage. There are two types of continuous record sites in the 

NETN: those established and maintained by the USGS, and sites at which small battery powered 

water level loggers (e.g., Hobo or Global loggers) have been purchased and installed by network 

personnel. 

Accurate stage measurement requires not only accurate instrumentation but also proper installation 

and continual monitoring of all system components to ensure the accuracy does not deteriorate with 

time. To ensure that instruments record water levels that accurately represent the water levels of the 

body of water being investigated, instrument readings are compared to those from a reference gage.

At pressure-sensor gaging stations, the reference gage is a sturdy low-water outside staff gage or 

reference point of known elevation. 

At all sites, NETN field staff are responsible for comparing the gage height measured by NETN level 

loggers with the gage height at all available gage datum (tape-up or tape-down) points to determine if 

the water level is being represented correctly by the recorders. Using the procedure described in the 

section of SOP 1 – Establishing, Maintaining, and Documenting Monitoring Sites entitled Deploying 

continuous dataloggers, determine the elevation of the level logger and verify that it has not changed 

since the last visit. If the logger elevation has changed, examine the logger data to identify the time 

of the shift, if possible. If the exact cause and time of the shift can be positively determined, that data 

can be corrected by adjusting the stage data for the new elevation. If the details of the change in 

elevation cannot be positively determined, the data for the affected sample period should be 

considered invalid and thrown out.

Any changes and corrections to gages are documented in the Site Record File, which contains all 

documentation of the establishment and maintenance of site infrastructure. Invalidations of and 

corrections to the stage data are noted in the comments field of the NETN_H2O database record for 

the visit in which the condition requiring correction was discovered.

Stage and discharge data for the USGS sites can be obtained at the “Real-time Data” section of the 

USGS National Water Information System (NWIS) web interface (http://waterdata.usgs.gov/nwis) by 

selecting a display option and entering the USGS station number in the search box. Time series (5-

minute interval) data are available for 120 days from time of collection; summary data (daily 

average, etc.) are available for earlier data. The procedures and policies pertaining to the processing 

and analysis of data associated with the computation of USGS streamflow records, including data 

from partial-record streamflow-gaging stations and continuous-record streamflow-gaging stations are 

described in Rantz et al. (1982) and Kennedy (1983).
SOP 9 – Collecting Streamflow and Stage Data

254

Data from NETN-owned water level loggers must be downloaded to a laptop or data shuttle at each 

site visit. Download procedures vary depending on the brand and model of equipment used at a 

particular site. Consult the manufacturer’s operation manual for detailed instructions on this process.

In cold climates, winter stream stage measurements can be affected by ice. Some level loggers must 

be removed from the field before the streams freeze solid.

Stage-discharge relationship

The development of the relation between gage height (stage) and discharge, also called the rating

curve (or rating), allows discharge measurements to be calculated from stage measurements, which 

are less expensive and easier to obtain, and can be determined continuously. Rating curves can take 

several years to develop and can change over time as stream-channel conditions change. Detailed 

information on developing ratings is found in Kennedy (1984). All measurements are plotted each 

year on the graphical rating plot. 

At most USGS permanent record stations, a minimum of three manual discharge measurements are 

made to confirm the accuracy of the rating each year. One measurement, made either directly or 

indirectly, is made as close as possible to the highest discharge experienced during the year, one is 

made as close as possible to the lowest discharge experienced during the year, and one is made at an 

intermediate discharge. If the three measurements are within 5 percent of the rating in effect, the 

rating is presumed to be valid for the entire year. If any of the measurements are more than 5 percent 

different than the rating, additional field measurements are made as needed to confirm and define the 

change in the rating. 

At USGS stations which are known to have unstable ratings, measurements are made at each site 

visit to the station to continually document changes to the rating. Most NETN sites also fall into this 

category, especially since NETN monitoring can rarely be planned to coincide with extreme high- or 

low-flow events, and the sites were not selected to have permanent controls and changes in the 

physical features of the channel may be more likely. A greater number of discharge measurements, 

and constant review and correction of the rating is necessary to ensure accuracy. 
255

Appendix S9.A. Sample equipment maintenance log form.

257

Appendix S9.B. Sample USGS dischage measurement field 

form
Appendix S9.B. Sample USGS dischage measurement field form (continued).

258
259

Appendix S9.C. Sample volumetric measurement form.
Appendix S9.C. Sample volumetric measurement (continued).

260

SOP 9 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 2007 B. Mitchell Section 3.3.2.1: Added second paragraph, 

specifying that QC for discharge must be done 

monthly (one second measurement), plus an 

additional 3 measurements per field season at a 

USGS gaged station. (Originally part of SOP 8–

Collection of Streamflow)

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting

2.02 April 2009 B. Mitchell Section 3.3.2: Revised to reflect use of 

FlowTracker acoustic Doppler meter outside of 

Acadia NP, and the use of a Pygmy meter at 

Acadia (and clarified the discussion of Pygmy 

versus Price AA meters to indicate that only the 

Pygmy meter is used). (Originally part of SOP 8–

Collection of Streamflow)

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting

3.00 January 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Combined all or sections of v2.02 SOP #s 8, 16

and 26 to consolidate all instructions for water 

quantity monitoring.

Re-assigned as SOP 9.

Added Table 1 comparing current meters.

Expanded section on Pygmy meter, including setup and care instructions.

Added section about Q-Calc

Expanded information on use of FlowTracker, 

including pre-deployment and configuration 

information.

Edited discharge measurement instructions to 

include both Pygmy and FlowTracker. 

Added section on volumetric measurements.

Moved v2.02 section 7.2.3 into this SOP (from 

v2.02 SOP 26)

Added maintenance log and field forms as 

appendices.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits Internal review
Appendix S9.C. Sample volumetric measurement (continued).

261

SOP 9 Revision History Log (continued)

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Updated “Staff Gage/Tape-Down” section to 

improve description of procedures, especially for 

the Concord River.

Update “Quality Control” section to specify how 

decisions about a second discharge 

measurement are made when a rating curve 

exists.

Reviewer 

comment

3.03 March 2015 B. Mitchell

A. Kozlowski

Replace PDA and Q-Calc references with 

iPad/iPhone and discharge application.

Added methods for using laser distance tool for 

taking tape-down measurements.

New equipment 

and software

New equipment

S, Wiggin and

B. Gawley

Added FlowTracker beam-check references. 

Added water depth setting procedures for flow 

measurements.

Protocol review 

meeting

263

SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

The purpose of the invasive aquatic plant survey is to screen parts or all of a lake or pond for target 

invasive plants. The early detection of an invasive plant infestation can make eradication or control 

more feasible, and it can help efforts that can reduce the spread of the plant to other areas of the 

waterbody. This SOP is adapted from Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plant (MCIAP) screening 

survey procedures (Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants 2011). The survey process described 

here is semi-quantitative. Volunteers can effectively do screening surveys with a minimum of 

training if basic procedures are followed carefully, and questionable plants are inspected in the field, 

or sent to professionals for identification. Surveys are done from mid-July through September so that 

plants will be sufficiently developed to allow for identification. 

Staff should also be on the lookout for invasive species that can affect streams, particularly didymo 

(Didymosphenia geminata), also known as “rock snot.” Stream surveys are opportunistic and staff 

should be aware of potential stream invasive species and be vigilant for them when visiting stream 

sites.

Survey Types

Level I surveys of all lakes in NETN with a public boat launch are done annually. Level II surveys 

are done on all ponds and impoundments in NETN every year except for in ACAD. Because of the 

large number of ponds and lakes in ACAD, Level II surveys are conducted when staff availability 

permits, or in cooperation with certified MCIAP volunteers. It is important that field staff who survey 

for invasive plants attend a training that includes invasive plant identification methods and a field 

survey in a lake or pond. This training is offered by the MCIAP. 

Level I and Level II surveys include the following:

 Level I: Survey points are of public access and other areas of concentrated boat traffic such 

as marinas and narrow navigation channels. Boat launch survey areas extend horizontally 

along the shoreline at least 100 meters (~300 ft) on either side of the boat launch area, and 

offshore along the entire length to the depth at which rooted plants are no longer observed 

(the outermost extent of the littoral zone.) If the access area is in a distinct cove, the survey 

includes the entire littoral zone of the cove, even if the shoreline distance from the launch 

area to the mouth of the cove is greater than 100 meters.

 Level II: Survey all Level I areas, plus all areas of the shoreline that are likely to provide 

suitable habitat for aquatic plants, such as shallow, sheltered coves. Floating leaved plants are 
SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures 

264

often a good indicator of a rich plant community below the surface. In addition to supporting 

native plants, these areas can provide suitable habitat for invaders.

Equipment Needs

See Appendix S10.A for the list of equipment necessary for invasive aquatic plant surveys. Please 

note that a boat is always needed for safety and documentation, and the survey can be accomplished 

much more easily and safely with at least two persons in the boat. Large boats and motors make the 

process of data collection more difficult, and could destroy sensitive aquatic vegetation. A diver 

outfitted with snorkel or SCUBA apparatus is helpful in getting close to the plants, and for obtaining 

specimens, but can also stir-up bottom sediments, reducing visibility.

General Guidelines

Mid-July is generally the best time to begin Invasive Aquatic Plant screening surveys, but the process 

can begin as late as mid-August. Prior to July, many aquatic plants are not fully developed. Emergent 

flowering structures are usually needed for plant identification. For example, in variable milfoil 

flowers do not typically start to develop until July with one exception. Curly leaf pondweed 

(Potamogeton crispus), one of the plants on Maine’s watch list, usually reaches maturity by late 

spring to early summer. Lakes that are high risk for invasive plant infestation can be checked more 

than once during the season. 

The survey can be conducted over a period of time (it does not have to be completed in one day). 

Survey when there is adequate light, and when conditions are relatively calm. Early morning 

conditions are often ideal because the water is calm and reflection on the water surface is minimal. It 

will be difficult to conduct an effective survey during windy conditions. Weekends can be 

problematic because of heavy powerboat activity on some lakes.

Survey Methods

1. Fill in Section 1 of the Screening Survey Documentation Form (example in Appendix 

S10.B). Data to be recorded here includes an estimate of the lake water level at the time of 

the survey using “water marks” on shoreline rocks to help determine whether or not the level 

is high, average, or low, and a Secchi Depth (clarity) reading if possible. Use a lake depth 

map to help determine where plant communities may be situated, and to mark the location of 

the surveyed areas.

2. Begin the survey. No matter which level of survey is undertaken, the survey area extends 

from the shoreline to the outer depth of the littoral zone--the point at which it is no longer 

possible to see the lake bottom with a viewing scope or diving mask. The depth of the littoral 

zone will vary, depending on the clarity of the water. Clear lakes can support rooted plants at 

depths of 15-20 ft. Shallow ponds can support rooted plants from shore to shore. In areas 

where the lake bottom drops steeply from the shore, plotting a straight course roughly 

parallel to the shore generally allows adequate screening of the area from both sides of the 

boat. 

3. Working in teams of two, scan the area from the boat toward the shore with one surveyor, the 

other surveyor scans from the boat toward the outward extent of the littoral zone. The 
SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures 

265

surveyor in the bow also watches for hazards and the surveyor in the stern steers the boat.

The distance from the shore the boat travels is determined by water clarity, wind and wave 

activity, cloud cover, the angle of the sun, plant density, and the width of the littoral zone.

The width of the littoral zone can be verified occasionally by “spiking out” (heading out 

perpendicular to shore). The “straight” line of travel along the shore can wiggle and contort 

from time to time to conform to, and accommodate, shoreline features, docks, moored boats, 

floats, etc. Be alert to submerged mooring pulley lines!

4. In areas where the littoral zone is wider, in shallow coves, inlets and outlets, and where the 

plant community is dense and complex, use other course patterns including point-to-point 

transects. The configuration and spacing of the patterns and transects will vary according to 

the observation conditions, and density of the plant communities. The overall goal in 

selecting a proper course pattern is to optimize direct observation of the littoral zone. 

Plant Identification

Refer to a regional field aquatic plant field guide to aid in the identification of aquatic plants, such as 

the MCIAP’s Maine Field Guide to Invasive Aquatic Plants and Their Common Native Look Alikes

(Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants 2007). A number of native plants look similar in 

appearance to the 11 invasive species that are of greatest concern. The most common of these are 

bladderwort, coontail, elodea, water marigold, and common pondweeds. Several species of milfoil 

are native to Maine and it can be difficult to distinguish between native and invasive species of 

milfoil without assistance. If field staff learn the structural characteristics of the look-alike plants 

before beginning the survey, less time is needed for identification. Some native plants, such as 

bladderwort and coontail, grow in large dense stands, giving the impression of being invasive. 

When a plant has been identified as suspicious

Indicate on the survey form and lake map (Appendix S10.C) the status of the plant using the 

following code:

S = Submerged – the entire plant is growing underwater (except possibly for a short stalk supporting 

the flower)

E = Emergent – parts of the plant grow above the water surface

FL = floating leaved – Underwater stem and roots, but most of the leaves float on the surface

FR = free floating – plants may have stems, but they are not rooted, and they float on the surface

Collect a plant specimen, but do not remove the entire plant from the water. 

Collecting a plant specimen

1. Clean-cut the plant specimen. Carefully avoid fragmenting the plant because this could result 

in an invasive plant spreading to other areas of the lake. Scoop up any and all fragments with 

a net. 

2. Collect several (3-5) healthy stems of the plant in question if possible. The flower, fruits, and 

winter buds of many aquatic plants are helpful in the identification process. If these structures 
SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures 

266

are present, be sure to include them in your sample. Gently break off stem sections about 6-8 

inches long from the top part of the plant. For rooted floating leaved plants, include as much 

of the stem as possible. 

3. DO NOT attempt to pull the plant out by its roots. This is very important, since some plants 

break easily and attempts to pull them could result in spreading an invasive species more 

rapidly.

4. Mark the location of the plant with a weighted buoy. A small buoy (plastic milk jug) attached 

to string and a cored brick or rock is sufficient. 

5. Mark the location on a map, and record the GPS coordinates, if possible. Indicate local 

landmarks such as shoreline cottages or unusual rocks or trees to help others re-locate the 

site.

6. If the plant is covered with algae or tangled in debris, remove as much of the unwanted 

material as possible, without damaging the specimens. 

7. Carefully place the plant in a sealable bag with sufficient water to prevent the plant from 

becoming damaged. Immediately place the bag in a cooler and then refrigerate until you are 

ready to ship the specimens. 

If a positive identification is not possible after checking the list of common look-alikes, seek 

assistance. If a plant that is thought to be on the list of invasive aquatic species needs to be identified, 

please contact the appropriate state agency immediately to confirm the species identification and 

initiate a rapid response if warranted. If the specimen must be mailed for identification, follow the 

guidelines listed for mailing specimens. Follow up with the appropriate agency after a week without 

a response. The names and contact information for the appropriate state agencies are listed in 

Appendix S10.D. 

Preparation and guidelines for mailing specimens

1. Place wet specimens in a water-tight plastic bag. 

2. If the plant is delicate or flimsy, add enough water to the bag to cushion the plant and keep it 

wet. 

3. Remove all air from the bag and seal if the plant is relatively sturdy. DO NOT wrap the plant 

in a wet paper towel or other absorbent material.

4. Seal the bag securely and place it in a small box with enough packing material to prevent 

movement. Cardboard mailing envelopes are fine for sturdy specimens that are not packed in 

water. Padded envelopes do not work well for plant specimens. 

5. Fill out and include a suspicious plant form (can be downloaded from: 

http://www.mainevlmp.org/mciap/SuspiciousPlantForm.pdf or other appropriate state agency 

form) in the box with the specimens. This information is critical to tracking plants submitted 

for identification, and ensuring a timely response. 
SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures 

267

6. Mail the specimen to the appropriate agency on a Monday or Tuesday, to minimize the 

possibility of weekend delays. 

Contacts for invasive species identification

Each state has its own state agency responsible for the early detection and rapid response of aquatic 

invasive species. These organizations, listed in Appendix S10.D, conduct trainings, have lists of the 

most problematic or potentially problematic aquatic species in the state, and have technical assistance 

for the positive identification of species. Although aquatic invasive species data will be compiled for 

NETN, it is important that any new outbreaks of aquatic invasive species be reported to the 

appropriate state agency as soon as possible. Natural resource managers and volunteers should attend 

annual trainings organized by the state in which they reside so that they will be apprised of new 

problematic species, new outbreaks of known invasive species, and the current procedures and 

contacts for the identification and reporting of species. Species of concern in NETN parks are listed 

in Appendix S10.E.

269

Appendix S10.A. Equipment Needs for an Invasive Aquatic 

Plant Screening Survey

 Small boat, canoe, or kayak. Note that large boats and motors can make the process more 

difficult, and could destroy sensitive aquatic vegetation

 Personal flotation devices for each crew member

 First aid kit

 Park radio

 Sunscreen, bug repellent

 Waders or hip boots

 Invasive Aquatic Plant Screening Survey documentation sheets (available from 

VLMP/MCIAP), pencil, permanent markers and clipboard

 Bathymetric maps

 Applicable protocols

 Digital camera

 GPS unit, compass 

 Pocket knife, scissors, or hand pruner for snipping specimens

 Small grass rake for grabbing specimens and retrieving fragments

 Secchi disk depth viewing scope- available commercially, or construct from 5 gallon. bucket 

and Plexiglas. (Constructions plans available from VLMP/MCIAP)

 Depth gun, weighted measuring tape, or Secchi disk to determine depths

 Large and small Zip-Lock plastic bags and cooler for storing specimens (bags must contain 

enough water to float the specimens)

 Boat anchor

 Polarized sunglasses (not essential, but very helpful)

 Plant identification guides and keys, (such as the MCIAP’s Maine Field Guide to Invasive 

Aquatic Plants and Their Common Native Look Alikes, available through VLMP/MCIAP)

 Makeshift buoys to mark the location of suspicious plants (can be 1/2 gallon jug, string and 

brick or rock)

 Magnifying glass or hand lens for examining plant specimen structure (5-10X pocket 

magnifiers)

 Small white tray or shallow plastic dish for floating and observing specimens in the field

 Drinking water/food

271

Appendix S10.B. MCIAP Screening Survey data form.

273

Appendix S10.C. Sample NETN Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey 

map

275

Appendix S10.D. State Agencies for Reporting Invasive 

Aquatic Plants

Contact the organizations listed below for aquatic invasive identification survey trainings for 

individual states, for the most current list of potentially problematic and (or) illegal plants in each 

state, for technical assistance in the positive identification of aquatic species, and for the initiation of 

rapid response actions. If instructed to send in a specimen, review the instructions in the Preparation 

and guidelines for mailing specimens section in body of this SOP.

Maine:

Maine Center for Invasive Aquatic Plants

Tel. 207-783-7733

24 Maple Hill Road 

Auburn, ME 04210

mciap@mainevlmp.org

See their virtual online herbarium at: http://www.mciap.org/herbarium/invasive.php for aid in 

identifying invasive plants. This agency will contact you within 72 hours of receiving your 

plant sample, identify the plant and confirm whether or not it is an invasive species. If the 

plant is invasive, the Maine Department of Environmental Protection will be notified, and a 

rapid response action plan will be initiated.

Maine Department of Environmental Protection

17 State House Station; Augusta, ME 04333

Tel. 1-800-452-1942

New Hampshire:

Exotic Species Coordinator 

NH Department of Environmental Services

29 Hazen Drive 

Concord, NH 03301

http://des.nh.gov/organization/divisions/water/wmb/exoticspecies/index.htm

Email: asmagula@des.state.nh.us

Vermont:

Vermont Department of Environmental Conservation

Water-Quality Division

103 South Main Street

Building 10 North

Waterbury, Vermont 05671-0408

1-802-241-3777

http://www.anr.state.vt.us/dec/waterq/lakes/htm/ans/lp_ans-index.htm
Appendix S10.D. State Agencies for Reporting Invasive Aquatic Plants (continued).

276

Massachusetts:

Weed Watchers Program

Department of Conservation and Recreation

Lakes and Ponds Program 

251 Causeway St. Suite 700 Boston, MA 02114

http://www.mass.gov/dcr/waterSupply/lakepond/weedwatch.htm

Fax: 617-626-1349

Connecticut

Invasive Aquatic Plants Program

The Connecticut Agricultural Experiment Station (CAES)

123 Huntington St

New Haven, CT 06511

http://www.ct.gov/caes/cwp/view.asp?a=2799&q=376972&caesNav=|&caesNav_GID=1805

Other States:

 To find lists of invasive plants that have been found in each state or to report an invasive 

plant for any state in New England, contact Invasive Plant Atlas of New England (IPANE) at 

the website http://invasives.uconn.edu/ipane/earlydetection/early.htm

 The Northeast Aquatic Nuisance Species Panel (NEANS) lists contacts for reporting aquatic 

invasive plants in northeastern states at their Web site: 

http://www.northeastans.org/sitemap.htm
277

Appendix S10.E. Invasive aquatic plant species of concern.

Table S10.E.1. Invasive aquatic plant species of concern at Acadia NP.

Common name Latin name

European Frogbit Hydrocharis morsus-ranae

Water Chestnut Trapa natans

Yellow Floating Heart Nymphoides peltata

Eurasian Water Milfoil Myriophyllum spicatum

Variable Water Milfoil Myriophyllum heterophyllum

Parrot Feather Myriophyllum aquaticum

Fanwort Cabomba caroliniana

Hydrilla Hydrilla verticillata

Brazilian Elodea Egeria densa

European Naiad Najas minor

Curly-Leaved Pondweed Potamogeton crispus

Table S10.E.2. Invasive aquatic plant species of concern at Marsh-Billings-Rockefeller NHP.

Common name Latin name

Didymo Didymoshpenia geminata

Brazilian Waterweed Egeria densa

Variable Water Milfoil Myriophyllum heterophyllum

Eurasian Water Milfoil Myriophyllum spicatum

Yellow Floating Heart Nymphoides peltata
278

Table S10.E.3. Invasive aquatic plant species of concern at Saint-Gaudens NHS.

Common name Latin name

Didymo Didymoshpenia geminata

Brazilian Waterweed Egeria densa

Hydrilla Hydrilla verticillata

Common Frogbit (European Frogbit) Hydrocharis morsus-ranae

Variable Water Milfoil Myriophyllum heterophyllum

Eurasian Water Milfoil Myriophyllum spicatum

Brittle Waternymph (European Naiad) Najas minor

Curly-Leaved Pondweed Potamogeton crispus

Water chestnut Trapa natans

Table S10.E.4. Invasive aquatic plant species of concern at Weir Farm NHS.

Common name Latin name

Didymo Didymoshpenia geminata

Brazilian Waterweed Egeria densa

Water Hyacinth Eichhornia crassipes

Hydrilla Hydrilla verticillata

Purple Loosestrife (riparian) Lythrum salicaria

Parrot Feather Myriophyllum aquaticum

Variable Water Milfoil Myriophyllum heterophyllum

Eurasian Water Milfoil Myriophyllum spicatum

Brittle Waternymph (European Naiad) Najas minor

Curly-Leaved Pondweed Potamogeton crispus

Water chestnut Trapa natans
279

SOP 10 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 January 

2012

B. Arsenault, B. 

Gawley

Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Updated/expanded equipment list in Appendix 

S10.A.

Added contact info for CT Invasive Plant program 

in Appendix S10.D.

Added field forms and sample map as 

Appendices S10.C and S10.D. 

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision); new 

maps created.

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits. Internal review

3.02 August 2013 B. Gawley Added lists of species of concern as Appendix 

S10.E.

In response to 

internal review.

3.03 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Revised overview to specify that this SOP is for 

lakes and ponds, but staff should be vigilant for 

stream invasives when collecting data.

Clarify the reason suspected invasives should not 

be pulled out by the roots.

Reviewer 

comment

281

SOP 11 – Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

An assessment for habitat and physiochemical characterization is conducted in July at each stream in 

the yearly rotation. NETN has adapted assessment techniques from the EPA Rapid Bioassessment 

protocol. Detailed descriptions of procedures, methods and data forms can be found in Barbour et al. 

(1999), specifically Chapter 5: “Habitat Assessment and Physiochemical Parameters”. The major 

departure from EPA methods is that NETN monitors assess a 20 meter reach of stream rather than 

the EPA-prescribed 100 meters. Data are stored in a table in the NETN_H2O database.

Background and Scope

Rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment evaluations of NETN stream characteristics are conducted to

provide a qualitative assessment of conditions upstream and influencing the stream discharge and 

sampling site. This information will support stream discharge, in situ chemistry, and nutrient 

sampling analyses. The rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment will be performed at each NETN stream 

in July of each year, to supplement observations of obvious changes in stream characteristics that are

noted on monthly stream data forms. Assessments should be conducted in teams of two as a safety 

measure. 

It is beyond the scope of this SOP to present all of the information and methods that are required to 

perform a rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment. Monitors should become familiar with the EPA 

document, “Rapid Bioassessment Protocols for Use in Streams and Wadeable Rivers: Periphyton, 

Benthic Macroinvertebrates, and Fish, Second Edition” (Barbour et al 1999). This document is 

comprised of several bioassessment protocols, including sections on habitat assessments, periphyton, 

benthic macroinvertebrates, and fish. NETN’s rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment procedures are 

taken from Chapter 5: Habitat Assessment and Physicochemical Parameters and its accompanying 

data sheets, “Physical Characterization/Water Quality Field Data Sheet”, and the “Habitat 

Assessment Field Data Sheet”. This protocol, including data forms and other appendices, can be 

downloaded from http://www.epa.gov/owow/monitoring/rbp/download.html.

The EPA recommends performing a rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment on a 100-meter reach of 

stream. For the purpose of NETN’s evaluations, a 20-meter stretch upstream of the discharge and 

sampling site was determined to be sufficient. This should take the observer about 20 to 30 minutes 

to complete. Two replicate measurements will be done at Acadia and at the Lower NETN sites by 

two independent teams each year. This QC check ensures that observers conducting these 

assessments are following the same guidelines and that measurements are comparable.
SOP 11 – Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment

282

Equipment Needs

Since the rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment will be conducted during a regular stream monitoring 

site visit, much of the required equipment will already be on hand. The EPA field forms (Appendices 

S11.A and S11.B) call for channel widths, water depths, etc. to be measured in metric units, so a 

metric measuring tape and/or wooden folding ruler (to supplement the engineer-scaled tape and ruler 

used for stage and discharge measurements) comes in handy to avoid having to convert from 

English-system measurements.Equipment List for rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment

 Physical Characterization and Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheets (printed on waterproof 

paper).

 copy of EPA protocol Chapter 5: Habitat Assessment and Physicochemical Parameters

(Barbour et al. 1999)

 clipboard

 pencils or waterproof pens

 digital camera

 50m or 100m measuring tape

 wooden folding ruler (metric scale)

 rangefinder or laser measuring device (optional)

 Global Positioning System (GPS) Unit

Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment Procedures

The beginning of the assessment includes physical characterization and water quality field data. Use 

the EPA protocol (Barbour et al. 1999) and data sheet to conduct these measurements. The Habitat 

Assessment Field Data sheet includes ten categories of physical stream characteristics that are 

evaluated and rated on a numerical scale of 0 to 20 (highest) for each sampling reach. The ratings are

then totaled and compared to a reference condition to provide a final habitat ranking. Scores increase 

as habitat quality increases. To ensure consistency in the evaluation procedure, descriptions of the 

physical parameters and relative criteria are included in the rating form.

1. Although the Physical Characterization/Water Quality data form is used for all stream types, 

there are different Habitat Assessment data forms for high-gradient and low-gradient streams. 

Refer to section 5.2 of the EPA protocol for instructions on how to determine the appropriate 

classification (and Habitat Assessment data form) for the stream that is being assessed.

NETN will maintain information about the gradient of each stream in a table that should be 

referred to prior to data collection.

2. Select the stream reach to be assessed. The habitat assessment is performed on the 20 m 

reach directly upstream from the location in which the water quality sampling and flow 

monitoring is conducted. Note that some parameters require an observation of a broader 

section of the catchment than just the sampling reach.
SOP 11 – Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment

283

3. Complete the station identification section of each field data sheet and habitat assessment 

form.

4. It is best for the investigators to obtain a close look at the habitat features to make an 

adequate assessment. If the hydro-geomorphic characterization and habitat assessment are 

done before the water quality sampling and discharge measurements, care must be taken to 

avoid disturbing the sampling habitat.

5. Complete the Physical Characterization and Water Quality Field Data Sheet (Appendix 

S11.A). Sketch a map of the sampling reach on the back of the form. Take additional digital 

photos (both upstream and downstream) to supplement the regular monthly photos taken 

from the established and documented photopoint.

 Two photos are taken to document the section of the stream used for the assessment. People 

should not be visible within the reach on these photos. One photo is taken from the top of the 

stream reach, looking downstream. The second photo is taken from the bottom of the reach

looking upstream. Do not use a flash, hold the camera between 5 to 6 feet above the ground 

(i.e., head height), and take the photo in landscape (wider horizontally) mode while holding 

the camera level (i.e., do not aim up or down). Alternatively, use the panoramic mode on an 

iPhone or similar device and hold the camera in portrait mode (wider vertically), capturing a 

180 degree view. These photos are named using standard NETN file-naming conventions 

described in SOP 13 – Data Management, using the template:

NETN Site code _ YYYYMMDD_hgmUS (or) hgmDS

An example using an upstream tag line photo from Saratoga NHP Stream A, taken on 

July 25, 2010 is:

SARASA_20100725_hgmUS.jpg

6. Complete the Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheet (Appendix S11.B), in a team of two or 

more observers, if possible, to come to a consensus on determination of quality. Those 

parameters to be evaluated on a scale greater than a sampling reach require traversing the 

stream corridor to the extent deemed necessary to assess the habitat feature. As a general 

rule-of-thumb, use two lengths of the sampling reach (40 meters) to assess these parameters.

Quality Assurance Procedures

 Each observer is to be trained in the visual-based habitat assessment technique for the 

applicable region or state.

 The judgment criteria for each habitat parameter are calibrated for the stream classes under 

study. Some text modifications may be needed on a regional basis.

 Periodic checks of assessment results are completed using pictures of the sampling reach and 

discussions among the biologists in the agency.

 Two replicate measurements will be done at Acadia and at the Lower NETN sites by two 

independent teams each year.
SOP 11 – Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessment

284

Post Field Activities

At the end of each hydro-geomorphic assessment, the scores for each parameter are added and the 

stream is given a total score. Review all calculations back at the office prior to transcribing data from 

paper field forms to the computer. Photos are stored on the network drive (in a folder within 

Z:\PROJECTS\MONITORING\Water_Quality\WaterMonitoring_Implementation\5_Data\Photos\Y

YYY_WQ_Photos\, where YYYY is the monitoring year). All hydro-geomorphic data and 

evaluation scores are entered into a table associated with the NETN_H2O water quality database.

Field data sheets are to be scanned and archived. Electronic copies of the scanned data forms will be 

archived in IRMA (Integrated Resource Management Applications, https://irma.nps.gov), the NPSwide repository for documents, publications, and data sets that are related to NPS natural and cultural 

resources.
285

Appendix S11.A. Physical Characterization/Water Quality 

Field Data Sheet.
286
287

Appendix S11.B. Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheet (Low 

gradient).
Appendix S11.B. Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheet (Low gradient) (continued).

288
289

Appendix S11.C. Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheet (High 

gradient).
Appendix S11.C. Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheet (High gradient) (continued).

290
Appendix S11.C. Habitat Assessment Field Data Sheet (High gradient) (continued).

291

SOP 11 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.02 April 2009 B. Mitchell Section 3.5: Inserted placeholder for Rapid 

Habitat Assessment SOP. All subsequent SOP’s 

renumbered. ( SOP 10– Rapid HydroGeomorphic Assessment)

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting

3.00 January 

2012

B. Arsenault, 

B. Gawley

Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Expanded SOP for implementing rapid habitat 

assessment at stream sites.

Re-assigned as SOP 11

Incorporated EPA documents by reference (list 

web sites) and described all changes to 

procedures.

Highlighted which portions of the EPA procedures 

are implemented.

Added equipment list, basic assessment, QA, and 

data management procedures.

Added field forms as appendices.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Minor edits

People should not be visible in the sampled reach 

on the photos of the stream reach

Reviewer 

comments

3.02 February 

2014

B. Mitchell Panoramic photos can be taken at photopoints Updated 

equipment

293

SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

This SOP covers NETN requirements for analytical laboratories, procedures for shipping samples 

and receiving analysis results, and descriptions and specifications of individual analytical methods.

Background and Scope

To ensure consistency of results and QA/QC, use a central laboratory for all samples. The laboratory 

selected must pass independent State and Federal (National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation 

Program or NELAP, see http://www.epa.gov/ttn/nelac/accreditlabs.html) accreditation/approval 

QA/QC checks, optimally including blind-sample round-robin trial analyses of proficiency test (PT) 

standards to see if the answer the laboratory provides is close enough to known (certified correct) 

ranges to pass QC performance standards. Review the choice of laboratory periodically to ensure that 

methods have not changed, and that routine QC samples are included in analyses. Make 

arrangements with the laboratory preceding the field season to ensure that the samples are expected, 

and adequate bottles and other necessary supplies are available.

Laboratories should participate in a standard reference sample program such as that outlined in Long 

et al. (1998) for nutrients and other inorganic constituents. This is not a certification program, but the 

program is used to detect and correct possible analytical deficiencies and problems. 

Acid neutralizing capacity (ANC), color, nitrogen and phosphorus are collected biannually as grab 

samples (or depth-integrated epilimnetic samples for lakes at ACAD) and sent to a certified 

laboratory for analysis. Beginning in 2012, dissolved organic carbon (DOC), sulfate, and chloride 

were added to the analyte list. Samples are collected in May and August for streams and in June and 

August for lakes. Additionally, algal biomass (chlorophyll a) samples are collected from lakes and 

ponds. All samples are collected and filtered (for chlorophyll a) according to SOP 7 – Water 

Samples: Grab and Depth Integrated. Table S7.1 in that SOP indicates the bottle size, type, and 

quantity for each sample set. Treatment and preservation requirements (listed in Appendix S12.A of 

this SOP) such as acidification, filtering and chilling, holding times and labeling must be strictly 

adhered to in order to ensure a consistency of results. It is critical that all methods and pretreatments 

be stated when reporting results. 

Analytical Methods

Beginning in 2008, all NETN lake, pond, and stream water samples have been analyzed by the 

University of Maine’s Sawyer Environmental Chemistry Research Laboratory (SECRL). Prior to 

2008, analyses were performed at the USGS National Water Quality Laboratory (NWQL) in Denver, 

CO., or split between the NWQL and SECRL. Information on and references for the 
SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses

294

NWQL water-quality analytical methods are published in Version 2.02 of this protocol (Lombard et 

al. 2006). SECRL laboratory analysis methods are discussed in the following sections with a 

reference for each analyte. Appendix S12.A provides a complete list of analytes, methods, reporting 

limits, holding times, etc.

Acid Neutralizing Capacity (ANC)

Acid Neutralizing Capacity (ANC) is the capacity of solutes plus particulates in an aqueous system to 

neutralize acid and is thus determined on an unfiltered sample. Water’s ability to neutralize acid (i.e. 

buffering capacity) is largely a function of the bicarbonate and carbonate ions derived from 

dissolution of calcium carbonate in the drainage basin. When there is little input of calcium carbonate 

to a surface-waterbody, the dissociation of dissolved carbon dioxide is the reaction that predominates

resulting in slightly acidic waters with little buffering capacity. From the inception of NETN water 

quality monitoring acid neutralizing capacity has been analyzed by SECRL because of their ability to 

detect low levels of ANC characteristic of some NETN parks. ANC is analyzed at SECRL using the 

Gran Titration method. References are:

1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th edition, copyright 

1998. Method 2320.

2. EPA Handbook of Methods for Acid Deposition Studies, Laboratory Analyses for Surface 

Water Chemistry, Section 5.0, 1987.

Apparent Color

Color in water results from natural metallic ions, humus, and peat materials, plankton, weeds, and 

industrial wastes. Color isreported in Pt-Co units. True color is the color of water from which 

turbidity has been removed. Apparent color is determined on original samples without filtration. 

Apparent color is analyzed at SECRL with a spectrophotometer (457.5 nm). References are:

1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th edition, copyright 

1998. Method 2120.

2. Milton Roy Spectronic 601 Operator's Manual, 1991.

3. Spectronic Geneysis 5 Operator’s Manual, 1997.

Phosphorus (P)

The total phosphorus occurring in water includes orthophosphate, condensed phosphates and 

organically bound phosphates. Phosphates are in solution, in particles, or in aquatic organisms. 

Phosphorus originates from water treatment, laundry soap, or agricultural or residential fertilizers and 

often indicates agricultural pollution. It is essential to the growth of aquatic organisms and is thus 

frequently a limiting nutrient in aquatic systems. The addition of phosphates to a waterbody usually 

results in the growth of aquatic microorganisms in nuisance quantities (APHA 1998) and thus it is an 

indicator of trophic status or the productivity of a waterbody.

After 6 years of analyzing several forms of phosphorus, including total P, total dissolved P, and 

orthophosphate, beginning in 2012 the NETN will only test for total P. Examination of all of the 

phosphorus test results showed a strong correlation between the various forms, and the strategy of 
SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses

295

focusing on total P still allows detection of elevated P levels at a reduced cost. More specified 

analyses can be conducted to determine the source of the elevated levels if necessary. 

Total phosphorus is analyzed by persulfate digestion/ascorbic acid using manual colorimetry. 

References are:

1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th edition, copyright 

1998. Methods 4500-P-B-5 and 4500-P E.

2. Maine Department of Environmental Protection. Preliminary method for automated 

determination of low level phosphorus. November 20, 1973.

3. Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples, 

EPA600/R-93-100, 1993.

Nitrogen (N)

Nitrogen is found in freshwaters in the following forms; nitrate (NO3), nitrite (NO2), ammonia (NH3), 

and organic nitrogen. Nitrate is an essential nutrient for many photosynthetic autotrophs and is thus a 

major limiting nutrient in most aquatic systems. An increase in nitrogen usually results in accelerated 

eutrophication. Nitrogen is indicative of agricultural pollution or acid rain. The drinking-water 

standard for nitrate, the most highly oxidized state of nitrogen is 10 mg/L (APHA, 1998), but nitrate 

can be found in concentrations up to 30 mg/L in wastewater effluent. NETN tests for total nitrogen, 

nitrite, nitrate, and ammonia.

At the Sawyer Environmental Chemistry Research Laboratory, total nitrogen and nitrite (NO2) are 

analyzed using automated colorimetry. References are:

1. Ebina J. (1983), Simultaneous determination of total nitrogen and total phosphorous in water 

using peroxodisulfate oxidation. Water Res. vol 17, pp 1721-1726.

2. Nydahl F. (1978), On the peroxodisulfate oxidation of total nitrogen in waters to nitrate. 

Water Res. vol 12, pp 1123-1130.

3. D’Elia C. (1977), Determination of total nitrogen in aqueous samples using persulfate 

digestion. Linmol Oceanogr. vol 22, 760-764.

4. Smart M. (1981), A comparison of a persulfate digestion and the kjeldhahl procedure for 

determination of total nitrogen in freshwater samples. Water Res. v15, pp 919-921.

5. Handbook of Methods for Acidic Deposition Studies, Laboratory Analysis for Surface Water 

Chemistry, EPA 600/4-87/026 1987.

6. Bran & Luebbe, Method 818-87T, Nitrate/Nitrite in water and seawater, 1987.

7. Nitrate and Nitrite Nitrogen and Nitrite Nitrogen Method (P/N 000142 and P/N 000143), 

Doc. 000589, Rev. 1/94, OI Analytical, College Station, TX 77842-9010.

8. RFA Methodology, Nitrate and Nitrite Nitrogen, Rev. 4-90.

9. Cadmium Coils, Continuous Flow News, 20, 1994.
SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses

296

10. Handley M., Total Nitrogen Method, Environmental Chemistry Laboratory, Sawyer Research 

Center, University of Maine, Orono, ME 04469.

Nitrate (NO3) is analyzed directly using Ion Chromatography. References are:

1. EPA Method 300.0, Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in 

Environmental Samples, EPA 600/R-93-100, 1993.

2. Dionex model 2010i Ion Chromatograph manual.

3. Dionex model DX-500 manual and assorted components manuals

Ammonia (NH3) is analyzed by an autoanalyzer. References are:

1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 18th ed., copyright 1992.

Method 4500-NH3 H.

2. Ammonia Nitrogen (P/N 000156 and P/N 000157), Doc. 000578, Rev. 12/93, OI Analytical, 

College Station, TX 77842-9010.

Dissolved Organic Carbon (DOC)

Carbon is a nutrient required for biological processes. Sources of organic carbon in water include 

humic substances from plant and soil organic matter, wetland peat deposits, and atmospheric 

deposition. Certain forms of DOC can contribute to “tea” color in water, which can affect light 

attenuation. DOC is also an important part of the energy balance and acid-base chemistry in many 

freshwater systems. It also affects the transport (solubility and bioavailability) of metals, including 

mercury, in aquatic systems.

DOC is analyzed using the sodium persulfate oxidation method - detected with a carbon analyzer, via 

infrared spectrophotometry. Reference:

1. Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, EPA 600/4-79-020, 1979, Revised 

1983

Chloride (Cl)

Chloride is one of the major negatively-charged ions in fresh water systems. The chloride content of 

natural surface waters will depend to a great extent on the geology of the area. Concentrations are 

generally greater in lakes that are in proximity to marine regions. Another source of chloride is road 

run-off, from de-icing materials. Chloride is important in terms of metabolic processes, as it 

influences osmotic salinity balance and ion exchange. 

Chloride is analyzed using ion chromatography. Reference:

1. Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples, EPA 

600/R-93-100, 1993.

Sulfate (SO4)

Sulfate is found in most natural waters, originating from watershed geology, soils, and precipitation. 

Sulfate can play a major role in acidification of lakes and streams.
SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses

297

Sulfate is analyzed using ion chromatography. Reference:

1. Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples, EPA 

600/R-93-100, 1993.

Algal Biomass (Chlorophyll a)

The amount of chlorophyll a in a water sample is a measure of the concentration of suspended 

phytoplankton and can be used as an indicator of algal biomass and thus of water quality. 

Chlorophyll a is responsible for photosynthesis and is found in various forms within the living cells 

of algae, phytoplankton, and other plant matter of water environments. Like other biological response 

variables, chlorophyll a tends to integrate the stresses of various parameters over time, and thus is 

often an important nutrient-stress parameter to measure.

Chlorophyll a is analyzed at SECRL with a spectrophotometer. References are:

1. Spectronic 1201 Operators Manual, Milton Roy. Section 4.6.8

2. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 18th ed., 1992. Method 

10200H

3. Technology Applications Inc. SOP #IN-027-00, Aug. 1993, Spectrophotometric 

Determination of Chlorophyll ‘a’.

4. USEPA method 445.0, In Vitro Determination of Chlorophyll ‘a’ and Phytoplankton by 

Fluorescence, Version 1.1, Nov. 1992, Section 7.0.

Shipping Samples to the Laboratory

All samples must be sent to the central laboratory (SECRL) within specified holding times. The 

following shipping procedures assume that the SECRL is used. If another laboratory is used, 

directions for sending samples can be obtained directly from the laboratory. 

1. Ensure that each sample-container sent to the lab is marked with a waterproof preprinted 

label securely attached to the sample container. Sample date and time information should be 

marked on the label with a permanent, waterproof marking pen. The label and the 

information on it must remain intact and legible throughout the shipping process.

2. Group all sample bottles for a site in a single zip-top bag. Place all bags in an appropriately 

sized cooler and add enough ice packs (preferred) or ice to keep the samples chilled until they 

reach the lab. Add packing material if there is extra space in the cooler. This will provide

extra insulation and protect breakable sample containers.

3. When shipping foil packets of chlorophyll filters, “sandwich” the packets between two ice 

packs to ensure they remain frozen during transit. 

4. Include the following information on all sample container labels: 

 Site name and six character NETN code. 

 Date of collection 

 Time of collection 
SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses

298

 QC type (BLANK or REP, if applicable)

 For chlorophyll a filters only: Quantity (in ml) filtered and Rep number (“# of #”) 

 This information serves as a link between the sample container and the chain of custody 

form. A sample chain of custody form can be found in Appendix S12.B. 

5. Include a chain of custody form listing all sample containers in each shipping container. Do 

not send samples in a shipping container without a chain of custody form. Place the form in a 

sealed, watertight bag. When shipping samples in coolers, be sure there is a return address 

(using street address) on the inside lid of the cooler.

6. Email a digital copy of the chain of custody form(s) to the lab manager (Mike Handleyemail: handley@maine.edu) or designate when the samples have shipped to allow the 

laboratory staff to expect their arrival and prepare for their analysis.

7. Ensure that samples are not discarded or set aside by the carrier by taking special precautions 

to make certain that the coolers are not leaking, and that they can remain leak-proof even 

after the ice has begun to melt. None of the package-carrier services will deliver leaking 

coolers or boxes. Tape coolers closed by encircling with packing tape before shipping.

8. Send chilled and time-dependent samples to the laboratory by the most expedient means 

possible. In general, ship all time-dependent samples by a reliable express delivery service, 

such as Federal Express, Priority Overnight. Samples should not be shipped any later in the 

week than on Thursday afternoon- lab staff will not be available to log in and process 

samples after Friday noon. Please indicate “Priority Overnight” on the Federal Express air 

bill. The SECRL is closed on all Federal holidays; therefore, extremely time-dependent 

samples are not to be shipped in conjunction with a holiday. Use the following address when 

shipping samples to the SECRL:

Mike Handley – Lab Manager

Sawyer Environmental Center Research Laboratory

5764 Sawyer Research Center

University of Maine

Orono, ME 04469-5764

Data Reports from the Laboratory

The Lab Manager will immediately notify the NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator if analyses 

detect a blank sample that is out of range, or a parameter violating national or regional water quality 

standards. Preliminary analytical results will be discussed at this point, and re-samples and/or re-tests 

will be scheduled if applicable.

Final analytical results are delivered electronically to the NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator and 

the NETN Program Manager after certification by the SECRL Lab Manager. The data are provided 

in a specially formatted MS Excel workbook (Figure S12.1) that can be directly imported into the 

NETN_H2O water quality database.
SOP 12 – Laboratory Analyses

299

Retests of individual samples are possible if Quality Control or other issues are suspected after 

NETN staff review the final results. The SERCL Lab Manager provides comments with the final data 

report on analytical issues, possible contamination, or any other factors potentially affecting the 

analytical results.
300

Figure S12.8. Example of final chemistry analysis results from SECRL
301

Appendix S12.A. List of Analytes and Specifications.

Analyte Method Precision Objective +/-

Net Accuracy 

Objective +/-

Reporting 

Limit

Holding 

Time

Sample 

Container

Field 

treatment/fi

ltering Preservation

ANC SM Method 2320 B (Gran 

Titration)

<100 μeq/L >100 μeq/L <100 

μeq/L

>100 

μeq/L

N/A 14 days 500 ml 

white poly

None Chill

5 μeq/L 5% 5 μeq/L 5%

Apparent 

Color

SM Method 2120 C 

(Spectrophotometry)

<20 PCU >20 PCU <20 PCU >20 PCU 5 PCU 72 hours 500 ml 

white poly

None Chill

2 PCU 10% 1 PCU 5%

Total P SM Methods 4500-P-B-5 and 

4500-P E (Persulfate digestion, 

spectrophotometry)

<10 μg/L >10 μg/L <10 μg/L >10 μg/L 1 μg/L 28 days 125 ml 

brown glass

None Chill

1 μg/L 10% 1 μg/L 10%

Total N EPA Handbook 600/4-87/26 Ch. 

18.0 (Alkaline persulfate 

digestion); Bran & Luebbe 

Method BL-818-87T (Automated 

colorimetry)

<0.2 mg/L >0.2 mg/L <0.2 mg/L >0.2 mg/L 0.1 mg/L 28 days 125 ml 

brown glass

None Chill

0.01 mg/L 5% 0.02 mg/L 10%

DOC SM Method 5310C (Carbon 

analyzer: persulfate oxidation, 

infrared spectrometry)

<2 mg/L >2 mg/L <1 mg/L >1 mg/L 0.25 mg/L 14 days 125 ml 

brown glass

None Chill

0.1 mg/L 5% 0.1 mg/L 10%

Cl EPA Method 300.0 (Ion 

chromatography)

<20 μeq/L >20 μeq/L <20 μeq/L >20 

μeq/L

2 μeq/L 28 days 500 ml 

white poly

None Chill

1 μeq/L 5% 1 μeq/L 5%

Nitrate: NO3 EPA Method 300.0 (Ion 

chromatography)

<10 μeq/L >10 μeq/L <10 μeq/L >10 

μeq/L

1 μeq/L 7 days 500 ml 

white poly

None Chill

0.5 μeq/L 5% 0.5 μeq/L 5%

SO4 EPA Method 300.0 (Ion 

chromatography)

<20 μeq/L >20 μeq/L <20 μeq/L >20 

μeq/L

2 μeq/L 28 days 500 ml 

white poly

None Chill

1 μeq/L 5% 1 μeq/L 5%

Nitrite: NO2 Bran & Luebbe Method BL-818-

87T (Automated colorimetry)

<20 μg/L >20 μg/L 10% 5 μg/L 48 hours 125 ml 

brown glass

None Chill

1 μeq/L 5%

Ammonia: 

NH3

SM Method 4500-NH3 G 

(Automated colorimetry)

<0.31 mg/L >0.31 mg/L 10% 0.1 mg/L 48 hours 125 ml 

brown glass

None Chill

0.016 mg/L 5%

Chlorophyll a Standard Methods 10200H 

(trichromatic spectrophotometric 

method)

10% 10% 1 μg/L 28 days 

(filters)

1L brown 

poly (raw)

Filter within 

24 hrs

Chill raw, 

Freeze filters

303

Appendix S12.B. Sample Chain of Custody Form.
Appendix S12.B. Sample Chain of Custody Form (continued).

304

SOP 12 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

2.00 March 2007 B. Mitchell Section 5.2: Added information for Sawyer Lab 

ANC analysis, and specified that the Sawyer lab 

will process all ANC samples starting in 2007. 

(Originally part of SOP 19 – Acid Neutralizing 

Capacity)

Section 5.3: Title changed to apparent color.

ACAD samples will be analyzed by Sawyer; 

others by NWQL. Added information for Sawyer 

Lab color analysis. (Originally part of SOP 20 – A 

Color)

Section 5.4: Updated to correct lab codes. ACAD 

samples will be analyzed by Sawyer; others by 

NWQL. Added information for Sawyer Lab color 

analysis. (Originally part of SOP 21 –

Phosphorus)

Section 5.5: Updated to correct lab codes. ACAD 

samples for total N and total dissolved N will be 

analyzed by Sawyer lab. Added information for 

Sawyer analysis. (Originally part of SOP 22 –

Nitrogen)

Section 5.6: Updated to state that chl a analysis 

is conducted by the Sawyer lab. Added Sawyer 

lab info. (Originally part of SOP 23 – Algal 

Biomass)

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting

2.02 April 2009 B. Mitchell Section 5.3: Revised to note that all samples 

were analyzed by SECRL (University of Maine) 

starting in 2008. (Originally part of SOP 20 – A 

Color)

Section 5.4: Revised to note that all samples 

were analyzed by SECRL (University of Maine) 

starting in 2008 (Originally part of SOP 21 –

Phosphorus)

Section 5.5: Revised to note that all samples 

were analyzed by SECRL (University of Maine) 

starting in 2008. (Originally part of SOP 22 –

Nitrogen)

Protocol 

Review 

Meeting
Appendix S12.B. Sample Chain of Custody Form (continued).

305

SOP 12 Revision History Log (continued)

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

3.00 January 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Combined all or sections of v2.02 SOP #s 18 - 26 

to consolidate all instructions for preparation, 

collection, processing, and QA/QC of water 

samples.

Re-assigned as SOP 12.

Updated list of analytes and methodology to 

reflect analysis schedule beginning in 2012.

Revised shipping and labeling instructions, and 

contact information to reflect change from NWQL 

to SECRL.

Added section on SECRL data reporting policies 

and procedures.

Added table of analytes and specifications as 

Appendix S12.A

Added sample chain of custody form as Appendix 

S12.B.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision); 

change in 

analytes.

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Minor edits Reviewer 

comment

March 2015 B. Gawley Updated SECRL lab manager contact 

information.

Protocol review 

meeting.

307

SOP 13 – Data Management 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

This SOP describes the various phases of the data management “life cycle”, from data entry to back 

up and archiving. It also provides an overview of NETN file naming conventions and of the 

computer data platforms used to record, store, and process information obtained from NETN 

freshwater monitoring activities.

Background and Scope

Whether initially recorded on a paper data form or in the volatile memory of an electronic datalogger, 

all information obtained from field monitoring or laboratory analysis goes through a number of 

stages or processes from the moment of collection until final archiving. These stages are known as 

the “Data Life Cycle”, and are 

diagrammed in Figure S13.1. Data 

entry is the initial transcription or 

import of the field data (collected 

during the data acquisition stage) to 

the database or other data 

management platform. Verification 

and validation are quality control 

processes ensuring that the data that 

have been transferred to this 

platform are both accurate and 

within expected ranges. Metadata 

creation provides “data about the 

data” so that future users will 

understand the structure and 

significance of the information. 

Finally, backup and archival 

procedures guarantee that the 

information will remain accurate 

and available for future use. 

The NPS I&M program and NETN 

utilize a number of electronic 

applications to record (and 

subsequently retrieve) data in the 

office or field, to store and process 

Figure S13.9. The Data Lifecycle.
SOP 13 – Data Management

308

data, and to summarize and analyze data for reports and data requests. Much of the water quality and 

quantity data are saved directly to logging devices, and are imported to NETN’s master water 

monitoring database, NETN_H2O, which has several modules for viewing/editing, exporting, and 

reporting functions. One of the modules currently in development will facilitate exporting data from 

NETN_H2O to NPSTORET or directly to EQuIS, the I&M program database that serves as an initial 

portal to the EPA’s STORET data warehouse, which is the ultimate repository for all NPS water 

data.

File Naming Conventions

During the data collection process, data files created by electronic dataloggers must be appropriately 

named using standard file naming conventions. Digital photographs and exported files that have been 

processed and saved in a new format also must be named properly. Standard naming is essential for 

good data management – it provides the initial association of metadata (e.g. sampling location and 

date) with the field data. Some filenames are generated automatically by dataloggers (such as the 

iPad/iPhone applications), using the location names or codes entered into the logger by field crews 

during the monitoring process combined with the system date and time. Other devices, like the YSI 

650 MDS or the FlowTracker, require the user to enter a filename before beginning to collect data. 

These names may be restricted to a certain number of characters due to hardware or software 

limitations. File naming conventions for NETN water monitoring data are displayed in Table S13.1.

Table S13.1. NETN Water Monitoring File Naming Conventions.

File Type Naming convention Example

YSI Sonde 

(Ecowatch)

NETN Site code + 2-digit year (Limited to 8 characters) MABIPA12.dat

FlowTracker NETN Site code + .MMYY MIMASA.1011.wad

Li-Cor NETN Site code + _MM-DD-YY_ + ”LPP” (Note: if multiple 

profiles are in one file, use site code for 1st profile in 

filename)

ACJORD_06-24-10_LPP.txt

iPad Apps “WQ_Lakes_” -or- “WQ_Streams_” -or- “WQ_Discharge_” 

+ current date (YYYYMMDD)

WQ_Lakes_20150702.fmp12

Photos NETN Site code + _YYYYMMDD_ + short description_#

(if necess.) (Note: Specific details for stream and lake photo 

naming in SOP 4 and SOP 5, respectively)

ACEAGL_20070515_YSI_3.jpg or

SARASA_2010725_US.jpg

Data Entry

Data entry is the initial set of operations in which raw data from paper field forms or field notebooks 

are transcribed into a computerized form (into a database). Several methods (electronic datalogger or 

paper field form) are used to record data in the field; therefore, there will be several ways of inputting 

data into NETN_H2O. 

Data entry is best performed by a person who is familiar with the data, and ideally takes place as 

soon as data collection is complete. It becomes more difficult to track down questionable information 
SOP 13 – Data Management

309

on a field form as the time period increases after data collection. Since there can be a considerable 

lag time for analytical results to be sent from off-site laboratories, results are usually added by editing 

an existing record that was created when field data were entered for that monitoring visit.

General procedures for data entry are as follows:

1. Become familiar with the data forms. Some errors or omissions are detectable or suspected at 

this point and can necessitate setting aside some of the forms for clarification or correction by 

the field staff before attempts at entering such data into the computer. Identify in the 

documents a good stopping point to prepare for interruptions or the end of the work day. The 

best stopping point is at the completion of the entry of any single, complete field form rather 

than in the middle of a logically single operation.

2. Transcribe the data. Data are entered in one logical set at a time – usually one complete field 

form. Errors or questions about the data content can be recorded in separate data entry notes; 

such notes are useful during data verification. Initial each paper form after data are entered to 

avoid confusion about whether it has been processed (a colored pen is useful for this 

purpose). Interrupt data entry only at logical stopping points.

3. Create a hardcopy of the data. Print a copy of all the entered data for later verification 

(consult the NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator for formatting details). Do not sort the file 

because it must be checked in the same order as it was entered to speed verification from 

matching field forms. Check whether all the data were printed and are readable (font size and 

attributes) for later use. Carefully formatted reports are not prepared at this stage because the 

data have not been checked and probably contain some errors.

4. Document the data entry. Indicate on a cover sheet or other suitable location the name or 

initials of the operator and the date of entry completion. Record identical information at the 

top of the printout of the entered data. The field data and the printout are kept together from 

this point on for use in data verification. 

Manual Data Entry

Information exclusively residing on paper field forms is manually typed into the system, although 

this method is the least desirable because of the increased likelihood of transcription errors. The data 

entry module of NETN_H2O (NETNH2O_FieldDE) and some other dedicated data entry 

applications have built in QC features to provide error messages when values that are obviously out 

of range are mistakenly entered.

Substantial progress has been made toward limiting the amount of NETN water monitoring data that 

must be entered manually. Whenever possible, data are entered electronically from the start. In some 

cases, data that are primarily recorded on paper forms are also entered into an electronic field data 

entry system almost simultaneously. The electronic data are imported into NETN_H2O and 

reconciled with the paper sheets during the proofing (verification and validation) process.
SOP 13 – Data Management

310

Electronic Data Entry 

Data captured on field dataloggers (such as the YSI sonde, FlowTracker, or Li-Cor light meter) can 

be imported into the NETN_H2O interface using customized import routines. Similar routines can be 

developed for data delivered from analytical laboratories in standardized electronic formats. Once an 

import routine has been developed to accept the output from a field datalogger or electronic 

laboratory result report it is incorporated into the “NETNImportTools” module of NETN_H2O to 

provide a user-friendly interface (Figure S13.1) to associate the data with a particular monitoring 

event. A user manual is in development to describe the step by step import process. The manual will 

be appended to this SOP upon completion.

Figure S13.1. NETNImportTools Main Menu.

Verification

Data verification ("proofing") immediately follows data entry and involves checking the accuracy of 

computerized records against the original source—usually paper field records. Although the goal of 

data entry is to achieve 100 percent correct entries, this is rarely accomplished. To minimize 

transcription errors, 100 percent of records are verified to their original source during the first review. 

Further, 10 percent of records are reviewed a second time by a different person (preferably the NETN 

Water Monitoring Coordinator) and the results of that comparison reported with the data. If errors are 

found in the second review, then the entire data set is verified again. Once the computerized data are 

verified as accurately reflecting the original field data, the paper forms are archived and the 

electronic version is used for all subsequent data activities.

Verification is often best accomplished using teams of two people (but can be done by a single 

person), with one person reading the original data sheets (the reader) and the second person reading 

the same data on a computer screen or printout (the checker). In the following process, a reader and a 
SOP 13 – Data Management

311

checker work together. The checker needs a fine-tipped marker for identifying errors and for

indicating corrections. The reader needs to use a different color marker. Use of a straight edge make 

reading aligned tabular data easier. A notepad is important for making notes that are useful during 

validation.

1. Compare entered data with field forms. The reader reads the original data (field forms) out 

loud so that the checker can compare the original data with the entered data. The three 

common types of error are: duplicated records (entered twice), missing records (inadvertently 

skipped during entry), and misspellings (wrong number or code). The checker controls the 

speed of the reader and halts the reader when a discrepancy is found. When an error in the 

computerized records is found, the correction to be made is noted in red on the printout or a 

copy of the data sheet, not on the original data sheet.

2. After verifying the data from each field sheet, the reader dates and initials the original field 

form at the top (or where indicated), indicating that verification was done. The reading and 

checking is continued until all the data sheets in a data set are compared. Thereafter, an 

original set of data sheets with completion marks (for entry and verification) and a set of 

printouts or data sheet copies with needed corrections marked in red are available.

3. Correct identified errors in the computer files. An application for data entry (or one provided 

specifically for editing) is used to correct the errors. Each correction is made separately in the 

computer file. Do not use the search and replace as it often produces unexpected 

consequences. As each correction is made, check the red mark on the printout or data sheet 

copy with a green check mark. When all identified errors are corrected in the computer file, 

the printout or data sheet copy is inspected again for any corrections that were missed (a red 

check without a green check). Finally, initial and date the printout or data sheet copy at the 

top to indicate that all errors were corrected. Save the printout or data sheet copy with the 

original field form because it serves as direct evidence of the completion of entry and 

verification. 

4. Complete a simple summary analysis. Run simple summary statistics of the entered data on 

the computer. This is important because even when care is taken up to this point, a duplicate 

or omitted entry could have been overlooked. For example, the number of known constant 

elements, such as the number of sampling sites, samples per site, or sites per date can be 

viewed. Ask the same question in different ways to find differences in the answer that will 

provide clues to errors. The more variety of checks to test the completeness of the data, the 

greater is the confidence that the data are completely verified. 

Data Validation and Quality Control

The NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator must validate the data after verification is complete. 

Validation is the process of reviewing computerized data for range and logic errors. Although data 

are correctly transcribed from the original field forms, the results may not be accurate or logical. For 

example, a stream pH of 25.0 or a temperature of 95°C is illogical and almost certainly incorrect, 

whether or not it was properly transcribed from field forms. 
SOP 13 – Data Management

312

Step-by-step instructions are not possible for data validation because each data set has unique 

measurement ranges, sampling precision, and accuracy requirements. Nonetheless, validation is an

important step in the certification of the data. Certain components of data validation are built into 

data entry forms (such as range limits). Additional data validation can be accomplished during 

verification, if the operator is sufficiently knowledgeable about the data. Data can be compared to 

previous years to identify gross differences. Validation procedures will identify generic errors such 

as missing, mismatched, or duplicate records, or errors specific to particular projects. 

One of the most important tasks of rigorous validation is when the checker returns to the original data 

media (and the printout or 2nd copy) to make corrections and notations about the errors that were 

found and fixed in the digital files. Without annotating the original field forms, the digital and paper 

records do not match. If this mismatch is discovered without adequate documentation, all data are 

rendered suspect. 

The following generic procedures can be used to develop a validation strategy for most data sets. 

Examples of validation strategies (and strange errors) are also provided. 

 Catalog the error types found in each data set. When particular validation errors are found, it 

is important to catalog them in an error log for that data set. Notes on the error(s) include a 

description, how detected, and how corrected. Simple, generic errors and more esoteric and 

cryptic errors must be documented. This list of errors is a valuable reference for the next 

validation session and will ultimately be used for building formal validation procedures into 

the data entry process and other automated, post-entry error-checking routines. 

 Perform exploratory data analysis to look for outliers. Database, graphic, and statistical tools 

can be used for ad-hoc queries and displays of the data. Histograms, line plots, and basic 

statistics reveal possible logic and range errors. Such exploratory methods identify obvious 

outliers. Some of these data results could appear unusual but prove to be quite valid after 

confirmation. Noting correct but unusual values in documentation of the data set saves other 

users from repeating the same confirmation. 

 Modify field data forms to avoid common mistakes. With a list of validation errors and 

exploratory data results in hand, the field-data forms as the source of the logic errors can be 

reevaluated. Often minor changes, small annotations, or adding check boxes to a field form 

remove ambiguity about what to enter on the form. In fact, any time the same type of 

validation errors occurs repeatedly in different data sets, the field form – not the field crew –

is usually at fault. Repeated validation errors can also mean that protocol(s) or field training 

is faulty, which must be recognized and corrected. 

Data generated from digital dataloggers such as the YSI 650MDS must be reviewed for validity, 

especially values indicating that the sensor(s) failed or were improperly calibrated. More detailed 

instructions for detecting and deleting these types of errors are found in the SOP for the specific 

monitoring equipment. This proofing and validation process can be performed in the datalogger's 

computer data-viewing application (such as YSI's EcoWatch software), before the data are imported 

to NETN_H2O. 
SOP 13 – Data Management

313

Creating Metadata

Metadata (which typically answers the question of “How” something was done) is the most critical 

improvement to modernized STORET. At a time when states are increasingly passing “Credible 

Data” statutes and ignoring improperly documented data, the NPS must ensure that metadata about 

sample collection, preservation, transport, and storage; laboratory preparation and analytical 

methodology; quantification and detection limits; and other metadata that help users judge the 

usefulness of data are stored with the data. In short, poorly documented data are a waste of money 

and effort. 

NPSTORET allows users to document the entire monitoring procedure, from field-data collection to 

final result generation. Before any results can be entered into the system, NPSTORET must be 

prepped with the appropriate metadata documenting the field sampling/measurement procedure; gear 

configurations; sample preservation, transport, and handling; field/laboratory analytical procedures; 

laboratory sample preparation; complete detail about the characteristics measured; laboratory 

information; staff and their roles; and any literature citations pertinent to the monitoring effort. 

Metadata only needs to be entered once in one place in the database before entering results. The 

metadata documentation section of the NETN_H2O database is currently being upgraded, in an effort 

to more efficiently “feed” the NPSTORET system.

Editing Data

Data sets are rarely static. They often change through additions, corrections, and improvements made 

from summary and analysis. There are three main exceptions to this process:

 Only make changes that improve or update the data while maintaining data integrity.

 Document any changes made to the data set, especially once archived.

 Be prepared to recover from mistakes made during editing.

The NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator edits all archived data. Document every change in an edit 

log and accompany it by an explanation that includes pre- and post-edit data descriptions. Practice 

careful version control during editing to ensure that changes are incremental and that roll-back to a 

previous editing session is possible until such time as the file being changed is certified as correct, up 

to date, and ready for archiving.

Backup and Archiving

After each month's monitoring data are entered, verified, and validated, the NETN_H2O database is 

backed up to the ACAD and NETN network drives. These drives are each regularly backed up by 

data management or IT staff. The edit log files, documenting major edits and changes to the database, 

are also backed up and stored with the database copies. NETN_H2O is a complex database 

containing many linked files and documents. To ensure that all of the NETN_H2O information is 

copied or backed up, always copy the entire NETN_H2O folder (at the highest level under the root 

drive or folder).

The annual roll up and archiving of NETN’s data to the NPSTORET database will occur at the end 

of each calendar year, once all laboratory results from offsite analyses have been entered and all 
SOP 13 – Data Management

314

corrections and edits are complete and fully documented in the edit log. The NETN Water 

Monitoring Coordinator will conduct a final "spot check" of randomly selected records representing 

10 percent of the data from the monitoring year. The resulting end-of-year copy of the NPSTORET 

database will reflect the complete annual water-quality-monitoring information for NETN parks, and 

will be used by the NETN Water Monitoring Coordinator or Data Manager for submission to the 

NPS WRD for transfer to the national STORET data warehouse.

The NETN_H2O Database

NETN_H2O is the master “working” database for entry, import, storage, viewing and editing, and 

export of NETN water monitoring data. It was developed by the NETN using Microsoft Access 

software, and consists of a “back-end” for data storage which can be linked to a series of “front-end” 

modules containing forms and queries designed for specific activities like viewing or editing data 

(Figure S13.2) or exporting summary statistics (Figure S13.3).

Figure S13.2. NETN_H2O Data View/Edit Screen.
SOP 13 – Data Management

315

Figure S13.3. NETN_H2O Chemistry Means Query Screen.

Currently, the “Main” (View/Edit), FieldDE (Data Entry, shown in Figure S13.4), Import, and Export 

modules are fully operational. The Reporting module and the Export to NPSTORET module are 

under development. A comprehensive user manual is also in development, and will be appended to 

this SOP upon completion.

Figure S13.4. NETNH2O_FieldDE (Field Data Entry) Module used in 2012.

The NPSTORET Database

All data collected by vital signs water-quality-monitoring activities is ultimately entered into EQuIS 

either directly or via the NPSTORET database (Figure S13.5). This database was developed by the 
SOP 13 – Data Management

316

NPS Water Resources division to serve as a portal to the USEPA STORET data warehouse. 

NPSTORET and EQuIS ensure that monitoring data are in the proper format and contain the 

appropriate metadata for migration to STORET.

Guidance for using NPSTORET is available in the on-line Help System, system documentation, the 

Vital Signs Water-quality Data Management and Archiving Web site 

(http://www.nature.nps.gov/water/infoanddata/index.cfm), and in the Guidance on Water Quality, 

Contaminants, and Aquatic Biology Vital Signs Monitoring Under the Natural Resource Challenge 

Long-Term Water-quality Monitoring Program - Part E: Draft Guidance on Data Reporting and 

Archiving in STORET at http://www.nature.nps.gov/water/infoanddata/wqPartEtest.pdf. Step-by-step 

instructions for exporting data from NETN_H2O to NPSTORET are under development and will be 

appended to this SOP upon completion.

Figure S13.5. NPSTORET Main Menu Screen

Aquatic Data Utility Software

Most or all of the field dataloggers and other electronic monitoring equipment used by NETN have 

an associated software application that runs on an iPad/iPhone or standard computer for 

configuration and data download. These programs are often specific to the individual manufacturer 
SOP 13 – Data Management

317

and/or model of the hardware items they support. It is difficult to fully document all of these 

applications, since there is some variability across the network in the types of equipment used. 

Instructions on the use of the programs are usually found in the user manuals or other documentation 

for the monitoring equipment, or in the software help files.

Some of the most frequently used support software, common to all NETN monitoring activities, are 

described below:

iPad Field Data Entry

Electronic data entry in the field is often accomplished using an iPad running a database designed in 

FileMaker Pro. Information such as site location, sampling date, weather conditions, QA/QC data, 

and notes is entered on a series of screens (Figure S13.6) containing pick lists and option boxes, 

formatted numerical fields, and free text boxes. 

Figure S13.6. iPad Data Entry Screens

The data records are downloaded to a “flat file” database (on an office computer) which generates an 

MS Excel export file formatted for direct import to NETN_H2O.

DISCHARGEcalc application software

NETN’s DISCHARGEcalc application is an iPad/iPhone application used by NETN monitors when 

obtaining discharge measurements with a Pygmy meter. Developed by NETN for iPhones but usable 

on an iPad, the application (Figure S13.7) stores site data and observations, records and processes 

measurements of velocity and section area, and calculates total discharge and other measurement 

statistics. Data are output to an Excel spreadsheet which is archived as a portion of the measurement 

record.
SOP 13 – Data Management

318

Figure S13.7. DISCHARGEcalc Application Data Entry Screen.

YSI EcoWatch Software

EcoWatch Lite software is supplied with the YSI 600XL water quality sonde, and is used to 

download and display data from the 650MDS datalogger (Figure S13.8), and perform file 

management functions (exports, etc.). Instructions for use of the software are found in the software 

help files. EcoWatch Lite was introduced in 2013 for use with 64-bit operating systems.
SOP 13 – Data Management

319

Figure S13.8. EcoWatch Lite file viewer.

FlowTracker software

Several utility programs are provided with the SonTek FlowTracker to support and maintain the 

acoustic discharge measurement and datalogger functions. The “FlowTracker” program facilitates the 

downloading and viewing of data files from the datalogger, and produces a formatted results report 

for each measurement (Figure S13.9). Instructions for use of the software are found in the software 

help files.

Figure S13.9. FlowTracker Data Report.
SOP 13 – Data Management

320

The “SonUtils4” software (Figure S13.10) is used for calibration, configuring system settings, and 

performing QA checks (beam checks, etc.) on the FlowTracker hardware. Instructions for use of the 

software are found in the software help files.

Figure S13.10. SonUtils4 Main Screen.

NETN Water Monitoring Data Flow

Data management is a constant process. There are tasks and responsibilities that are performed on 

daily, weekly, and seasonal (annual) schedules. An outline of these responsibilities is provided in 

Table S13.2.
SOP 13 – Data Management

321

Table S13.2. NETN Water Monitoring Data Flow and Responsibilities

Interval Responsible Party Tasks

Daily Monitoring teams Data are collected from lake, pond, stream, and other associated 

monitoring activities.

Data and photos are downloaded from all dataloggers, iPads/iPhones, 

field computers, cameras, etc. to an “office” computer and with backup 

copies loaded to the NETN file server (as soon as possible). 

Supplementary backup copies are loaded to removable media (thumb

drive, external HD, etc).

Data from paper field forms are entered to first stage of electronic data 

entry system (iPad program or NETNH20_FieldDE). All paper field 

forms are filed in folder. 

Monthly Monitoring teams, 

NETN Water 

Monitoring 

Coordinator

After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data from iPad application 

spreadsheets and NETNH20_FieldDE are imported to the NETN_H2O

database using the Import Module. (Monitoring Team)

YSI profiles and Li-Cor data are merged, converted, and imported to the 

NETN_H2O database using the Import Module. (Monitoring Team)

Photos are renamed following NETN naming conventions. (Monitoring 

Team)

Other associated data (Rapid hydro-geomorphic, lake level, etc.) are 

entered into NETN_H2O. (Monitoring Team)

Water monitoring coordinator performs initial data validation (for 

completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are generated, and Sample 

Event Codes from the database are transcribed to each original field 

data form. 

Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Monitoring Team)

If laboratory results for earlier samples have been delivered from lab 

they are imported to the NETN_H2O database using the Import Module. 

(Water monitoring coordinator)

Updated copy of NETN_H2O backend is loaded to NETN file server. 

(Water monitoring coordinator)

Seasonally Monitoring teams, 

Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, NETN 

Data Manager

All data from current monitoring year have been loaded to NETN_H2O,

all data are verified and validated using original data sheets and Proof 

Reports. (All, as assigned)

After final data edits are completed and documented, annual export 

queries are run for cooperators (e.g. states, EPA), annual reporting, 

analysis, etc. (Water monitoring coordinator)

Complete dataset is exported for NPSTORET input. Updated 

NPSTORET backend is delivered to NETN Data Manager. (Water 

monitoring coordinator)

NETN Data Manager delivers current NPSTORET database to NPS 

Water Resources Division.

Updated (final) copy of NETN_H2O backend is loaded to NETN file 

server. (Water monitoring coordinator)

All annual data files, photos, scanned field sheets, etc. are archived on 

NETN file server. (Water monitoring coordinator)

All annual data files, photos, scanned field sheets, etc. are archived on 

IRMA. (NETN Data Manager)
SOP 13 – Data Management

322

SOP 13 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 February 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Re-assigned as SOP 13. (was SOP 24 in Protocol 

v2.02)

Expanded overview of basic data management 

functions

Added sections on NETN_H2O database, file 

naming conventions, and other computer data 

utility programs.

Added table of water monitoring data flow and 

responsibilities.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell All references to “NETN_H2Ov1” changed to 

“NETN_H2O”

Data verification can be done using a computer 

screen and copy of the data sheets OR a printout 

of the entered data.

Reviewer 

comment

3.03 March 2015 B. Mitchell Remove references to PDA and CyberTracker/QCalc, replace with iPad/iPhone and appsNew equipment 

and software

B. Gawley Change references to EcoWatch software to 

Ecowatch Lite.

New software
323

SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and 

Streams 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

This SOP describes the topics and analysis methods included in NETN water monitoring reports.

Background and Scope

Data reporting will follow the data-reporting guidelines detailed in Chapter 7 of the NETN Vital 

Signs Monitoring Plan (Mitchell et al. 2006). Data analyses and reporting will consist of an annual 

data report, and periodic trend analyses and scorecard reports. The annual data report will ensure that 

all data are being checked for quality and completeness, and will be available to the public. 

Whenever possible, data will be presented in a “scorecard” format that compares data to ecological 

and regulatory thresholds. After enough data are collected for initial analysis, trends will be analyzed 

every five years on all water quality vital-sign measures for each park. Where statistically and 

ecologically significant trends are found, further analyses will be conducted to determine if these 

trends hold across waterbodies in a park or a region or if they are unique to one waterbody in a park. 

Annual Data Reporting for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

All data and QC samples that are collected as a part of this protocol will be included in the annual 

upload of the NETN database to the NPSTORET database as described in SOP 13 – Data 

Management. In addition, an annual data report will be published that will make the data and basic 

summary statistics available to cooperators, park managers, state databases, and the public.

An annual data report will be prepared at the end of each calendar year summarizing the status of 

each metric at each park for the previous monitoring season (May 1- October 31). Annual data 

reports will be produced by NETN water monitoring staff by the end of February following the field 

season. The NETN data report will include links or references to any cooperator data reports (e.g., 

USGS reports incorporating continuous gage data), and will be available to the public. State water 

quality standards are updated triennially, and part of the annual reporting process entails looking for 

updated water quality standards and updating the appropriate sections of the protocol narrative and 

annual reports with the latest standards.

Data reports include all water monitoring data, all QC samples, basic summary statistics for the data 

and the QC data, descriptions of field and laboratory methods, and the name, number, and description 

of each site where data were collected. An assessment of the data quality includes minimum 

reporting limits, estimates of precision and accuracy, and sources of error. Annual data reports also 

include any new instances of invasive plant species, although substantiated new outbreaks of 

invasive plant species will already have been brought to the attention of park managers and the 

appropriate state agencies. Data values less than state water-quality standards will be flagged in these 
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

324

reports. Much of this data report can be standardized by use of a template that includes all methods 

and background information. This background data information is usually similar from year to year.

Interpretive work is not included in these data reports. Annual reports are compiled and reviewed by 

NETN and made available to the public in the April of the year following data collection before the 

upcoming field season begins.

Data reports are highlighted in NETN outreach efforts and any concerns with the data including QC 

concerns are discussed with the NETN technical committee (the park resource managers). Feedback 

from these meetings will be used to guide monitoring effort in the following year and to refine 

protocols where appropriate.

Quality-Control Reporting

All QC data are included in the annual report. It is the responsibility of the field staff to bring QC 

problems to the attention of NETN and to suggest solutions to improve the monitoring program. 

NETN reviews all QC data and ensures that problems are addressed before the next field season 

begins. 

Data quality must be indicated whenever data are reported. Data quality is most easily indicated by 

estimates of precision and accuracy and by the results of blank analyses. Each analytical batch 

includes an estimate of precision and accuracy. Raw data used in estimates of precision and accuracy 

and in results of blank analyses are to be reported with all data. Summaries of estimates of precision 

and accuracy for a sampling period can be used when data reports are prepared. Precision data can be 

included by listing the range of precision values obtained in percent relative standard deviation 

(RSD) by variable for each year or sampling period, noting the number of duplicates, and the number 

of duplicates that exceeded the QA objectives. 

Accuracy data can be included by listing the range of accuracy values in percent difference by 

variable for each year or sampling period, noting the number and type of samples used to determine 

accuracy, and noting the number of samples that did not meet the QA objectives. Similarly, 

summaries of blank analyses can be included by listing the range of blank values by variable for each 

sampling period, the number and concentration of blanks that exceeded the concentration values 

listed, and the total number of blank analyses. If the total number of duplicates or blanks is 10 or less, 

report results from all duplicates or blanks, instead of providing a written a summary. Field blanks 

are used to identify contamination being introduced through field procedures.

Analyses for Field Blanks

Results of field blank sample analyses from the laboratory are examined immediately to see if 

contamination is occurring. These results can then be used to adjust collection methods and guide the 

use of topical blanks before sampling continues. Confidence limits for selected percentiles of 

contamination and bias are calculated and reported annually in the annual data report. Initially, 

blanks are used singly to compare blank analysis to critical concentrations, such as water-quality 

standards, and to alert staff of contamination problems and identify the need for topical blanks if 

necessary. When enough blanks are collected throughout each park and throughout NETN, use 
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

325

nonparametric statistics on the blanks to obtain confidence limits for selected percentiles of 

contamination that are estimated based on concentrations of the analytes in the blanks. 

1. Rank the blank data from lowest to highest. The rank (u) that equals or exceeds the selected 

1-α confidence limit for the selected percentile (p): 100 (1- α) ≥ B {p, n, u-1} can be 

determined, where B is a binary probability. The upper 1-α confidence limit for the percentile 

is the value of the rank u observation: Cucl = X(u) where Cucl is the concentration that goes 

with the rank u (Helsel and Hirsch 1992).

2. Systematic error or bias is expressed as a percent recovery (with the correct or expected 

answer at 100 percent). The systematic error or bias measurement-quality objective (MQO) 

percent recovery ranges from 80 to 120 percent. If the MQO for a particular parameter is 

outside of that range (70 to130 percent), all values associated with that blank batch qualify as 

an error, and recalibration or other adjustments to the blanks must be done until the MQO can 

be met. The raw values used to calculate these percentages are also reported in the annual 

data report to allow for future statistical analyses (such as long-term or multi-laboratory 

means or standard deviations).

Analyses for Replicates

Replicates measure both field variability and method variability. Results of field replicate sample 

analyses from the laboratory are examined immediately to check these sources of variability among 

samples. These results can then be used to adjust collection before sampling continues. Standard 

deviations and means are calculated from the analysis results and reported in the annual data report. 

1. The mean and the standard deviation are calculated for replicate samples as

Cave = (C1 + C2 + ...Cn)/n

SD = ((∑ [Ci-Cave]

2

) /(n-1))1/2

where C is the concentration and n is the sample size (Helsel and Hirsch 1992). The 

RSD is calculated so that the standard deviation does not depend on the concentration 

of the sample. RSD = 100*(SD/Cave). 

2. With the RSD and SD, variability for ranges of mean concentration can be graphed and 

estimated (Helsel and Hirsch 1992). In this way an estimate of the uncertainty of the 

concentration measured in a single sample can be obtained for a given degree of confidence 

as

Confidence Interval = Csamp ± Z(1- α/2) SDreps

For a 90 percent confidence interval (α /2 = 0.05, z = 1.645). 

QC measurement quality objectives (MQOs), should not exceed a relative percent difference of 

10 percent (RPD, for a sample size of two [duplicates] or a RSD for sample size of three or 

more). Field-probe measurements for this performance standard are specific conductance, pH, 

temperature, DO, light transmittance (PAR), and SD.
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

326

Measurement precision for nutrients and chlorophyll a are less stringent and should not exceed 

30 percent. Although RPDs are sometimes reported for a sample size as small as two, two is not a 

large enough sample size for a reliable estimate of precision, and 8-20 replicates (perhaps by 

pooling data over time), is necessary to keep measurement uncertainty to reasonable levels (Irwin 

2004). If MQOs are not met, all values associated with that batch of QC samples are discarded, 

and recalibration or other adjustments are done until the MQO is met.

Data Analyses and Scorecard Report for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

Data analyses and reports are the responsibility of NETN staff. In the analyses for long-term 

continuous streamflow gages, analyses could be contracted out to the agency performing the work, 

but it remains the responsibility of NETN to compile and integrate all reports from all contractors 

and network staff into a single summary document that is useful for NPS managers and Inventory 

and Monitoring staff at a national level. 

Data analyses include the following: 1) basic statistics such as maximums, minimums, means, and 

standard deviations for each analyte and 2) seasonal and annual trend analyses. Data analyses are 

designed to answer the following questions:

1. What is the range of variation of water-chemistry parameters in pristine waters with 

minimum anthropogenic stressors?

2. What are the long-term trends in water chemistry in each waterbody, each park, and in the 

region? Are these trends statistically and ecologically significant? 

3. Can trends in water chemistry be explained by changes in flow and/or climate?

4. Are trends among all of the measures in a vital sign changing in the same way? 

5. Are waterbodies meeting state water-quality standards? 

6. Have invasive plant species been introduced into any new ponds or lakes in the park 

network? 

The presence of trends can be tested with the nonparametric Seasonal Kendall Test (a seasonal 

extension of the nonparametric Mann-Kendall test) (Helsel and Hirsch 1992), and the slope of the 

linear trend is estimated with the nonparametric Sen’s method (Gilbert 1987). Seasons are defined as 

months when sufficient data is available for the analyses. If monthly data are not available, groups of 

months that would not be expected to differ significantly from one another can be combined into 

larger seasons as long as these seasons are consistent from year to year. The data must be tested for 

trends within that period. The longer the defined season, however, the more variability there will be 

in the data, and the more difficult it will be to demonstrate a trend or lack thereof. Alternatively, 

variability can be determined and summarized for the single month for which the most data is 

available (often August). Trends are reported whether or not they are statistically significant, but are 

highlighted if they are statistically significant at p ≤ 0.05. An excel template (MAKESENS) is used 

for all calculations (Salmi et al. 2002).
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

327

Measures and trends are also analyzed for each vital sign. Indices for each vital sign can be 

developed so that all measures within a vital sign can be compared with one another. These indices 

will help resource managers understand an integrated picture of the aquatic resources at each park. 

The index will be numerical, such as the trophic status index in lakes or the indices will be graphed 

side by side and compared to one another such as an acidification index. Examples of the types of 

information to be included in data analyses are included for lakes and for streams. 

Categories such as good, caution, and significant concern are included and are primarily based on 

water-quality standards when available. These categories can change as more data are collected. How 

these categories apply to management is beyond the scope of this SOP. 

Lake Water Quality Analyses 

Measures of lake water quality are separated into those measures that are indicators of a lake or pond 

trophic status and those measures that are indicators of water chemistry. Water quality implies a 

subjective judgment depending on water-chemistry measures and the desired uses and attainment 

classes of the water. Water quality is different from the more objective trophic status which offers a 

framework within which evaluations of water quality can be made (Carlson 1977). Eutrophication of 

lakes and ponds is a natural process and unaffected lakes and ponds are at all points along the trophic 

continuum. Eutrophication only becomes a problem when it is accelerated from anthropogenic 

causes. 

For the parameters used to estimate the trophic condition of lakes such as Secchi depth (SD), total 

phosphorus and chlorophyll a, population variance or (lake-to-lake variance) dominates all other 

variance components including within-year variance, year-to-year variance and sampling error by a 

substantial amount (Larsen et al. 1995). Thus it is most meaningful to calculate summary statistics, 

(including an estimation of the variability of the statistics) on individual lakes – and then summarize 

the variability and trends across all sites. The report could then include a number or proportion of 

sites with statistically significant trends upward or downward. Likewise standard deviations or 

estimates of seasonal or year to year variability are most meaningful if the variability of individual 

sites is summarized.

A trophic status index can be calculated based on measurements of SD, total phosphorus and 

chlorophyll a. For Maine, this index can be calculated with the equations generated by the state of 

Maine as listed in the section on Maine in the section Water-quality Standards in the protocol 

narrative. Each of these three measures, when converted to the trophic scale, will give a similar 

estimate of the trophic state index. Arguably, only one of these measures is needed to estimate the 

trophic state of a lake. The calculated trophic state number, however, is only an index of trophic 

status, or a lake or pond’s productivity. Having more than one measure of a lake’s productivity 

allows for a QA check, options for estimating trophic state during various seasons of the year, and a 

better understanding of why the trophic state is changing if it is in fact fluctuating.

Each of these measures is used to understand lake processes throughout the year. Phosphorus is 

relatively stable throughout the year, and can be used as an index in the fall and spring when algal 

biomass is limited by other factors than phosphorus and thus may be below its maximum potential. 
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

328

The measurement of chlorophyll a, however, can be used in the summer for the best estimate of algal 

biomass. Chlorophyll a will be used to calculate the TSI if values of Apparent Color are greater than 

25 PCU. SD is the least expensive and easiest measurement to make, is widely measured, and allows 

for comparison across many lakes in the region. It usually provides an index very similar to that 

determined with measurements of chlorophyll a. 

SD is the only parameter of the three that is measured monthly, and thus TSI for the example 

scorecard is calculated based on the monthly means for each sample. A minimum of one reading per 

month from May through October is used with no two consecutive months of missing data (see 

section in the protocol narrative entitled Water-quality Standards: Maine). Five lakes in Acadia were 

chosen in 1995 to be more intensely monitored for trophic status (Witch Hole Pond, Upper Hadlock 

Pond, Echo Lake, Seal Cove Pond and Jordan Pond). These lakes vary in their vulnerability to 

accelerated eutrophication and in their physical characteristics. In addition, Long Pond is included as 

it has sufficient SD measurements for analysis as a part of its long-term monitoring history. Although 

many of these Acadia lakes have SD measurements back through 1982, a modified SD viewing 

scope came into use in 1995, therefore pre-1995 measurements may not correspond to post-1995 

measurements (Breen et al. 2002). Furthermore, trophic status in some lakes appears to have decadelong cyclic trends, indicating that it may be most appropriate to look at linear trends for only the most 

recent period (L. Bacon, MDEP, written commun., 2005). 

For some lakes, up to 30 years of SD data are available. Test these longer datasets for cyclical trends. 

An example of the type of graph that could be used in the scorecard based on ten years of data is 

given in Figure S14.1.

Figure S14.1. Example of a trophic scorecard for current condition and slope of trend of yearly mean 

Secchi disk depths in Acadia National Park lakes from 1995 to 2004. Hollow circles indicate that trend is 

significant at p ≤ 0.05.

-1.000

-0.600

-0.200

0.200

0.600

1.000

0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00

Current Condition -- Mean 2004 Secchi Depth (m)

Slope of Trend (1995-2004)

Eutrophic Mesotrophic Oligotrophic NonAttainment

Jordan Pond

Long Pond

Upper 

Hadlock 

Pond Echo Lake

Seal Cove Pond

Witch

Hole

Pond

increasing secchi depth

decreasing secchi depth
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

329

The graph shows the mean 2004 SD for each lake as the current condition against the slope of the 

trend for the period of record. The presence of a trend is tested with the nonparametric Mann-Kendall 

test, and the slope of the linear trend is estimated with the nonparametric Sen’s method (Gilbert 

1987). Trends are shown whether or not they are statistically significant, but hollow circles indicate 

that the trend is statistically significant at p ≤ 0.05. 

Lakes with a negative slope of trend have decreasing SDs that perhaps indicate accelerated 

eutrophication. Jordan Pond and Seal Cove Pond are the only lakes in which negative trends are 

statistically significant. When trends in August SDs are examined, Seal Cove Pond is the only lake 

with a downward trend in SDs from 1995 to 2004 that is statistically significant. Although some 

trends are statistically significant, trends might not be ecologically significant. Ecologically 

significant trends in trophic status usually indicate an acceleration of natural eutrophication 

processes, which usually indicates declining water quality. This graph is an example and not a 

comprehensive evaluation of trends at lakes in Acadia National Park (ACAD). 

As more monthly data are collected, longer time frames will allow for better evaluation of 

documented trends, causes, and ecological significance. Additional lakes at ACAD could be included 

in the analyses, and monthly analyses would then be possible for all parameters. Scorecards show the 

status and trends of various indices of water quality such as an index for trophic status and 

acidification. Categories of trophic status equate to state water-quality standards. 

Water-quality judgments for a lake consider not only trophic status, but also water-chemistry 

measures, changes in trophic status, and the presence and extent of invasive plant species. The graphs 

of the condition and trends of pH and ANC in ACAD lakes (Figures S14.2 and S14.3) indicate the 

acidification status of ACAD lakes. Five lakes have been monitored consistently since 1995 to 

evaluate long-term acidification status. Jordan and Bubble Ponds represent the large deep water lakes 

in ACAD, Sargent Mountain Pond and The Bowl represent smaller headwater or high-elevation lakes 

most likely to show chronic acidification, and Witch Hole Pond represents a lake affected organically 

by its adjacent wetland (Breen et al. 2002). Samples are half-meter deep grab samples taken from the 

deepest point in all lakes. These lakes have intermittent pH and ANC data since 1982. These earlier 

data are included in trend analyses despite large data gaps, in 1984-85, 1987-88, and 1990-97.

Both graphs show the condition as of October 2004 against the slope of the trend for the period of 

record. The presence of a trend is tested with the nonparametric Mann-Kendall test, and the slope of 

the linear trend is estimated with the nonparametric Sen’s slope estimator method (Gilbert 1987).

Trends are shown whether or not they are statistically significant, but hollow circles indicate that the 

trend is statistically significant at p ≤ 0.05. Lakes in ACAD tend to be poorly buffered (low ANC) 

and with low to neutral pH values; thus pH and ANC indicate improvement in lake water quality if 

trends show a significant increase (Breen et al. 2002). 

Maine does not currently (2011 standards) have numerical water-quality standards for pH and ANC. 

Lake standards are “as naturally occurs” (Maine State Government 2011). In the absence of 

numerical standards, the categories of good, caution, and concern for current condition are 

determined on the basis of the documented distribution of pH in Maine lakes (Williams 2004). Most 
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

330

Maine lakes have pH values between 6.0 and 7.0, which meet the standards for other New England 

states. ANC categories are determined on the basis of documentation that values above 100 μeq/L are 

insensitive to acidification, and values below zero typify acidic waters (Stoddard et al. 2003). 

Figure S14.2. Current condition (2004) and slope of trend of October pH grab samples in lakes in Acadia 

National Park from 1982 to 2004. Hollow circles indicate that trend is significant at p ≤ 0.05.

Figure S14.3. Current condition (2004) and slope of trend of October Acid neutralizing capacity grab 

samples in lakes in Acadia National Park from 1982 to 2004. Hollow circles indicate that trend is 

significant at p ≤ 0.05.

-0.020

-0.010

0.000

0.010

0.020

3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5

Current Condition -- October 2004 pH

Slope of Trend (1982-2004)

CONCERN CAUTION GOOD

The Bowl

Bubble Pond

Jordan Pond

Witch Hole 

Pond

Sargent

Mt Pond

increasing pH decreasing pH

-1.5

-1.0

-0.5

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

-50 0 50 100 150

Current Condition -- October 2004 ANC

Slope of Trend (1982-2004)

CONCERN CAUTION GOOD

Jordan Pond Bubble Pond

Witch Hole Pond

SargentMtn Pond

The Bowl

increasing ANC decreasing ANC
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

331

Of the five lakes shown, all have average pH as compared to other lakes in Maine, except for Sargent 

Mountain Pond with a pH of 5.11. Sargent Mountain Pond is also poorly buffered with an ANC of 

0.41, but shows a trend towards improving conditions of both acidification parameters. The Bowl is 

the only lake showing decreasing trends in ANC and pH, although only the trend in pH is statistically 

significant. Although some trends were statistically significant, trends might not be ecologically 

significant. As more data are collected, longer time frames will allow for better evaluation of 

documented trends, causes, and ecological significance. These graphs are examples and not 

comprehensive evaluations of trends at lakes in ACAD.

Stream Water Quality Analyses 

Stream water-quality status is evaluated on the basis of state water-quality standards for its fisheries 

classification (Table 3 in the protocol narrative). Most streams or watersheds in NETN parks have 

been classified by the state either directly or indirectly. Streams have been identified as cold water 

fisheries or warm water fisheries. See the table in each park’s sampling design (protocol narrative 

section Sampling Design in Streams) for the fisheries classification of each stream if available. These 

classifications are important to defining water-quality standards and thus will be the framework used 

to evaluate stream water quality standards. In cases where a stream does not meet one or more of 

these water-quality standards for chemistry or nutrients, it will be flagged in the annual data report 

and analyzed for trends in the scorecard report. 

For streams, most water-quality parameters, including nutrients, are strongly correlated with 

streamflow. Streamflow data analyses are addressed in a later section of this SOP and once 

completed are used to calculate streamflow-adjusted concentrations or loads. If there is a strong 

correlation between the concentrations and flow, streamflow-adjusted concentrations or loads are 

included in trend analyses of streams. Load is calculated as the discharge (Q) times the concentration 

(C) for a given time period such as a day. Trend analyses are analyzed for all parameters by use of 

the seasonal Mann-Kendall test for trend. Seasons are comprised of monthly data for any month with 

sufficient data. 

Light-Penetration-Profiles Analyses

Photosynethetic photon flux density (PPFD) is measured with a light meter in lakes with average SD 

readings less than 5 meters, or in any lake where at least one SD has been greater than the lake depth. 

A relation between SD and PPFD has been established for lakes in ACAD. A non-linear relation 

between SD and the light attenuation coefficient that has often been cited in the literature is Kd = 1.7/

ZSD; where Kd is the light attenuation coefficient and ZSD is SD (Poole and Atkins 1929, Short and 

Coles 2001). Although this may be a reasonable approximation if site-specific data are not available, 

a more specific relation was approximated from 6 years of data on seven lakes in ACAD; Kd = 4.7/

(ZSD)

1.18 (Figure S14.4). The average summer SDs in the seven lakes ranged from 4 to 14 m. It is not 

appropriate to use this relationship outside the range of variables from which the equation was 

developed. In lakes at ACAD with average SDs of 5 meters or greater, the light attenuation 

coefficient can be estimated based on the relationship; Kd = 4.7/ (ZSD)

1.18 (Figure S14.4).
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

332

Figure S14.4. Relation between Secchi disk depth and light attenuation coefficient calculated from light 

meter data in seven lakes in Acadia National Park. 

Water Level and Streamflow Analyses

There are a number of analysis methods that can be used to document the status and trends of water 

quantity in water resources in NETN parks. Graphical and numerical methods can indicate spatial or 

temporal trends in streams, lakes, and ponds. More than one continuous-record streamflow-gaging 

station is needed, however, to determine if long-term trends in streamflow are related to long-term 

climatic records. 

Analyses of streamflow statistics at continuous-record streamflow-gaging stations

Hydrographs show water levels as a function of time and are the best visual description of 

seasonal and annual water-level fluctuations. Once significant data have been collected, simple 

statistics such as maximums, minimums, means, medians, and 25th and 75th quartiles can all be 

included in a hydrograph made up of either daily or monthly values. Regulatory values such as 

minimum low flows (August median) can be plotted to see visually how much of the time the 

streamflow went below this line. 

It is also useful to calculate a duration curve to show how often the discharge of a stream meets 

or exceeds a given value. To create a duration curve, start by ranking the discharge data (for

example 1 year) from the highest value to the lowest value. The chance that a given flow will be 

equaled or exceeded, expressed by a percentage, can be calculated as P = 100(m)/(n+1), where P 

y = 4.6984x-1.1843

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2

0 5 10 15 20

Secchi Depth (meters)

Attenuation Coefficient (Kd)

Witch Hole

Jordan

Seal Cove

Echo

Upper hadlock

Bubble

Eagle
SOP 14 – Data Reporting and Analysis for Lakes, Ponds, and Streams

333

is the percentage; m is the rank, and n is the total number of values. This type of a graph can 

show if streamflow is adequate to meet designated requirements. 

Analyses of streamflow statistics at partial-record streamflow-gaging stations

After significant data have been collected, discharge measurements at partial-record streamflowgaging stations are correlated with concurrent mean daily streamflow measurements at nearby 

continuous-record streamflow-gaging stations with similar hydrological and (or) 

geomorphological characteristics to determine if a relation can be established between the two 

stations. If a relation can be established, daily mean discharges, and streamflow statistics such as 

monthly means and medians can be estimated at the partial record station on the basis of the 

streamflow measurements at the continuous-record stations. Estimates can only be made for the 

season in which measurements have been taken at the partial-record station. 

SOP 14 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 February 

2012

B. Gawley Reformatted using NRPS-NRR template.

Changed annual reporting period from previous 

water year to previous calendar year.

Changed annual report due date to end of 

February following monitoring season.

Moved section on Water-Level and StreamflowData Analysis (v2.02 Section 7.2.3) to SOP 9.

Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits.

Trend reports every 5 years, not every 2 years.

Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Minor edits

Added sentence to the end of the second 

paragraph of “Annual Data Reporting for Lakes, 

Ponds, and Streams”, indicating that an annual 

review of state standards is needed.

Reviewer 

comment

335

SOP 15 – Post-Season Activities 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.02

Overview

This SOP consists of a checklist of the tasks and procedures that must be completed at the conclusion 

of the freshwater monitoring field season.

Post-season Checklist:

 Clean, winterize, and store field gear and boats.

 For YSI sonde follow procedures in the Probe Care and Storage section of SOP 6 –

In Situ Water-Quality Measurements using Multiparameter Sonde. YSI sondes 

should be sent to the manufacturer for testing and calibration every two years, even if 

they appear to be functioning properly.

 Remove batteries from all electronic equipment.

 Wash all boats and canoes with fresh water.

 Flush outboard motors and follow appropriate “winterizing” procedures 

recommended by the manufacturer.

 Identify and set aside all items needing repair/replacement.

 Enter/import all data.

 Follow procedures in SOP 13 – Data Management.

 Proof (verify and validate) all data.

 Follow procedures in SOP 13 – Data Management.

 Submit final data to NETN Data Manager and cooperators (where applicable). 

 Continue monitoring lake levels until ice-in (ACAD). Monitor ice-in/ice-out dates where 

applicable.

 Remove Global water level loggers before hard freeze; download and manage data from all 

continuous loggers.

 Update inventories of equipment and expendables.

 Provide estimate of needs for next season and projected cost to NETN Program 

Manager for budget formulation and approval.
336

 Repair/replace gear/instruments as needed.Plan purchases, other expenditures, and hiring for 

next year.

 Renew contracts/agreements as needed.

 Training, as needed/available.

 Prepare for and participate in annual program/protocol review conference call or meeting.

 Reporting (Annual reports due end of February following the field season).

 Update protocol to reflect action items from protocol review meeting. 

SOP 15 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 Feb 2012 B. Gawley New SOP established for Protocol Version 3.00 Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Download and import data from continuous 

loggers.

Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell YSI sondes go to manufacturer every two years 

for service

Codify current 

procedure
337

SOP 16 – Annual Timeline of Activities 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.01

Overview

This SOP establishes the timeline for tasks and procedures that must be completed to implement and 

support NETN freshwater monitoring.

Annual Timeline:

Month Tasks and Procedures

January  All previous season’s data entered to NETN_H2O database and validated by January 31. 

(Water Monitoring Coordinator).

 All previous season’s raw data, scanned field sheets, and photos uploaded to NETN server by 

January 31. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s]).

 Begin/continue protocol revisions identified at December protocol review meeting. (Water 

Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Make sure all administrative needs (contracts, purchase requests, invoice payments, 

personnel/hiring) for previous & upcoming seasons have been addressed. (Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, NETN Program Manager)

February  Continue protocol revisions identified at December protocol review meeting. (Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Deliver previous season’s data to all cooperators (states, EPA, etc.) as required. (Water 

Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Complete dataset is exported for NPSTORET input. Updated NPSTORET backend is 

delivered to NETN Data Manager. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Begin/continue writing annual data reports for all parks. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Hiring/re-hiring in progress. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, NETN Program Manager)

 All field equipment requiring repair, factory recalibration, recertification sent back to 

manufacturer. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])
338

Annual Timeline (continued):

Month Tasks and Procedures

March  Complete protocol revisions identified at December protocol review meeting by March 31. 

(Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Summary of protocol changes sent to all water monitoring staff and other appropriate parties. 

(Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Complete annual data reports for all parks by March 31. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Hiring/re-hiring complete. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, NETN Program Manager)

 Complete full inventory of all supplies and equipment. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Order necessary equipment and supplies. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Order sample bottles from lab for April ACAD acidification monitoring and all NETN May 

(stream) nutrient sampling. (ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Record ice-out dates when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s])

 Install Global stream level loggers in ACAD when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Survey/install stage benchmarks when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Begin ACAD weekly lake level monitoring when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Complete necessary training as available. (All)

April  Field crew EOD.

 Cross-training session with ACAD and LNETN teams (LNETN to ACAD). (Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Meet with lab manager to discuss logistics and analysis. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Prepare/service boats, motors, vehicles. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Unpack/prepare and perform accuracy checks on YSI, current meters, Li-Cor. (see SOP 6 – In 

Situ Water Quality Measurements Using Multiparameter Sonde) (Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Label and bag sample bottles for April ACAD acidification monitoring. (ACAD Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader)

 Make travel arrangements for May LNETN monitoring. (LNETN Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader)

 Contact LNETN park Resource Managers re: May monitoring schedule and assistance. 

(LNETN Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Record ice-out dates if necessary. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s])

 Install Global stream level loggers in ACAD if necessary. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Survey/install stage benchmarks when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Begin/continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD 

Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Conduct ACAD lake acidification monitoring (10 lakes). (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD 

Water Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Complete necessary training as available. (All)
339

Annual Timeline (continued):

Month Tasks and Procedures

May  Complete necessary training as available. (All)

 Survey/install stage benchmarks when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Order sample bottles from lab for June (lake & pond) nutrient sampling. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s])

 Label and bag sample bottles for May nutrient sampling. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Conduct stream, lake, and pond monitoring at all NETN sites. Collect water samples for 

nutrient analysis from streams. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct YSI accuracy check (see SOP 6 – SOP 6 – In Situ Water Quality Measurements 

Using Multiparameter Sonde). (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Make travel arrangements for June LNETN monitoring. (LNETN Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader)

 Contact LNETN park Resource Managers re: June monitoring schedule and assistance. 

(LNETN Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data are entered to the NETN_H2O database 

using the Data Entry and Import Modules. Photos are renamed and filed. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Begin initial data validation of May data (for completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are 

generated, and Sample Event Codes from the database are transcribed to each original field 

data form. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Field Crew)

June  Complete necessary training as available. (All)

 Meeting or conference call to discuss the field crew's progress and any concerns that have 

surfaced after the first month of monitoring. (All)

 Survey/install stage benchmarks when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Label and bag sample bottles for June nutrient sampling. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Conduct stream, lake, and pond monitoring at all NETN sites. Collect water samples for 

nutrient analysis from lakes and ponds. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct YSI accuracy check (see SOP 6 – SOP 6 – In Situ Water Quality Measurements 

Using Multiparameter Sonde). (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Make travel arrangements for July LNETN monitoring. (LNETN Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader)

 Contact LNETN park Resource Managers re: July monitoring schedule and assistance. 

(LNETN Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data are entered to the NETN_H2O database 

using the Data Entry and Import Modules. Photos are renamed and filed. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Complete validation of May data and begin initial data validation of June data (for 

completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are generated, and Sample Event Codes from the 

database are transcribed to each original field data form. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Field Crew) 

 Compile “wish list” for end-of-year purchasing. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)
340

Annual Timeline (continued):

Month Tasks and Procedures

July  Complete necessary training as available. (All)

 Survey/install stage benchmarks when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Order sample bottles from lab for August nutrient sampling. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Cross-training session with ACAD and LNETN teams (ACAD to LNETN, budget/schedule 

permitting). (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct stream, lake, and pond monitoring at all NETN sites. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Take panorama photo series at lakes and ponds during monitoring events. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Begin conducting Invasive Aquatic Plant surveys after mid-July, during lake and pond 

monitoring events. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct Rapid Hydro-Geomorphic Assessments during stream monitoring events. Survey for 

Didymo. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct YSI accuracy check (see SOP 6 – SOP 6 – In Situ Water Quality Measurements 

Using Multiparameter Sonde). (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct mid-season inventory of all supplies. Order all supplies needed for remainder of 

monitoring season. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Finalize “wish list” for end-of-year purchasing & submit to NETN Program Manager by 2nd

week of July. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Make travel arrangements for August LNETN monitoring. (LNETN Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader)

 Contact LNETN park Resource Managers re: August monitoring schedule and assistance. 

(LNETN Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data are entered to the NETN_H2O database 

using the Data Entry and Import Modules. Photos are renamed and filed. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Complete validation of June data and begin initial data validation of July data (for 

completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are generated, and Sample Event Codes from the 

database are transcribed to each original field data form. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Field Crew)
341

Annual Timeline (continued):

Month Tasks and Procedures

August  Complete necessary training as available. (All)

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Conduct stream, lake, and pond monitoring at all NETN sites. Collect water samples for 

nutrient analysis from all sites. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct remaining Invasive Aquatic Plant surveys during lake and pond monitoring events. 

(Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Deploy benthic macroinvertebrate samplers at 5 ACAD streams. (Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Conduct YSI accuracy check (see SOP 6 – SOP 6 – In Situ Water Quality Measurements 

Using Multiparameter Sonde). (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Make travel arrangements for September LNETN monitoring. (LNETN Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader)

 Contact LNETN park Resource Managers re: September monitoring schedule and assistance. 

(LNETN Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Receive data from lab analysis of April-June samples. Check on status of lab invoice #1. 

(Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data are entered to the NETN_H2O database 

using the Data Entry and Import Modules. Photos are renamed and filed. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Complete validation of July data and begin initial data validation of August data (for 

completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are generated, and Sample Event Codes from the 

database are transcribed to each original field data form. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Field Crew)

September  Complete necessary training as available. (All)

 Meeting or conference call to discuss the field crew's progress and any concerns that have 

surfaced after monitoring to date. (All)

 Order sample bottles from lab for October ACAD acidification monitoring. (ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Conduct stream, lake, and pond monitoring at all NETN sites. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Retrieve benthic macroinvertebrate samplers at 5 ACAD streams. (Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader, ACAD Field Crew)

 Conduct YSI accuracy check (see SOP 6 – SOP 6 – In Situ Water Quality Measurements 

Using Multiparameter Sonde). (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Make travel arrangements for October LNETN monitoring. (LNETN Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader)

 Contact LNETN park Resource Managers re: October monitoring schedule and assistance. 

(LNETN Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data are entered to the NETN_H2O database 

using the Data Entry and Import Modules. Photos are renamed and filed. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Complete validation of August data and begin initial data validation of September data (for 

completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are generated, and Sample Event Codes from the 

database are transcribed to each original field data form. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Field Crew)
342

Annual Timeline (continued):

Month Tasks and Procedures

October  Complete necessary training as available. (All)

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Label and bag sample bottles for October ACAD acidification monitoring. (ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Conduct stream, lake, and pond monitoring at all NETN sites. Collect water samples for 

acidification analysis from 10 ACAD lakes. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Conduct YSI accuracy check (see SOP 6 – SOP 6 – In Situ Water Quality Measurements 

Using Multiparameter Sonde). (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 After monthly monitoring is complete, all new data are entered to the NETN_H2O database 

using the Data Entry and Import Modules. Photos are renamed and filed. (Water Monitoring 

Crew Leader[s], Field Crew)

 Complete validation of September data and begin initial data validation of October data (for 

completeness). Paper “Proof Reports” are generated, and Sample Event Codes from the 

database are transcribed to each original field data form. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Data forms are scanned and saved as .pdf files. (Field Crew)

 Field crew end of season.

November  Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Winterize boats, motors, vehicles. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Conduct end-of-season inventory of all equipment supplies. Identify all equipment needing 

repair/replacement. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Winterize and store all monitoring equipment. (Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s]

 Receive data from lab analysis of August samples. (Water Monitoring Coordinator)

 Complete validation of October data. Other associated data (Rapid hydro-geomorphic, lake 

level, etc.) are entered into NETN_H2O. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water 

Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Compile agenda for protocol review meeting and schedule meeting. (Water Monitoring 

Coordinator, NETN Program Manager, Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

December  Receive data from lab analysis of October samples. Check on status of lab invoice #2. (Water 

Monitoring Coordinator)

 All data from current monitoring year have been loaded to NETN_H2O, all data are verified 

and validated using original data sheets and Proof Reports. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s])

 Continue ACAD weekly lake level monitoring until ice-in. (Water Monitoring Coordinator,

ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Record ice-out dates when possible. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, Water Monitoring Crew 

Leader[s])

 Remove and manage data from Global stream level loggers in ACAD before hard freeze. 

(Water Monitoring Coordinator, ACAD Water Monitoring Crew Leader)

 Conduct protocol review meeting. (Water Monitoring Coordinator, NETN Program Manager, 

Water Monitoring Crew Leader[s]) 
343

SOP 16 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 Mar 2012 B. Gawley New SOP established for Protocol Version 3.00 Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits.

Deleted “Responsible Parties” column since all 

months listed the same responsible parties.

Year-end wish list needed by end of June.

Complete data validation by end of the month 

after data collection.

Invasive plant surveys can begin after mid-July.

Internal review

345

SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures 

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 3.03

Overview

This SOP outlines the operational practices and decontamination procedures that are used to 

minimize the spread of invasive aquatic plants and animal species, and fish and wildlife pathogens 

from NETN freshwater monitoring activities.

Background

There is a growing concern about the spread of invasive aquatic organisms into previously unaffected 

areas in the Northeast. The NETN has been conducting invasive aquatic plant monitoring since 2006, 

and though no invasive aquatic plant species have been detected during NETN monitoring, species of 

concern are present in all states containing NETN parks. The range of the invasive alga Didymo 

(Didymosphenia geminata), also known as “rock snot”, has expanded dramatically in the past several 

years as has the spread of a variety of pathogens that cause fish and amphibian diseases.

NETN water monitoring crews have the potential to spread aquatic invasive species and fish and 

wildlife pathogens from watershed to watershed and park to park. Taking precautions to minimize 

the spread of these threats is essential. Combining a series of informed scheduling and operational 

choices with thorough and effective decontamination measures is the best strategy for keeping 

invasive organisms out of NETN parks.

Operational Practices

 Contact park resource managers annually for updates on detection of invasive species in or 

near NETN parks. Follow all park-specific guidance or requirements for disinfection 

frequencies and procedures.

 Consult the NETN Invasive Aquatic Plant Early Detection Cards or other identification 

resources for species of concern. If you suspect that one or more of these target species is 

present, alert the park resource manager, and use extra diligence in cleaning and disinfection 

procedures. Further information on reporting suspected invasive aquatic plants can be found 

in SOP 10 – Invasive Aquatic Plant Survey Procedures.

 Whenever possible, schedule monitoring visits to sites with suspected or confirmed presence 

of invasive species after visits to “uncontaminated” sites.

 When monitoring several sites on the same stream or within the same watershed, visit the 

sites in a downstream sequence. Most algae and aquatic invasives and pathogens can’t swim 

upstream.
SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures

346

 Use easily disinfected equipment and wading gear. Non-absorbent equipment is easier to 

disinfect quickly than absorbent equipment. Use only rubber-soled wading boots–felt-soled 

boots have been banned in some states.

 Designate waders/boots/canoes/rafts for different watersheds or have multiple sets available 

for same-day travel, when needed.

 If equipment can be rinsed and air-dried thoroughly for at least 2 days (in a NON-HUMID 

(<60%) environment) before use in a new watershed, disinfection is not needed.

 In all other situations, clean/disinfect all equipment using soap or bleach before entering a 

new watershed. This will likely require a minimum of 15 to 20 minutes of time at the 

conclusion of a monitoring visit, and scheduling should be adjusted to accommodate these 

procedures.

 Certain equipment items cannot be disinfected easily between sites (e.g., the boats at ACAD), 

however, these items should still be carefully inspected and have any visible debris and other 

contamination removed from all external surfaces.

 Construct and use a simple, portable disinfection kit. A typical kit includes:

 Large trash can and/or medium sized Rubbermaid-type bin for soaking wading boots

and gear.

 Large stiff bristle brush for scrubbing.

 Spray bottle(s) or pump sprayer(s).

 Graduated cylinder or measuring cup.

 Cleansing solutions (5% Palmolive soap) solution and 10% salt solution.

 Fresh water (several gallons) for rinsing.

Standard Cleaning Procedures

To prevent the accidental introduction of organisms transported through water, all watercraft and 

equipment that have been in a waterbody should be thoroughly cleaned to remove invasive species, 

including any fragments, seeds, or other materials. This recommendation applies to equipment 

arriving at the monitoring site as well as equipment that is taken out of the water after monitoring. 

 Visually inspect your boat, gear and equipment before entering and leaving the water.

Remove all plants, plant fragments, animals, mud or other debris and discard in the 

trash. Check trailer (if used), including axle and wheel areas, in and around the boat itself: 

anchor, props, ropes, boat bumpers, paddles. After wading, remove all visible detritus from 

boots before exiting a stream, pond or lake.

 Drain every conceivable space or item that can hold water. Always drain the bilges of the 

boat by removing the drain plug. Empty water out of kayaks, canoes, rafts, etc. 
SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures

347

 Set up the best staging area possible for cleaning operations. Step into the bin containing the 

soap solution for 1 FULL MINUTE while scrubbing your boots. Place the field equipment 

into the solution. Visually inspect all surfaces during washing and feel by hand to remove any 

remaining foreign material. You can use this method for all equipment and boots that touched 

stream or pond water. Rinse waders and equipment thoroughly with tap water. Be sure to 

transport enough water to rinse after decontaminating at each stream (approx. 1 gallon per 

stream) because the soap is concentrated and difficult to rinse. Allow the rinse water to run 

onto the ground away from the stream. 

 Adhesive rollers are also considered to be moderately effective in removing the majority of 

plant material from equipment or gear. Seed and fragment materials readily attach to the 

adhesive sheets and are effectively lifted out of seams and the weave of loose particle fabrics; 

proper attention and care given during removal is a direct reflection of the potential 

efficiency of this technique. A follow up with water washing, high-pressure air blasting, or 

high-pressure wash is also recommended. To prevent contained plant and soil matter from 

being redeposited following the cleaning process, adhesive sheets should be bagged and 

incinerated or disposed of in a sanitary landfill.

Disinfection Procedures

There are a number of disinfection techniques that will kill most aquatic invasive species and fish 

and wildlife pathogens, including Didymo. Solutions of bleach or dishwashing detergent products are 

suggested as they provide the best combination of availability, cost AND effectiveness against 

Didymo as well as other aquatic invasive species and fish and wildlife pathogens, such as whirling 

disease. These procedures should always be used in high-risk areas, and those known to be 

contaminated. Choose the appropriate agent based on the actual items requiring disinfection (i.e. salt 

and bleach solutions will destroy some items). It is recommended that all disinfected equipment be 

rinsed on dry land, away from natural waters. It is preferable to contain all used disinfectant solutions

in the field and drain them into treated wastewater (e.g. pour down a sink drain) at the end of the day.

Do NOT dispose solutions into a septic system.

Non-absorbent items (boats, canoes, rubber waders, ‘hard-sided’ objects)

 Household cleansers/disinfectants, such as Formula 409® and Fantastic® that contain the 

quaternary ammonium compound alkyl dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride can also be 

used to disinfect equipment. These solutions can be used full strength as a spray, or diluted 

for soaking with two parts water to one part disinfectant. For all materials, follow label 

instructions and be sure to soak equipment for a minimum of 10 minutes. Be sure to dispose 

of materials away from surface waters in accordance with label restrictions. ‘Green’ 

products are less effective and not recommended for disinfecting. 

 Diluted household bleach solution provides an inexpensive, effective way to control invasive 

species. Soak or spray equipment for at least one minute with a 2% bleach solution (3 ounces 

of household bleach mixed with 1 gallon of water). If invasive pathogens or diseases are 

suspected, a 10% solution should be used (13 ounces of household bleach mixed with 1

gallon of water). Bleach is an extremely effective disinfection agent, but it is a caustic 
SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures

348

substance that can be corrosive to aluminum and other sensitive equipment. Bleach solutions 

must be replaced daily to remain effective.

 A 10% (w/v) salt solution (to create add 1,000 grams [~4 cups] of NaCl to 1 gallon of warm 

water, conductivity reading of 150,000 μS/cm ) can be used on all non-metallic equipment 

and boots.

 Although impractical in the field, hot water treatments are also effective: soak gear for at 

least one minute in very hot water (above 140°F – hotter than most tap water) OR for at least 

20 minutes in hot water kept above 120°F (hot tap water, uncomfortable to touch).

 Drying: Drying will kill Didymo, but slightly moist environments will support some 

organisms for months. This approach should only be used for gear that can be left in the sun 

for extended periods of time (i.e. a canoe that’s left in the yard for several days between 

uses).

Absorbent items require longer soaking times to allow thorough penetration into the materials. Feltsoled waders, for example, are difficult and take time to properly disinfect. Other absorbent items 

include clothing, wetsuits, sandals with fabric straps, or anything else that takes time to dry out. The 

thicker and denser a material, the longer it will require for adequate disinfection. Err on the side of 

caution. Bleach solutions are not recommended for absorbent materials.

 Hot Water: Soak items for at least 40 minutes in very hot water kept above 140°F (hotter than 

most tap water).

 Detergent and hot water: (‘Green’ products are less effective and not recommended for 

disinfecting): soak for 30 minutes in a hot 5% detergent/water solution kept above 120°F.

The National Capital Region Network Inventory and Monitoring (NCRN I&M) & NCR Water 

Resource Management Team (WRMT) has developed decontamination recommendations that are 

flexible and easily adaptable for NETN monitoring activities. The following procedures should be 

followed for all waterbodies with AND without documented didymo infestation:

Procedure for entering a single water body:

Drying - for use with non-electronic equipment* and waders

1. Remove all visible detritus before exiting the water.

2. Waders and equipment should be rinsed and allowed to dry thoroughly in a NON-HUMID 

(<60%) environment for more than 48 hours. If they are going to be used again before ample 

drying time, follow one of the below procedures. If the equipment has crevices or places for 

water to pool, the equipment should be cleaned using the below treatment unless it will be 

out of use long enough to allow complete drying.

*Non-electronic equipment refers to instruments that do not have a probe that requires that it is stored in a humid 

environment (i.e. YSI sondes)
SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures

349

Procedure(s) for entering multiple water bodies: *Decontaminate after EVERY stream or pond!

A) 10% (w/v) Salt Solution – for use on all non-metallic equipment and boots (to create add 

1,000 grams [~4 cups] of NaCl to 1 gallon of warm water, conductivity reading of 150,000 μS/cm)

1. Remove all visible detritus, before exiting the water. 

2. After returning to vehicle, rinse and scrub remaining large particles off of the boots. Step into 

the salt solution for 1 FULL MINUTE while scrubbing your boots. 

3. Place ALL equipment (*except SonTek FlowTracker) that touched stream water in the bucket 

of salt water for 1 FULL MINUTE. Do not leave anything in the salt solution for an extended 

period of time as it can be corrosive.

4. Rinse waders and equipment thoroughly with tap water. Be sure to transport enough water to 

rinse after decontaminating at each stream (approx. 1 gallon per stream). Allow the rinse 

water to run onto the ground away from the stream. 

B) 2% (w/v) Virkon Aquatic® Solution- for use on non-electronic equipment and boots (to 

create add 21 grams (~1.5 Tbs) of Virkon powder to 1 liter of warm water. *wear gloves!)

1. Remove all visible detritus, before exiting the water.

2. After returning to vehicle, rinse and scrub remaining large particles off of the boots. Spray 

the Virkon solution onto boots being vigilant about covering every area. Let stand for 1 

FULL MINUTE. 

3. Rinse waders thoroughly with tap water. Be sure to transport enough water to rinse after 

decontaminating at each stream (approx. 1 gallon per stream). Allow the rinse water to run 

onto the ground away from the stream. 

C) 5% (v/v) Palmolive Solution*- for use on all equipment and boots (to create add 50 milliliters 

of Palmolive soap to 1 liter of warm water)

1. Remove all visible detritus, before exiting the water.

2. After returning to vehicle, step into the soap solution for 1 FULL MINUTE while scrubbing 

your boots. Place the field equipment into the solution. You can use this method for all 

equipment and boots that touched stream water but you will need more water because the 

soap is concentrated and difficult to rinse.

3. Rinse waders and equipment thoroughly with tap water. Be sure to transport enough water to 

rinse after decontaminating at each stream (approx. 1 gallon per stream). Allow the rinse 

water to run onto the ground away from the stream. 
SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures

350

*This method is the ONLY one that should be used for the FlowTracker. However, it is recommended that the salt 

solution is used for boots and equipment because it is easier to rinse and the possibility of soap build up on the DO 

membrane.

Table of methods:

Treatment % solution Formula Duration Problem/gear 

Salt 10 % (w/v) 4 cups/2.5 gal > 1 min Many, effective for 

Didymo/non-metallic 

Dish detergent 

(Palmolive or Dawn) 

5% 1 cup / gal water > 1 min All, effective for 

Didymo/all gear 

Virkon Aquatic* 2% 0.7 oz/ 1 quart water > 1 min All but WD and 

ZM/all gear 

Hot water soak >140° F > 1 min; for WD in 

felts 40 min + 

All/all 

Drying > 48 hrs All/all

Freeze Until frozen solid Porous items that will 

stand up to freezing

WD = Whirling Disease ZM = Zebra Mussel

Recommended after all washing/disinfection procedures: Allow equipment to air dry, preferably in 

direct sunlight, at 84°F or warmer for more than 4 hours.

Additional Resources:

 NOAA Habitat conservation Restoration Center Invasive Species website: 

http://www.habitat.noaa.gov/restoration/programs/invasivespecies.html

 http://protectyourwaters.org/
SOP 17 – Aquatic Decontamination Procedures

351

SOP 17 Revision History Log

Version # Date Revised by Changes Justification

N/A N/A N/A Prior to version 3.00, the narrative and SOPs for a 

given year all had the same version number. 

Beginning with version 3.00, SOP version 

numbers are allowed to vary from each other, and 

are only updated when there are changes to the 

SOP. Entries in this table prior to 3.00 reflect 

changes specific to this SOP; if numbers are 

missing, there were no changes between the 

original procedures and version 3.00.

Convert 

version 

numbering to 

NETN standard

3.00 Mar 2012 B. Gawley New SOP established for Protocol Version 3.00 Protocol review 

meeting;

Version 2.02+

to 3.00 (major 

revision)

3.01 December 

2012

B. Mitchell Minor edits. Internal review

3.02 December 

2013

B. Mitchell Disinfectant solutions should not be disposed into 

a septic system.

Reviewer 

comment

3.03 March 2015 B. Gawley Added NCRN disinfection procedures. Protocol review 

meeting

353

SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major 

Changes 

Acadia National Park /Lower Northeast Temperate Network parks

Version 1.02

Overview

This SOP documents:

 Differences between water monitoring methods used by NETN at Acadia National Park

(ACAD) and the lower Northeast Temperate Network (LNETN) parks.

 Known deviations from established methods. Deviations are situations where data were 

collected in a manner that is substantially different from the methods documented within the 

SOPs used during a particular field season.

 Major changes in the protocol. Major changes are fundamental shifts in the way data are 

collected that cannot easily be rectified with earlier data. Major changes are not deviations, 

provided that the changes are documented in the SOPs. Ideally, any time there is a major 

change in methods NETN will use both methods long enough to determine whether the 

results from the different methods are sufficiently correlated to allow old data to be corrected. 

In some cases (especially early in the use of the protocol), the small amount of data lost by 

the protocol change will not be worth the cost of overlapping methods. 

Differences between ACAD and LNETN Methods

Table 1 documents any known differences between the established methods used by field crews at 

ACAD and LNETN parks. The purpose of this portion of the SOP is to facilitate the task of the field 

crew members in adapting to the change in methodology when moving from one park to the next.

Table S18.1. Differences between established methods used at ACAD and LNETN parks, by SOP.

SOP ACAD Methods LNETN Methods

Narrative Discharge is measured monthly at all sites 

except USGS continuous record site.

Benthic macroinvertebrate monitoring is 

conducted at 4-5 sites during August and 

September visits.

Water samples are collected in 10 lakes for 

acidification analytes in April and October. 

Discharge is measured monthly at all sites 

except Concord River.

Benthic macroinvertebrates collected by USGS 

at MORR (Primrose Brook)

No acidification analysis in LNETN parks.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

354

Table S18.1 (continued). Differences between established methods used at ACAD and LNETN parks, by 

SOP.

SOP ACAD Methods LNETN Methods

Establishing and 

Documenting Monitoring 

Sites

Lake/pond bathymetry from historic (ca. 

1960s) depth maps. 

Continuous stream level loggers are Global 

model WL16S, deployed during ice-free 

season.

Pond bathymetry data collected in 2013 for 

SAGA and MABI using GPS and sounding 

weight and processed using GIS software.

Continuous stream level/ temperature loggers 

are HOBO model U20-001-01, deployed yearround.

Preparation and 

Equipment

All monitoring sites within ACAD boundary -

no interstate or overnight travel required.

Field crew consists of two NPS technicians

Interstate (most) and overnight (some) travel 

required to reach parks.

Field crew consists of one NPS technician and 

one intern or volunteer

Safety No difference

Monitoring Streams Many discharge measurements use Pygmy.

Pygmy discharge measurements entered in 

Q-Calc PDA program during collection. 

iPad/iPhone app used beginning in 2015.

Nearly all discharge measurements use 

FlowTracker.

Pygmy discharge measurements recorded on 

paper form during collection. Data entered in 

Excel spreadsheet for final calculations. iPad

app used beginning in 2015.

Monitoring Lakes and 

Ponds

Lake stage is measured weekly from MayNovember in addition to monthly monitoring 

visits.

Lakes and ponds are measured using canoe 

or inflatable boat with outboard motor 

transported to each site.

Depth-integrated composite (epilimnion core) 

samples are collected for nutrient analysis.

Pond stage is measured at monthly monitoring 

visits.

Ponds are monitored using small inflatable 

boat with oars kept at each site.

Grab (~0.5 m depth) samples are collected for 

nutrient analysis.

YSI Sonde Measurements 600XL sonde used is medium-depth (to 61 m) 

model.

2-point pH calibrations conducted using pH 7 

and pH 4 buffers (for acidic water).

Specific conductance checks conducted using 

50 μS and 100 μS standards (for low-ionic 

strength water).

Each file on 650MDS contains data from one 

site visit for one monitoring site. Files are 

downloaded and datalogger is cleared 

monthly. File name includes month.

600XL sonde used is shallow-depth (to 9 m) 

model.

2-point pH calibrations conducted using pH 7 

and pH 10 buffers (for alkaline water).

Specific conductance checks conducted using 

100 μS and 1,000 μS standards (for moderate 

to high-ionic strength water).

Each file on 650MDS contains data from all site 

visits for one monitoring site. Files are 

downloaded monthly but datalogger is not 

cleared (files are cumulative). File name only 

includes year.

Water Samples Depth-integrated composite (epilimnion core) 

samples are collected from lakes and ponds 

for nutrient analysis.

Grab (~0.5 m depth) samples are collected 

from all streams for nutrient analysis.

Grab (~0.5 m depth) samples are collected 

from ponds for nutrient analysis.

Width-integrated composite (from pylons 2 and 

4) sample is collected from Concord River for 

nutrient analysis. All other samples are 0.5 m 

grab samples.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

355

Table S18.1 (continued). Differences between established methods used at ACAD and LNETN parks, by 

SOP.

SOP ACAD Methods LNETN Methods

Water Clarity and Light Li-Cor profiles taken in Jordan Pond (1 m 

intervals) and in all lakes and ponds in which 

SD > lake depth (using <1 m intervals).

PAR sensor suspended from 1m boom off 

side of boat.

Blank (0 NTU) turbidity standard prepared in 

park lab by filtering deionized water.

Li-Cor light profiles taken in all ponds (using < 

0.25 m intervals).

PAR sensor suspended off of oar to side of 

boat.

Blank (0 NTU) turbidity standard purchased 

from commercial suppliers.

Streamflow Many measurements use Pygmy.

Pygmy discharge measurements entered in 

Q-Calc PDA program during collection. 

iPad/iPhone app used beginning in 2015.

Discharge is measured monthly at all sites 

except continuous record sites.

Discharge is occasionally measured using 

volumetric method at some sites.

Continuous stream level loggers are Global 

model WL16S, deployed during ice-free 

season.

Nearly all measurements use FlowTracker.

Pygmy discharge measurements recorded on 

paper form during collection. Data entered in 

Excel spreadsheet for final calculations. iPhone 

app used beginning in 2015.

Discharge is measured monthly at all sites 

except Concord River.

Discharge is occasionally measured using 

Parshall flume at some sites.

Continuous stream leve/temperature loggers 

are HOBO model U20-001-01, deployed yearround.

Invasive Aquatic Plant 

Surveys

Level I surveys are conducted annually at all 

lakes and ponds with public boat launch 

areas. Level II surveys conducted as 

time/staffing permits.

Target species are MCIAP list and statespecific species of concern.

Monitors attend MCIAP training.

Level II surveys are conducted annually at all 

NETN ponds.

Target species are MCIAP list and statespecific species of concern.

Monitors attend alternative trainings, as time 

permits

Hydro-Geomorphic 

Assessments

No difference

Laboratory Analysis Samples are shipped to lab via Fedex from 

park headquarters.

Samples are shipped to lab via Fedex from 

commercial FedEx shipping locations.

Data Management YSI data files are downloaded and datalogger 

is cleared monthly. File name includes month.

Data can be entered electronically in the field 

using a Windows Mobile PDA. iPad used 

beginning in 2015.

YSI data files are downloaded monthly but 

datalogger is not cleared (files are cumulative). 

File name only includes year.

Data can be entered electronically in the field 

using a Windows-based notebook PC. iPad 

used beginning in 2014.

Data Reporting and Analysis No difference

Post-season Activities Global stream level loggers removed prior to 

ice season.

Onset loggers remain installed year-round.

Annual Timeline of Activities Differences are detailed within SOP

Decontamination Procedures No difference

Deviations and Changes N/A

Leveling No difference
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

356

Known Deviations and Major Changes

This portion of the SOP documents the major changes over time in the procedures and program 

administration, so that changes that may impact data analyses are all summarized in one place. This 

portion of the SOP also documents situations where procedures were not followed as specified in the 

SOPs that were current at the time of data collection.

Overall Protocol Changes and Data Issues by Year

2006 Major Changes

 MIMA: Confirmation that no discharge measurements will be taken at the Concord River due 

to expense.

 MORR: Added Passaic River site. Implemented addition on Indian Grove site.

 ROVA: Added Maritjes Kill site. Dropped monitoring of Vanderbilt Pond and ELRO Pond 

(Val Kill).

 SAIR: WQ samples collected at the Saugus River USGS gaging station, as well as sonde 

measurements twice per year (May and August).

 SARA: Devil’s Hollow site dropped. Proposed moving Mill Creek South Fork site to North 

Fork.

2006 Deviations

 Conductivity calibration – LNETN found it useful to do a 3-point conductivity check instead 

of the 1-point in the protocol.

 NWQL did not perform TDN and TDP analysis on any samples due to mix-up in contracting 

instructions.

 LNETN performs a monthly 3-point check for pH; ACAD performs a pH calibration at the 

start of every sampling day.

 LNETN crew had contamination issues trying to filter immediately; went to storing 2L 

samples in a cooler for a few hours before filtering in a cleaner environment. Lab manager at 

NWQL approved this procedure, and it seems reasonable.

 LNETN investigating use of transparency tubes to measure clarity since Secchi 

measurements are almost always > pond depth.

 LNETN taking 0 and 1 m readings and a reading just above the bottom for pond profiles. No 

guidance in protocol for alternate closer intervals in shallow ponds.

 Began using YSI “Site” field 89 recording for pre-sampling DO calibration, and 99 for postsampling calibration confirmation.

 Photopoints are written into the protocol. Need to add more specificity to these procedures 

and attention in the field to ensure that the photos are taken.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

357

 Issues with detection/reporting limits for ANC, TP and color being too high in NWQL 

analytical methods. Investigated alternative test methods, and use of University of Maine 

laboratory.

 Very few stream stage sites established at ACAD. Marks at many LNETN parks were on 

inappropriate locations (trees, impermanent substrate). Poor documentation of those that do 

exist.

2007 Major Changes

 Used transparency tube to measure water clarity in LNETN ponds. Transparency tube used 

through 2011.

 Continued using two labs (NWQL, SECRL) for nutrient sample analysis.

 MIMA: Conducted 7-point YSI measurement at Concord River to quantify mixing.

 SARA: Mill Creek main stem and North Branch sites were started this year.

 SAIR: Turning Basin was added as a sonde site (no nutrient chemistry)

2007 Deviations

 Issues at several parks with site access or ability to monitor:

 MIMA – beaver activity, Mill Creek; stream can’t be monitored for flow because culvert is 

completely full, and above tape-down point.

 ROVA – Upper Crum Elbow, construction by state or city on Route 9 bridge led to flow 

diversion; also added several cubic yards of gravel.

 SAGA – beaver activity, Blow-Me-Down – tape-down point flooded, had to go upstream and 

around bend to find suitable site. Small dam, and if it gets bigger will have to move the dam.

 SARA – America’s Creek is always difficult to measure, very low flow, no place for 

volumetric, and flume may not work well either. North Fork of Mill Creek is also a problem 

– bone dry in Sept and Oct.

 ACAD – Some problems with low stream flow – very marginal in some streams. Volumetric 

measurements possible in some sites. Man-O-War Brook, outlet to Eagle Lake; problems 

started in August and September.

 Some descriptive metadata that should be recorded in fields listed in the “Field Data Forms” 

sections of SOP 4 – Monitoring Streams and SOP 5 – Monitoring Lakes and Ponds were not

collected for all sites. Different field data forms used in ACAD and LNETN.

 Issues with slowing response time/failure of YSI pH probes. Began pH check with low ionic 

strength standard at ACAD.

 Encountered some flagged TN and TP measurements where TDN or TDP were coming out 

greater than the total (TN, TP) values. 
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

358

 LNETN crew had issues with timing and UMO lab; short holding times were a problem 

logistically. Joe Bartlett (UVM) was not able to appropriately randomize his replicates in order to 

accommodate the shipping schedule to the lab.

 LNETN crew used EPA’s rapid-bioassessment worksheet for habitat assessment. No habitat 

assessments performed at ACAD.

 ACAD shifted its sites for macroinvertebrate collection to locations that have NETN stream 

measurements. Stanley Brook, Man-O-War, and Duck Brook (Eagle Lake Outlet) were sampled 

using Maine DEP methods. The pilot samples at other NETN parks used EPA’s kick-sampling 

method.

2008 Major Changes

 Began collecting nutrient chemistry samples at SAIRSB (Turning Basin) site.

 UMO’s SECRL laboratory used for analysis of all NETN samples. Use of USGS-NWQL 

discontinued.

 LNETN began using Sontek FlowTracker for discharge measurements.

2008 Deviations

 Transparency tube is only used at SARA.

 LNETN crew conducted comparison between the pygmy meter and FlowTracker. At low 

flows and velocities, there was a departure from the pygmy data; lower velocities measured 

and higher variance. ACAD used pygmy exclusively.

 YSI data recording convention has become a problem, because calling each depth a different 

site on the 650MDS became an issue with datalogger memory. All actual measurements were 

saved to the “0” site- sites “899” and “999” (changed from “89” and “99” in previous years) 

were retained for pre- and post-measurement 100% DO saturation readings.

 Continued to see a number of cases for where the dissolved measures of P and N were higher 

than the total. Some of the differences are definitely higher than the test error. Some of this 

may be field protocol issues. The dissolved samples are filtered, while the total samples are 

not filtered. Clive Devoy (SECRL Lab) tested bottle and filter blanks in laboratory and found 

some detectable P and N in filters. Suggested acid-washing filters and tubing.

 LNETN crew used EPA’s rapid-bioassessment worksheet for habitat assessment. Habitat 

assessments performed at ACAD using Maine DEP survey methods.

2009 Major Changes

 Relocated stream sites at Acadia. Eagle Lake outlet site near dam moved across Route 233 

because original site gradient was too low and seemed redundant with lake measurement.

Now get a better flow measurement and signal from the road. Lurvey Brook moved upstream 

side of road to obtain a better discharge measurement.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

359

 Purchased second FlowTracker for use in ACAD.

 Migrated from UTM coordinates to decimal degrees for all spatial data. NPStoret requires 

coordinate information in decimal degrees. NETN_H2O capable of storing both DD and 

UTM. Decimal degrees are now the primary coordinate format.

 EPA’s rapid-bioassessment worksheet for habitat assessment used at all sites (ACAD and 

LNETN).

 Established schedule for YSI sonde winter factory maintenance.

2009 Deviations

 LNETN flowtracker was reporting error messages (beam 1 not matching beam 2). Ultimately 

it was determined that probe sustained some type of physical damage when being used in 

shallow stream in MORR and required repair. Eric Davis (UVM) borrowed ACAD 

FlowTracker for October 2009 data collection.

 Began acid washing filters and tubing to reduce potential P and N contamination in filtered 

constituents.

 Hydro-geomorphic assessment methods not detailed in NETN protocol, and inconsistent 

between teams. USGS protocol suggests taking measurements on 100m reach, but 20 meters 

was deemed appropriate for NETN at last protocol review meeting. USGS protocol does not 

break sampled stream reach into smaller sections. Breaking 20 meter stream reach into four 

5-m sections each measured separately was initiated by ACAD staff. Takes more time, but 

lends more accuracy to the process (more quantitative; 30 minutes once comfortable with the 

process). LNETN crew reviewed the entire 20 m reach as a whole without sub-sampling 

(more qualitative; 15-20 minutes).

 ACAD crew using a low-ionic strength buffer as a weekly pH check sample. There is no 

description of this procedure in the NETN protocol.

 ACAD and MORR (Primrose Brook) are the only sites in NETN that currently collect 

macroinvertebrates.

2010 Major Changes

 Conducted summer QA/QC trip with ACAD crew leader spending a week in the field with 

LNETN crew.

 Rapid hydro-geomorphic assessment moved to July. Both crews surveyed entire 20-m reach 

as a whole without sub-sampling (more qualitative; 15-20 minutes), as per decision at 2010 

protocol review meeting.

 Eagle Lake Outlet (ACEGLO) site renamed Duck Brook (ACDUCK). Site moved 2 years 

ago. Because moved far enough away, decided to rename the site (more than 100 m and 

across Route 233).
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

360

 Standardized site photo procedures. Streams: monthly core photos are one upstream, one 

downstream, and one of water quantity cross-section (the last may not be in protocol). 

Annual pond and lake panorama from monitoring site (N and clockwise, 8-9 photos).

2010 Deviations

 Documentation at many stage measurement sites is spotty; lacking good photos and physical 

descriptions, including surveying of tape-downs and sampling spots. 

 Inconsistency in stage measurement techniques; ACAD crew uses a “level stick” about a 

meter long with a bubble level to help with tape-downs by getting further out from point. 

LNETN crew has not been using one of these.

 Inconsistency in transparency measurement methods. Secchi depth should be metric –

LNETN using Secchi disk with cord marked in feet.

 Secchi depth is usually not measurable in LNETN parks, using disk or transparency tube, 

since water is too clear and ponds are too shallow.

 ACAD crew began sampling turbidity in May, using a turbidity meter, to see how much time 

it will take. 

 ACAD crew uses Extech digital thermometers for field measurements, not NIST traceable, 

but checks them against each other and the YSI periodically. Lower NETN will pick two up.

2011 Major Changes

 GS-07 Hydrologic Technician (Brian Schuetz; LNETN, permanent STF) was hired and 

started in June. Duty station was Troy, NY (USGS Water Science Center) and moved to 

MABI in 2012. Spent 2 weeks of initial training at ACAD, accompanied UVM technicians in 

LNETN parks in August and September, and monitored LNETN independently in October.

 Installed fixed stage datum points at ACAD, MORR, ROVA, and WEFA.

 Utilized separate inflatable rafts at each of the three LNETN parks with ponds to minimize 

contamination.

2011 Deviations

 LNETN and ACAD both have turbidity meters. Collected trial measurements in preparation 

for taking readings in FY2012, and an SOP will be produced for measuring turbidity at all 

stream sites. Transparency tube will no longer be used.

 Conducted summer QA/QC trip with water monitoring coordinator and ACAD crew leader 

spending a week in the field with LNETN crew (UVM technicians).

 LNETN field GPS unit (providing location coordinates for sonde data files) was not used 

because RS-232 interface cord was malfunctioning.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

361

 October field data for SAGASA interchanged with SAGASB data due to LNETN crew 

leader being supplied with inaccurate site identification information.

 In three attempts, ROVA’s Lower Crum Elbow site could not be measured for discharge 

because flow was too high. Looked for better site upstream for a tag line. Further upstream is 

a dam, but there is space above it. Also, the section of stream that has been monitored is not 

on park property, while upstream is on park property. Tape-down point is across the stream, 

which is a potential issue since at high flow will not get any stage measurements. Considered 

moving site.

2012 Major Changes

 Eagle Lake Outlet site (ACEGLO) was moved and renamed Duck Brook (ACDUCK).

 ROVA Lower Crum Elbow site was moved, but name was retained (ROVASD).

 Nutrient sample analyte suite was modified: Total dissolved nitrogen, nitrate + nitrite, total 

dissolved phosphorus, and orthophosphate analyses were discontinued. Dissolved organic 

carbon (DOC) analysis was added, as well as testing for nitrate, sulfate, and chloride. Sample 

filtering in the field was no longer required.

 Chlorophyll a testing began for samples from LNETN ponds.

 Began taking in situ water quality measurements (with YSI sonde) at SAIRSB (Turning 

Basin). 

 Began taking monthly field turbidity measurements at all NETN streams; this method 

replaced the transparency tube. 

 Installed fixed stage datum points at ACAD, MABI, MIMA, SAGA, and SARA.

 Site photo methodology expanded to include monthly upstream/downstream pictures from 

fixed photopoint. 

 In LNETN parks, the hydro tech was assisted by park staff or volunteers.

2012 Deviations

 Lake and pond sampling not conducted in May due to administrative demands on monitoring 

staff.

 May and June field data for SAGASA interchanged with SAGASB data due to LNETN crew 

leader being supplied with inaccurate site identification information.

 ROVA Lower Crum Elbow site moved upstream to a site better suited for obtaining 

discharge measurements. The section of stream that has traditionally been monitored is not 

on park property, while upstream site is on park property. Protocol has not yet been updated 

with new site description.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

362

 ROVA Upper Crum Elbow site severely impacted by Hurricane Irene in August 2011.

Changes in stream channel made it extremely difficult to obtain discharge measurement, and 

changing site location was recommended. 

 Beaver impact at SAGA Blow-Me-Down Brook site. Now a pool at the monitoring site, with 

some (minimal) flow. Unable to measure discharge at this location during August and later 

visits, only collected in situ water quality and lab samples. Depth was up to 4 feet.

 Variations on camera positions for photopoints, inconsistency in tagline photos (some did not 

contain tagline).

 Missed several light profiles late in ACAD season due to equipment problems.

 No consistent procedures implemented for cleaning gear between sites to prevent disease 

transmission and invasive species transport.

 MORR and ROVA strongly affected by Hurricane Sandy (Oct 29-30), mostly wind damage. 

MORR had significant tree loss. October ROVA visit was completed November 1.

2013 Major Changes

 GS-07 Hydrologic Technician (Brian Schuetz; LNETN, permanent STF) left unexpectedly in 

September 2013. Hali Roy (SCA intern) took over managing the LNETN monitoring.

 Hali Roy assisted Brian Schuetz from May through August. For September sampling, NETN 

staff (Adam Kozlowski and Ed Sharron) assisted with the monitoring.

 Bathymetry of MABI and SAGA ponds was mapped in the winter. 

 Construction at the ROVASF site between July and August resulted in the loss of tape-down 

bolts and the installation of rip-rap at the site. Sandbags and fencing were used to reduce 

runoff from the construction.

 ACSTNL site moved approximately 50 meters downstream from previous sampling location 

to take advantage of better cross section for discharge measurement.

2013 Deviations

 Due to failure of the LNETN turbidity meter, a Hach 2100p meter was used for most of 

September and all of October at LNETN streams.

 LNETN specific conductance checks used 50 or 250 μS/cm standard instead of 100 μS/cm.

 LNETN used only pH 7 and 10 buffers in the pH sensor calibration for the multiparameter 

sonde. One park (MIMA) occasionally has acidic waters and a 3-point calibration should 

have been used. Also used the 7 or 10 buffer for the pH check, not the pH 4.63 solution.

 LNETN did not check multiparameter sonde accuracy against benchtop units or Winkler 

titration.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

363

 LNETN FlowTracker “BeamCheck” diagnostic procedure was only run once during the 

season rather than monthly.

 Both LNETN and ACAD did not conduct duplicate discharge measurements or conduct QC 

discharge measurements at a gaged location.

 Replicate Hydrogeomorphic assessments for quality control were not conducted in LNETN

or ACAD.

 A lab mix-up resulted in the loss of the WEFA chlorophyll a sample from August; a new 

sample was collected in September.

 Composite water samples were not collected for the Concord River (MIMA); instead a single 

sample was taken from the middle of the bridge.

 Discharge was not measurable at the ROVASC site (Upper Crum Elbow Creek) all year

(except October). ROVASD may be close enough that ROVASC can be removed from the 

protocol.

 A new beaver dam below ROVASA may have affected September and October data.

 A possible beaver dam below SAGASB may have affected the October data.

 Concord River (MIMA) stage was measured to the nearest 0.25 m, not the nearest cm.

 ACAD missing GPS coordinates on YSI data files from June 19- 25 due to cable adaptor 

malfunction.ACAD collected lake water quality profiles from August 20- 28 with YSI 6600 

due to YSI 600XL being at manufacturer for repair.

2014 Major Changes

 Hali Roy (SCA intern) left in August. Liza McElroy (SCA Intern) took over managing the 

LNETN monitoring. 

 Bathymetry of WEFA pond was mapped in the winter. 

 Pilot deployment of continuous level, DO, conductivity, and temperature loggers occurred at 

MABI and SAGA, and a level logger was also deployed at ACAD Marshall Brook.

 iPad running FileMaker Pro applications used for most data entry in LNETN.

2014 Deviations

 Leveling was not conducted at ACAD, but was completed at LNETN parks.

 Both FlowTrackers failed by the end of August and repairs were not completed until 

November. ACAD switched to using the pygmy meter, but LNETN staff did not sample 

discharge at some sites until they were trained in use of the pygmy meter.

 Both LNETN and ACAD conducted some duplicate discharge measurements and some QC 

discharge measurements at a gaged location, but not as many as specified in the protocol.
SOP 18 – Differences, Deviations, and Summary of Major Changes

364

 Replicate hydrogeomorphic assessments for quality control were not conducted in LNETN or 

ACAD.

 ACAD missed some benchtop QC comparisons.

Revision History

Version numbers will be incremented by a whole number (e.g., Version 1.3 to 2.0) when a change is 

made that significantly affects requirements or procedures. Version numbers will be incremented by 

decimals (e.g., Version 1.06 to Version 1.07) when there are minor modifications that do not affect 

requirements or procedures included in the protocol. Add rows as needed for each change or set of 

changes tied to an updated version number.

Revision History Log

Version Date Revised By Changes Justification

1.00 August 2013 Brian Mitchell

and Bill 

Gawley

New SOP

1.01 January 2014 Brian Mitchell Update to include 2013 field season Annual review

1.02 February 2015 Brian Mitchell Update to include 2014 field season and use of 

iPad for data entry.

Annual review
365

SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 1.03

Overview

This SOP documents the use of a Sokkia SDL30 or SDL50 Digital Level with a bar code staff to 

level water monitoring sites. Leveling is the process of using nearby permanent datum benchmarks 

and the level to ensure that the tape down points and any equipment (e.g. pressure transducers and 

staff gages) have not shifted vertically.

Leveling must be conducted biannually (April/May and October) at all sites with tape-down points, 

staff gages, or pressure transducers. This schedule will allow for the detection of when any datum 

shifts occur – either during the monitoring season or over the winter.

The basic procedure for leveling involves setting up the autolevel between a datum point and the 

equipment. Ideally both locations would be visible from a location between them. The elevation of 

the datum (the “backsight”) is taken with the level, and then the elevation of the equipment (the 

“foresight”) is taken, and the vertical distance is calculated based on the difference between the two 

measurements. When the equipment is not visible from a location between the datum point and the 

equipment, a series of measurements are taken that use intermediate “turning points”. If the 

measurement does not agree with a previous measurement (the USGS standard is for the 

measurements to be within 0.005’ [1.5 mm] over distances up to 300’ [91 m]), the measurement must 

be repeated until it does agree. If measurements from multiple datum benchmarks agree with each 

other (i.e., both show an elevation, corrected for elevation difference between the datum points, that 

agrees within 1.5 mm), then the equipment or tape down has shifted. If the datum point and the tape 

down or equipment cannot both be seen from an intermediate location, then leveling involves a 

circuit where an intermediate point is chosen as a foresight, and that point then becomes the 

backsight for the next measurement.

BOLD indicates buttons on the level; ITALICS indicates menu items on the screen. This SOP is not 

intended to provide detailed instructions for the use of a Sokkia level; users should review the 

Operator’s Manual for additional information. The only difference between the SDL30 and the 

SDL50 is that the SDL30 is more accurate.

Basic Maintenance and Operation of the Level

 When removing the level from the case, check the lens for dust and clean with a lens brush 

and lens cleaning cloth, if necessary. 

 If leaving the level on the tripod or a long period while not in use, cover the level with the 

protective vinyl cover. 
SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

366

 Before storing the level in its case for any period of time, brush dirt off of the lens with a lens 

brush, breathe on the lens to provide some moisture, then clean the lens with a lens cleaning 

cloth.

 Always remove the battery if storing the level for a long period of time (greater than a week).

 The light on the battery charger will flash when the battery is charging, and turn steady when 

charging is complete.

 To turn the level on: Press the PWR button.

 To turn the level off: Press the PWR button and hold it, and press the backlight button (to 

the left of PWR).

 The bar code staff has numbers on one side, and the bar code on the other. When assembling 

the staff, make sure the segments fit together snugly and create an unbroken series of 

numbers. 

 The bar code staff must be treated with care. Remove any water or dirt, and take care not to 

soil or scratch the staff. 

 Note that extreme temperatures can make the staff expand or contract. The staff is calibrated 

to 20 °C (68 °F). If temperatures are below 14 °C (57 °F) or above 26 °C (79 °F), the 

expansion will exceed 0.5 mm over 4 m, and a correction for temperature may be needed (see 

Operator’s Manual, page 24).

Setting up the Tripod and Level

 First set up the tripod so that it is approximately level.

 Mount the level on the tripod, and hand-tighten the mounting screw.

 Using the bubble level on the level for guidance, shift the legs of the tripod until the bubble is 

inside the central circle of the bubble level. Firmly press the tripod legs into the ground.

 Use the three round foot screws (knobs) on the level to exactly center the bubble in the bubble 

level.

 Look through the eye piece and adjust the eyepiece outwards (counter-clockwise) so that the 

reticle is blurry, then inwards until the point where it first becomes sharp.

 With the bar code staff in a stable location, focus on it (with the major focus knob), and shift your 

eyes slightly up and down, left and right, and make sure that there is no parallax/shifting. The 

reticle should seem fixed on the bar code, and not shift relative to the bar code staff when you 

move your eyes slightly.

 Verify settings.

o When the unit powers on, there will be a letter in the top-right corner of the measurement 

screen to indicate the measuring mode. Verify that this letter is “W” (for “Wave-and-
SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

367

Read”). If not, press MENU twice, then ►, then ← twice, select “Waving” with the 

arrow keys, then ← then ESC.

 Choose a measurement job to record leveling data. 

o Press MENU then ← to get into the Job menu. 

o “SELECT” will be highlighted; press ← to choose a job. The level holds 20 different 

jobs. Choice of different jobs is for convenience; job and point numbers will need to be 

recorded separately, along with site info and the specific object (datum, staff gage, tapedown) being surveyed for each point.

o Jobs can be renamed by choosing “EDIT” from the Job menu.

o When finished, press ESC to get to the main menu, press ► to select “REC” and press 

←. “Cond.” will be highlighted; press ← again. Make sure “Manual” is highlighted and 

press ← again. Press ESC to return to the main menu.

Taking Measurements

 Use the gun sights on top of the level to aim the level at the bar code staff.

 Look through the eye piece, and adjust the focus using the large focus knob.

 Use the smaller horizontal focus knobs to center the bar code staff in the eye piece. If the bar 

code staff is in deep shade, a flashlight can be shined on the staff to facilitate measurement.

 The person holding the staff should place it firmly on the benchmark, equipment, or turning point 

location and wave it front-to-back (in the plane of the level) within 10 degrees of vertical, and at 

a rate that has the staff passing through vertical about once per second. Moving the staff side-toside (perpendicular to the level) will result in a measurement error. For wave-and-read 

measurements to work, the staff must be between 5 and 50 m from the level, and the 

measurement must be made between 0.5 and 4.0 m on the staff. In other situations, the 

measurement type can be changed to “S” for “single measurement”. In this mode, the staff must 

be held stationary and perpendicular to the ground. To change to “single measurement” mode, 

follow the procedures above (under “Verify Settings” in “Setting up the Tripod and Level”).

 All objects must always be measured from a consistent and marked elevation. For example: the 

top of a datum bolt or USGS benchmark, the top of a stake pounded firmly into the ground to 

create a turning point, a marked point on a rock, or a nail or bolt head firmly affixed to a staff

gage. Since shifting as little as 2 mm will invalidate the measurement, every precaution must be 

taken to measure from firm and consistent elevation points.

 Press the blue button below the major focus knob to begin the measurement. A single beep will 

sound. A double beep will sound when the measurement is completed. The staff height (Rh) and 

horizontal distance to the staff (Hd) will be displayed. For foresight points, “∆H” will also be 

displayed.
SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

368

Testing and Calibrating the Level with a Two Peg Test

The level needs to be checked and adjusted periodically (monthly when it is seeing regular use) by 

conducting a “Two Peg Test”. Find a level area at least 33 m across, and establish two calibration 

points (A and B) that are 30 m apart. The points will need stable elevation for the test (e.g., rock 

outcrop, blacktop, tent stakes pounded firmly into the ground) and be clearly marked so that they can 

be found repeatedly during the test. Follow the procedures in the Operator’s Manual, pages 66-70 

(reproduced as Appendix S19.A).

Note that it will not be possible to use the “Wave and Read” setting for all measurements during 

calibration (this method will not work for the 3 m measurements). To change the measurement type, 

press MENU prior to a reading, and select the measurement type (“Single” or “Waving”) and press 

←.

Field Procedures

For initial surveying work, height differences must be taken using the double-run (out and back) 

method between each benchmark datum point, and between each benchmark datum point and the 

installed equipment. Multiple pieces of equipment that are visible from the same level location can 

be surveyed together (e.g., from the same turning point, as long as two successive measurements 

agree on the height difference). If the elevation upon return to the initial datum point (for each 

double-run) exceeds ±1.5 mm per 90 m of distance or is more than ±5 mm total, conduct a new 

double-run measurement. Note that if equipment is spread out, the closest equipment can be recorded 

as an “IS” or intermediate sight point.

For follow-up (annual) leveling work, a single-run measurement (from a datum point to the 

equipment) is acceptable, as long as the elevation of the equipment compared to the previous doublerun measurement is within ±1.5 mm per 90 m of distance and no more than ±5 mm total. If the 

measurement does not agree with previous measurements, then a double run measurement from each 

datum point to the equipment is needed. If those measurements show an equipment elevation that is 

within the acceptable error (after accounting for the elevation difference between datum points), 

there has been a datum shift. If the measurements from separate datum points do not agree, then a 

complete resurvey is needed to reestablish all datum and equipment elevations.

The detailed measurement procedure is:

1. On the data sheet (Appendix S19.B) or database, record the date, temperature (°C), 

monitoring site name and code, and the job number (from the level).

2. Set up the level between the datum point and the first turning point or piece of equipment to 

be leveled.

3. From the main screen (displays “MEAS” in the top-left), select MENU and use ► or ▼ to 

scroll to “Ht-Diff”. Press ←.

4. The left side of the screen should have “∆H”, “BS” (backsight) and the next 4 digit point 

number displayed. 
SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

369

a. If an “*” appears to the right of “BS”, press MENU, ► to highlight “Go”, and then press 

←.

5. Focus on the staff held at the backsight and press the blue button. The staff height (Rh) and 

distance (Hd) will display. If the values look correct, press ← (Y); otherwise press ► and 

then ← (N) to start the measurement again.

6. Record the point type (BS Type), point number (BS #), and backsight distance (“Hd” to 

nearest meter; BSD) on the datasheet or database. 

a. “FS” (foresight) will now be displayed in the middle of the left side of the screen.

7. The person moves to the equipment or turning point, and sets up the staff. It is essential to 

always measure from a firm/fixed elevation point. If the point is a turning point, choose a 

rock or other solid object and clearly mark it. Alternatively, pound a tent stake firmly into the 

ground and clearly mark it. If you are conducting a double-run measurement you will need to 

re-use the same turning points to facilitate data quality control checks.

8. If the point is an intermediate sight (e.g., a close-by piece of equipment, when at least one 

turning point will be needed before reaching other equipment):

a. Press ← and then ► to select “IS”, then press ← and then ESC. Focus on the staff held at 

the intermediate sight and press the blue button. 

b. The intermediate sight height (∆H), staff height (Rh) and distance (Hd) will display. 

c. If the values look correct, record that this point is an intermediate sight (IS? = “Y”), and 

also record the point type (FS Type), point number (FS #) and intermediate sight height 

(∆H) on the data sheet or database. Record the “Hd” to the nearest meter in the FSD 

column. If you are using a datasheet, calculate 1) the distance (D) as the sum of the BSD 

and FSD, and 2) the cumulative ∆H (according to the instructions on the data sheet).

d. Press ← (Y); otherwise press ► and then ← (N) to start the measurement again. NOTE: 

Use ► as many times as needed to view data that has already been stored, starting with 

the most recent point. Press ESC when done reviewing data.

e. Go to Step 5.

9. Focus on the staff held at the turning point or equipment and press the blue button. The 

turning point or equipment height (∆H), staff height (Rh) and distance (Hd) will display. 

a. If the values look correct, record whether or not this is a non-terminal foresight 

measurement (IS? = “Y”) or a turning point or other terminal foresight measurement (IS? 

= “N”), the point type (FS Type), point number (FS #) and height (∆H) on the data sheet 

or database. Record the “Hd” to the nearest meter in the FSD column. If you are using a 

datasheet, calculate 1) the distance (D) as the sum of the BSD and FSD, and 2) the 

cumulative ∆H (according to the instructions on the data sheet).
SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

370

10. Press ← (Y); otherwise press ► and then ← (N) to start the measurement again. NOTE: Use 

► as many times as needed to view data that has already been stored, starting with the most 

recent point. Press ESC when done reviewing data.

11. If the point is equipment, and there is more equipment to measure, go to Step 5.

12. If the point is a turning point or if you are conducting a double run measurement and have 

reached the end of your outward run (i.e., all equipment heights have been measured):

a. Press MENU to display “Turning Point Yes/No?” and press ← for “Yes”. 

b. “BS” will be displayed in the middle of the left side of the screen, and the same point 

number will be displayed (since the bar code staff is at the same position).

c. If you are commencing the return run of a double run measurement, press MENU to 

display “Go” and “Return”, and press ► then ← for “Return”. An “*” will appear to the 

left of “Rh”. The person with the bar code staff should lift if off of the final piece of 

equipment, then replace it. Go to step 4, and proceed to make all the measurements you 

made on the way out in reverse order, including any intermediate sight equipment.

d. If you are measuring a turning point, relocate the level between the turning point and next 

piece of equipment to measure, and have the person at the turning point carefully rotate 

the staff so the bar code is facing the level. Take extreme care not to change the elevation 

of the staff. Go to Step 4.

13. At the end of your survey, calculate Total D (if using a datasheet) as the sum of the D 

measurements where IS? = “N”. Then calculate the allowable error as 1.5 mm if Total D is 

less than 90 m, 5.0 mm if Total D is greater than 300 m, and (Total D * 1.5) / 90 for other 

distances. If the final cumulative ∆H exceeds the allowable error, the survey must be 

conducted again. Reviewing the data sheet should highlight specific leg(s) of a double-run 

survey where there was more error; start by resurveying these leg(s).

Data Management

Data recorded by the level can theoretically be downloaded via a download cable and “SDL Tool” 

software. However, this process does not work in practice despite being tested on multiple 

computers, COM ports, and with various COM settings. Since the data is only needed for QA/QC 

against the data collected in the field, the comparison can be done manually as follows.

Upon returning from the field, compare the datasheet or database entries to the stored points in the 

autolevel.

1. Turn on the autolevel and press Menu. If you need to change the job, press ← twice, then use 

the ► key to select the job (note that Menu at this point will jump forward to Job 11 then Job 

1). Press ← when you have the correct job.

2. Press ► to highlight “REC”, then ←, then use the ▼ to highlight “Review”. Press ←. 

3. The level will show you the last point first. Scroll through the data using ►, and for each 

entry verify that the “∆H” shown matches the ∆H recorded on the data sheet. Also verify that 
SOP 19 – Leveling Water Monitoring Sites

371

the values recorded for “BSD” or “FSD” match. Note that “∆H” will be “0.0000” for a 

backsight.

4. If data were recorded on a paper datasheet, open the leveling database and enter the data into 

a data form. The database will calculate D, cumulative ∆H, total D, and the allowable error. 

If any values don’t match what was recorded on the data sheet, review the values for BSD, 

FSD, and ∆H, as appropriate, and check the math on the datasheet, as appropriate.

5. When the data review is complete, press “ESC” three times to return to the main screen.

6. When you are certain that the data in the database matches the data on the level, you can 

delete the job:

a. Pressing “MENU” then “←”. 

b. Despite there not being a way to download data, if the level does not think it has 

downloaded data it will not allow you to delete it. So Use an arrow key to highlight 

“Output” and press ←.

c. Press ←, select the correct job with ►, then press ← and wait for the export to complete. 

d. Use an arrow key to highlight “Delete” and press ←.

e. Select the job with ► and press ←. Select “Yes” with the ► and press ←.

373

Appendix S19.A. Operator’s Manual, pages 66-71
374

Figure S19.A.10. Sokkia SDL30 Operator's Manual pages 68-69
375

Figure S19.A.11. Sokkia SDL30 Operator's Manual pages 70-71

377

Appendix S19.B. Leveling Data Sheet

Date (MM/DD/YYYY): 

Temp (°C): 

Site Leveled (name and code):

Job Number (1 to 20, from autolevel):

BS Type BS # BSD IS? FS Type FS # FSD D (m) ∆H (m) Cum∆H (m) Notes

Total D (m): Allowable Error (mm): 

Notes:
378

Instructions

BS and FS Type: DPN = Datum Point and Number (e.g., DP1), TPN = Turning Point and Number, TDN = Tape-Down Point and Number, 

SGN = Staff Gage Point and Number, PTN = Pressure Transducer Point and Number

BS and FS #: Backsight and Foresight Point Number from autolevelBSD and FSD: Backsight and Foresight Distance (Hd on level) to 

nearest meter

IS? “Y” if intermediate sight OR not the last foresight point at the current location; otherwise “N”

D: Distance covered by measurement to nearest meter; sum from backsight and foresight

∆H: to nearest tenth of mm, from autolevel

Cum∆H: Most recent ∆H plus the sum of all ∆H measurements where IS? = “N”

Total D: The sum of all D measurements where IS? = “N”

Allowable Error: If Total D is < 90, allowable error is 1.5 mm. If Total D is > 300, allowable error is 5.0 mm. Otherwise allowable error in 

mm is (Total D * 1.5) / 90
379

Revision History

Version numbers will be incremented by a whole number (e.g., Version 1.3 to 2.0) when a change is 

made that significantly affects requirements or procedures. Version numbers will be incremented by 

decimals (e.g., Version 1.06 to Version 1.07) when there are minor modifications that do not affect 

requirements or procedures included in the protocol. Add rows as needed for each change or set of 

changes tied to an updated version number.

SOP 19 Revision History Log

Version Date Revised By Changes Justification

1.00 April 2013 Brian Mitchell New SOP

1.01 April 2013 Brian Mitchell Add section “Data Management”

Added data sheet

Added instructions for recording data to the 

“Field Procedures” section

Needed to 

complete the 

SOP

1.02 June 2013 Bill Gawley Inserted appendices

Minor formatting changes

Needed to 

complete the 

SOP

1.03 February 2015 Brian Mitchell Leveling should be conducted biannually 

(April/May and October)

Need to 

determine 

whether shifts 

occur during 

monitoring 

season or over 

winter

381

SOP 20 – Calculating Cumulative Watersheds for Water 

Monitoring Sites

Northeast Temperate Network

Version 1.00

Overview

This SOP documents the geoprocessing steps required to calculate the area or region from which all surface 

water drains to NETN’s water quality monitoring sites (i.e. cumulative watershed). The process steps 

documented here were adapted from a University of Virginia Scholar’s Lab lecture assignment of unknown 

authorship titled “GIS Watershed Delineation Exercise”. 

Cumulative watersheds are one of several physical characteristics compiled and entered into the NETN water 

database (NETN_H2O) and represent the geographic extent from which surface water may have traveled to 

reach the monitoring site. Periodicity, flood attenuation, chemical buffering capacity, nutrient load, 

contaminants, invasive species, and water volume are just a few of the metrics that can be better understood 

when viewed from a cumulative watershed context.

The procedure for calculating cumulative watersheds is relatively straight forward (Figure 1).

Input data: The only input data required are a digital elevation model (DEM) of sufficient extent to cover 

the area being analyzed and the coordinates of the lowest point on the watershed you are interested in 

calculating (pour point). NETN uses USGS digital elevation models (DEM) obtained from the National 

What is the difference between a watershed and a cumulative watershed?

Strictly speaking, a watershed is the area or region draining to a particular watercourse or 

waterbody. Using watercourse/body intersections allows watersheds to be standardized and 

scaled up or down (think USGS hydrologic unit codes [HUCs]). 

Cumulative watershed is a more general term applied to the area of land where all water that 

drains off of it goes to the same point. Although the point may be the intersection of a 

watercourse or waterbody, any point on the landscape can be used for the analysis.

Since in numerous cases NETN’s stream monitoring sites are not located at the intersection 

of watercourses or waterbodies, but rather occur at locations of management interest to the 

park, the term cumulative watershed is used throughout this SOP. 
382

Elevation Dataset (NED) for its analyses. Metadata for the final watershed contains specifics on the input 

data used (e.g. year derived, cell size). 

Intermediate products: Two gridded surfaces, flow direction and flow accumulation – both useful layers in 

their own right - are produced as intermediate steps to this process. In particular, the flow accumulation 

surface when properly classified was discovered to represent surface water flow (stream potential) for all 

points on a landscape.

Final output: The final cumulative watershed can be represented as either a raster (gridded) surface or a 

vector polygon. Geoprocessing steps are accomplished using ESRI’s ArcGIS Spatial Analyst Hydrologic 

Analysis Tools. Attribute table manipulation and area calculations are handled by Data East’s XTools Pro. 

Figure S20.1. Overview of process steps used by the Northeast Temperate Network to calculate delineate 

cumulative watershed boundaries and area. 

Although not covered in this SOP, the following additional process steps are covered in the University of 

Virginia Library’s Scholar’s Lab instructions: analyzing a watershed stream network, analyzing watershed 

elevation data, and analyzing watershed land cover. Please refer to the original exercise instructions (stored 

on NETN’s server) for more information on these analyses.
383

Process Steps

1) Setup and Preparation

a) Create a home directory/folder on your computer to help organize all the watershed 

documents. Within the home directory create a folder for each park you intend to work 

with. Also within the home directory, create an “Auxiliary” folder to store spatial layers not 

used directly in cumulative watershed analyses but useful for providing context (e.g. water 

quality monitoring locations, park boundaries, state boundaries, etc.)

b) In each park folder, create a ‘DEM’ folder and obtain the digital elevation model for your 

area of interest (e.g. http://ned.usgs.gov/). Determining the exact extent of the DEM layer 

for each park is largely guess work unless you already have some idea of the extent of its 

watershed(s). Studying topographic maps, tracing stream courses, or obtaining hydrologic 

unit code (HUC) maps can be helpful in obtaining a rough extent. NETN maintains DEM’s 

for all its parks on its server (“Z” drive).

c) Open ArcGIS ArcMap.

i. Create a new map document (Ctrl +N). While the ‘New Document’ window is open 

this is a good time to define the geodatabase for this map. Set the geodatabase’s path 

to the home directory created in step 1a. Use an explicit name (e.g. 

LNETN_WEFA_watershed.gdb). Click OK.

ii. Save (Ctrl + S) your new map document to your home directory file created in step 

1a. Click OK. The folder your map document is stored will now be assigned your 

home folder (where ArcMap saves results, stores new datasets, acceses file-based 

information).

d) Add boundaries 

and the DEM to 

your map 

document by 

either dragging 

them from 

ArcCatalog or 

using the ‘Add 

Data’ button 

(shown at right).
384

1) Setup and Preparation (continued)

e) Open the map 

document’s Environment 

Settings (Geoprocessing 

> Environments) 

i. Under Workspace, 

set the Current 

Workspace and 

Scratch Workspace. 

(It should default to 

the geodatabase that 

was just made).

ii. Under Raster 

Analysis, set the Cell 

Size using the 

dropdown to select 

your DEM for your 

area of interest.

iii. Click OK to exit 

Environmental 

Settings

f) Enable the Spatial 

Analyst Extension. 

i. Customize > 

Extensions > check 

mark next to Spatial 

Analyst) 

ii. Click Close to accept 

the change and close 

the Extensions dialog 

box.
385

1) Setup and Preparation (continued)

g) Open Geoprocessing >

Geoprocessing Options 

and disable Background 

Processing. This setting 

will let us see each 

process as it completes.

Click OK to exit 

Geoprocessing options.

h) Save your map document 

(Ctrl + S)

i) Open the ArcToolbox 

window and expand 

Spatial Analyst Tools > 

Hydrology.
386

2) Fill sinks in the Digital Elevation Model

The Hydrology Fill Tool is used to remove small depressions in the digital elevation model. Left 

unfilled these small sinks (single grid cell surrounded by ‘taller’ cells) act as their own tiny 

watersheds. Filling them in improves the watershed delineation process. For more information on 

the Fill Tool: http://goo.gl/2xHU6

a) Open the Fill tool 

(ArcToolbox > Spatial 

Analyst Tools > 

Hydrology > Fill).

i. Set the input surface 

to the DEM for your 

study area.

ii. Label the output so 

that it will go directly 

to the pre-set database 

and it can easily be 

distinguished and 

found (e.g. 

WEFA_filled).

iii. Click OK. When the 

Fill process 

completes (be 

patient), click Close.

b) Verify that the new filled DEM grid has been added to your map.

Note: If the newly made fill DEM is blank, check the processing extent. First delete the 

newly made fill layer and start step 2a over again. When in the Fill window click on 

Environments set the Processing Extent to “same as” your target DEM.

c) Remove the original DEM layer from the map. The rest of the analysis will use the filled 

DEM.

d) Save your work (Ctrl +S).
387

3) Create the Flow Direction Grid

Direction of flow must be known for each cell, because it is the direction of flow that determines 

the ultimate destination of water flowing across the surface. More info on Flow Direction:

http://goo.gl/7rmIJ

a) Open the Flow Direction 

tool (ArcToolbox > 

Spatial Analysis Tools > 

Hydrology > Flow 

Direction). 

i. Select the filled DEM 

as the input surface 

raster.

ii. The output raster 

should default to the 

home geodatabase. 

Name it using a 

similar pattern as the 

fill (e.g. 

WEFA_FlowDir)

Note: Check the 

processing extent under 

the ‘Environment...’ 

button. Set the extent 

same as the input layer 

(i.e. filled DEM).

iii. Click OK to run the 

Flow Direction tool. 

When it completes, 

click Close to exit the 

Flow Direction dialog 

box. A new flow 

direction grid is 

added to your map.

b) Cell values in the flow direction layer show the direction of flow from each cell to its 

steepest downslope neighbor. 

c) Turn off the filled DEM layer (speeds up screen refresh rate) and save your work (Ctrl +S).
388

4) Create the Flow Accumulation Grid

This step creates a grid layer where the value of each cell represents an accumulation of the 

values of all cells upslope of it.

a) Open the Flow 

Accumulation tool 

(ArcToolbox > Spatial 

Analysis Tools > 

Hydrology > Flow 

Accumulation).

i. Set the input flow 

direction raster to the 

output of Step 3 (e.g. 

WEFA_FlowDir).

ii. The output raster 

should default to the 

home geodatabase. 

Name it using a 

similar pattern as the 

fill (e.g. 

WEFA_FlowAcc)

Note: Check the 

processing extent under 

the ‘Environment...’ 

button. Set the extent 

same as the input layer 

(i.e. FlowDir).

iii. Click OK to run the 

Flow Accumulation

tool. When it 

completes, click 

Close to exit the Flow 

Accumulation dialog 

box. A new flow 

accumulation grid is 

added to your map.
389

4) Create the Flow Accumulation Grid (continued)

The new flow accumulation map added to your project may appear very dark and difficult to 

interpret. Although the next steps will alter the symbology of the grid to make it easier to 

visualize high-flow pathways, this is a good time to pause and explain what the flow 

accumulation grid layer represents:

This step in the watershed delineation process calculates, for each cell, the number of cells 

upstream of that cell. Another way to think about it: The 3 dimensional landscape is divided up 

into same sized cells (in our case 10x10m of the DEM). Each cell gets an arbitrary, but equal 

amount of rain – to keep things simple let’s say each cell gets 1 unit of rain (actual units don’t 

matter). Each unit of rain will then move to the cell below it, adding its unit to the one already 

there (1+1 = 2). Together those two units of water will move to the next cell downhill (2+1 = 3), 

and so forth, and so forth until each cell has accumulated the rain that fell on the cells 

topographically above itself. So the accumulation surface is simply a layer depicting the max 

score in each cell that could be accumulated from water flowing to it from cells above it. Cells 

with higher values are lower in the watershed (they accumulate more water) and tend to be 

located in drainage channels rather than on hillsides or ridges.

b) Change the symbology of 

the Flow Accumulation 

grid.

i. Right click on the 

Flow Accumulation 

grid > Properties > 

Symbology.

ii. In the Show box 

choose Classified. If 

you are prompted to 

compute a histogram, 

choose Yes.

iii. Under Classes choose 

2.

iv. Click the Classify...

button to open the 

Classification dialog.
390

4) Create the Flow Accumulation Grid (continued)

c) In the Classification 

dialog, under Break 

Values, click on the first 

break value and type 

5000 (i.e. cells with a 

flow accumulation value 

above and below 5000 

will be treated 

differently). 

d) Click OK twice.

Note: The classification 

process does not change the 

data, but rather how they are 

presented. Classification simply 

breaks the data into classes 

allowing the user to visualize 

them differently (e.g. highlight 

cells above or below a value 

you are interested in). A break 

value of 5000 is a good general 

starting point. After working 

through Step 5 you may find 

you need to return to step 4c 

and try a lower break point to 

visualize the high flow cells in 

the area of your pour point.
391

4) Create the Flow Accumulation Grid (continued)

e) Change the symbology by 

double clicking each of 

the color swatches under 

Symbol and selecting 

these colors: no color for 

the first class, red for the 

second class. 

f) Click OK to apply your 

changes.

g) File > Save to save your 

work. 

Note: Mapping streams and stream potential can be accomplished simply by experimenting with 

the breakpoint classifications of the flow accumulation grid layer. The lower the break point the 

more inclusive the map is of low flow cells. Since low flow cells carry water only during large 

flow events (think intermittent streams) these may be useful areas to anticipate/map/protect.

Since streams will show up almost anywhere if there is enough water falling on the landscape (set 

a low break point and see what it looks like), the trick is to find the accumulation score thresholds 

that are most meaningful to your management goals and landscape. This may require that you 

travel to a few places on your map and see what certain accumulation scores look like in real life.

In general, we have found a classification using cutoffs of 5000, 1000, and 500 a useful place to 

start (the lower the score the more inclusive the class is of low accumulation cells – i.e. more 

intermittent). But again, what score represents an intermittent stream or flood potential needs to 

match up with your management definition of the area you would like to protect. Is an area that 

sees flowing water 1 in 3, or 5, or 10 years an area you consider intermittent/potential/important?

Use of expert knowledge or visits to these sites to develop your classification cutoffs will be 

necessary to really personalize your map.
392

4) Create the Flow Accumulation Grid (continued)

h) Examine your newly 

classified Flow 

Accumulation grid layer 

using the Identify tool to 

click on some of the red 

cells to examine their 

values. You will be able 

to tell which direction is 

upstream (lower 

accumulation value) and 

which direction is 

downstream (higher 

accumulation value).

i) For additional context, 

add imagery.

j) If you have one, now

would also be a good 

time to add the point 

feature class of outlet 

points (e.g. WQ 

monitoring locations) to 

your map see how they 

overlap with the Flow 

Accumulation grid. If you 

don’t have a shapefile of 

your points don’t worry –

Step 5 accounts for that.

Note: If at this point you do not 

see cells highlighted red in the 

vicinity of your selected 

watershed outlet point you will 

need to return to Step 4c to 

lower your reclassification 

break point value (i.e. show 

cells with lower flow 

accumulation scores).
393

5) Create Cumulative Watershed Pour Points

Each watershed has an outlet point called a “Pour Point”. Because this process calculates 

cumulative watersheds by working uphill from the pour point, it is very important that it be 

located in a cell of high cumulative flow or the resultant watersheds will be very small. The 

following steps outline the process by which outlet/pour point (e.g. WQ monitoring location) is 

overlaid with the flow accumulation map to create the official pour point used in the subsequent 

watershed delineation. If you already have a point layer, you may be able to skip to Step 6.

a) Create a new shapefile to 

store the pour point we 

are about to identify.

i. In the ArcMap main 

menu choose 

Windows > Catalog.

ii. In the Catalog 

window, click the 

Pushpin icon to lock 

the window in place.

iii. Right click on your 

default geodatabase > 

New > Feature 

Class.

iv. Enter ppoints as the 

Name. 

v. Set Type to Point 

Feature > Next

vi. Choose a coordinate 

system to match that 

of your DEM. > Next

vii. Accept default XY 

tolerance > Next

viii. Accept default 

storage configuration 

> Next > Finish

You will now notice that a new (empty) point layer (ppoints) has been added to your 

map/geodatabase. Next we will create the pour point that will be used to calculate the cumulative 

watershed. Locating your pour point can be accomplished either with the aid of a previously 

constructed point file, known coordinates, or studying an imagery base layer. 
394

5) Create Cumulative Watershed Pour Points (continued)

b) To add a Pour Point, 

activate the editor toolbar 

(Customize > Toolbars 

> Editor)

c) From the Editor Toolbar, 

choose Editor > Start 

Editing.

d) In the Start Editing 

dialog, highlight the 

ppoints layer and click 

OK.

e) If you see the following 

dialog, click Continue.

f) The Create Features 

window will open in the 

right-hand corner. In that 

window, highlight 

ppoints.

g) Once you’ve clicked on 

ppoints move your cursor 

over the map. Your 

cursor changes to include 

a small dot at the end of 

the pointer signifying you 

are ready to add a pour 

point.
395

5) Create Cumulative Watershed Pour Points (continued)

h) Locate your point of 

interest (point layer, 

imagery, coordinates**).

It is normal that your 

target point may not 

naturally fall directly in a 

highlighted cell. Use 

common sense to find the 

red (high flow) cell 

closest to your target 

point. For example, for 

lakes and ponds the pour 

point should be the outlet 

of the water body – not 

the waterbody’s centroid. 

i) Click in the center of the 

cell to create your pour 

point. Repeat as 

necessary for other pour 

points.

** If pour points are given in 

latitude and longitude navigate 

to the button circled in red on 

the top toolbar and insert the 

numbers.

j) Save your newly defined pour point(s). (Editor > Stop Editing > Save Edits? > Yes). 
396

6) Snap/Convert Cumulative Watershed Pour Points

Next the Spatial Analyst Tools > Hydrology > Snap Pour Point tool will be used to ensure 

your pour point(s) are located on the highest flow accumulation cell within a specified radius (set 

this radius as “0” if pour point has been accurately established (Steps 5a-h). The Snap Pour Point 

tool also converts your pour point(s) into the raster format required for the watershed delineation 

step.

a) Open the Hydrology > 

Snap Pour Point tool. 

b) Click Environments... 

i. Under Processing 

Extent > select from 

the dropdown “Same 

as layer [flow 

accumulation file 

name].

ii. Under Raster 

Analysis > Cell Size 

> select from the 

dropdown “Same as 

layer [flow 

accumulation file 

name]. 

Note: If the Analysis 

Extent and Cell Size do 

not match an existing 

layer, there will be 

problems of registration 

between the pour point 

raster and the other raster 

layers necessary to 

delineate watersheds. 

Therefore, it is always a 

good idea to set your cell 

size and analysis extent 

relative to an existing 

raster layer.

iii. Click OK to close the 

Environment Settings 

dialog.
397

6) Snap/Convert Cumulative Watershed Pour Points (continued)

c) Back in the Snap Pour 

Point Tool dialog...

i. The input pour point 

is your ppoints layer.

ii. The input 

accumulation raster is 

your FlowAcc grid.

iii. Label the output 

raster so that it 

includes the site name

(e.g. 

WEFAPA_SnapPou

).

iv. Enter a snap distance 

if you are using a 

pour point layer other 

than that created in 

Step 5.

v. Click OK to run the 

tool. When the tool 

completes click Close 

to exit.
398

6) Snap/Convert Cumulative Watershed Pour Points (continued)

d) When the tool completes, 

the raster version of the 

pour point is 

automatically added to 

your map.

If you entered a snap 

distance: If your original 

pour point(s) were already 

located within a high-flow 

pathway, you will find the 

snapped pour point(s) are 

moved downstream by the 

size of your snap radius. If it 

is important to your analysis 

to keep the exact cell location 

where you located the 

original pour point(s), re-run 

the Snap Pour Point tool with 

a radius of 0. 

e) File > Save to save your 

work.
399

7) Cumulative Watershed Delineation

a) Open the Watershed tool 

under Toolbox > Spatial 

Analysis Tools > 

Hydrology.

b) Select the _FlowDir grid 

as the input flow 

direction raster. 

c) Select the raster version 

of the pour point (e.g. 

SnapPou_WEFAPA) as 

the second input raster.

Note: One of your choices 

for Input raster or feature 

pour point data is the point 

feature dataset (ppoints). 

Selecting a point feature 

dataset will work only if the 

pour points fall in a highflow pathway. 

d) Accept the other defaults 

and click OK. When 

complete, click Close.
400

7) Cumulative Watershed Delineation (continued)

e) The new watershed raster 

will be added to the map. 

Zoom out to see it all.

Note: If your watershed is 

too small or otherwise not 

what you expected, it could 

be because you located your 

pour points outside of a highflow pathway, or you did not 

fill the sinks in your input 

digital elevation model. To 

correct these errors, return to 

those steps in the exercise, 

correct the error, and follow 

through all the remaining 

exercise steps. If the 

watershed appears ‘cut-off’ 

(i.e. square on one side) it is 

likely that your starting DEM 

was not large enough to 

include the entire watershed.

A new, more expansive DEM 

will need to be obtained and 

the process started over.
401

7) Cumulative Watershed Delineation (continued)

f) Convert your new 

watershed raster to a 

polygon for area 

calculation and for use 

later to clip other 

datasets. (ArcToolbox 

> Conversion Tools > 

From Raster > Raster 

to Polygon). 

i. Set the parameters as 

shown, then click OK 

to run the tool. 

ii. When complete, click 

Close.

g) The new polygon is 

added to your map 

project.

h) File > Save to save 

your work.
402

8) Calculating Cumulative Watershed Area

a) Select the final watershed 

layer in ArcMap’s Table 

of Contents.

b) In ArcMap’s main menu, 

select the drop down 

menu of XTools Pro* > 

Table Operations > 

Calculate Area, 

Perimeter, Length, 

Acres, and Hectares.

i. Verify the selected 

layer is your final 

watershed feature.

ii. Choose a Projected 

Coordinate System 

(e.g. UTM) for your 

Output Projection in 

order to get metric 

choices for output 

units.

iii. Change Desired 

Output Units to 

kilometers.

iv. Uncheck Perimeter

and Hectares

v. Change Area field 

name to Area_km2

vi. Click OK

c) Changes can be viewed in 

the attribute table of the 

original watershed 

shapefile.

* Purchased ArcGIS software 

add-on. 
403

9) Cumulative Watershed Layer Attribution

a) XTools Pro > Table 

Operations > Table 

Restructure is used to 

populate the final 

watershed attribute table.

i. Verify the input data 

source is the 

watershed polygon 

layer.

ii. Set the output dataset 

Path by clicking the 

save icon > browse 

to home directory > 

provide a 

descriptive name 

(e.g. 

[Site]_Watershed_Fi

nal) > Save > Next.

b) Delete unnecessary 

fields: “Id”, “Grid code”, 

“Shape length” and 

“Area”

c) Add additional fields.

i. Name = “Pour_pt”; 

Length = 12

ii. Name = 

“Water_bdy”; Length 

= 50

d) Order the fields using the 

arrows according to the 

figure on right.

e) Click Next > Finish
404

9) Cumulative Watershed Layer Attribution (continued)

f) Open the attribute table

of the new final 

watershed shapefile.

g) Editor > Start Editing > 

Select the Final 

Watershed layer from 

the list> OK

h) Click Continue for any 

warnings about through 

any spatial data frame 

discrepancies.

i) Populate the empty fields 

in the attribute table

i. Add Pour_pt Point 

name (e.g. 

WEFAPA, 

MORRSA, 

MIMASB, etc)

ii. Add Water_bdy name 

(e.g. Weir Pond)

j) Editor > Stop Editing > 

Save Edits

Mop up: 

 Save your overall map document (Ctrl + S)

 Move all stay files into the file geodatabase for this project (ArcCatalog > Right Click > 

Import)

 Remember to write FGDC compliant metadata for any files that are being kept.
405

Revision History

Version numbers will be incremented by a whole number (e.g., Version 1.3 to 2.0) when a change is made 

that significantly affects requirements or procedures. Version numbers will be incremented by decimals (e.g., 

Version 1.06 to Version 1.07) when there are minor modifications that do not affect requirements or 

procedures included in the protocol. Add rows as needed for each change or set of changes tied to an updated 

version number.

SOP 20 Revision History Log

Version Date Revised By Changes Justification

1.00 April 2013 Hali Roy,

Adam Kozlowski

New SOP Requirement for 

STORET

The Department of the Interior protects and manages the nation’s natural resources and cultural heritage; provides scientific 

and other information about those resources; and honors its special responsibilities to American Indians, Alaska Natives, and 

affiliated Island Communities.

NPS 962/132820, June 2016
National Park Service

U.S. Department of the Interior

Natural Resource Stewardship and Science

1201 Oakridge Drive, Suite 150

Fort Collins, CO 80525

www.nature.nps.gov

EXPERIENCE YOUR AMERICA TM